ARTSCILAB 2001
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
Gene Youngblood became a passenger of
Spaceship Earth on May
30, 1942. He is a faculty member of the
California Institute of the
Arts, School of Critical Studies.
Since 1961 he has worked in all
aspects of communications media:
for five years he was reporter,
feature writer, and film critic
for the Los Angeles Herald-Examiner; in
1965 he conducted a
weekly program on film and the arts for KPFK,
Pacifica Radio in
Los Angeles; in 1967 he wrote, produced, directed,
edited, and
on-camera reported "human interest" filmed news
features for
KHJ-TV in Los Angeles; since 1967 his column
“Intermedia” has
appeared weekly in the Los Angeles Free Press on
subjects
ranging from film and the arts to science, technology, and
the
cultural revolution. Mr. Youngblood currently is working on two
books: The Videosphere, about global television in the 1970s as
a
tool for conscious evolution, and Earth Nova, a philosophical
novel
and screenplay about the new consciousness, the new
lifestyle, and
their relation to technology.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
EXPANDED CINEMA
by Gene Youngblood
Introduction by R.
Buckminster Fuller
A Dutton Paperback
P. Dutton & Co., Inc., New York 1970
ARTSCILAB 2001
Copyright © 1970 by Gene Youngblood
Introduction and poem, "Inexorable Evolution
and Human Ecology,"
copyright © 1970 by R. Buckminster Fuller
All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
First Edition
No part of this publication may be reproduced
or transmitted in any form or by
any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopy, recording, or any
information
storage and retrieval system now known or to be invented, without
permission in writing from the publishers, except by a reviewer
who wishes to
quote brief passages in connection with a review
written for inclusion in a
magazine or newspaper or broadcast.
Published simultaneously in Canada by
Clarke, Irwin & Company Limited, Toronto and Vancouver.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number:
71-87207
SBN 0— 525— 10152— 7(Cloth) SBN 0— 525— 7263—
0 (DP)
ARTSCILAB 2001
To Nancy
ARTSCILAB 2001
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
Contents
List of Illustrations 11
Introduction by
R. Buckminster Fuller 15
Inexorable Evolution and Human Ecology
by R. Buckminster Fuller 37
Preface 41
Part One: The Audience and the Myth of
Entertainment 45
Radical Evolution and Future Shock
in the Paleocybernetic Age 50
The
Intermedia Network as Nature 54
Popular Culture and the
Noosphere 57
Art, Entertainment, Entropy 59
Retrospective
Man and the Human Condition 66
The Artist as Design Scientist 70
Part Two: Synaesthetic Cinema: The End of
Drama 75
Global Closed Circuit: The Earth as Software 78
Synaestheic Synthesis: Simultaneous Perception of
Harmonic
Opposites 81
Syncretism and Metamorphosis: Montage as Collage 84
Evocation and Exposition: Toward Oceanic Consciousness 92
Synaesthetics and Kinaesthetics: The Way of All Experience
97
Mythopoeia: The End of Fiction 106
Synaesthetics and
Synergy 109
Synaesthetic Cinema and Polymorphous Eroticism 112
Synaesthetic Cinema and Extra-Objective Reality 122
Image-Exchange and the Post-Mass Audience Age 128
Part Three: Toward Cosmic Consciousness 135
2001: The New Nostalgia 139
The Stargate Corridor 151
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 157
ARTSCILAB 2001
10 Expanded Cinema
Part Four: Cybernetic Cinema and Computer
Films 179
The Technosphere: Man/Machine Symbiosis 180
The Human Bio-Computer and His Electronic Brainchild 183
Hardware and Software 185
The Aesthetic Machine 189
Cybernetic Cinema 194
Computer Films 207
Part Five: Television as a Creative Medium
257
The Videosphere 260
Cathode-Ray Tube
Videotronics 265
Synaesthetic Videotapes 281
Videographic
Cinema 317
Closed-Circuit Television and Teledynamic
Environments 337
Part Six: Intermedia 345
The Artist as Ecologist 346
World
Expositions and Nonordinary Reality
352
Cerebrum: Intermedia and the Human
Sensorium 359
Intermedia Theatre 365
Multiple-Projection
Environments 387
Part Seven: Holographic Cinema: A New World
399
Wave-Front Reconstruction: Lensless
Photography 400
Dr. Alex Jacobson: Holography in Motion 404
Limitations of Holographic Cinema 407
Projecting Holographic
Movies 411
The Kinoform: Computer-Generated Holographic Movies
414
Technoanarchy: The Open Empire 415
Selected Bibliography 421
Index 427
ARTSCILAB 2001
Illustrations
Color Plates (Following page 432)
Jordan Belson: Phenomena
Jordan Belson:
Samadhi and Momentum
John Whitney: Permutations
John
Whitney: Permutations
John Whitney, Jr.: Images from
triple-projection computer film
John Stehura: Cybernetik 5.3
Terry Riley and Arlo Acton: Music With Balls
Philip Makanna:
The Empire of Things
James Seawright: Capriccio for TV
Nam
June Paik: Three experiments with color cathode tube
Scott
Bartlett: OFFON
Clouds of barium atoms ionized by solar
radiation
Black-and-white Plates
Stan Brakhage: Dog Star Man 89
Will
Hindle: Chinese Firedrill 94
Patrick O'Neill: 7362 98
John
Schofill: XFilm 101
Ronald Nameth: Andy Warhol's Exploding
Plastic Inevitable 104
Paul Morrissey: Flesh 118
Carolee
Schneemann: Fuses 120
Michael Snow: Wavelength 123
Mystical
alignment of planets and sun in 2001: A Space Odyssey 142
Starchild Embryo from 2001: A Space Odyssey 145
Stargate
Corridor from 2001: A Space Odyssey 152
Slit-scan machine 155
Jordan Belson: Allures 161
Jordon Belson: Re-Entry 164
Jordan Belson: Re-Entry 165
Jordan Belson: Samadhi 170
Jordan Belson: Momentum 175
Stereo pairs from a film by A.
Michael Noll 190
Mechanical analogue plotter (above); animated
sequence (below) 195
Cybernetic movie studio 197
Reclining
nude scanned and reconstructed by computer 201
ARTSCILAB 2001
12 Expanded Cinema
Charles Csuri: Hummingbird 202
Demonstration of RCA's liquid crystal display 204
John
Whitney working with his mechanical analogue computer 209
Detail
shots of mechanical analogue computer 211
John Whitney:
Catalogue 212
Dr. Jack Citron of IBM Los Angeles 219
James
Whitney: Lapis 224
James Whitney: Lapis 225
John Whitney,
Jr.: Untitled 232
Michael Whitney: Binary Bit Patterns 235
The Whitney brothers 237
John Stehura: Cybernetik 5.3 240
Computer interpretation of the word "movies" 247
Variations
of the Beflix technique 248
Peter Kamnitzer: City-Scape 251
The Picturephone 262
Use of Chroma-Key video matting 271
Use of two cameras and three VTRs 272
Composite scene from
the Limbo program 273
Stan VanDerBeek at work 278
Disintegration of form in Videospace 286
Use of six levels
of delayed videotape superimpositions 288
Loren Sears: Sorcery
290
Otto Piene: Electronic Light Ballet 300
Electromagnetic
distortions of the video image by Nam June Paik 305
Nam June
Paik with charlotte Moorman in TV Bra for Living
Sculpture 307
Aldo Tambellini: Black TV
309
Aldo Tambellini: Black Video Two 310
Aldo Tambellini in
control room of WGBH-TV, Boston 312
Eric Siegel:
Psychedelevision 315
Scott Bartlett: Moon 322
Tom DeWitt:
The Leap 325
Scott Bartlett filming Tom DeWitt 327
Jud
Yalkut: Paikpieces 329
The King of
Sweden as seen in Monument 332
Paul McCartney in
Monument 333 Lutz Becker: Horizon 335
Les Levine with
Iris 338
Les Levine with Contact 341
Frank Gillette and Ira
Schneider: Wipe Cycle 342
ARTSCILAB 2001
Illustrations 13
Stan VanDerBeek with multifaceted surface 349
Stan VanDerBeek presides over intermedia presentation 350
Chamber One of Roman Kroitor's Labyrinthe at Expo '67 353
Chamber Three of Labyrinthe 354
Two scenes from Francis
Thompson's We Are Young 355
The Diapolyceran Screen at Expo '67
356
The Diapolyceran Screen 357
Sensory-kinetic multi-media
experience at Cerebrum 360
Cerebrum, New York City 362
Carolee Schneemann: Night Crawlers 367
Carolee Schneemann:
Illinois Central 372
Centers: A Ritual of Alignments performed
by Milton Cohen 373
ONCE Group: Unmarked Interchange 375
Milton Cohen's Space Theatre 376
John Cage and Ronald
Nameth: HPSCHD 377
Two scenes from Ronald Nameth's As the World
Turns 379
Two scenes from Robert Whitman's Prune Flat 380
Aldo Tambellini: Black Zero 382
Aldo Tambellini and Otto
Piene: Black Gate Cologne 384
Wolf Vostell: Electronic Happening
Room 385
Henry Jacobs and Jordan Belson 388
Planetarium
projector equipped for Vortex Concerts 390
Isobe's Floating
Theatre at Oneonta, N.Y. 393
Two images from the lightworks of
the Single Wing Turquoise Bird 395
Sequence of images from
Circles 397
Diffusion of a laser beam 401
Multiple-exposure
photo approximation of an animated hologram 402
Two photos from
holographic movie of tropical fish 405
Schematic diagram of
Hughes holographic movie system 405
Hughes holographic
projection system 408
Holographic movie viewing system developed
by North American Philips Corporation 409
Hemispherical mirror developed by Los Angeles
chapter of Experiments in Art and Technology
417
ARTSCILAB 2001
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction
by R. Buckminster Fuller
At all times nowadays, there are
approximately 66 million human
beings around Earth who are
living comfortably inside their mothers'
wombs. The country
called Nigeria embraces one-fourth of the
human beings of the
great continent of Africa. There are 66 million
Nigerians. We
can say that the number of people living in Wombland
is about
the same as one-fourth the population of Africa. This 66
million
Womblanders tops the total population of either West
Germany's
58 million, the United Kingdom's 55 million, Italy's 52
million,
France's 50 million, or Mexico's 47 million. Only nine of the
world's so-called countries (China, India, Soviet Union, United
States, Indonesia, Pakistan, Japan, and Brazil) have individual
populations greater than our luxuriously-living,
under-nine-monthsold
Womblanders.
Seemingly switching our subject, but only for
a moment, we note
that for the last two decades scientists
probing with electrodes have
learned a great deal about the
human brain. The brain gives off
measurable energy and discrete
wave patterns disclosed by the
oscillograph. Specific,
repetitive dreams have been identified by
these wave patterns.
The neurological and physiological explorers
do not find it
extravagant to speculate that we may learn that what
humanity
has thus far spoken of mystifiedly as telepathy, science will
have discovered, within decades, to be ultra-ultra
high-frequency
electro-magnetic wave propagations.
All good science fiction develops
realistically that which scientific
data suggests to be
imminent. It is good science fiction to suppose
that a superb
telepathetic communication system is inter-linking all
those
young citizens of worldaround Wombland. We intercept one of
the
conversations: "How are things over there with you?" Answer:
"My
mother is planning to call me either Joe or Mary. She doesn't
know that my call frequency is already 7567-00-3821." Other: "My
mother had better apply to those characters Watson, Crick, and
Wilkerson for my call numbers!" And another of their 66 million
ARTSCILAB 2001
16 Expanded Cinema
Womblanders comes in with, "I'm getting very
apprehensive about
having to 'go outside.' We have been hearing
from some of the kids
who just got out— They say we are going to
be cut off from the main
supply. We are going to have to shovel
fuel and pour liquids into our
systems. We are going to have to
make our own blood. We are
going to have to start pumping some
kind of gas into our lungs to
purify our own blood. We are going
to have to make ourselves into
giants fifteen times our present
size. Worst of all, we are going to
have to learn to lie about
everything. It's going to be a lot of work,
very dangerous, and
very discouraging." Answer: "Why don't we
strike? We are in
excellent posture for a 'sit-down.'" Other: "Wow!
What an idea.
We will have the whole population of worldaround
Wombland refuse
to go out at graduation day. Our cosmic population
will enter
more and more human women's wombs, each refusing to
graduate at
nine months. More and more Earthian women will get
more and more
burdened. Worldaround consternation— agony. We
will notify the
outsiders that, until they stop lying to themselves and to
each
other and give up their stupid sovereignties and exclusive
holier-than-thou ideologies, pollutions, and mayhem, we are
going to
refuse to come out. Only surgery fatal to both the
mothers and
ourselves could evacuate us."
Another: "Great! We had might as well do it.
If we do come out
we will be faced with the proliferation of
Cold War's guerrillerized
killing of babies for psycho-shock
demoralization of worldaround
innocent communities inadvertently
involved in the abstruse
ideological warfare waged by
diametrically opposed, equally
stubborn, would-be do-gooder,
bureaucratic leaders and their
partisans who control all of the
world's means of production and
killing, whose numbers
(including all the politically preoccupied
individuals around
the Earth) represent less than one per cent of all
humanity, to
whose human minds and hearts the politicos and their
guns give
neither satisfaction nor hope. Like the women in Lysistrata
who
refused intercourse with their men until they stopped fighting, we
Womblanders would win."
Until yesterday, what are now the 150 member
nations of our
planet's United Nations were tiny groups of
humans who for two
million years had been regenerating around
our globe so remotely
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 17
from one another that each colony, nation, or
tribe was utterly unaware
of one another's existence. Only
through telepathy, as
supposedly operative in the previous
paragraphs, could those remote
cells of precariously-surviving
human beings have been aware
of one another throughout those two
million years. In the last few
split seconds of overall history,
there emerged a dozen millennia ago
from the womb of tribal
remoteness a few sailors and overland
explorers who began to
discover the presence of other humans
scattered around the
mysterious world. Finding the tribes to be each
unaware of
either the surprising resources or the vital needs and
desires
of the others, they kept the whereabouts of these surprise
demands and supplies secret and thus were able, through monopoly
of commerce and middle-manning, to exploit to their own special
advantage the vital needs, ignorance, and the wealth of
life-support
to be generated by expediting or slowing the
physical resource
interactions with humanity's available time to
work the resources into
higher advantage tools, environment
controlling devices, and
metabolically regenerative sustainers.
Throughout all the two million years up to
the Twentieth Century,
the total distance covered by an average
man in an average lifetime
disclosed to him less than
one-millionth of the surface of our
spherical planet. So tiny
was a human and so relatively large is our
planet that it is not
surprising that humans as yet cerebrate only in
terms of a
"wide, wide world— a four-cornered Earth," situated in the
middle of an infinite plane, to which all the perpendiculars are
parallel to one another and lead only in two directions— UP and
DOWN— with sky UP there and earth DOWN here. Don't think it is
only an illiterate unemployee who is misoriented and ignorant;
even
now the senses and brains of all the Ph.D. scientists are
so
reflexively misoriented that they too see the sun go down,
plunging
into the infinite plane at a mysterious and
never-discovered place
called the West, to rise mysteriously
from it again next morning at a
never-identified place called
East— and Astronaut Conrad bursts out
spontaneously from his
moon advantage talking about being " … up
here on the moon..."
and the President of the United States
congratulates the
astronauts on "...going up to the moon and back
down to earth."
Scientists not only admit but assert that there are no
locales
in the Universe to be identified as UP and DOWN. None of
ARTSCILAB 2001
18 Expanded Cinema
the perpendiculars to our spherical Earth's
surface are parallel to one
another; they lead in an infinity of
directions.
No matter how you may look upon the matter
morally and
ideologically, the assumption that humanity could or
could not own a
piece of land with all the earth vertically
below it and all the air
vertically above it is not only
scientifically invalid— it is scientifically
impossible. The
scheme is geometrically possible only as an up-anddown
make-believe flat world.
To understand the scientific impossibility of
such a scheme, let us
consider a cube inside of a sphere, with
the cube's eight corners
congruent with the surface of the
sphere. Let the cube's twelve edges
consist of steel
structurals. A light is at the common center of the
cube and
sphere and casts a shadow of the twelve structural edges
of the
cube outwardly upon the surface of the translucent sphere. We
will now see that the total spherical surface is divided
symmetrically
by great circle arcs into six equilateral
four-edged areas. Though
each of the four-sided symmetrical
areas has 120-degree corners
instead of 90-degree corners, each
is called a spherical square.
Altogether they constitute a
spherical cube.
We will now suppose the spherical cube to be
the planet Earth.
We will suppose that war and treaties have
resulted in the total
Earth's being divided equally amongst six
sovereign groups— each
empowered by its laws to grant deeds to
properties within their
respective spherical square surfaces on
the planet, regardless of
whether covered by water or not. We
will suppose that, as at
present, each of the world's major
sovereign nations assumes the
authority to deed or lease the
titles to subdivisions of each of their
respective lands to
corporations, sub-governments, and individuals.
All the legally
recognized deeds to property anywhere around our
Earth date back
only to sovereign claims established and maintained
exclusively
by military might.
Now that we have the model of a cubical
subdivision of the
sphere, let us color our cube's six faces,
respectively, red, orange,
yellow, green, blue, and violet. Let
Russia sovereignly possess the
red face of the cube. Consider
all the perpendiculars to the red face
of the internally
positioned cube as being the up and down perpendiculars
defining
the property claims to all the land below the surface
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 19
and all the air above the surface. Under
these conditions, it will be
seen that the red square owns all
the interior of the cube which
occurs perpendicularly below that
red surface square. Therefore,
each of the six countries would
be claiming exclusive possession of
the same "whole" cube, which
obviously invalidates each and all of
their claims to only
one-sixth of the cube. This realization is mildly
reminiscent of
Portia's admonition to Shylock that he must be able to
cut loose
his pound of flesh without letting a drop of blood.
"Alright," you say, "I will concede it is
impossible to demonstrate
the validity of the claims to the
lands lying perpendicularly below my
surface map without
invalidating all other land owners of the world.
Therefore, I
will try to live on the surface of my land and just claim it
and
the air space vertically above me." "Alright," we say to you,
"what air are you talking about, because it just blew away." You
retort
testily, "I don't mean that nonsense... just the air
geometrically above
me. That is what I refer to when I say you
are violating my air
space— you are violating my overhead
geometry." "Alright," we say
to you, "which stars were you
looking at when you said, '...that space
above me'? Our Earth
has been revolved away from those stars.
Other stars are now
above us. Not only are we revolving, but we are
simultaneously
orbiting around the sun, while all the planets and
stars are
always in swift motion, but are so far away from us and our
lives so short that we are unable to perceive those motions. The
distances involved are so great that the light from the next
star to the
sun takes four and one-half years to come to our
solar system while
traveling 700 million miles per hour and the
distance across our
galaxy is more than 300,000 light years,
while the next nearest of the
millions of galaxies are
multi-millions of light years away from our
galactic nebula.
With those kinds of distances in the heavens, the
amount of star
motion that you and I can detect in our lifetime is
humanly
unrecognizable. Most of the star speeds within their
galaxies
are in the order of only 100,000 miles per hour, which is a
negligible speed beside light's speed of 700 million miles per
hour."
Because all the stars in the Universe are in
motion, our planet
orbits rotatingly in an ever-changing,
omni-circus of celestial
events.There is no static geometry of
omni-interrelationship of Uni
ARTSCILAB 2001
20 Expanded Cinema
verse events. Some of the stars you are
looking at have not been
there for a million years— Some no
longer exist. As Einstein and
Planck discovered, "Universe is a
scenario of non-simultaneous and
only partially overlapping,
transformative events." One frame in the
scenario of caterpillar
does not foretell the later scenario event of its
transformation
into butterfly. One frame of butterfly cannot tell you
that the
butterfly flies; only large time-sequence segments of the
scenario can provide meaningful information. Cogitating on the
myriads of stars apparently scattered in disorderly spherical
array
about the heavens, individuals often remark, as may you,
"I wonder
what is outside outside?"— asking for a one-frame
answer, which is
as unintelligent as asking, "Which word is the
dictionary?" You know
the order of the dictionary to be
alphabetical, but its words do not
read sequentially. Just
hearing them read aloud, they make an only
apparent, disorderly
array. This is typical of the manner in which
nature hides her
orderliness in only apparent disorder.
Back to little Space Vehicle Earth and that
question of property.
The most that the individual could be
entitled to own would be the
inside of an infinitely thin
blueprint of his land, because there is no
geometry of space
outside it and no exclusively occupiable land
below. Our planet
Earth is the home of all humans, but scientifically
speaking it
belongs only to Universe. It belongs equally to all
humans. This
is the natural, geometrical law. Any laws of man which
contradict nature are unenforceable and specious.
Without the infinitely-extended lateral
plane, the words up and
down are meaningless. The airman
initiated the correct descriptive
terms "coming IN for a landing
and going OUT." It is meaningful to
say "INSTAIRS and
OUTSTAIRS." Say it for a week and your
senses will discover and
notify that you are living on a planet.
What do you mean, "astronaut?" We are all
astronauts. Always
have been— but really! Never mind your
"Never-mind-that-spacestuff,
let's-be-practical,
let's-get-down-to-Earth" talk— brain-talk as
undisturbed by
knowledge as is a parrot's brain-talk by any
awareness born of
thought. Brain is physical— weighable; thought is
metaphysical—
weightless. Many creatures have brains. Man alone
has mind.
Parrots cannot do algebra; only mind can abstract. Brains
are
physical devices for storing and retrieving special case
experi
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 21
ence data. Mind alone can discover and employ
the generalized
scientific principles found holding true in
every special case
experience.
Universe has disclosed to astrophysics an
elegantly orderly
inventory of ninety-two regenerative chemical
elements, each with its
unique behaviors, all of which are
essential to the success of
Universe. All are in continual
interexchange within the total
evolutionary process of Universe.
Ignorant humans aboard Space
Vehicle Earth are now screaming,
"Pollution!" There is no such
phenomenon. What they call
pollution is extraordinarily valuable
chemistry essential to
Universe and essential to man on Earth. What
is happening is
that the egocentricity of omni-specialized man makes
him
ignorant of the value with which his processing is confronting
him. The yellow-brown content of fume and smog is mostly
sulphur.
The amount of sulphur going out of the smokestacks
around the
world each year is exactly the same as the amount of
sulphur being
taken from the Earth each year to keep the world
ecology going. It
would be far less expensive to catch that
sulphur while concentrated
in the stack, and to distribute it to
the original users, than to do the
original mining AND to get it
out of human lungs, et cetera, when all
the costs to society
over a deteriorating twenty-five years are taken
into account.
But humanity insists on holding to this year's profits,
crops,
and elections. World society is lethally shortsighted.
Subconsciously reflexing to the as yet
mistaken concept of an
infinite plane, men have felt that they
could dispose of annoyingly
accruing substances with which they
did not know how to deal by
dispatching them outward in some
cosmic direction, assumedly to be
diffused innocuously in
infinity. "I spit in the ocean. So what?"
Humans as yet
cerebrate secretly and hopefully that— inasmuch as
yesterday's
exhaustion of customary resources has always been
followed by
discovery of alternate and better resources— the great
infinity
is going to keep right on taking care of ignorant carelessness
and waste. "So what the hell?" say the "down-to-earth"
statusquoers.
"Pump all the fossil fuel energy-depositing of
billions of years
out from the Earth's crust. Burn it up in a
century. Fill all your bank
accounts with ten-place figures. To
hell with the great grandchildren.
Let them burn up our Space
Vehicle Earth's oceans with hydrogen
ARTSCILAB 2001
22 Expanded Cinema
fusion. Let them do the worrying about
tomorrow."
Just as biological protoplasmic cells are
colonized into larger
organisms, the most complex and
omni-adaptable of which is the
human, so too do humans colonize
and inventively externalize the
same organic tool functions for
their mutual metabolic regeneration.
We call this complex mutual
tool externalization by the name
industrialization, in which
each of us can use the telephone or the
electric light in our
special, unique tasks, all of which require
increasing
development of worldaround access to the total resources
and
worldaround distribution of the advantages comprehensively
produced in total metabolic regeneration.
The world population which, after the
cell-colonizing within its
controlled environment, has been
emitted from the thin,
protoplasmic, tissue-sheathed, human womb
into planet Earth's
larger biosphere-sheathed, industrial
organism womb, goes on
colonizing, integrating, and specializing
locally as innocently and
ignorantly as did the protoplasmic
cells within the woman's womb, all
the while mistrusting one
another as they evolve their utter
interdependence around Earth,
as do the individual protoplasmic
cells of the residents of
human Wombland gather together
selectively, finally to form a
whole child. In due course, we will
realize a one world human
integrity and with each degree of physical
integration a new
degree of metaphysical freedom will be attained.
Earthians in their more roomy biosphere are
as yet provided-for,
despite their utter ignorance of the
infinitely-exquisite reliable
interactions of cosmic mechanics.
Mothers don't have to invent a
breast to feed the baby or invent
oxygen for it to breathe. Nor do they
have to tell the child how
to invent its cell growth. Humans are utterly
ignorant of what
goes on, how, and why.
The Universe is a self-regenerating and
transforming organic
machine. Human womb graduates now gestating
within the
biosphere's world industrial organism womb are
discovering and
employing a few of the principles governing
micro-macro cosmic
mechanics, all the while ignorantly speaking
of their accomplishments
of the generally-disregarded obvious as
"inventions" and
"creations." Now humans have become suspicious
of their little
machines, blaming them for the continual
disconnects of the
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 23
inexorable evolutionary processes of cosmic
gestations which—
transcendental to their brain detecting— ever
and again emit them
into a greater, more inclusively exquisite
spherical environment of
automated mechanical controls that
progressively decontrol humanity's
thought and action
capabilities— ever increasing humanity's
options— emancipating
it from its former almost total preoccupation
with absolute
survival factors.
Assuming erroneously that their day-to-day
positive experiences
should be rendered perpetual and their
negative experiences
eliminated, humans try to freeze the
unfreezable evolution at specific
stages. They try to make
"plastic flowers" of all momentarily
satisfying events and
paraphernalia. In the past, they tried to do it
with stone.
Separated from the familiar, confronted with the
unfamiliar, and
reflexed only by the brain's mechanical feedback,
unthinking
humans— not realizing that there are no straight lines, only
wavy ones, and not realizing that waves can only be propagated
by
positive-negative oscillating— find their straight linear
strivings
forever frustrated by the wave system realities of
Universe.
Ignorantly they speak of the evolutionary waves'
regeneratively
oscillating complementaries as "good" and "bad,"
though the
scientist can find no such moral and immoral
qualities in the electron
or its complementary opposite, the
positron.
Humanity as a whole is indeed being emitted
from a two-millionyear
gestation within the womb of permitted
ignorance, for which
infantile period cosmic mechanics have been
making ample
provision not only to offset ignorance and waste
but also to permit
humanity's gradual trial-and-error
experimental discovery of the
relatively negligible
effectiveness of its muscle— which it had at first
employed not
only exclusively but savagely— and the concomitant
discovery of
the infinite apprehending and comprehending
effectiveness of the
human mind, which alone can discover and
employ the Universal
verities— and thereby realize comprehensively
the potential,
progressive, non-wasteful, competent, considerate
mastery of the
physical environment by the metaphysical intellect.
The metaphysical integrities manifest
throughout the everywhere
inter-transforming Universe's
omni-inter-accommodative cosmic
organic system apparently are
from time-to-time emulated in meager
degree by the intellect of
the human passengers who are gestating
ARTSCILAB 2001
24 Expanded Cinema
within the spherical womb sheath of planet
Earth's watery, gaseous,
and electro-magnetic biosphere.
Humanity's most recent sorties to the moon
from within Space
Vehicle Earth's womb-like biosphere sheath
have been tantamount
to a premature, temporary surgical removal
of a baby from its human
mother's womb, skillfully enclosed
within a scientifically-controlled
environment, still attached
to the mother, and after successful
surgery being returned into
the human mother's womb to loll-out its
remaining gestation days
to the successful detached-action launching
outwards in Universe
which we ignorantly identify as "birth."
Sovereign nation
"landing cards" require answers to ridiculous
questions: "When
were you born?" "Where do you live?" Answer: "I
am immortal. I
check in here and there from celestial-time-tocelestial-
time.
Right now I am a passenger on Space Vehicle Earth
zooming about
the Sun at 60,000 miles per hour somewhere in the
solar system,
which is God-only-knows where in the scenario
Universe. Why do
you ask?"
Humanity's sorties to the moon have been
accomplished only
through instrumental guidance of their
controlled-environment
capsules and mechanical-enclosure
clothing by utterly invisible
electromagnetic wave phenomena
referenced to instrument-aligned
star bearings, with the
invisible mathematical integrations accomplished
by computers,
uncorrupted and incorruptible by ignorantly
opinionated humans.
Thus has man been advantaged by the few
who have thought and
acted to produce the instruments, as yet
relieving the vast
majority of humans from the necessity of having to
think and
coordinate their sensings with the realities of cosmic
mechanics.
Humans still think in terms of an entirely
superficial game of static
things— solids, surfaces, or straight
lines— despite that no things— no
continuums— only
discontinuous, energy quanta— separate event
packages— operate
as remotely from one another as the stars of the
Milky Way.
Science has found no "things"; only events. Universe has
no
nouns; only verbs. Don't say self-comfortingly to yourself or to me
that you have found the old way of getting along with false
notions to
be quite adequate and satisfactory. So was the old
umbilical cord to
your mother. But you can't re-attach it and
your mother is no longer
physically present. You can't go back.
You can't stay put. You can
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 25
only grow and, if you comprehend what is
going on, you will find it
ever more satisfactory and
fascinating, for that is what evolution is
doing, whether you
think, ignorantly, that you don't like it or do.
To each human being, environment is "all of
Universe that isn't
me." Our macrocosmic and microcosmic "isn't
me-ness" consists
entirely of widely dissynchronous frequencies
of repetitions of
angular changes and complex inter-actions of
waves of different
lengths and frequencies of repetition.
Physics has found a Universe
consisting only of frequency and
angle modulations.
Our environment is a complex of frequencies
and angles. Our
environment is a complex of different
frequencies of impingement—
from within and without— upon the
individual "me-nesses." We are in
a womb of complex frequencies.
Some of those frequencies man
identifies ignorantly with such
words as "sight, sound, touch, and
smell." Others he calls
"tornadoes, earthquakes, novae." Some he
ignorantly looks upon
as static things: houses, rocks, and human-like
manikins.
Very, very slow changes humans identify as
inanimate. Slow
change of pattern they call animate and natural.
Fast changes they
call explosive, and faster events than that
humans cannot sense
directly. They can see the rocket blasted
off at 7,000 miles per hour.
They cannot see the
hundred-thousand times faster radar pulse
moving 700 million
miles per hour. Humans can sense only the
position of pointers
on instrument dials. What they call "radio"—
electro-magnetics—
they learn of through scientific instrumentation.
Of the total
electro-mechanical spectrum range of the now known
realities of
Universe, man has the sensory equipment to tune in
directly with
but one-millionth of the thus far discovered physical
Universe
events. Awareness of all the rest of the million-fold
greater-than-human-sense reality can only be relayed to human
ken
through instruments, devised by a handful of
thought-employing
individuals anticipating thoughtfully the
looming needs of others.
The almost totally invisible, nonsensorial,
electro-magnetic
womb-sheath of environmental evolution's
reality-phase into which
humanity is now being born— after two
million years of ignorant,
innocent gestation— is as yet almost
entirely uncomprehended by
humanity. 99.9 per cent of all that
is now transpiring in human activity
ARTSCILAB 2001
26 Expanded Cinema
and interaction with nature is taking place
within the realms of reality
which are utterly invisible,
inaudible, unsmellable, untouchable by
human senses. But the
invisible reality has its own behavioral rules
which are
entirely transcendental to man-made laws and evaluation
limitations. The invisible reality's integrities are infinitely
reliable. It
can only be comprehended by metaphysical mind,
guided by
bearings toward something sensed as truth. Only
metaphysical mind
can communicate. Brain is only an information
storing and retrieving
instrument. Telephones cannot
communicate; only the humans who
use the instruments. Man is
metaphysical mind. No mind— no
communication— no man. Physical
transactions without mind— YES.
Communication— NO. Man is a
self-contained, micro-communicating
system. Humanity is a
macro-communicating system. Universe is a
serial communicating
system; a scenario of only partially
overlapping,
nonsimultaneous, irreversible, transformative events.
As yet preoccupied only with visible, static,
newspicture views of
superficial surfaces of people and things—
with a one-millionth
fraction of reality which it has cartooned
in utter falsehood— society
fails to realize that several
hundred thousand radio or TV
communications are at all times
invisibly present everywhere around
our planet. They permeate
every room in every building— passing
right through walls and
human tissue. This is to say that the stone
walls and human
tissue are invisible and nonexistent to the electromagnetic
wave
reality. We only deceived ourselves into reflexing
that the
walls are solid. How do you see through your solid
eyeglasses?
They are not full of holes. They are aggregates of
atoms as
remote from one another as are the stars. There's plenty of
space for the waves of light to penetrate.
Several hundred thousand different wide-band
radio sets can at
any time be tuned in anywhere around our
biosphere to as many
different communications. Going right
through our heads now, these
programs could be tuned in by the
right crystals and circuits. Crystals
and circuits consist of
logically structured atomic arrays. Such arrays
could operate
even within our brains. Tiny bats fly in the dark by
locating
objects ahead in their flight path by ever more minuscule
radar
sending and receiving, distance-to-object calculating
mechanisms. Right this minute, five hundred Earth-launched
satellit
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 27
es with sensors are reporting all phenomena
situated about our
planet's surface. Tune in the right
wavelength and learn where every
beef cattle or every cloud is
located around the Earth. All that
information is now being
broadcast continually and invisibly.
For humans to have within their cerebral
mechanism the proper
atomic radio transceivers to carry on
telepathetic communication is
no more incredible than the
transistors which were invented only two
decades ago, and far
less incredible than the containment of the
bat's radar and
range-finding computer within its pin-point size brain.
There is
nothing in the scientific data which says the following
thoughts
are impossible and there is much in the data which
suggests that
they are probable. The thoughts go as follows: The
light of a
candle broadcasting its radiation in all directions can be
seen
no farther than a mile away in clear atmosphere. When the
same
candle's flame is placed close in to the focus of a parabolic
reflector and its rays are even further concentrated into a beam
by a
Freznell lens, its light can be seen at ten miles distance.
The earliest
lighthouses were furnished with such reflectively
concentrated beam
lights of tiny oil lamps.
What we speak of as light is a limited set of
frequencies of the
vast electro-magnetic wave ranges. All
electro-magnetic waves can
be beamed as well as broadcast. When
beamed and lensingly
concentrated (as with the laser beams
refracted through rubies), their
energies are so concentrated as
to be able to bore tunnels in
mountains. The shorter the waves,
the smaller the reflector and
refractor may be.
We know that the human has never seen outside
himself. Electromagnetic
waves of light bounce off objects
outside him and
frequencies are picked up by the human eyes and
scanningly relayed
back into the brain. Because the light is so
much faster than touch,
smell, and hearing, men have tended to
discount the billionth of a
second it takes light to bounce off
one's hand and to get the
information back into one's brain. All
sensing is done by humans
entirely inside the brain, with
information nerve-relayed from the
external contact receivers.
The human brain is like a major television
studio-station. Not
only does the brain monitor all the incoming, live,
visible,
audible, smellable, and touchable 3D shows, it also makes
ARTSCILAB 2001
28 Expanded Cinema
videotapes of the incoming news, continually
recalls yesterday's
relevant documentaries and compares them
with incoming news to
differentiate out the discovered new and
unexpected events from the
long-familiar types, and to discover
the implications of the news from
those previously-experienced
similar events, in order swiftly to
design new scenarios of
further actions logically to be taken in
respect to the
newly-evolved challenges.
So faithful has been the 4D,
omni-directional, image-ination within
the human omni-sense
transceiving studio-stations of human brains
that the humans
themselves long ago came to assume
spontaneously that the
information received inside the brain made it
safe to presume
that those events were, in fact, taking place outside
and remote
from the seeing human individual. The reliability of all
this
imagining has been so constant that he now tends to think he
sees only outside himself.
The shorter the electro-magnetic, air, water,
sand, or rocky
earthquake wavelengths, the higher their
frequency. The higher the
wave frequencies, the more the
possibility of their interfering with
other high-frequency,
physical phenomena such as walls, trees,
mountains. The nearer
they approach the same frequencies, the less
do they interfere
with one another. For this reason, the very high-
frequency
electro-magnetic waves of radio and television get badly
deflected by obstacles. As a consequence, man learned to beam
short wave television programs from horizon to horizon. He
developed parabolic transceiver reflectioning cups that took in
and
sent out waves in parallel beam-focused rays. At the
transceiver
relay stations on the horizons, additional energy is
fed into the
signals received and their projection power is
boosted so that, when
they arrive at final destination after
many relayings, their fidelity and
power are as yet exquisitely
differentiated and clearly resonated.
It may well be that human eyes are just such
infra-sized parabolic
transceiver cups. It may be that our
transceiver eyes adequately
accommodate the extraordinarily low magnitude
of energy
propagating of the brain as electromagnetic
wave
pattern
oscillations to be picked up by others.
Early photography required whole minutes of
exposure. As film
chemistry improved, exposure times decreased.
Yesterday, one-
thousandth of a second was fast. Today's
capability makes one
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 29
millionth of a second a relatively slow
electro-astrophotography
exposure. Pictures taken in a millionth
of a second today are clearer
than those of yesterday which took
minutes. The scanned-out picture
signals travel 700 million
miles per hour. The effect in terms of man's
tactile, hearing,
and smelling senses is instantaneous.
Speakers who appear frequently before large
audiences of
human beings over a period of years have learned
that the eyes of
the audience "talk back" so instantaneously to
them that they know
just what their audiences are thinking and
they can converse with
their audiences, even though the speaker
seems to be the only one
making audible words. The feedback by
eye is so swift as to give
him instantaneous, spontaneous
reaction and appropriate thought
formulation.
The parabolic reflector-beamed, ultra-ultra
high frequency,
electro-magnetic waves— such as can be coped
with by transceivers
with the infra-diameter of the human eye—
are such that they would
be completely interfered with by walls
or other to-us-seeminglyopaque
objects. However, when they are
beamed outwardly to the
sky in a cloudless atmosphere, no
interference occurs. Ultra short
wave radio and radar beams
which are interfered with by mountains
and trees can be beamed
into a clear sky and bounced off the moon,
to be received back
on Earth in approximately one and three-fourths
seconds. In a
like manner, it is possible that human eyes operating
as
transceivers, all unbeknownst to us, may be beaming our thoughts
out into the great night-sky void, not even having the sun's
radiation
to interfere mildly with them. Such eye-beamed
thoughts sent off
through the inter-celestial voids might bounce
off various objects at
varying time periods, being reflectively
re-angled to a new direction
in Universe without important
energy loss. A sufficient number of
bouncings-off of a
sufficient number of asteroids and cosmic dust
could convert the
beams into wide-angle sprays which diffuse their
energy signals
in so many angular directions as to reduce them
below
receptor-detection level. Eye-beamed thoughts might bounce
off
objects so remote as to delay their 700 million mile per hour
travel back to Earth for a thousand years, ten thousand years, a
hundred thousand years. It is quite possible that thoughts may
be
eye-beamed outwardly not only from Earth to bounce back to
Earth
at some later period from some celestially-mirroring
object, but
ARTSCILAB 2001
30 Expanded Cinema
also that thoughts might be beamed— through
non-interfering space
to be accidentally received upon Earth—
from other planets
elsewhere in Universe. There is nothing in
the data to suggest that
the phenomenon we speak of as intuitive
thought may not be just
such remote cosmic transmissions.
Intuitions come to us often with
surprising lucidity and
abruptness. Such intuitions often spotlight
significant
coincidences in a myriad of special case experiences
which lead
to discovery of generalized scientific principles heretofore
eluding humanity's thought. These intuitions could be messages
to
the Earthian brain receiving it to "Look into so-and-so and
so-and-so
and you will find something significant." Intuitions
could be thoughts
dispatched from unbelievably long ago and from
unbelievably far
away.
As Holton wrote in the American Journal of
Physics and as
reported on the "Science" page of Time magazine,
January 26, 1970:
To fully recognize the extraordinary
intellectual daring of Einstein's equations,
we note the great
scientist’s own explanation of their origin: "There is no logical
way to the discovery of these elementary laws. There is only the
way of
intuition."
Because humans consist of a myriad of atoms
and because atoms
are themselves electro-magnetic frequency
event phenomena— not
things— it is theoretically possible that
the complex frequencies of
which humans are constituted,
together with their angular interpositioning,
could be
scanningly unraveled and transmitted beam-
wise into the
celestial void to be received some time, somewhere in
Universe,
having traveled at 700 million miles per hour, which is
approximately 100 thousand times faster than the speed of our
moon
rockets a minute after blast-off. It is not theoretically
impossible in
terms of the total physical data that humans may
have been
transmitted to Earth in the past from vast distances.
Retreating from such a speculative mood, we
come now to
consider closer-range possibilities and
probabilities. We recall that
humans, who to our knowledge
arrived on Earth at least two million
years ago, have been
regenerating aboard that small, 8000-mile
diameter, Space
Vehicle Earth throughout all those years without
even knowing
that they were aboard a space vehicle. They are now
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 31
emerging, however, from the womb of permitted
ignorance of their
early, subjective, taken-care-of phase and
are now beginning to
become comprehensively aware of all the
matters we have
discussed so far. They are beginning to
understand that they are
within a limited biosphere life-support
system whose original
excessively-abundant living supply was
provided only to permit
humanity's initial trial-and-error
discovery of its anti-entropic function
in Universe. Humans are
coming swiftly to understand they must now
consciously begin to
operate their Space Vehicle Earth with total
planetary
cooperation, competence, and integrity. Humans are
swiftly
sensing that the cushioning tolerance for their initial error has
become approximately exhausted.
Each child emerging from its mother's womb is
entering a larger
womb of total human consciousness which is
continually modified
and expanded by subjective experiences and
objective experiments.
As each successive child is born, it
comes into a cosmic
consciousness in which it is confronted with
less misinformation than
yesterday and with more reliable
information than yesterday. Each
child is born into a much
larger womb of more intellectually
competent consciousness.
I was seven years old before I saw an
automobile, though living in
the ambience of a large American
city. Not until I was nine was the
airplane invented. As a child
I thought spontaneously only in terms of
walking, bicycling,
horse-drawn capability. Trips on railroads and
steamships were
dream-provokers learned of through a few older
people who
traveled. My daughter was born with cloth-covered-wing
bi-planes
in her sky and the talkie radio in her hearing. My
granddaughter
was born in a house with several jet transports going
over every
minute. She saw a thousand airplanes before she saw a
bird; a
thousand automobiles before a horse. To children born in
1970,
trips to the moon will be as everyday an event as were trips
into the big city to me when a boy. There was no radio when I
was
born. Television came when I was what is called "retiring
age." The
first Berkeley dissident students were born the year
commercial
television started. They have seen around the world
on the hour ever
since being born— they think world. The total
distance covered by an
average human being in a total lifetime
up to the time I was born was
30,000 miles. Because of the great
changes since my birth, I have
ARTSCILAB 2001
32 Expanded Cinema
now gone well over one hundred times that
distance. The astronauts
knock off three million miles in a
week. The average airline hostess
is out-mileaging my
hundred-fold greater mileage than all the people
before me. All
this has happened in my lifetime. My lifetime has been
one of
emerging from the womb of human-being remoteness from
one
another to comprehensive integration of worldaround humanity.
But all the customs, all the languages, all laws, all accounting
systems, viewpoints, cliches, and axioms are of the old,
divided,
ignorant days. The corollary of "divide and conquer" is
"to be divided
is to be conquered." To be specialized is to be
divided. The
specialization which humanity perseveres in was
invented by
yesterday's armed conqueror illiterates. The
separation of humans
into more countries made them easy to
manage. Nations may unite,
as at present, without success.
Strife is proliferating. Not until
specialization and nations
are dispensed with will humanity have a
chance of survival. It
is to be all or none.
In my first jobs before World War I, I found
all the working men to
have vocabularies of no more than one
hundred words, more than 50
per cent of which were profane or
obscene. Because I worked with
them, I know that their
intellects were there, but dulled and deprived
of the
information of visionary conceptioning. They had no way of
expressing themselves other than by inflection and shock.
Conquerors invented gladiatorial wrestling, self-brutalizing
games,
slapstick and illusionary drama to keep their illiterate
masses
preoccupied when not at work. This was not changed by any
scheduled system of education— it was changed by the radio. The
radio broadcasting employees were hired for their vocabularies
and
diction. The eyes and ears of human beings were able to
coordinate
the words of the radio and the graphic words of the
newspaper.
Literacy accelerated. In a half-century, worldaround
man's vocabulary
has been expanded to the equivalent of
yesterday's scholar.
Television's scientific invention and
underwater and space exploration
have accelerated this process
of freeing humanity from its slave
complex to an extraordinary
degree. The young realize, as their
elders do not, that humanity
can do and can afford to do anything it
needs to do that it
knows how to do.
Those who ignorantly think of themselves as a
well-to-do conservative
elite are, in fact, so slave-complexed
that they are shocked
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 33
when the younger generation throws aside
their clothes and cars of
distinction and— abandoning their
make-believe mansions which only
are their old conquerors'
castles— congregate in hundreds of
thousands in shameless,
innocent bands on vast beaches and
meadows. It is not an
unspannable generation gap that has occurred,
but an
emancipation of youth from yesterday's slave-complex
reflexes.
This has been brought about solely by the proliferation of
knowledge. "The medium is the message" is the message only of
yesterday's middle-class elite. It said, "Never mind the mind.
It's the
body that counts." or "It's the physical that can be
possessed— To
hell with the metaphysical. You can possess a
physical brain but not
the universally free mind and its
thoughts. Leave that to the
intellectuals. Look out for those
dangerous free thinkers." Higher
education was an adornment— a
mark of distinction— not something
to be taken seriously. The
problem of man's being born into the new
womb of planetary
comprehension, into the new world of integrated
coordination and
understanding of all humanity, is one not of
educating a single
absolute monarch, nor of educating either a
fascistic or central
party elite, nor of educating only the middle class.
It is a
matter of educating everyone everywhere to the realities of the
emerging of man from the womb of permitted ignorance into the
womb of required comprehension and competence. That education
will have to be brought about by the extraordinary discarding of
yesterday's inadequate amusements, shallow romances and drama,
and make-believe substitute worlds to cover up the inadequacies
of
misinformed and underinformed, physically slavish or
bureaucratically dogmatic, thoughtless life.
All the foregoing observations of human
misorientations constitute
but a minor fraction of those which
can be truthfully and cogently
made today with some chance of
their not only being heard but
heeded. And all this brings us
all to this book by Gene Youngblood—
an excellent name for one
of the first of the youth who have emerged
from childhood and
schooling and "social experience" sufficiently
undamaged to be
able to cope lucidly with the problem of providing
worldaround
man with the most effective communication techniques
for
speaking universal language to universal man— for helping
universal man to understand the great transitions, to understand
the
ARTSCILAB 2001
34 Expanded Cinema
reasonableness of yesterday's
only-transitional inadequacies, to
understand that the oldsters
are victims of yesterday's ignorance and
not Machiavellian
enemies of youth, to understand that any bias—
one way or
another— utterly vitiates competent thinking and action, to
understand that 100 per cent tolerance for error of viewpoint
and
misbehavior of others is essential to new-era competence—
and,
finally, to understand that man wants to understand.
Nowhere have
we encountered a youth more orderly-minded
regarding the most
comprehensively favorable, forward
functioning of humans in
Scenario-Universe than in Gene
Youngblood. His book Expanded
Cinema is his own name for the
forward, omni-humanity educating
function of man's total
communication system.
Isaac Newton, as the greatest Olympian of
classical science
whose influence reigned supreme until the turn
of the Nineteenth into
the Twentieth Century, assumed the
Universe to be normally at rest
and abnormally in motion.
Einstein realized that the experimental
data regarding the
Brownian Movement and the speed of light made
it clear that
Universe was not normally at rest, for when its energies
were
released in a vacuumized tunnel they traveled linearly at 186
million miles per second. This he assumed to manifest its norm,
since that is how Universe behaves normally when unfettered in a
vacuum. Any seemingly motionless phenomena, he reasoned, such
as seemingly solid matter, consisted of energy moving at 186
million
miles per second but in such small local orbits that
their speed and
the exquisitely small, self-huddling orbit made
them impenetrable;
ergo, apparently solid. This was the basis of
his formulation of his
extraordinary E=mc2, which, when fission
and fusion occurred,
proved his locked-up-energy formulation to
be correct. The utter
difference between Newton's norm of at
rest and Einstein's norm of
186 million miles per second
provides humanity's most abrupt
confrontation regarding the
epochal difference of conceptioning
between that in the womb of
yesterday's ignorance and in the womb
of new-dawning awareness,
from which and into which, respectively,
man is now experiencing
the last phases of delivery.
Thinking in terms of 700 million miles per
hour as being normal—
and informed by the experiments of
scientists that no energies are
ARTSCILAB 2001
Introduction 35
lost— Einstein abandoned the Newtonian
thought of Universe and
assumed in its place Universe to be "A
scenario of non-simultaneous
and only partially overlapping
transformative events." Einstein's
observational formulations,
however, are subjective, not objective. In
the mid-1930's I
suggested in a book that Einstein's work would
eventually affect
the everyday environment of humanity, both
physically and
mentally. After reading what I had written, Einstein
said to me,
"Young man, you amaze me. I cannot conceive of
anything I have
ever done as having the slightest practical
application." He
said that to me a year before Hahn, Stressman, and
Lisa Meitner
had, on the basis of E=mc2 , discovered the theoretical
possibility of fission. You can imagine Einstein's dismay when
Hiroshima became the first "practical application."
Gene Youngblood's book is the most brilliant
conceptioning of the
objectively positive use of the
Scenario-Universe principle, which
must be employed by humanity
to synchronize its senses and its
knowledge in time to ensure
the continuance of that little, threeand-
one-half-billion-member
team of humanity now installed by
evolution aboard our little
Space Vehicle Earth. Gene Youngblood's
book represents the most
important metaphysical scenario for coping
with all of the ills
of educational systems based only on yesterday's
Newtonian-type
thinking. Youngblood's Expanded Cinema is the
beginning of the
new era educational system itself. Tomorrow's youth
will employ
the video cassette resources to bring in the scenario
documents
of all of humanity's most capable thinkers and
conceivers. Only
through the scenario can man possibly "houseclean"
swiftly
enough the conceptual resources of his spontaneous
formulations.
Tomorrow's Expanded Cinema University, as the word
uni-verse—
towards one— implies, will weld metaphysically together
the
world community of man by the flux of understanding and the
spontaneously truthful integrity of the child.
R. BUCKMINSTER FULLER
ARTSCILAB 2001
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
Inexorable Evolution
and Human
Ecology
Until humanity starts behaving
In
logical ways
For logical reasons
Natural evolution will
force it
To keep on behaving logically
For seemingly
illogical reasons—
Resulting inexorably, as at present,
In
humanity's backing
Rump-bumpingly into its future
While
disregarding opportunities
To about-face and realize
Its
inspiring passengership
Aboard Planet Earth—
As its
exploratory mothership
Of ever vaster and more exquisite
Macro- and micro-cosmic realms.
And the frustrations
Of
fearfully clung-to customs
Will persist unabated until
Humanity undertakes
Seriously, imaginatively,
Courageously, inspiringly
To employ effectively
The
ever-more with ever less—
Of effort, material, time
And
tolerance of error
Per each accomplished task
The
comprehensively anticipatory
Design science revolution—
Being intent thereby
To make all of humanity
Successful
in every sense.
As it undertakes design revolution
37
ARTSCILAB 2001
38 Expanded Cinema
Humanity also must realize
That it can
always afford rearrangements
Of the physical environment
constituents
Which produce sustainable increases
In the
proportion of all of humanity
Enjoying comprehensive success—
Provided only the task
Is physically feasible
Within
ecologically critical limits
Of electro-magnetics, chemistry,
time.
"We cannot afford" assumes spending
Intertransforming
as matter or radiation
Energy cannot be spent
Know-how
always increases
Wealth multiplies irreversibly.
And not
until then will nature
Cease to cope with humanity's
Ignorance-prolonged inertia
Just in the same way
That
human parents
Cope with their newborns'
Innocently ignorant
Self-helplessness—
And that is by forcing man
To acquire
the adequate technology
With which ultimately
To attain and
sustain
That potential omni-success.
And until then it will
be accomplished inversely—
Through activating humanity's
Death fearing instincts.
Fear forcing it to acquire
The
adequate production-tool complex
As a consequence of inducing
humanity
Into an investment and reinvestment
Of its best
capabilities and resources
Only in preparation for war.
This
inverse procedure will regenerate
ARTSCILAB 2001
Inexorable Evolution and Human Ecology 39
To ever higher degree
Both the
more-with-less energy processing
And its production equipment.
And when man learns, if he does
To initiate the
more-with-lessing
Under peacefully purposed auspices
Peace
then will be attained
And Universe sustained
But not until
then.
R. BUCKMINSTER FULLER
ARTSCILAB 2001
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
Preface
The question what is life, says Norman O.
Brown, turns out to be the
question what is sleep. We perceive
that the sky exists only on earth.
Evolution and human nature
are mutually exclusive concepts. We're
in transition from the
Industrial Age to the Cybernetic Age,
characterized by many as
the post-Industrial Age. But I've found the
term Paleocybernetic
valuable as a conceptual tool with which to
grasp the
significance of our present environment: combining the
primitive
potential associated with Paleolithic and the transcendental
integrities of "practical utopianism" associated with
Cybernetic. So I
call it the Paleocybernetic Age: an image of a
hairy, buckskinned,
barefooted atomic physicist with a brain
full of mescaline and
logarithms, working out the heuristics of
computer-generated
holograms or krypton laser interferometry.
It's the dawn of man: for
the first time in history we'll soon
be free enough to discover who we
are.
When we say expanded cinema we actually mean
expanded
consciousness. Expanded cinema does not mean computer
films,
video phosphors, atomic light, or spherical projections.
Expanded
cinema isn't a movie at all: like life it's a process
of becoming, man's
ongoing historical drive to manifest his
consciousness outside of his
mind, in front of his eyes. One no
longer can specialize in a single
discipline and hope truthfully
to express a clear picture of its
relationships in the
environment. This is especially true in the case of
the
intermedia network of cinema and television, which now functions
as nothing less than the nervous system of mankind.
At this point in the Paleocybernetic Age, the
messages of society
as expressed in the intermedia network have
become almost totally
irrelevant to the needs and actualities of
the organism. The situation
is equivalent to one's own nervous
system transmitting erroneous
information about the metabolic
and homeostatic condition of one's
own body. It is the primary
purpose of this book to explore the new
messages that exist in
the cinema, and to examine some of the
image-making technologies
that promise to extend man's communicative
capacities beyond his
most extravagant visions.
ARTSCILAB 2001
42 Expanded Cinema
We'll begin with a discussion of the
individual's relationship to the
contemporary cultural
environment in a time of radical evolution, and
the way in which
an irresponsible attitude toward the intermedia
network
contributes to blind enculturation, confusion, and
disharmony.
In the section of Part One titled "Art, Entertainment,
Entropy"
I've applied cybernetics and communication theory to the
role of
commercial entertainment in our radically evolving
environment.
The prevailing messages of the so-called popular
media have lost
their relevance because a socioeconomic system
that substitutes
the profit motive for use value separates man from
himself and
art from life. When we're enslaved to any system, the
creative
impulse is dulled and the tendency to imitate increases.
Thus
arises the phenomenon of commercial entertainment distinct
from
art, a system of temporarily gratifying, without really fulfilling,
the experiential needs of an aesthetically impoverished culture.
The mass public insists on entertainment over
art in order to
escape an unnatural way of life in which
interior realities are not
compatible with exterior realities.
Freedom, says Brown, is fusion.
Life becomes art when there's no
difference between what we are
and what we do. Art is a
synergetic attempt at closing the gap
between what is and what
ought to be. Jacob Bronowski has
suggested that we "ought to act
in such a way that what is true can
be verified to be so." This
characterizes the substance of Part One,
and is why I call it
"The Audience and the Myth of Entertainment."
Before we can discuss that point at which the
cinema requires
some new technological extension we must first
follow the history of
conventional film language to its limits:
this I have attempted to do in
Part Two, "Synaesthetic Cinema:
The End of Drama." The essence
of this chapter is that
technology is decentralizing and individualizing
the
communication channels of humanity; that personalized
communication means the end of "official" communication
structures
such as the genre of drama, resulting in a new "major
paradigm" of
cinematic language that I call the synaesthetic
mode. Following a
detailed analysis of synaesthetic cinema
there's a section titled
"Image-Exchange and the
Post-Mass-Audience Age." Here I've
attempted to illuminate some
of the social and psychological
potentials inherent in the
decentralization of global communications
facilities. The
conclusion is that the art and technology of expanded
ARTSCILAB 2001
Preface 43
cinema mean the beginning of creative living
for all mankind and
thus a solution to the so-called leisure
problem.
In Part Three, "Toward Cosmic Consciousness,"
I discuss various
new realities, primarily the result of
scientific developments, which
until recently the artist has not
been able to engage in a meaningful
fashion. This chapter also
contains a discussion of the "new
nostalgia," a post-Existential
view of the human condition. Finally,
I've contrasted two
approaches to cinematic cosmic consciousness:
Stanley Kubrick's
2001: A Space Odyssey, and the small personal
films of the
master, Jordan Belson.
Two of the most important technologies that
will provide access to
the new realities of the Paleocybernetic
Age will be discussed in Part
Four, "Cybernetic Cinema and
Computer Films," and Part Five,
"Television as a Creative
Medium." I've attempted to cover these
disciplines as
comprehensively as possible, presenting the social,
political,
and psychological implications as well as their aesthetic
and
technical aspects. Thus the many interviews with artists and
technologists are intended to counterbalance my subjective
remarks
and to provide a cross section of attitudes concerning
the confluence
of art and technology as it is today and as it
will be tomorrow.
Part Six, "Intermedia," has more to do with
attitude than
technology. The intent here is to illuminate a
universal trend toward
the concept of artist as ecologist, art
as environment rather than anti-
environment, subsuming the
eco-system of our planet itself into the
art process. Finally
with Part Seven, "Holographic Cinema," we
arrive at the end that
is also a beginning. I've tried to dispel many of
the
misconceptions regarding holographic movies, and to delineate
some possibilities. With the perfection of holographic cinema
within
the next two decades, we'll arrive at that point in the
evolution of
intelligence when the concept of reality no longer
will exist. Beyond
that the cinema will be one with the life of
the mind, and humanity's
communications will become increasingly
metaphysical.
Although I've been involved in film criticism
since 1960, the major
substance of this book is the result of
articles published in different
form in the Los Angeles Free
Press from September, 1967, to
December, 1969. That material was
rewritten for this text, expanded
ARTSCILAB 2001
44 Expanded Cinema
and clarified, in addition to the several
hundred pages that appear
here for the first time. We are
transformed by time through living
within it, so in a sense all
of this book is "new" in my work.
My indebtedness to the thoughts of R.
Buckminster Fuller, John
McHale, Norbert Wiener, and Marshall
McLuhan is quite clear. What
is not so clear is the influence of
my friends Edwin Schlossberg, Ted
Zatlyn, and Jon Dieges, all of
whose perceptions of humanity as a
whole system are unfettered
by the constraints of yesterday's
consciousness. There are
portions of this text in which "by Gene
Youngblood" should be
taken to mean "by way of Youngblood,
Schlossberg, and Zatlyn."
Dieges' influence was less specific, more
general. Charles
Brouyette contributed much to the technical aspects
of the
chapter on television and I owe him thanks. In ways known to
each of them I am gratefully indebted to Nancy Schiro, Ronald
Nameth, Gerald O'Grady, Tom Ancell, John Margolies, Lawrence
Lipton, Tony Cohan, and my parents Walter and Marie Youngblood
who filled my childhood with the wonder of art. Finally, I wish
to
express my thanks to American Airlines for their generous
assistance
in the preparation of this book.
GENE YOUNGBLOOD
Los Angeles
January,
1970
ARTSCILAB 2001
PART ONE:
THE AUDIENCE AND THE MYTH
OF
ENTERTAINMENT
"The most important part about tomorrow is
not the technology or the automation,
but that man is going to
come into entirely new relationships with his fellow men.
He
will retain much more in his everyday life of what we term the
naïveté and
idealism of the child. I think the way to see what
tomorrow is going to look like is
just to look at our children."
R. BUCKMINSTER FULLER
As a child of the
New Age, for whom "nature" is the solar system and
"reality" is
an invisible environment of messages, I am naturally
hypersensitive to the phenomenon of vision. I have come to
understand
that all language is but substitute vision and, as
Teilhard de
Chardin has observed, "The history of the living
world can be
summarized as the elaboration of ever more perfect
eyes within a
cosmos in which there is always something more to
be seen.”1
It is that "something more" that has
fascinated me since first I
became aware of the limited range of
ordinary consciousness,
chiefly as manifested in the cinema. We
are witnessing a metamorphosis
in the nature of life on earth.
Art, science, and metaphysics,
separated for so long in the
specialized world of Western
man, are reconverging; the
interface reveals a broader and deeper
reality awaiting our
investigation. An increasing number of humans
are beginning to
understand that man probably never has perceived
reality at all,
because he has not been able to perceive himself. The
realization is not new; only the context is unique: a vast
portion of
our culture, free of the conditioning of and
nostalgia for past
environments, has intuited something
fundamentally inadequate in
prevailing attitudes toward the
notion of reality.
1Pierre Teilhard de Chardin, The Phenomenon
of Man (New York: Harper & Row, 1959),
p. 31.
ARTSCILAB 2001
46 Expanded Cinema
In most languages of most cultures throughout
history, seeing has
been equated with understanding. The entire
Indo-European
linguistic system is filled with examples: I see,
ya vizhu, je vois. Yet
nearly twenty-four hundred years ago
Plato asserted, "The world of
our sight is like the habitation
in prison."2 Recent studies in anatomy,
physiology, and
anthropology have led to a similar conclusion.3 We
have come to
see that we don't really see, that "reality" is more
within than
without. The objective and the subjective are one.
At the same time, science has taught that
there is no purely
physical reason for the disparity between
apprehending and
comprehending. We know, for example, that
thirty-eight percent of
fibers entering or leaving the central
nervous system are in the optic
nerve. It is estimated that as
much as seventy-five percent of
information entering the brain
is from the eyes. Current research
indicates approximately one
hundred million sensors in the retina
and only five million
channels to the brain from the retina. There is a
great deal of
evidence to suggest that information processing is
done in the
eye before data are passed to the brain.4
The metaphysical space that separates father
and son so
dramatically in what we call the generation gap was
manifested on a
global scale on July 20, 1969. In television's
elaborate movie-like
subjective-camera "simulation" of the first
moon landing, the history
of subjective art with its emphasis on
content came into total
confrontation with the history of
objective art and its emphasis on
process. As we saw the event,
reality was not half as "real" as the
simulation because it was
the reality of a process of perception. We
were seeing nothing
but videospace; the simulated reality turned out
to be only the
reality of a simulation. Objective awareness of a
subjective
process was all that mattered, and history's simulation
suddenly
became irrelevant. Thousands of years of theatrical
2Plato, The Republic, Book VIII, ca. 390 B.C.
3Extensive research on physiological conditioning is found inThe
Influence of Culture on
Visual Perception, by Marshall H.
Segall, Donald T. Campbell, and Melville J. Herskovits
(Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1966).
4F. R. Sias, Jr., "The
Eye as a Coding Mechanism," Medical Electronic News, quoted in:
Nels Winkless and Paul Honore, "What Good Is a Baby?"Proceedings
of the AFIPS
1968 Fall Joint Computer Conference.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Audience and the Myth of
Entertainment 47
tradition were demolished in two hours before
an audience of four
hundred million world persons.
In the ascending spiral of evolution each new
generation absorbs
the experiences of the previous level and
expands upon them.
Teilhard has termed this hominization, the
process by which the
original protohuman stock becomes
increasingly more human, realizing
more of its possibilities.
This "consciousness expansion" has
reached a velocity of
evolutionary acceleration at which several
transformations occur
within the life-span of a single generation.
Because of
mankind's inevitable symbiosis with the mind-manifesting
hallucinogens of the ecology on the one hand, and his organic
partnership with machines on the other, an increasing number of
the
inhabitants of this planet live virtually in another world.
The messages
to be discussed in this book are of that world.
It is a world infinitely more natural and
complete than that of
commercial cinema or television, which is
used to confirm the existing
consciousness rather than to expand
it. Art is the language
through which we perceive new
relationships at work in the environment,
both physical and
metaphysical. Indeed, art is the
essential instrument in the
very development of that consciousness.
As Hermann Hesse
observed, every important cultural gesture
comes down to a
morality, a model for human behavior concentrated
into a
gesture. Whitehead found it to be "the ultimate morality of the
mind." Perhaps never before has a new model for human behavior
been needed so urgently as today.
We who are about to inherit the earth from
our fathers will receive
it with a brave new design. We see the
whole earth and thus we see
the illusion that has characterized
life upon it. We cannot accept the
truths and values of a world
in which we no longer live. We are a
generation of desperadoes.
We move across the landscape with
bold abandon because we intuit
that the birth certificate is the only
credit card. The word
"utopian" is not anathema to us because we
know that the
illusion can be shattered within our own lifetimes, that
the
industrial equation means practical utopianism for the first time in
history.
Our grasp of these realities is inarticulate;
we cannot speak it. We
are haunted by our own disenchantment and
alienation as much as
our parents are offended by it. The human
condition, as this millen
ARTSCILAB 2001
48 Expanded Cinema
nium draws to a close, is one of decreasing
intervals between increasing
emergencies until nothing but
emergency exists. We have
nothing to lose. Spiritually we have
nothing to lose because there is
only sorrow in the values of
the past and we have no tears left.
Physically we have nothing
to lose because we know that wealth can
neither be created nor
spent, that it goes nowhere and always
increases with use.
"In this century alone we have gone from less
than one percent of
humanity being able to survive in
appreciable health and comfort to
forty-four percent of humanity
surviving at a standard of living unexperienced
or undreamed of
before. This utterly unpredicted synergetic
success occurred
within only two-thirds of a century despite
continually
decreasing metallic resources per each world person ...
the
world total of seventy billion dollars in mined gold represents only
three one-thousandths of one percent of the value of the world's
organized industrial production resources."5
Within the larger context of radical
evolution there are many local
revolutions. One of them is the
revolution of expectations that burns
in the minds of the new
consciousness. Eskimo children who've
never seen a wheeled
vehicle can identify the types of aircraft flying
over the North
Pole. Young Dyaks in the longhouses of equatorial
Borneo listen
to the Beatles on transistor radios. Teenage Bedouins
wandering
the Sahara hear Nasser's radio telling how Vietnamese
children
are being slaughtered half the world away.6
Dylan swears he sees his reflection so high
above the wall upon
which he once drew conclusions. Seeing that
reflection is the
revolution. It tells us old reasons for doing
things that no longer exist.
"There's less to do because
circumstances do it for us: the earth. Art
has obscured the
difference between art and life; now life will
obscure the
difference between life and art."7 We no longer need to
prove
our right to live. We're struggling in the toil of old realities,
5 R. Buckminster Fuller, Operating Manual for
Spaceship Earth (Carbondale, Ill.:
Southern Illinois University
Press, 1969), pp. 82, 95.
6Ritchie Calder, "The Speed of
Change,"Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists (December,
1965).
7John Cage, A Year from Monday (Middletown, Conn.:
Wesleyan University Press,
1968), pp. 9, 19.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Audience and the Myth of
Entertainment 49
stranded from our conscience, doing our best
to deny it. We are
tragically in need of new vision: expanded
cinema is the beginning of
that vision. We shall be released. We
will bring down the wall. We'll
be reunited with our reflection.
I'm writing at the end of the era of cinema
as we've known it, the
beginning of an era of image-exchange
between man and man. The
cinema, said Godard, is truth
twenty-four times a second. The truth
is this: that with the
possibility of each man on earth being born a
physical success
there is no archetypal Man whom one can use in
the culturally
elitist manner and each man becomes the subject of
his own
study. The historical preoccupation with finding the one idea
that is Man will give way to the idea that earth is, and then to
the
idea of other earths.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Radical Evolution and Future Shock
in
the Paleocybernetic Age
It is perhaps not coincidental that Western
youth has discovered the
I Ching, or Book of Changes, on a
somewhat popular level as we
move into the final third of the
twentieth century. Change is now our
only constant, a global
institution. The human ecological biosphere is
undergoing its
second great transition, destined to be even more
profound than
the invention of agriculture in the Neolithic Age. If we
can't
see the change, at least we can feel it. Future shock affects our
psyche and our economy just as culture shock disorients the
Peace
Corps worker in Borneo.
It is said that we are living in a period of
revolution. But nothing
sells like freedom: Revolution is big
business. As the physicist P. W.
Bridgman once said, the true
meaning of a term is found by
observing what a man does with it,
not what he says about it. Since
the phenomenon we call
revolution is worldwide, and since it's felt in
every human
experience, perhaps we might think of it not as
revolution but
as radical evolution. Revolution is basically the same
whether
defined by Marx or the I Ching: removal of the antiquated.
But
revolution replaces one status quo with another. Radical
evolution is never static; it's a perpetual state of
polarization. We
could think of it as involuntary revolution,
but whatever terminology
we apply that's the condition of the
world today, the environment with
which the artist must work.
Radical evolution would be kinder if it
were better understood;
but it won't be so long as commercial
entertainment cinema
continues to represent a "reality" that doesn't
exist.
Sociologist Alvin Toffler has stressed
ephemerality as a chief
aspect of radical evolution: "Smith
Brothers Cough Drops, Calumet
Baking Soda, Ivory Soap, have
become institutions by virtue of their
long reign in the
marketplace. In the days ahead, few products will
enjoy such
longevity. Corporations may create new products
knowing full
well they'll remain on the market for only a matter of a
few
weeks or months. By extension, the corporations themselves—
as
well as unions, government agencies and all other organiza
ARTSCILAB 2001
Radical Evolution and Future Shock in the
Paleocybernetic Age 51
tions— may either have shorter life-spans or
be forced to undergo
incessant and radical reorganization. Rapid
decay and regeneration
will be the watchwords of tomorrow."8
Toffler observes that no
reasonable man should plan his life
beyond ten years; even that, he
says, is risky. When parents
speak of their sons becoming lawyers
they are deceiving
themselves and their sons, according to the
sociologist,
"Because we have no conception of what being a lawyer
will mean
twenty years hence. Most probably, lawyers will be
computers."
In fact, we can't be sure that some occupations will
even exist
when our children come of age. For example, the
computer
programmer, a job first created in the 1950's, will be as
obsolete as the blacksmith within a decade; computers will
reprogram
and even regenerate themselves (IBM recently announced
a new computer that repairs itself).
John McHale, coauthor of the World Design
Science Decade
documents with Buckminster Fuller, emphasizes
expendability and
impermanence in radical evolution: "Use value
is replacing
ownership value. For example, the growth of rental
and services—
not only in automobiles and houses, but from skis
to bridal gowns to
heirloom silver, castles and works of art...
our personal and household
objects, when destroyed physically or
outmoded symbolically,
may be replaced by others exactly
similar. A paper napkin, a suit, a
chair, an automobile, are
items with identical replacement value.
Metals in a cigarette
lighter today may be, within a month or year,
part of an auto,
lipstick case or orbiting satellite... the concept of
permanence
in no way enables one to relate adequately to our
present
situation."9
McHale has seen the need for a totally new
world view as radical
evolution speeds farther from our grasp.
"There's a mythology
abroad which equates the discovery and
publication of newfacts
with new knowledge. Knowledge is not
simply accumulated facts but
the reduction of unrelated and
often apparently irrelevant facts into
new conceptual wholes."10
He's talking about completely new ways
8 Alvin Toffler, "The Future as a Way of
Life,"Horizon (Summer, 1965).
9John McHale, "The Plastic
Parthenon,"Dotzero (Spring, 1967).
10John McHale, "Information
Explosion— Knowledge Implosion," Good News, eds. Edwin
Schlossberg and Lawrence Susskind (New York: Columbia University
Press, 1968)
ARTSCILAB 2001
52 Expanded Cinema
of looking at the world and everything in it.
This is proposition far
more profound than mere political
revolution, which Krishnamurti has
characterized as "The
modification of the right according to the ideas
of the
left.''11 The new consciousness transcends both right and left.
We must redefine everything.
What happens to our definition of
"intelligence" when computers,
as an extension of the human
brain, are the same size, weight, and
cost as transistor radios?
They're being developed through the
microelectronics process of
Large-Scale Integration.
What happens to our definition of "morality"
when biochemists are
about to unravel the secrets of the DNA/RNA
interaction mechanism
to create human life?
What happens to our definition of "man" when
our next door
neighbor is a cyborg (a human with inorganic
parts)? There are
several crude cyborgs in the world today.
What happens to our definition of
"environment" when our video
extensions bring us the reality of
the solar system daily? What do we
mean by "nature" under these
circumstances? (McLuhan: "The first
satellite ended nature in
the conventional sense.")
What happens to our definition of
"creativity" when a computer
asks itself an original question
without being programmed to do so?
This has occurred several
times.
What happens to our definition of "family"
when the intermedia
network brings the behavior of the world
into our home, and when
we can be anywhere in the world in a few
hours?
What happens to our definition of "progress"
when, according to
Louis Pauwels: "For the really attentive
observer the problems facing
contemporary intelligence are no
longer problems of progress. The
concept of progress has been
dead for some years now. Today it is a
question of a change of
state, a transmutation.''12 Or Norbert Wiener:
"Simple faith in
progress is not a conviction belonging to strength but
one
belonging to acquiescence and hence to weakness.''13
11 J. Krishnamurti, The First and Last
Freedom (Wheaton, III.: Quest Books, 1968), pp.
25,
26.
12Louis Pauwels, Jacques Bergier, The Morning of the
Magicians (New York: Avon
Books, 1968), pp. xxii, xxiii.
13
Norbert Wiener, The Human Use of Human Beings (New York: Avon Books,
1967), p.
66.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Radical Evolution and Future Shock in the
Paleocybernetic Age 53
What happens to our definitions of "material"
and "spiritual" when
science has found no boundary between the
two? Although it is still
popularly assumed that the world is
divided into animate and
inanimate phenomena, virologists
working at the supposed threshold
between life and nonlife at
the virus level have in fact discovered no
such boundary. "Both
animate and inanimate have persisted right
across yesterday's
supposed threshold in both directions...
subsequently what was
animate has become foggier and foggier...
no life, per se, has
been isolated.''14
Indeed, what becomes of "reality" itself as
science expands its
mastery of the forces of the universe? "The
paradox of twentieth-
century science consists of its unreality
in terms of sense impressions.
Dealing as it does in energy
transformation and submicroscopic
particles, it has become a
kind of metaphysics practiced by a
devoted priestly cult—
totally as divorced from the common-sense
notions of reality as
was the metaphysics practiced by witch doctors
and alchemists.
It is not at all odd, then, to discover that the closer
we come
via the scientific method to 'truth,' the closer we come to
understanding the 'truth' symbolized in myths.''15
This, then, is merely a superficial glimpse
at some of the phenomena
that characterize the Paleocybernetic
Age. Quite clearly man
is in the paradoxical position of
existing in a state of consciousness
without being able to
understand it. Man does not comprehend his
relationship to the
universe, either physical or metaphysical. He
insists on "doing
his thing" without the slightest notion of what his
"thing"
might be. This cosmic credibility gap exists primarily between
the facts of scientific experience and the illusions of
environmental
conditioning as manifested in the global
intermedia network.
14 R. Buckminster Fuller, "Planetary
Planning," text of the Jawaharlal Nehru Memorial
Lecture, New
Delhi, India, November 13, 1969.
15 John N. Bleibtreu, The
Parable of the Beast (New York: Collier Books, 1969), p. 112.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Intermedia Network as Nature
The point I wish to make here is obvious yet
vital to an
understanding of the function of art in the
environment, even though
it is consistently ignored by the
majority of film critics. It's the idea
that man is conditioned
by his environment and that "enviromnent"
for contemporary man
is the intermedia network. We are conditioned
more by cinema and
television than by nature. Once we've agreed
upon this, it
becomes immediately obvious that the structure and
content of
popular cinema is a matter of cardinal importance, at least
as
serious as most political issues, and thus calls for comment not
from journalists but from those who work at the matter, artists
themselves.
The cinema isn't just something inside the
environment; the
intermedia network of cinema, television,
radio, magazines, books,
and newspapers is our environment, a
service environment that
carries the messages of the social
organism. It establishes meaning
in life, creates mediating
channels between man and man, man and
society. "In earlier
periods such traditional meaning and value
communication was
carried mainly in the fine and folk arts. But today
these are
subsumed amongst many communicating modes. The
term 'arts'
requires expansion to include those advanced technological
media
which are neither fine nor folk.''16
We've seen the need for new concepts
regarding the nature of
existence; yet concepts are expanded or
constricted in direct relation
to the relevancy of prevailing
languages. In a world where change is
the only constant, it's
obvious we can't afford to rely on traditional
cinematic
language. The world has changed immeasurably in the
seventy
years since the birth of cinema: for one thing "world" now
includes the microcosm of the atom and the macrocosm of the
universe
in one spectrum. Still popular films speak a language
developed by Griffith, Lumière, Méliès, derived from traditions
of
vaudeville and literature.
In the Agricultural Age man was totally
passive, conditioned and
victimized by the environment. In the
Industrial Age man's role was
16 John McHale, "Education for Real," Good
News.
54
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Intermedia Network as Nature 55
participatory; he became more aggressive and
successful in his
attempts to control his environment. We're now
moving into the
Cybernetic Age in which man learns that to
control his environment
he must cooperate with it; he not only
participates but actually
recreates his environment both
physical and metaphysical, and in
turn is conditioned by it.
To be free of the toil of old relationships
we must first be free of the
conditioning that instills it
within us. As radical evolution gains
momentum the need to
unlearn our past becomes increasingly clear:
contemporary life
is a process of miseducation/uneducation/reeducation,
at a
cost of much precious time. McLuhan has noted that
the true
significance of Pavlov's experiments was that any controlled
man-made environment is a conditioner that creates
"non-perceptive
somnambulists." Since then science has
discovered that "molecular
memory" is operative in single-celled
and some multi-celled
organisms, and there's evidence that
memory-in-the-flesh exists in
humans as well. Biochemists have
proven that learned responses to
environmental stimuli are
passed on phylogenetically from
generation to generation,
encoded in the RNA of the organism's
physical molecular
structure.17 And what could be a more powerful
conditioning
force than the intermedia network, which functions to
establish
meaning in life?
Science has proven that there's no such thing
as "human nature."
Just as water takes the shape of its
container, so human nature is
relative to its past and present
conditioning. Optimum freedom of
behavior and increased
self-awareness are implicit in the industrial
equation that is
trending toward physical success for all men;
Paleocybernetic
man, however, has not learned to control the environment
he
creates. "The content of what is available for emulation
on the
part of the young in each society is itself culturally shaped
and limited... the individual typically remains, throughout his
lifetime,
unaware of how his own habits, which to him appear
'only natural,' in
fact result from a learning process in which
he never had an
opportunity to attempt alternative
responses.''18 This process
17 Bleibtreu, op. cit., pp. 85-114.
18
Segall, Campbell, Herskovits, op. cit., p. 10.
ARTSCILAB 2001
56 Expanded Cinema
of enculturation produces phenomenal
absolutism, the tendency to
interpret our experience as
volitional, objective, and absolute; it will
have
ever-increasing consequences as radical evolution continues
to
accelerate.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Popular Culture and the Noosphere
Contemporary man is fortunate to have a
tool that makes him aware
of his own enculturation and thus he
enjoys greater psychic freedom
than his ancestors. This tool is
what Teilhard de Chardin has called
the noosphere, the film of
organized intelligence that encircles the
planet, superposed on
the living layer of the biosphere and the
lifeless layer of
inorganic material, the lithosphere. The minds of
three-and-a-half-billion humans— twenty-five percent of all
humans
who ever lived— currently nourish the noosphere;
distributed around
the globe by the intermedia network, it
becomes a new "technology"
that may prove to be one of the most
powerful tools in man's history.
John McHale: "World communications... diffuse
and interpenetrate
local cultural tradition, providing
commonly-shared cultural
experience in a manner unparalleled in
human history. Within this
global network the related media
share and transmit man's symbolic
needs and their expression on
a world scale. Besides the
enlargement of the physical world,
these media virtually extend our
psychical environment,
providing a constant stream of moving,
fleeting images of the
world for our daily appraisal. They provide
psychic mobility for
the greater mass of our citizens. Through these
devices we can
telescope time, move through history, and span the
world in a
great variety of unprecedented ways.''19
Like all energy sources the noosphere can be
used for negative
purposes. Its resources can be manipulated to
disguise craft as
creativity, especially in these
Paleocybernetic days when we're still
impressed by the sudden
influx of information. Fuller has
differentiated craft from
industry by demonstrating that craft is
inherently local in
technique and effect whereas industry is inherently
comprehensive and universal in technique and effect. One might
make a similar analogy between entertainment and art:
entertainment
is inherently "local," that is, of limited
significance, whereas
art is inherently universal and of
unlimited significance. Too often
today we find that so-called
artists working in the intermedia
19 John McHale, "The Plastic Parthenon."
ARTSCILAB 2001
58 Expanded Cinema
network are little more than adroit
imitators, collectors of data and
phenomena, which they glean
from the noosphere and amalgamate
into packages that are far
from whole. They're clever and glib;
they've made an art of
selling themselves, but they know only effect,
not cause; they
are merchants of mannerisms.
It is precisely this confusion that clouds
critical appraisal of
"content" in the popular arts. All too
frequently eclectic thinking is
confused with creative thinking.
The distinction is subtle to be sure:
integrative thinking can
be the highest form of creativity. Indeed both
art and science
function to reveal similarities within an a priori
universe of
apparent dissimilarities. As with all else, however, there's
an
art and a craft to thinking, and the popular entertainments remain
at the craft level by the very nature of their purpose.
The intermedia network has made all of us
artists by proxy. A
decade of television-watching is equal to a
comprehensive course in
dramatic acting, writing, and filming.
Compressed in such constant
and massive dosage, we begin to see
the methods and clichés more
clearly; the mystique is gone— we
could almost do it ourselves.
Unfortunately too many of us do
just that: hence the glut of sub-
mediocre talent in the
entertainment industry. Paradoxically this
phenomenon carries
with it the potential of finally liberating cinema
from its
umbilical to theatre and literature, since it forces the movies
to expand into ever more complex areas of language and
experience. Evidence of television's effect on the cinema is
already
apparent, as we shall see in our discussion of
synaesthetic cinema.
From another more immediate perspective,
however, it is quite
unfortunate. We live in an age of
hyperawareness, our senses
extended around the globe, but it's a
case of aesthetic overload: our
technological zeal has
outstripped our psychic capacity to cope with
the influx of
information. We are adrift on the surface of radical
evolution
unable to plumb the depths of its swift and turbulent
current.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Art, Entertainment, Entropy
"It is easier to copy than to think, hence
fashion. Besides, a community of
originals is not a community."
WALLACE STEVENS
The current generation is engaged in an
unprecedented questioning
of all that has been held essential.
We question traditional concepts
of authority, ownership,
justice, love, sex, freedom, politics, even
tradition itself.
But it's significant that we don't question our
entertainment.
The disenfranchised young man who dropped out of
college, burned
his draft card, braids his hair, smokes pot, and digs
Dylan is
standing in line with his girl, who takes the pill, waiting to
see The Graduate or Bonnie and Clyde or Easy Rider— and they're
reacting to the same formulas of conditioned response that
lulled
their parents to sleep in the 1930's.
We've seen the urgent need for an expanded
cinematic language. I
hope to illustrate that profit-motivated
commercial entertainment, by
its very nature, cannot supply this
new vision. Commercial
entertainment works against art, exploits
the alienation and boredom
of the public, by perpetuating a
system of conditioned response to
formulas. Commercial
entertainment not only isn't creative, it actually
destroys the
audience's ability to appreciate and participate in the
creative
process. The implications become apparent when we
realize that,
as leisure time increases, each human will be forced to
become a
creative, self-sufficient, empirical energy laboratory.
D. H. Lawrence has written: "The business of
art is to reveal the
relation between man and his circumambient
universe at this living
moment. As mankind is always struggling
in the toil of old
relationships, art is always ahead of its
'times,' which themselves are
always far in the rear of the
living present." Jean-Jacques Lebel
stated the same idea in
different terms when he described art as "the
creation of a new
world, never seen before, imperceptibly gaining on
reality."20
20 Jean-Jacques Lebel, "On the Necessity of Violation," The
Drama Review (Fall, 1968).
ARTSCILAB 2001
60 Expanded Cinema
We've seen that man is conditioned by, and
reacts to, certain
stimuli in the man-made environment. The
commercial entertainer is
a manipulator of these stimuli. If he
employs a certain trigger
mechanism, we're guaranteed to react
accordingly, like puppets,
providing he manipulates the trigger
properly. I'm not saying the
artist doesn't resort to audience
manipulation; we know he often
does. The point, however, is the
motivation in doing so. If the artist
must resort to trigger
mechanisms to make himself clear, he will; but
it's only a means
to his end. In the case of the commercial
entertainer, however,
it's the end in itself.
Plot, story, and what commonly is known as
"drama" are the
devices that enable the commercial entertainer
to manipulate his
audience. The very act of this manipulation,
gratifying conditioned
needs, is what the films actually are
about. The viewer purchases it
with his ticket and is
understandably annoyed if the film asks him to
manipulate
himself, to engage in the creative process along with the
artist. Our word poetry derives from the Greek root poiein
meaning
"to make" or "to work." The viewer of commercial
entertainment
cinema does not want to work; he wants to be an
object, to be acted
upon, to be manipulated. The true subject of
commercial
entertainment is this little game it plays with its
audience.
By perpetuating a destructive habit of
unthinking response to
formulas, by forcing us to rely ever more
frequently on memory, the
commercial entertainer encourages an
unthinking response to daily
life, inhibiting self-awareness.
Driven by the profit motive, the
commercial entertainer dares
not risk alienating us by attempting
new language even if he
were capable of it. He seeks only to gratify
preconditioned
needs for formula stimulus. He offers nothing we
haven't already
conceived, nothing we don't already expect. Art
explains;
entertainment exploits. Art is freedom from the conditions
of
memory; entertainment is conditional on a present that is
conditioned by the past. Entertainment gives us what we want;
art
gives us what we don't know we want. To confront a work of
art is to
confront oneself— but aspects of oneself previously
unrecognized.
The extent to which blatant audience
manipulation not only is
tolerated but extolled is alarming.
Alfred Hitchcock, for example, in
his interview with François
Truffaut, finds merit in his ability to
manipulate
preconditioned needs for formula stimulus. Speaking of
Psycho,
Hitchcock frankly admits: "It wasn't a message that stirred
ARTSCILAB 2001
Art, Entertainment, Entropy 61
them, nor was it a great performance, or
their enjoyment of the
novel... they were aroused by the
construction of the story, and the
way in which it was told
caused audiences all over the world to react
and become
emotional.''21
It is essential to understand that Hitchcock
openly admits that he
didn't even try to expand awareness or to
communicate some
significant message, but only exploited a
universal tradition of
dramatic manipulation in order to supply
his audience with the
gratification it paid for. The audience
sees itself and its dreams
reflected in the film and reacts
according to memory, which
Krishnamurti has characterized as
being always conditioned.
"Memory," says Krishnamurti, "is
always in the past and is given life
in the present by a
challenge. Memory has no life in itself; it comes
to life in the
challenge [preconditioned formula stimulus]. And all
memory,
whether dormant or active, is conditioned."22 It is this
process
that the entertainment industry calls audience identification.
To a healthy mind, anything that is primarily
art is also immensely
entertaining. It seems obvious that the
most important things should
be the most entertaining. Where
there's a difference between what
we "like" and what we know to
be vital, we have a condition of
schizophrenia, an unnatural and
destructive situation. I speak
deliberately of a "healthy" mind
as one capable of creative thinking.
Filmmaker Ken Kelman: "The
old cinema removes experience,
making us see things along with
(or through) a protagonist with
whom we identify, and a plot in
which we are caught. Such an
approach tends toward not only a
lack of viewpoint, of definition of
whose experience it is, but
also filters the power of sight into mere
habit, dissolves
insight into vicariousness. The spectator is reduced
to a
voyeur— which is, increasingly, the individual's role in society at
large."23
Minimalist painter David Lee: "When
people do not trust their
senses they lack confidence in
themselves. For the last few
centuries people have lacked
confidence. They have not trusted
21 François Truffaut, Hitchcock (New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1968), p. 211.
22 Krishnamurti, op. cit.,
p. 54.
23 Ken Kelman, "Anticipations of the Light,"The New
American Cinema, ed. Gregory
Battcock (New York: Dutton
Paperbacks, 1967), pp. 24, 25.
ARTSCILAB 2001
62 Expanded Cinema
their experience to provide a standard for
knowing how to act."24 It is
quite obvious that most of us not
only don't know much about art, we
don't even know what we like.
Krishnamurti: "One of the fundamental
causes of the
disintegration of society is copying, which is the
worship of
authority."25
Imitation is the result of inadequate
information. Information results
in change. Change requires
energy. Energy is the result of adequate
information Energy is
directly proportional to the amount of
information about the
structure of a system. Norbert Wiener: "Information
is a name
for the content of what is exchanged with the
outer world as we
adjust to it and make our adjustment felt upon it …
to live
effectively is to live with adequate information."26 From the
cinema we receive conceptual information (ideas) and design
information (experiences). In concert they become one
phenomenon,
which I've described as the experiential information
of aesthetic
conceptual design. This information is either
useful (additive) or redundant.
Useful information accelerates
change. Redundant information
restricts change. If sustained
long enough redundant information
finally becomes
misinformation, which results in negative
change.
In communication theory and the laws of
thermodynamics the
quantity called entropy is the amount of
energy reversibly
exchanged from one system in the universe to
another. Entropy also
is the measure of disorder within those
systems. It measures the
lack of information about the structure
of the system. For our
purposes "structure of the system" should
be taken to mean "the
human condition," the universal subject of
aesthetic activity. Entropy
should be understood as the degree
of our ignorance about that
condition. Ignorance always
increases when a system's messages
are redundant. Ignorance is
not a state of limbo in which no
information exists, but rather
a state of increasing chaos due to
misinformation about the
structure of the system.
The First Law of Thermodynamics states that
energy is constant: it
cannot be created or destroyed; its form
can change, but not its quantity.
24David Lee, "A Systematic Revery from
Abstraction to Now,"Minimal Art, ed. Gregory
Battcock (New York:
E. P. Dutton, 1968), p. 195.
25Krishnamurti, op. cit., p. 41.
26Wiener, op. cit., pp. 26, 27.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Art, Entertainment, Entropy 63
The Second Law states that the amount of
energy within a local
system is naturally entropic— it tends
toward disorder, dissipation,
incoherence. And since energy is
defined as "a capacity to rearrange
elemental order," entropy,
which runs counter to that
capacity, means less potential for
change. We've learned from
physics that the only anti-entropic
force in the universe, or what is
called negentropy (negative
entropy), results from the process of
feedback. Feedback exists
between systems that are not closed but
rather open and
contingent upon other systems. In the strictest
sense there are
no truly "closed" systems anywhere in the universe;
all
processes impinge upon and are affected by other processes in
some way. However, for most practical purposes, it is enough to
say
that a system is "closed" when entropy dominates the
feedback
process, that is, when the measure of energy lost is
greater than the
measure of energy gained.
The phenomenon of man, or of biological life
on earth taken as a
process, is negentropic because its
subsystems feed energy back
into one another and thus are
self-enriching, regenerative. Thus
energy is wealth, and wealth
according to Buckminster Fuller is "the
number of forward days a
given system is sustainable." Biologist
John Bleibtreu arrived
at a similar conclusion when he noted that the
concept of time
can best be viewed as a function of the Second Law
of
Thermodynamics— that the measure of entropy in a system is a
measure of its age, or the passage of time since the system
originated.27 In other words the degree of a system's entropy is
equal to redundancy or stasis whereas its negentropy is equal to
kinesis or change. So information becomes energy when it
contributes to the self-enriching omni-regenerative wealth of
the
system. When it's not contributing (i.e., redundant) it is
allowing the
natural entropy to increase.
"It is possible to treat sets of messages as
having an entropy like
sets of states of the external world...
in fact, it is possible to interpret
the information carried by
a message as essentially the negative of
its entropy... that is,
the more probable the message the less
information it gives.
Clichés, for example, are less illuminating than
great poems."28
Thus the more information concerning the human
27 Bleibtreu, op. cit., p. 15.
28 Wiener,
op. cit., p. 31.
ARTSCILAB 2001
64 Expanded Cinema
condition that the artist is able to give us,
the more energy we have
with which to modify ourselves and grow
in accord with the
accelerating accelerations of the living
present.
Commercial entertainment may be considered a
closed system
since entropy dominates the feedback process. To
satisfy the profit
motive the commercial entertainer must give
the audience what it
expects, which is conditional on what it
has been getting, which is
conditional on what it previously
received, ad infinitum. Inherent in
the term "genre," which
applies to all entertainment, is that it must be
probable. The
content of westerns, gangster movies, romances, etc.,
is
probable in that it can be identified and comprehended simply by
classification. The phenomenon of drama itself usually is not
considered a genre, but is in fact the most universal and
archetypical
of all genres. Drama, by definition, means
conflict, which in turn
means suspense. Suspense is requisite on
the expectation of known
alternatives. One cannot expect the
unknown. Therefore
expectation, suspense, and drama are all
redundant probable
qualities and thus are noninformative.
Drama requires a plot that forces the viewer
to move from point A
to point B to point C along predetermined
lines. Plot does not mean
"story" (beginning-middle-end). It
simply indicates a relatively closed
structure in which free
association and conscious participation are
restricted. Since
the viewer remains passive and is acted upon by
the experience
rather than participating in it with volition, there's no
feedback, that vital source of negentropy. Norbert Wiener:
"Feedback is a method of controlling a system by reinserting
into it
the results of its past performance... if the
information which
proceeds backward from the performance is able
to change the
general method and pattern of performance, we have
a process
which may well be called learning."29 Fuller: "Every
time man makes
a new experiment he always learns more. He cannot
learn less.”30
In the cinema, feedback is possible almost
exclusively in what I call
the synaesthetic mode, which we'll
discuss presently. Because it is
entirely personal it rests on
no identifiable plot and is not probable.
The viewer is forced
to create along with the film, to interpret for
himself what he
is experiencing. If the information (either concept or
29 Ibid., p. 84.
30 Fuller, Spaceship
Earth, p. 92.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Art, Entertainment, Entropy 65
design) reveals some previously unrecognized
aspect of the viewer's
relation to the circumambient universe—
or provides language with
which to conceptualize old realities
more effectively— the viewer
recreates that discovery along with
the artist, thus feeding back into
the environment the existence
of more creative potential, which may
in turn be used by the
artist for messages of still greater eloquence
and perception.
If the information is redundant, as it must be in
commercial
entertainment, nothing is learned and change becomes
unlikely.
The noted authority on communication theory, J. R. Pierce,
has
demonstrated that an increase in entropy means a decrease in
the
ability to change.31 And we have seen that the ability to change
is the most urgent need facing twentieth-century man.
The notion of experimental art, therefore, is
meaningless. All art is
experimental or it isn't art. Art is
research, whereas entertainment is
a game or conflict. We have
learned from cybernetics that in
research one's work is governed
by one's strongest points, whereas
in conflicts or games one's
work is governed by its weakest
moments. We have defined the
difference between art and entertainment
in scientific terms and
have found entertainment to be
inherently entropic, opposed to
change, and art to be inherently
negentropic, a catalyst to
change. The artist is always an anarchist,
a revolutionary, a
creator of new worlds imperceptibly gaining on
reality. He can
do this because we live in a cosmos in which there's
always
something more to be seen. When finally we erase the
difference
between art and entertainment— as we must to survive—
we shall
find that our community is no longer a community, and we
shall
begin to understand radical evolution.
31 J R. Pierce, Symbols, Signals and Noise
(New York: Harper & Brothers, 1961).
ARTSCILAB 2001
Retrospective Man and the Human Condition
The image I would offer as representative of
the Paleocybernetic
Age is that of the dying man whose life
passes before him: a Retrospective
Man who discovers the truth
about himself too late to make
use of it. The information
explosion is not a window on the future so
much as a mirror of
the past catching up with the present. The
intermedia network,
or global communications grid, taps knowledge
resources that
always have existed in discrete social enclaves
around the
planet and saturates them into the collective consciousness.
Suddenly the mass public "discovers" African culture,
East
Indian and American Indian cultures, folk music, politics.
Knowledge previously the domain of scholars becomes common
knowledge, and precisely at that point when the old order is
about to
fade it sees itself clearly for the first time. William
Burroughs has
called it the Age of Total Confront, noting that
all the heretofore
invisible aspects of our condition have quite
suddenly become
visible.
Through Duchamp, Cage, and Warhol, for
example, we have
rediscovered art in the ancient Platonic sense
in which there's no
difference between the aesthetic and the
mundane. Although these
men certainly fulfill an avant-garde
function in present society, they
in fact conform to the most
universal and enduring definition of art. If
they've been
rejected as artists by the majority of our citizens it's
because
we've been conditioned by an economic system in which
aesthetic
concerns must assume a secondary position if the system
is to
survive. Thus art is separated from common experience and an
elite hierarchy is established, which seems only natural to
everyone
caught up in the economic struggle. John Dewey: "When
art attains
classic status it becomes isolated from the human
conditions under
which it was brought into being and from the
human consequences it
engenders in actual life experience...
when, because of their remoteness,
the objects acknowledged by
the cultivated to be works of
fine art seem anemic to the mass
of people, aesthetic hunger is
likely to seek the cheap and the
vulgar."32
Twentieth-century man is retrospective also
because the symbolic
32 John Dewey, Art as Experience (New York:
Capricorn, 1958), pp. 3, 6.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Retrospective Man and the Human Condition
67
and value content of his messages— most of
which take the form of
commercial entertainment— is
predominantly redundant. Norbert
Wiener: "Society can only be
understood through a study of the
messages and the communication
facilities which belong to it."33
Almost without exception,
these messages tend to be concerned
with what is known as the
"human condition." The history of popular
entertainment, in
terms of its conceptual content, can be divided into
three
general categories: (1) idealization, which corresponds to
states of happiness in which life is seen as a heavenly
experience
and man is characterized by his most noble deeds;
(2)frustration, an
expression of the conflict between inner and
outer realities, when
what is is not what should be; (3)
demoralization, generally
expressed as "the blues." In
commercial entertainment cinema these
three formulas are
followed religiously, almost without exception, and
usually
comprise the nature of the message. They are the human
condition, that which is taken for granted, the given, the facts
of life.
Everyone has ideals, everyone is frustrated, everyone
gets the
blues. But this information is redundant; we must go on
from there.
Commercial entertainment is "popular" and not
what we call art
because it doesn't go on from there. To insure
the widest possible
acceptance of his message, the commercial
entertainer must speak
a common language. He copies, repeats, or
imitates that which
already exists within the grasp of the
so-called average man. And
the majority of us embrace it because
it offers security, a crutch, in
the knowledge that the miseries
we suffer are shared by others. But
art transcends the human
condition. The artist doesn't want to hear
our problems and our
dreams— he already knows them. Instead he
wants to know what
we're doing about them, and he gives us the
instruments we need
for the task. The symbol is the basic instrument
of thought;
those who create new symbols— artists, scientists, poets,
philosophers— are those who, by giving us new instruments to
think
with, give us new areas to explore in our thinking.
A rather indignant woman once asked me how I
could have the
nerve to suggest that an "abstract" film like
Brakhage's Dog Star
Man could be more important than an immortal
classic like Renoir's
The Grand Illusion. The new consciousness
takes the view that films
33 Wiener, op. cit., p. 25.
ARTSCILAB 2001
68 Expanded Cinema
like Renoir's do not contain one single
insight into the nature of the
human condition that has not
already been absorbed by the collective
consciousness. Bob
Dylan: "How many times must a man look
up before he can see the
sky? How many ears must one man have
before he can hear people
cry?" And my own question: how many
times must we acknowledge
the human condition before it becomes
redundant? How long must
we tolerate the same facts of life before
we begin seeking new
facts? We intuit that the human condition has
expanded since
yesterday, but the popular arts aren't telling us. The
human
condition does not stop with what we know about ourselves.
Each
genuinely new experience expands the definition of the human
condition that much more. Some are seeking those new facts,
those
new experiences, through the synaesthetic research of
expanded
cinema.
Barbara Rose: "The new art... posits an
entirely new world view
which shifts cultural values from a
death-oriented, commemorative,
past-enshrining culture to a
life-oriented, present-oriented civilization...
In this sense
[Claes] Oldenburg's monuments represent, as he
contended, not
the appearance of something, but its disappearance...
the tomb,
the memorial, the shrine, the monument, all belong
to cultures
that commemorate."34
John McHale: "The problem now is that those
areas of our formal
education which deal with the symbolic and
value content of our
culture do so almost entirely in terms of
the past35... The new
educational technologies are largely being
used as twentieth-century
channels to convey a conceptual
context which is still nineteenth
century or earlier. The most
recent example was mathematics,
where the Sputnik-inspired
'second look' revealed that mathematics
as generally taught was
quite out of date. Science has begun to take
a second look at
its contents as currently taught. But the arts and
humanities
remain relatively unaware of any need to revise the
conceptual
framework of studies little removed from the polite
education of
eighteenth-century gentry."36
34 Barbara Rose, "Problems of Criticism, VI,"
Artforum (May, 1969), p. 50.
35 McHale, "Education for Real,"
Good News.
36 McHale, "Information Explosion," Good News.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Retrospective Man and the Human Condition
69
The entropy of commercial entertainment is
the chaos that results
from its retrospective nature, forever
commemorating past events,
historical figures, social eras,
life-styles, or the memory of the viewer,
while the living
present speeds farther from our grasp. Alvin Toffler:
"We offer
children courses in history; why not also make a course in
'future' a prerequisite for every student? A course in which the
possibilities and probabilities of the future are systematically
explored
exactly as we now explore the social system of the
Romans
or the rise of the feudal manor?"37 We invent the future
in the
present. We are what we think the future will be.
37 Toffler, op. cit.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Artist as Design Scientist
Our discussion obviously has excluded many
important works of art
that function completely within the
genres of drama, plot, and story.
Citizen Kane, L'Avventura,
Pierrot le Fou, and 8½ are dramatic, plot
films, yet no one
denies their greatness. We know also that most of
the truly
significant films such as Beauty and the Beast or Pather
Panchali operate entirely within parameters of the human
condition
as generally recognized. Moreover, common sense tells
us that the
artist must work with what exists, with the given,
the human
condition; he could produce no art at all if he relied
exclusively on
information that is totally new.
Yet the undeniable aesthetic value of these
works does not
contradict what I have said about art and
entertainment. These films
transcend their genres. They are not
important for their plots or
stories but rather for their
design. Susan Sontag: "If there is any
'knowledge' to be gained
through art, it is the experience of the form
or style of
knowing the subject, rather than a knowledge of the
subject
itself."38
To perceive that the artist functions as
design scientist we must
first understand that in their broadest
implications art and science
are the same. Eddington's classic
definition of science, "The earnest
attempt to set in order the
facts of experience," corresponds with
Bronowski's view of
science as "The organization of knowledge in
such a way that it
commands more of the hidden potential in
nature… all science is
the search for unity in hidden likenesses."39 It's
the same in
art: to set in order the facts of experience is to reveal the
relation between man and his circumambient universe with all its
hidden potential.
Herbert Read: "Only in so far as the artist
establishes symbols for
the representation of reality can mind,
as a structure of thought, take
shape. The artist establishes
these symbols by becoming conscious
38 Susan Sontag, "On Style,"Against
Interpretation (New York: Delta Books), p. 22.
39 J. Bronowski,
Science and Human Values (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1965),
pp. 3,
13.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Artist as Design Scientist 71
of new aspects of reality and by representing
his consciousness in
plastic or poetic form... it follows that
any extension of awareness of
reality, any groping beyond the
threshold of present knowledge,
must first establish its
sensuous imagery."40
Our word "design" is composed of "de" and
"sign," indicating that it
means "to remove the symbol of." In
this context "symbol" signifies
ideas distinct from experiences.
As design scientist the artist
discovers and perfects language
that corresponds more directly to
experience; he develops
hardware that embodies its own software
as a conceptual tool for
coping with reality. He separates the image
from its official
symbolic meaning and reveals its hidden potential, its
process,
its actual reality, the experience of the thing. (A. N.
Whitehead: "Process and existence pre-suppose each other.") He
establishes certain parameters that define a discrete "special
case"
phenomenon, principle, or concept known as the subject.
The work,
in effect, poses this "problem" of perception and we
as viewers must
draw from this special case all the "general
case" metaphysical
relationships that are encoded within the
language of the piece.
This language is the experiential information
of aesthetic
conceptual design; it is addressed to what
Wittgenstein termed the
"inarticulate conscious," the domain
between the subconscious and
the conscious that can't be
expressed in words but of which we
constantly are aware. The
artist does not point out new facts so
much as he creates a new
language of conceptual design information
with which we arrive
at a new and more complete
understanding of old facts, thus
expanding our control over the
interior and exterior
environments.
The auteur theory of personal cinema
indicates those instances
when the filmmaker's design science
transcends the parameters of
his genre; our comprehension of
that genre, that human condition is
thus expanded. But
cybernetics has demonstrated that the structure
of a system is
an index of the performance which may be expected
from it.41
That is, the conceptual design of a movie determines the
variety
and amount of information we're likely to obtain from it. And
since we've seen that the amount of information is
40Herbert Read, Icon and Idea (New York:
Schocken Books, 1965), p. 53.41Wiener, °op. cit., p. 79.
ARTSCILAB 2001
72 Expanded Cinema
directly proportional to the degree of
available choices we can see
that drama, story, and plot, which
restrict choice, also restrict information.
So the auteur is
limited to developing new designs for old
information, which we
all know can be immensely enjoyable and
instructive. There are
no "new" ideas in L'Avventura, for example,
but Antonioni voiced
the inarticulate conscious of an entire
generation through the
conceptual and structural integrity of his
transcendental design
science, merging sense and symbol, form and
content.
Rudolph Arnheim: "Perceiving achieves at the
sensory level what
in the realm of reasoning is known as
understanding... eyesight is
insight."42 If we realize that
insight means to see intuitively, we
acknowledge that Arnheim's
assertion is true only when ordinary
vision— conditioned and
enculturated by the most vulgar of environments—
is liberated
through aesthetic conceptual design information.
Film is a way
of seeing. We see through the filmmaker's eyes.
If he's an
artist we become artists along with him. If he's not,
information tends toward misinformation.
The artist's intuitive sense of proportion
corresponds to the
phenomenon of absolute pitch in musicians and
answers a fundamental
need in comprehending what we apprehend.
In the final
analysis our aptitudes and our psychological
balance are a result of
our relation to images. The image
precedes the idea in the development
of consciousness: an infant
doesn't think "green" when it
looks at a blade of grass. It
follows that the more "beautiful" the
image the more beautiful
our consciousness.
The design of commercial entertainment is
neither a science nor
an art; it answers only to the common
taste, the accepted vision, for
fear of disturbing the viewer's
reaction to the formula. The viewer's
taste is conditioned by a
profit-motivated architecture, which has
forgotten that a house
is a machine to live in, a service environment.
He leaves the
theatre after three hours of redundancy and returns
home to a
symbol, not a natural environment in which beauty and
functionality are one. Little wonder that praise is heaped on
films
whose imagery is on the level of calendar art. Global man
stands on
the moon casually regarding the entire spaceship earth
in a glance,
42Rudolph Arnheim, Art and Visual Perception
(Los Angeles, Calif.: University of
California Press, 1954), p.
37.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Artist as Design Scientist 73
yet humanity still is impressed that a rich
Hollywood studio can lug
its Panavision cameras over the Alps
and come back with pretty
pictures. "Surpassing visual majesty!"
gasp the critics over A Man
and a Woman or Dr. Zhivago. But with
today's technology and
unlimited wealth who couldn't compile a
picturesque movie? In fact
it's a disgrace when a film is not of
surpassing visual majesty because
there's a lot of that in our
world. The new cinema, however,
takes us to another world
entirely. John Cage: "Where beauty ends
is where the artist
begins."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
PART TWO:
SYNAESTHETIC CINEMA: THE
END OF DRAMA
"The final poem will be the poem of fact in
the language of fact. But it will be the poem
of fact not
realized before."
WALLACE STEVENS
Expanded cinema has been expanding for a long
time. Since it left
the underground and became a popular
avant-garde form in the late
1950's the new cinema primarily has
been an exercise in technique,
the gradual development of a
truly cinematic language with which to
expand further man's
communicative powers and thus his awareness.
If expanded cinema
has had anything to say, the message has
been the medium.1
Slavko Vorkapich: "Most of the films made so far
are examples
not of creative use of motion-picture devices and
techniques,
but of their use as recording instruments only. There are
extremely few motion pictures that may be cited as instances of
creative use of the medium, and from these only fragments and
short
passages may be compared to the best achievements in the
other
arts."2
It has taken more than seventy years for
global man to come to
terms with the cinematic medium, to
liberate it from theatre and
literature. We had to wait until
our consciousness caught up with our
technology. But although
the new cinema is the first and only true
cinematic language, it
still is used as a recording instrument. The
recorded subject,
however, is not the objective external human condition
but the
filmmaker's consciousness, his perception and its pro
1 For a comprehensive in-depth history of
this development, see: Sheldon Renan, An
Introduction to the
American Underground Film (New York: Dutton Paperbacks, 1967).
And for a survey of initial critical reaction, see The New
American Cinema, ed. Gregory
Battcock (New York: Dutton
Paperbacks, 1967).
2 Slavko Vorkapich, "Toward True Cinema,'' in
Film: A Montage of Theories, ed. Richard
Dyer MacCann (New York:
Dutton Paperbacks, 1966), p. 172.
ARTSCILAB 2001
76 Expanded Cinema
cess. If we've tolerated a certain absence of
discipline, it has been in
favor of a freedom through which new
language hopefully would be
developed. With a fusion of
aesthetic sensibilities and technological
innovation that
language finally has been achieved. The new cinema
has emerged
as the only aesthetic language to match the
environment in which
we live.
Emerging with it is a major paradigm: a
conception of the nature of
cinema so encompassing and
persuasive that it promises to
dominate all image-making in much
the same way as the theory of
general relativity dominates all
physics today. I call it synaesthetic
cinema. In relation to
traditional cinema it's like the science of bionics
in relation
to previous notions of biology and chemistry: that is, it
models
itself after the patterns of nature rather than attempting to
"explain" or conform nature in terms of its own structure. The
new
artist, like the new scientist, does not "wrest order our of
chaos."
Both realize that supreme order lies in nature and
traditionally we
have only made chaos out of it. The new artist
and the new scientist
recognize that chaos is order on another
level, and they set about to
find the rules of structuring by
which nature has achieved it. That's
why the scientist has
abandoned absolutes and the filmmaker has
abandoned montage.
Herbert Read: "Art never has been an attempt
to grasp reality as a
whole— that is beyond our human capacity;
it was never even an
attempt to represent the totality of
appearances; but rather it has
been the piecemeal recognition
and patient fixation of what is significant
in human
experience."3 We're beginning to understand that
"what is
significant in human experience” for contemporary man is
the
awareness of consciousness, the recognition of the process of
perception. (I define perception both as "sensation" and
"conceptualization,"
the process of forming concepts, usually
classified as
"cognition." Because we're enculturated, to
perceive is to interpret.)
Through synaesthetic cinema man
attempts to express a total phenomenon—
his own consciousness.4
3 Read, Icon, p. 18.
4 In defining
consciousness I concur with R. G. Collingwood: "The kind of thought
which
stands closest to sensation or mere feeling. Every further
development of thought is
based upon it and deals not with
feeling in its crude form but with feeling as thus
transformed
into imagination." Principles of Art (Oxford: Clarendon Press,
1938), p. 223.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema: The End of Drama 77
Synaesthetic cinema is the only aesthetic
language suited to the
post-industrial, post-literate, man-made
environment with its multidimensional
simulsensory network of
information sources. It's the
only aesthetic tool that even
approaches the reality continuum of
conscious existence in the
nonuniform, nonlinear, nonconnected
electronic atmosphere of the
Paleocybernetic Age. "As visual space
is superseded," McLuhan
observes, "we discover that there is no
continuity or
connectedness, let alone depth and perspective, in any
of the
other senses. The modern artist— in music, in painting, in
poetry— has been patiently expounding this fact for decades."5
The
modern synaesthetic filmmaker has been patiently expounding
this
fact for decades as well, and with far more success than
painters or
poets.
Finally, I propose to show that synaesthetic
cinema transcends the
restrictions of drama, story, and plot and
therefore cannot be called a
genre. In addition to matching
McLuhan's view of contemporary
existence, it also corresponds to
Buckminster Fuller's observations
on natural synergetics and
consequently is negentropic. Before
discussing specifics,
however, we must first understand why synaesthetic
cinema is
just now being developed into a universal
language, more than
seventy years after the birth of the medium.
Like most
everything else, it's because of television.
5 Marshall McLuhan, Quentin Fiore, War and
Peace in the Global Village (New York:
Bantam Books), p. 13.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Global Closed Circuit: The Earth as
Software
Television Renders Cinema Obsolete
as
Communicator of Objective Reality
Just as every fact is also metaphysical,
every piece of hardware
implies software: information about its
existence. Television is the
software of the earth. Television
is invisible. It's not an object. It's not
a piece of furniture.
The television set is irrelevant to the phenomenon
of
television. The videosphere is the noosphere transformed
into a
perceivable state. "Television," says video artist Les
Levine,
"is the most obvious realization of software in the general
environment. It shows the human race itself as a working model
of
itself. It renders the social and psychological condition of
the environment
visible to the environment."
A culture is dead when its myths have been
exposed. Television is
exposing the myths of the republic.
Television reveals the observed,
the observer, the process of
observing. There can be no secrets in
the Paleocybernetic Age.
On the macrostructural level all television
is a closed circuit
that constantly turns us back upon ourselves.
Humanity extends
its video Third Eye to the moon and feeds its own
image back
into its monitors. "Monitor" is the electronic manifestation
of
superego. Television is the earth's superego. We become aware
of
our individual behavior by observing the collective behavior as
manifested in the global videosphere. We identify with persons
in
news events as once we identified with actors or events in
fiction
films. Before television we saw little of the human
condition. Now we
see and hear it daily. The world's not a
stage, it's a TV documentary.
Television extends global man
throughout the ecological biosphere
twenty-four hours a day. By
moving into outer space, television
reveals new dimensions of
inner space, new aspects of man's
perception and the results of
that perception.
This implosive, self-revealing,
consciousness-expanding process is
irreversible. Global
information is the natural enemy of local government,
for it
reveals the true context in which that government is
ARTSCILAB 2001
Global Closed Circuit: The Earth as
Software 79
operating. Global television is directly
responsible for the political
turmoil that is increasing around
the world today. The political
establishments sense this and are
beginning to react. But it's too
late. Television makes it
impossible for governments to maintain the
illusion of
sovereignty and separatism which is essential for their
existence. Television is one of the most revolutionary tools in
the
entire spectrum of technoanarchy.
We recognize television's negative effect on
the popular arts: that it
induces a kind of sedentary uniformity
of expression and generates a
false sense of creativity. In its
broader consequences, however,
television releases cinema from
the umbilical of theatre and
literature. It renders cinema
obsolete as communicator of the objective
human condition. It
has affected cinema in much the same way
as the invention of
photography affected sculpture and painting.
Cubism and other
means of abstracting the realistic image were born
with the
photographic plate because painting no longer provided the
most
realistic images. The plastic arts abandoned exterior reality for
interior reality. The same has happened to cinema as a result of
television: movies no longer provide the most realistic images
so
they've turned inward.
We're in direct contact with the human
condition; there's no longer
any need to represent it through
art. Not only does this release
cinema; it virtually forces
cinema to move beyond the objective
human condition into newer
extra-objective territory. There are
manifold trends that
indicate that virtually all cinema has felt the
profound impact
of television and is moving inevitably toward
synaesthesis. The
progression naturally includes intermediary steps
first toward
greater "realism," then cinéma-vérité, before the final and
total abandon of the notion of reality itself. The fact that
we're now
approaching the peak of the realism stage is
demonstrated by
Warhol, for example, whose recent work contrasts
"reality" with
"realism" as manifested in the spontaneous
behavior of actors pretending
to be acting. In addition there's
virtually all of Godard's work,
as well as John Cassavetes'
Faces, James McBride's David
Holzman's Diary, Peter Watkins' The
War Game, Gillo Pontecorvo's
The Battle of Algiers, Paul
Morrissey's Flesh, and Stanton Kaye's
Georg and Brandy in the
Wilderness.
ARTSCILAB 2001
80 Expanded Cinema
Most of this work is characterized by an
astute blending of scripted
and directed acting with spontaneous
improvisation, in which the
actor randomly fills in the
parameters of a characterization predetermined
and predestined
by the director. Yet precisely because
they attempt to
approximate objective reality without actually being
real,
places them firmly in the tradition of conventional Hollywood
pretend movies, with the exception of camera presence or what
might be called process-level perception.
It's only natural that contemporary
filmmakers should be more
successful at imitating reality since
the intermedia network makes us
more familiar with it. But
there's a curious and quite significant
aspect to the nature of
this new realism: by incorporating a kind of
bastardized
cinéma-vérité or newsreel style of photography and
behavior, the
filmmaker has not moved closer to actual unstylized
reality
itself but rather a reality prestylized to approximate our
primary mode of knowing natural events: television. We accept it
as
being more realistic because it more closely resembles the
process-
level perception of TV watching, in which unstylized
reality is filtered
and shaped through the process of a given
medium.
The traditional dramatic structure of these
films becomes more
easily discernible in contrast with pure
cinéma-vérité work such as
Jean Rouch's Chronicle of a Summer,
Pennebaker's Don't Look
Back, or Chris Marker's brilliant Le
Joli Mai. A comparison of Faces
or David Holzman's Diary with
Warhol's Nude Restaurant is even
more revealing: the difference
between prestylized and predestined
realities on the one hand,
and Warhol's totally random and only
partially prestylized
reality on the other, is brought into sharp focus.
Warhol has
expressed regret that a camera cannot simply be
switched on and
left running for twenty-four hours, since the "important"
(naturally-revealing) events seem to occur at that moment
just after it stops turning. Godard disclosed similar sentiments
when
he said: "The ideal for me is to obtain right away what
will work. If
retakes are necessary it falls short of the mark.
The immediate is
chance. At the same time it is definitive. What
I want is the definitive
by chance."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Synthesis:
Simultaneous
Perception of Harmonic Opposites
Time, said St. Augustine, is a threefold
present: the present as we
experience it; the past as present
memory; the future as present
expectation. Hopi Indians, who
thought of themselves as caretakers
of the planet, used only the
present tense in their language: past was
indicated as "present
manifested," and the future was signified by
"present
manifesting.”6 Until approximately 800 B.C., few cultures
thought in terms of past or future: all experience was
synthesized in
the present. It seems that practically everyone
but contemporary
man has intuitively understood the space-time
continuum.
Synaesthetic cinema is a space-time
continuum. It is neither subjective,
objective, nor
nonobjective, but rather all of these combined:
that is to say,
extra-objective. Synaesthetic and psychedelic mean
approximately
the same thing. Synaesthesis is the harmony of
different or
opposing impulses produced by a work of art. It means
the
simultaneous perception of harmonic opposites. Its sensorial
effect is known as synaesthesia, and it's as old as the ancient
Greeks who coined the term. Under the influence of
mind-
manifesting hallucinogens one experiences synaesthesia in
addition
to what Dr. John Lilly calls "white noise," or random
signals in the
control mechanism of the human bio-computer.7
Any dualism is composed of harmonic
opposites: in/out, up/ down,
off/on, yes/no, black/white,
good/bad. Past aesthetic traditions,
reflecting the
consciousness of their period, have tended to
concentrate on one
element at a time. But the Paleocybernetic
experience doesn't
support that kind of logic. The emphasis of traditional
logic
might be expressed in terms of an either/or choice, which
in
physics is known as bistable logic. But the logic of the Cybernetic
Age into which we're moving will be both/and, which in physics
is
6 Benjamin Whorf, Language, Thought and
Reality (Cambridge, Mass.: Massachusetts
Institute of
Technology, Publications Office, 1956).
7 John C. Lilly, The
Human Bio-Computer (Miami, Fla.: Communications Research
Institute, 1967).
ARTSCILAB 2001
82 Expanded Cinema
called triadic logic. Physicists have found
they can no longer describe
phenomena with the binary yes/no
formula but must operate
with yes/no/maybe.
The accumulation of facts is no longer of top
priority to humanity.
The problem now is to apply existing facts
to new conceptual wholes,
new vistas of reality. By "reality" we
mean relationships. Piet
Mondrian: "As nature becomes more
abstract, a relation is more
clearly felt. The new painting has
clearly shown this. And that is why
it has come to the point of
expressing nothing but relations."8
Synaesthetic cinema is an
art of relations: the relations of the conceptual
information
and design information within the film itself
graphically, and
the relation between the film and the viewer at that
point where
human perception (sensation and conceptualization)
brings them
together. As science gropes for new models to accommodate
apparent inconsistencies and contradictions, the need for
seeing incompatibles together is more easily discerned. For
example,
the phenomenon of light is conceived in both/and terms:
both
continuous wave motions and discontinuous particles. And we
have
noted our incapacity for observing both movement and
position of
electrons.
This is but one of many reasons that
synaesthetic cinema is the
only aesthetic language suited to
contemporary life. It can function as
a conditioning force to
unite us with the living present, not separate
us from it. My
use of the term synaesthetic is meant only as a way of
understanding the historical significance of a phenomenon
without
historical precedent. Actually the most descriptive term
for the new
cinema is "personal" because it's only an extension
of the filmmaker's
central nervous system. The reader should not
interpret
"synaesthetic" as an attempt to categorize or label a
phenomenon
that has no definition. There's no single film that
could be called
typical of the new cinema because it is defined
anew by each individual
filmmaker.
I've selected about seven films that are
particularly representative
of the various points I wish to
make. I'm using them only to illuminate
the nature of
synaesthetic cinema in general, not as specific archetypal
examples. Sufficient literature exists on Brakhage's Dog Star
8Piet Mondrian, Plastic Art and Pure Plastic
Art (New York: Wittenborn, Schultz, Inc.,
1945), p. 50.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Synthesis: Simultaneous
Perception of Harmonic Opposites 83
Man to preclude any major expository analysis
here, but it is exemplary
of virtually all concepts involved in
the synaesthetic mode, in
particular syncretism and
metamorphosis. Will Hindle's Chinese
Firedrill is an outstanding
example of the evocative language of
synaesthetic cinema as
distinct from the expositional mode of
narrative cinema. Pat
O'Neill's 7362, John Schofill's XFilm, and
Ronald Nameth's
Exploding Plastic Inevitable provide some insight
into
kinaesthetics and kinetic empathy. Carolee Schneemann's
Fuses,
in contrast with Warhol's Blue Movie and Paul Morrissey's
Flesh,
illustrates the new polymorphous eroticism. And, finally,
Michael Snow's Wavelength has been chosen for its qualities of
extra-objective constructivism.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Syncretism and Metamorphosis:
Montage
as Collage
The harmonic opposites of synaesthetic cinema
are apprehended
through syncretistic vision, which Anton
Ehrenzweig has characterized
as: "The child's capacity to
comprehend a total structure rather
than analyzing single
elements... he does not differentiate the identity
of a shape by
watching its details one by one, but goes straight for
the
whole."9 Syncretism is the combination of many different forms
into one whole form. Persian tapestries and tile domes are
syncretistic. Mandalas are syncretistic. Nature is
syncre-tistic. The
majority of filmgoers, conditioned by a
lifetime of conven-tional
narrative cinema, make little sense of
synaesthetic cinema because
their natural syncretistic faculty
has suffered entropy and atrophy.
Buckminster Fuller: "All universities have
been progressively
organized for ever-finer specialization.
Society assumes that specialization
is natural, inevitable and
desirable. Yet in observing a little
child we find it is
interested in everything and spontaneously apprehends,
comprehends and coordinates an ever-expanding inventory
of
experience.''10
It has been demonstrated that all species of
life on earth that have
become extinct were doomed through
overspecialization, whether
anatomical, biological, or
geological. Therefore conventional narrative
cinema, in which
the filmmaker plays policeman guiding our
eyes here and there in
the picture plane, might be described as
"specialized vision,"
which tends to decay our ability to comprehend
the more complex
and diffuse visual field of living reality.
The general impression that syncretism, and
therefore synaesthetic
cinema, is empty of detail or content is
an illusion: "… it is highly
sensitive to the smallest of cues
and proves more efficient in identify
9 Anton Ehrenzweig, The Hidden Order of
Art (Berkeley, Calif.: University of California
Press, 1967), p.
9.
10 Fuller, Operating Manual for Spaceship Earth (Carbondale,
Ill.: Southern Illinois
University Press, 1969), p. 13.
Press, 1967), p. 9.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Syncretism and Metamorphosis: Montage as
Collage 85
ing individual objects. It impresses us as
empty, vague and generalized
only because the narrowly-focused
surface consciousness
cannot grasp its wider more comprehensive
structure. Its precise,
concrete content has become inaccessible
and ‘unconscious.’11''
Synaesthetic cinema provides access to
syncretistic content
through the inarticulate conscious.
Similarly, it contradicts the
teachings of Gestalt psychology,
according to which we must make
an either/or choice: we can
choose either to see the "significant"
figure or the
"insignificant" ground. But when the "content" of the
message is
the relationship between its parts, and when structure
and
content are synonymous, all elements are equally significant.
Ehrenzweig has suggested that syncretism is "Gestalt-free
perception,"
and indeed this must be the case if one expects any
visual
"meaning" from synaesthetic cinema.
Paul Klee, whose syncretistic paintings
closely resemble certain
works of synaesthetic cinema, spoke of
the endotopic (inside) and
exotopic (outside) areas of a picture
plane, stressing their equal
importance in the overall
experience.12 Synaesthetic cinema, primarily
through
superimposition, fuses the endotopic and exotopic by
reducing
depth-of-field to a total field of nonfocused multiplicity.
Moreover, it subsumes the conventional sense of time by
interconnecting
and interpenetrating the temporal dimension with
images that
exist outside of time. The "action" of Dog Star Man,
for example,
could be an entire life-span or merely a split
second in the inarticulate
conscious of Stan Brakhage. I stress
"action" as commonly
understood in the cinema because
synaesthetic syncretism replaces
montage with collage and, as
André Bazin has observed, "montage
is the dramatic analysis of
action." Bazin was perceptive enough to
realize that "only an
increased realism of the image can support the
abstraction of
montage.''13
Synaesthetic cinema subsumes Eisenstein's
theory of montage-ascollision
and Pudovkin's view of
montage-as-linkage. It demonstrates
that they were certainly
correct but didn't follow their own observations
to their
logical conclusions. They were restricted by the con
11 Ehrenzweig, op. cit., pp. 19,
20.
12 Paul Klee, The Thinking Eye (London: Lund Humphries,
1961).
13 André Bazin, What Is Cinema? trans. Hugh Gray (Los
Angeles, Calif.: University of
California Press, 1967), p. 39.
ARTSCILAB 2001
86 Expanded Cinema
sciousness of their times. Synaesthetic
cinema transcends the notion
of reality. It doesn't "chop the
world into little fragments," an effect
Bazin attributed to
montage, because it's not concerned with the
objective world in
the first place. The new filmmaker is showing us
his feelings.
Montage is indeed an abstraction of objective reality;
that's
why, until recently, Warhol did not cut his films at all. But
synaesthetic syncretism is the only mode in which the
manifestations
of one's consciousness can be approximated
without distortion.
There's no conflict in harmonic opposites.
Nor is there anything that
might be called linkage. There is
only a space-time continuum, a
mosaic simultaneity. Although
composed of discrete elements it is
conceived and edited as one
continuous perceptual experience. A
synaesthetic film is, in
effect, one image continually transforming into
other images:
metamorphosis. It is the one unifying force in all of
synaesthetic cinema. The notion of universal unity and cosmic
simultaneity is a logical result of the psychological effects of
the
global communications network.
If montage is the dramatic analysis of
action, a film without classic
montage thus avoids at least the
structural element of drama
inherent within the medium. All that
remains to avoid drama entirely
is to exclude dramatic (i.e.,
theatrical) content by making content and
structure the same.
Warhol's films are not dramatic, and neither are
films at the
extreme opposite end of the spectrum, synaesthesia. The
classical tension of montage is dissolved through overlapping
superimposition. For example: we have shots A, B. and C. First
we
see A, then B is superimposed over it to produce AB. Then A
fades
as C fades in. There's a brief transitional period in
which we're
seeing ABC simultaneously, and finally we're looking
only at BC. But
no sooner has this evolved than B begins to fade
as D appears, and
so on.
This is a physical, structural equivalent of
the Hopi "present
manifested" and "present manifesting"
space-time continuum. It's the
only style of cinema that
directly corresponds to the theory of general
relativity, a
concept that has completely transformed all aspects of
contemporary existence except traditional Hollywood cinema. The
effects of metamorphosis described above become more apparent if
shots A, B. and C happen to be of the same image but from
slightly
ARTSCILAB 2001
Syncretism and Metamorphosis: Montage as
Collage 87
different perspectives, or with varied
inflections of tone and color. It
is through this process that a
synaesthetic film becomes, in effect,
one image constantly
manifesting.
And finally we're forced to admit that the
pure art of cinema exists
almost exclusively in the use of
superimposition. In traditional
cinema, superimposition usually
gives the impression of two movies
occurring at once in the same
frame with their attendant psychological
and physiological
connotations coexisting separately. In synaesthetic
cinema they
are one total image in metamorphosis. This does
not imply that
we must relinquish what Eisenstein called "intellectual
montage." In fact, the conflict-juxtaposition of intellectual
effects is
increased when they occur within the same image.
Fiction, legend,
parable, myth, traditionally have been employed
to make comprehensible
the paradoxes of that field of nonfocused
multiplicity that is
life. Synaesthetic cinema, whose very
structure is paradox, makes
paradox a language in itself,
discovering the order (legend) hidden
within it.
Stan Brakhage: Dog Star Man
Dog Star Man is a silent,
seventy-eight-minute film divided into
Prelude and Parts One
through Four. It was shot in 1959-60 and
edited during the next
four years. Prelude is an extremely fast
collage of
multiple-level superimpositions and compounded images
that
emerge from a blurry diaphanous haze and slowly take form,
only
to be obscured by other images and countermotions. We begin
to
discern specific objects, patterns, and finally a motif or theme:
the
elements of Earth, Air, Fire, and Water; a childbirth; a man
climbing
a mountain with his dog; the moon; the sun throwing off
huge solar
prominences; lovemaking; photomicrography of blood
vessels; a
beating heart; a forest; clouds; the faces of a man
and a woman; and
literally thousands of other images to appear
in the rest of the film.
These images exist essentially autonomously
and are superimposed
or compounded not for "dramatic" effect but
rather as a kind of
matrix for psychic exercise on the part of
the viewers. For example,
over an expanding solar prominence we
might see Brakhage's
leonine face or a line of snow-covered fir
trees in the mountains of
Colorado. We are not asked to
interpret or find "meaning" in these
ARTSCILAB 2001
88 Expanded Cinema
combinations, though vastly rich experiences
are possible. When the
images emerge from a hazy blur, for
example, we are not asked to
interpret this as the creation of
life or some similar dramatic notion,
but rather as a perceptual
experience for its own sake, in addition to
the contextual
relationship of this image to the rest of the film, or
what
Eisenstein indicated by the term "intellectual montage."
Whereas Prelude is a rapid barrage of
multiple overlays, Part One
is superimposed sparingly,
concentrating on interface relationships
between individual
shots. However, every effort is made to subdue
any effect that
might be considered montage. The shots fade in and
out very
slowly, often fading into a color such as red or green. The
fragments of Prelude fall into place and an overwhelming sense
of
oceanic consciousness evolves. We begin to realize that
Brakhage
is attempting to express the totality of consciousness,
the reality
continuum of the living present. As his solitary
figure climbs the
snow-covered mountain, we see images of man's
world from the
microspectrum of the bloodstream to the
macrospectrum of the sun,
moon, and universe. Both time and
space are subsumed in the
wholeness of the experience.
Superimposition is not used as an
economical substitute for
"parallel montage"— indicating simultaneous
but spatially
separate events— for spatio-temporal dimensions
do not exist in
the consciousness. Brakhage is merely presenting us
with images
orchestrated in such a way that a new reality arises out
of
them.
When we see the sun superimposed over a
lovemaking scene, it's
not an invitation to interpret a meaning
such as cosmic regeneration
or the smallness of man in the
universe, but rather as an occasion to
experience our own
involuntary and inarticulate associations. The
images are not
symbolic, as in The Seventh Seal, or artfully composed
as in
Last Year at Marienbad. Brakhage does not manipulate
us
emotionally, saying: "Now I want you to feel suspense" or "Now I
want you to laugh" or "Now is the time to be fearful." This is
the ploy
of the commercial entertainer: an arrogant degradation
of cinema,
using film as a tool for cheap sensationalism. This
is not to say that
spatio-temporal experiences, or suspense,
humor, or any emotion
cannot be found in synaesthetic cinema.
Quite the contrary: because
we're dealing with our own personal
associations, emotion is
ARTSCILAB 2001
Syncretism and Metamorphosis: Montage as
Collage 89
Stan Brakhage: Dog Star Man. 1959
64. 16 mm. Color, black and white.
78
min. "The totality of consciousness,
the reality continuum of
the living
present."
ARTSCILAB 2001
90 Expanded Cinema
guaranteed. And it will be more genuinely
profound than the formula-
triggered gratification of conditioned
response that we receive from
commercial entertainment.
Brakhage has spoken of "restructuring" vision
through his films,
and often refers to the "untutored" vision of
the child before he's
taught to think and see in symbols. In
what he calls "closed-eye
vision," Brakhage attempts to
simulate, by painting and scratching on
film, the flashes and
patterns of color we perceive when our eyes are
closed.
Approximately midway through Dog Star Man, otherwise
mundane
images take on wholly new meanings and in some cases
new
appearances. We stop mentally labeling images and concentrate
instead on the synaesthetic/kinaesthetic flow of color,
shape, and motion.
This is not to suggest a nonobjective
experience. The images
develop their own syntactical meaning and
a "narrative" line is
perceived, though the meaning of any given
image may change in
the context of different sequences. This
constitutes a creative use of
the language itself, over and
above any particular "content" conveyed
by that language.
(Wallace Stevens: "A new meaning is
equivalent to a new word.")
The effect of synaesthetic cinema is to
break the hold that the
medium has over us, to make us perceive it
objectively. Art is
utter folly unless it frees us from the need of art as
an
experience separate from the ordinary.
Wittgenstein has described art as a game
whose rules are made
up as the game is in process. The exact
meaning of words (images)
becomes known only in the context of
each new statement.14 E. H.
Gombrich, on the other hand,
demonstrates that objective realism
also is a game, but one
whose schema is established prior to its use
and is never
altered. Artists and society thus learn to read the
schema as
though it were objective reality. But since the language
itself
is not used creatively, the viewer is seduced beyond form into
an abstract content with an illusion of being externally
objective.15
Thus the viewer is captive under the hold, or
spell, of the medium
and is not free to analyze the process of
experience.
14 Ludwig Wittgenstein, Philosophical
Investigations (Oxford: Blackwell Press, 1963).
15 E. H.
Gombrich, Art and Illusion, The Bollingen Series XXXV (New York:
Pantheon
Books, Inc., 1960).
ARTSCILAB 2001
Syncretism and Metamorphosis: Montage as
Collage 91
Brakhage expressed this concept with respect
to his own work:
"Imagine an eye unruled by man-made laws of
perspective, an eye
unprejudiced by compositional logic, an eye
which must know each
object encountered in life through a new
adventure of perception.
Imagine a world alive with
incomprehensible objects and shimmering
with an endless variety
of movement and gradations of color.
Imagine a world before the
beginning was the word.''16
16 Stan Brakhage, "Metaphors on Vision," ed.
P. Adams Sitney,Film Culture (Fall, 1963).
ARTSCILAB 2001
Evocation and Exposition:
Toward
Oceanic Consciousness
There is an important distinction to be made
betweenevocation, the
language of synaesthetic cinema, primarily
poetic in structure and
effect, and exposition, the language of
narrative cinema, which
chiefly conforms to traditional,
literary narrative modes. Intermedia
artist and filmmaker
Carolee Schneemann has characterized evocation
as the place
between desire and experience, the interpenetrations
and
displacements which occur between various sense stimuli.
"Vision
is not a fact," Miss Schneemann postulates, "but an
aggregate of
sensations. Vision creates its own efforts toward
realization;
effort does not create vision.”17
Thus, by creating a new kind of vision,
synaesthetic cinema creates
a new kind of consciousness: oceanic
consciousness. Freud spoke
of oceanic consciousness as that in
which we feel our individual
existence lost in mystic union with
the universe. Nothing could be
more appropriate to contemporary
experience, when for the first time
man has left the boundaries
of this globe. The oceanic effect of
synaesthetic cinema is
similar to the mystical allure of the natural
elements: we stare
in mindless wonder at the ocean or a lake or
river. We are drawn
almost hypnotically to fire, gazing as though
spellbound. We see
cathedrals in clouds, not thinking anything in
particular but
feeling somehow secure and content. It is similar to the
concept
of no-mindedness in Zen, which also is the state of mantra
and
mandala consciousness, the widest range of consciousness.
Miss Schneemann defines perception
aseye-journey or empathy-
drawing. It is precisely through a kind
of empathy-drawing that the
content of synaesthetic cinema is
created jointly by the film and the
viewer. The very nature of
evocation requires creative effort on the
part of the viewer,
whereas expository modes do all the work and the
viewer becomes
passive. In expositional narrative, a story is being
told; in
evocative synaesthesia an experience is being created. The
17Carolee Schneemann, "Snows,"I-Kon, ed.
Susan Sherman, Vol. 1, No. 5 (New York:
March, 1968).
ARTSCILAB 2001
Evocation and Exposition: Toward Oceanic
Consciousness 93
figure of Stan Brakhage in Dog Star Man
actually moves through a
psychic environment created by the
viewer, whose deeply-hidden
creative resources and hungers have
been evoked by the film.
With typical poetic eloquence, Hermann Hesse
has summarized
the evocative effects of oceanic consciousness in
this memorable
passage from Demian: "The surrender to nature's
irrational, strangely
confused formations produces in us a
feeling of inner harmony with
the force responsible for these
phenomena... the boundaries separating
us from nature begin to
quiver and dissolve... we are unable to
decide whether the
images on our retina are the result of
impressions coming from
without or from within... we discover to
what extent we are
creative, to what extent our soul partakes of the
constant
creation of the world.''18
Will Hindle: Chinese Firedrill
There have been essentially three generations
of personal filmmakers
in the United States. The first began
with the invention of the
medium and continued in various stages
through the 1940's. The
second began approximately in the
mid-1950's with the increasing
availability of inexpensive 8mm.
and 16mm. equipment. It represented
the first popular movement
toward personal cinema as a way
of life. The third generation
has evolved since the mid-1960's, primarily
in the San Francisco
area, where the latest trend is toward a
blending of aesthetics
and technology. One reason personal cinema
is more eloquent than
commercial cinema is that the filmmaker is
forced into a closer
interaction with his technology.
Will Hindle is exemplary of this recent
technological awareness, a
combination of engineering and
aesthetics. Trained in art, literature,
and professional
television filmmaking, Hindle has applied his
knowledge to
personal cinema in a singularly spectacular fashion.
His ability
to invest a technical device with emotional or metaphysical
content is truly impressive. He has, for example, developed
the technique of rear-projection rephotography to a high degree
of
eloquence. He shoots original scenes with wide-angle lenses,
then
"crops" them by projecting and rephotographing this footage
using a
special single-frame projector. Thus extremely subtle
effects are
18Hermann Hesse, Demian (New York: Bantam
Books, 1968), p. 88.
ARTSCILAB 2001
94 Expanded Cinema
Will Hindle: Chinese Firedrill. 1968.
16mm.
Color. 24 min. "We discover to what extent
our soul
partakes of the constant creation
of the world."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Evocation and Exposition: Toward Oceanic
Consciousness 95
achieved that would be prohibitively
expensive, if not impossible, if
done through conventional
laboratory optical printing.
Although many synaesthetic films are
wonderfully evocative,
Hindle's recent works are especially
notable for their ability to generate
overwhelming emotional
impact almost exclusively from cine matic
technique, not
thematic content. Hindle has an uncanny talent
for transforming
spontaneous unstylized reality into unearthly poetic
visions, as
in Billabong (1968), a wordless impressionistic "documentary"
about a boy's camp in northern California, and Watersmith
(1969), a spectacular visual fantasy created from footage of an
Olympic swimming team at practice.
Chinese Firedrill, unique in Hindle's work,
was prestylized and
"performed" almost in the traditional sense
of a scripted, directed,
and acted movie. The difference is that
Hindle used the images not
for their symbolic or theatrical
content but as ingredients of an almost
iconographic nature, to
be compounded and manipulated through the
process of the medium.
Although there are "actors" (Hindle plays the
principal role),
there is no characterization. Although there are sets,
we're not
asked to suspend our disbelief.
Chinese Firedrill is a romantic, nostalgic
film. Yet its nostalgia is of
the unknown, of vague emotions,
haunted dreams, unspoken words,
silences between sounds. It's a
nostalgia for the oceanic present
rather than a remembered past.
It is total fantasy; yet like the best
fantasies— 8½, Beauty and
the Beast, The Children of Paradise— it
seems more real than the
coldest documentary. The "action" occurs
entirely within the
mind of the protagonist, who never leaves the
small room in
which he lives. It's all rooms everywhere, all cubicles
wherever
we find man trapped within his dreams. Through the
door/mirror
is the beyond, the unreachable, the unattainable, the
beginning
and the end. Not once in the film's twenty minutes can we
pinpoint a sequence or action that might be called "dramatic" in
the
usual sense. Yet almost immediately an overwhelming
atmosphere
of pathos is generated. There are moments of
excruciating emotional
impact, not from audience manipulation
but from Hindle's ability to
realize metaphysical substance,
stirring the inarticulate conscious.
Every effort is made to
distance the viewer, to keep us aware of our
perceptions, to
emphasize the purely cinematic as opposed to the
theatrical.
ARTSCILAB 2001
96 Expanded Cinema
We find Hindle kneeling on the floor of his
surrealistic room stuffing
thousands of IBM cards into boxes.
Over this we hear a strange
monologue of fragmented words and
sentences in an odd foreign
accent. This is punctuated by fierce
thunderclaps and howling wind
that evolve into ethereal music
and tinkling bell sounds. Periodically
the screen is slashed
across with blinding white flashes while the
central images
constantly are transformed through lap-dissolves and
multiple
superimpositions. There are flash-forwards of images to be
encountered later, though we don't recognize them and therefore
don't interpret them. We see nude lovers, a small boy bathing, a
beautiful woman with candles, a huge eyeball, a battery of
glaring
lights. These are noted for their inherent psychological
connotations
and not as narrative devices.
The most memorable sequence of Firedrill,
possibly one of the
great scenes in the history of film,
involves Hindle lying in anguish on
his floor and slowly
reaching out with one hand toward the
glimmering void beyond his
door. Suddenly a mirror-like reflection of
his arm and hand
appears on the opposite side of the mirror. When
he removes his
hand we see the vague shadowy figure of a nude
woman silhouetted
ghostlike, her skin sparkling. In slow motion the
silhouette of
a nude man enters from an opposite direction and the
two
gossamer figures embrace in a weightless ballet of graceful
motion in some dream of bliss. In the film's final image, the
haunted
man has become a child once again, splashing in his bath
in a series
of freeze-frames that grow ever fainter until they
vanish.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetics and Kinaesthetics:
The
Way of All Experience
The term kinetic generally indicates motion
of material bodies and
the forces and energies associated with
it. Thus to isolate a certain
type of film as kinetic and
therefore different from other films means
we're talking more
about forces and energies than about matter. I
define aesthetic
quite simply as: the manner of experiencing something.
Kinaesthetic, therefore, is the manner of experiencing a thing
through the forces and energies associated with its motion. This
is
called kinaesthesia, the experience of sensory perception.
One who
is keenly aware of kinetic qualities is said to possess
a kinaesthetic
sense.
The fundamental subject of synaesthetic
cinema— forces and
energies— cannot be photographed. It's not
what we're seeing so
much as the process and effect of seeing:
that is, the phenomenon of
experience itself, which exists only
in the viewer. Synaesthetic
cinema abandons traditional
narrative because events in reality do
not move in linear
fashion. It abandons common notions of "style"
because there is
no style in nature. It is concerned less with facts
than with
metaphysics, and there is no fact that is not also metaphysical.
One cannot photograph metaphysical forces. One cannot
even
“represent" them. One can, however, actuallyevoke them in the
inarticulate conscious of the viewer.
The dynamic interaction of formal proportions
in kinaesthetic
cinema evokes cognition in the inarticulate
conscious, which I call
kinetic empathy. In perceiving kinetic
activity the mind's eye makes
its empathy-drawing, translating
the graphics into emotional-
psychological equivalents meaningful
to the viewer, albeit meaning
of an inarticulate nature.
"Articulation" of this experience occurs in
the perception of it
and is wholly nonverbal. It makes us aware of
fundamental
realities beneath the surface of normal perception:
forces and
energies.
Patrick O'Neill: 7362
New tools generate new images. In the
historical context of image
ARTSCILAB 2001
98 Expanded Cinema
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetics and Kinaesthetics: The Way
of All Experience 99
making, the cinema is a new tool. 7362 is
among the few purely
cinematic images to evolve from this new
seventy-year-old tool. All
the visual arts are moving toward the
cinema. Artists like Frank
Stella or Kenneth Noland have been
credited as significant painters
within the last decade because
they kept the game going. One is
impressed that they merely
discovered new possibilities for a two-
dimensional surface on
stretchers. But the possibilities are sonarrow
today that soon
there will be nowhere to go but the movies.
Pat O'Neill is a sculptor with a formal
background in the fine arts.
Like Michael Snow, also a sculptor,
O'Neill found unique possibilities
in the cinema for exploration
of certain perceptual concepts he had
been applying to sculpture
and environmental installations. 7362,
made some five years ago,
was the first of many experiments with
the medium as a
"sculptural" device. The term is intended only as a
means of
emphasizing the film's kinetic qualities.
7362 was named after the high-speed emulsion
on which it was
filmed, emphasizing the purely cinematic nature
of the piece. O'Neill
photographed oil pumps with their rhythmic
sexual motions. He
photographed geometrical graphic designs on
rotating drums or
vertical panels, simultaneously moving the
camera and zooming in
and out. This basic vocabulary was
transformed at the editing table
and in the contact printer,
using techniques of high-contrast bas-
relief, positive/negative
bi-pack printing and image "flopping," a
Rorschach-like effect
in which the same image is superimposed over
itself in reverse
polarities, producing a mirror-doubled quality.
The film begins in high-contrast
black-and-white with two globes
bouncing against each other
horizontally, set to an electronic score
by Joseph Byrd. This
repetitive motion is sustained for several
seconds, then fades.
As though in contrast, the following images are
extremely
complex in form, scale, texture, and motion. Huge masses
of
mechanical hardware move ponderously on multiple planes in
various directions simultaneously. The forms seem at times to be
recognizable,
at others to be completely nonobjective. Into this
serial,
mathematical framework O'Neill introduces the organic
fluid lines of
Patrick O'Neill: 7362.1965-66.16mm. Color,
black and white.
11 min. "Human and machine interact with serial
beauty,
one form passing into another with delicate precision."
ARTSCILAB 2001
100 Expanded Cinema
the human body. He photographed a nude girl
performing simple
motions and processed this footage until she
became as mechanical
as the machinery. At first we aren't
certain whether these shapes are
human or not, but the
nonrhythmic motions and asymmetrical lines
soon betray the
presence of life within a lifeless universe. Human
and machine
interact with serial beauty, one form passing into
another with
delicate precision in a heavenly spectrum of pastel
colors.
John Schofill: XFilm
The young Berkeley physicist John Schofill
has exhibited a thorough
and creative grasp of kineticism as
regards the representational
organic image. Although XFilm is a
spectacular example of
montage-as-collage, it does not ignore
the conflicts of volume, scale,
mass, and graphic direction that
Eisenstein found so central to film
form. Other physiological
montage effects postulated by Eisenstein—
metric, rhythmic,
tonal, overtonal— also are used by Schofill
not for any result
that might resemble montage, but rather to
generate an
overpowering sense of kinaesthesia, or rushing dynamic
force.
Through precise manipulation of individual
frames and groups of
frames, Schofill creates an overwhelming
sense of momentum practically
unequaled in synaesthetic cinema.
There is almost a visceral,
tactile impact to these images,
which plunge across the field of vision
like a dynamo. Yet they
are punctuated with moments of restful
quietude. It is a
composition of point-counterpoint, the better to
accentuate
kinaesthetic content.
Schofill has developed a method of A-B-C-roll
editing for superimpositions,
adapted from Karel Reisz's methods
of cutting single
footage.19 It's a rhythmic concept, that is, a
shot is divided into
definite kinetic "beats." The kinetic
activity begins, reaches a middle
point, and ends. In triple
superimpositions, the corresponding
19Karel Reisz, The Techniques of Film Editing
(New York: Hastings House, 1968).
John Schofill: XFilm. 1967.16mm. Color. 14
min.
"Images which plunge across the field of
vision like
a dynamo... punctuated with moments of
restful
quietude."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetics and Kinaesthetics: The Way
of All Experience 101
ARTSCILAB 2001
102 Expanded Cinema
rhythms of each piece of film are matched,
fading in and out without
abrupt cuts.
XFilm begins with quiet formal imagery:
static shots of factories
spewing poison into the sky, strongly
reminiscent of Antonioni'sRed
Desert. The structures are seen in
eight levels of superimposition of
eight different zoom-lens
positions. The sound track explodes with an
extraordinary tape
composition by Berkeley composer William
Maraldo, a synthesis of
East Indian and rock music that perfectly
counterpoints the
visuals with its own sense of dynamic thrust. We
see a series of
tableau statements in which a nude girl's cupped
hand opens to
reveal a flower, then a factory. Then begins an
accelerating
succession of flash-frames, macro-close-ups of electronic
circuitry, tree bark, dirt, plants, human flesh. Each image is
balanced in terms of scales, volumes, masses, directions, and
textures
of objects within it. Quite often a particularly smooth
or static
image is counterpointed with strobing flash-frames.
The most powerful sequence, one which deals
purely with the
kinaesthetic experience, involves a time-lapse
sunset that begins
with a low horizon, bare-limbed trees, and a
blue sky. Suddenly the
action is speeded: clouds and squiggly
jet contrails rush up and over.
Maraldo's sound track takes a
spiraling, droning dive and the sun
appears, sinking rapidly
like a comet from upper left to lower right.
Just as it reaches
the horizon the foreground and trees flash brilliant
white
(superimposed high-contrast negative over a high-contrast
positive silhouette). The effect is stunning. A train,
approaching the
camera, becomes visible as the sun fades,
continuing the kin-
aesthetic sense of dynamic volumes and
trajectories.
Ronald Nameth: Exploding Plastic Inevitable
To some extent the so-called psychedelic
discotheque was to the
cinema of the sixties what the Busby
Berkeley ballroom was to the
thirties. In a larger sense,
however, they are by no means in the
same class either socially
or aesthetically. The Berkeley extravaganzas,
like Hollywood,
were not places but states of mind. They
generated their own
ethos, their own aesthetic. They answered an
obvious need for
escape from the dreary hardships of the times. Life
imitated
art. But thirty years later Hollywood had degenerated to the
point that it was, at best, an imitation of an imitation. The
spate of
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetics and Kinaesthetics: The Way
of All Experience 103
"hip" Hollywood films, which began to appear
after 1966, was about
as socially significant as the various
Kennedy assassination
"souvenirs," and was proffered with the
same exploitive street-
vending zeal. Like all commercial
entertainment, these films were
about something rather than
being something, and so were the
discotheques they imitated.
Andy Warhol's hellish sensorium, the
Exploding Plastic Inevitable,
was, while it lasted, the most
unique and effective discotheque
environment prior to the
Fillmore/Electric Circus era, and it is safe to
say that the EPI
has never been equaled. Similarly, Ronald Nameth's
cinematic
homage to the EPI stands as a paragon of excellence in
the
kinetic rock-show genre. Nameth, a colleague of John Cage in
several mixed-media environments at the University of Illinois,
managed to transform his film into something far more than a
mere
record of an event. Like Warhol's show, Nameth's EPI is an
experience, not an idea.
In fact, the ethos of the entire pop
life-style seems to be synthesized
in Nameth's dazzling
kinaesthetic masterpiece. Here, form and
content are virtually
synonymous, and there is no misunderstanding
what we see. It's
as though the film itself has exploded and
reassembled in a
jumble of shards and prisms. Gerard Malanga and
Ingrid Superstar
dance frenetically to the music of the Velvet
Underground
(Heroin, European Son, and a quasi-East Indian
composition),
while their ghost images writhe in Warhol's Vinyl
projected on a
screen behind. There's a spectacular sense of frantic
uncontrollable energy, communicated almost entirely by Nameth's
exquisite manipulation of the medium.
EPI was photographed on color and
black-and-white stock during
one week of performances by
Warhol's troupe. Because the
environment was dark, and because
of the flash-cycle of the strobe
lights, Nameth shot at eight
frames per second and printed the
footage at the regular
twenty-four fps. In addition he developed a
mathematical curve
for repeated frames and superimpositions, so
that the result is
an eerie world of semi-slow motion against an aural
background
of incredible frenzy. Colors were superimposed over
black-and-white negatives, and vice-versa. An extraordinary
off-color
grainy effect resulted from pushing the ASA rating of
his color stock;
thus the images often seem to lose their
cohesiveness as though
ARTSCILAB 2001
104 Expanded Cinema
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetics and Kinaesthetics: The Way
of All Experience 105
wrenched apart by the sheer force of the
environment.
Watching the film is like dancing in a strobe
room: time stops,
motion retards, the body seems separate from
the mind. The screen
bleeds onto the walls, the seats. Flak
bursts of fiery color explode
with slow fury. Staccato strobe
guns stitch galaxies of silverfish over
slow-motion, stop-motion
close-ups of the dancers' dazed ecstatic
faces. Nameth does with
cinema what the Beatles do with music: his
film is dense,
compact, yet somehow fluid and light. It is extremely
heavy,
extremely fast, yet airy and poetic, a mosaic, a tapestry, a
mandala that sucks you into its whirling maelstrom.
The most striking aspect of Nameth's work is
his use of the freeze-
frame to generate a sense of timelessness.
Stop-motion is literally
the death of the image: we are
instantly cut off from the illusion of
cinematic life— the
immediacy of motion— and the image suddenly is
relegated to the
motionless past, leaving in its place a pervading
aura of
melancholy. Chris Marker's La Jetée, Peter Goldman's
Echoes of
Silence, and Truffaut's 400 Blows are memorable for the
kind of
stop-frame work that Nameth raises to quintessential beauty.
The
final shots of Gerard Malanga tossing his head in slow motion
and freezing in several positions create a ghostlike atmosphere,
a
timeless and ethereal mood that lingers and haunts long after
the
images fade. Using essentially graphic materials, Nameth
rises
above a mere graphic exercise: he makes kinetic empathy a
new
kind of poetry.
Ronald Nameth: Andy Warhol's Exploding
Plastic
Inevitable. 1966.16mm. Color, black and white. 30
min. "An eerie world of semi-slow motion against an
aural
background of incredible frenzy. He makes
kinetic empathy a new
kind of poetry."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Mythopoeia: The End of Fiction
"If what we see depicted had been really the
truth, successfully created in front
of the camera, the film
would cease to exist because it would cease, by the
same token,
to be a myth."
ANDRÉ BAZIN
In 1934 Erwin Panofsky wrote: "To pre-stylize
reality prior to tackling
it amounts to dodging the problem. The
problem is to shoot and
manipulate unstylized reality in such a
way that the result has style."
The problem that concerned
Panofsky was how to work with the two
qualities unique to cinema
alone, not to be found in any other
aesthetic medium.
The first is its ability to capture and
preserve a picture of time. This
is fine until the filmmaker
wishes to comment upon or interpret the
events he has captured.
Thus we come to the second unique
property of cinema, its
aesthetic element: the ability to post-stylize
natural reality.
To understand this concept we must examine the
three general
purposes to which cinema historically has been applied:
fiction,
documentary, and cinéma-vérité.
Cinematic fiction should be understood as
prestylized or manufactured
reality that did not exist prior to
the making of the film. The
only true reality that remains in
the finished film is the objective
awareness of the stylization
itself. That is to say, a theatrical
scenario-based fiction film
deals with a prestylized reality distilled
and recorded through
the personality of the writer, then visualized by
the director,
crew, and actors according to certain schemata. Not
only is this
not objective reality; it's not even the cohesive, unique
reality of one artist's perception.
A documentary also deals with prestylized
reality. The documentary
filmmaker shifts and reorganizes
unstylized material into a
narrative form that explains that
reality to the viewer. Thus a
documentary is not an explanation
of reality, but rather the reality of
an explanation.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Mythopoeia: The End of Fiction 107
Cinéma-vérité, or direct cinema, is based on
recording actual
unstylized reality as it exists at a particular
moment before the
camera. The filmmaker is never to intrude by
directing the action or
in any way alter the events taking place
(that is, beyond the
unavoidable alterations caused by his very
presence). The film maker's
refusal to intervene directly in the
reality before his camera,
and the resultant loosely-organized
structure, bring this type of
cinema closer to the truth of the
way events move in actual reality.
Synaesthetic cinema is all and none of these.
It is not fiction
because, with a few exceptions, it is based
wholly on unstylized
reality. It is not documentary because the
reality is not organized into
an explanation of itself. And it
is not cinéma-vérité because the artist
shoots and manipulates
his unstylized reality in such a way that the
result has style.
This process, best described as
"post-stylization," is accomplished
through cinematic
equivalents of the four historical styles of art:
realism,
surrealism, constructivism, and expressionism.
Cinematic realism already has been defined as
Cinéma-vérité
capturing and preserving a picture of time as
perceived through
unstylized events.
Cinematic surrealism is achieved by the
juxtaposition of unstylized
elements so incongruous and remote
that close proximity creates an
extra dimension, a psychological
reality that arises out of the
interface.
Cinematic constructivism, as we've discussed
it, actually is the
universal subject of synaesthetic cinema: a
constructivist statement,
a record of the process of its own
making.
Cinematic expressionism involves the
deliberate alteration or
distortion of unstylized reality,
either during photography with lenses,
filters, lights, etc., or
after photography with optical printing, painting,
or scratching
on film.
Post-stylization of unstylized reality
results in an experience that is
not "realistic" but neither is
it "fiction" as generally understood,
because none of the
elements is altered or manufactured prior to
filming. In essence
a myth is created, a myth born out of the
juxtapositions of the
paradoxes of reality. Webster defines myth as a
story that
"serves to unfold part of the world view of a people or
explain
a practice, belief, or natural phenomenon." The natural
ARTSCILAB 2001
108 Expanded Cinema
phenomenon explained by synaesthetic cinema
is the filmmaker's
consciousness. It is a documentary of the
artist's perception. Since
this is not a physical reality, it
must be a metaphysical reality, that is,
a myth. In the
approximation of this intangible, however, the artist's
language
is reality, not fiction. What we see on the screen is not an
act. True, it's processed through the medium until it no longer
is
objective reality, but it is nonetheless real. This is
mythopoeic reality.
In one sense it renders fiction obsolete.
At the beginning of Alphaville, Jean-Luc
Godard states: "There are
times when reality becomes too complex
for communication. But
legend gives it a form by which it
pervades the whole world." This is
the legitimate role of
fiction: to establish a framework that provides
insights into
otherwise inaccessible areas of the living present. But
most
insights inherent in fiction as the simulation of objective reality
have been absorbed by the collective consciousness. The
structure
of the system is an index of the performance that may
be expected
from that system: the simulation of reality has
delivered its maximum
performance; it no longer benefits us as
it has in the past.
Obviously, filmmakers will continue to
prestylize reality; in one
sense the very nature of art is the
rearrangement of the environment
for greater advantage to
humanity. Yet this prestylization will not be
so clearly
separated from "reality" as it has been. Because of
technology,
we have now reached the point at which it is possible to
manipulate reality itself in order to create new legends. It may
be that
insights most relevant to contemporary society will be
achieved
primarily through this language.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetics and Synergy
Synaesthetic cinema by definition
includes many aesthetic modes,
many "ways of knowing,"
simultaneously omni-operative. The whole,
however, is always
greater than the sum of its parts. This is a result
of the
phenomenon called synergy. Synergy is the behavior of a
system
unpredicted by the behavior of any of its parts or subassemblies
of its parts. This is possible because there is no a priori
dependency between the conceptual and design information (i.e.,
the
energy) of the individual parts. The existence of one is not
requisite
on the presence of another. They are harmonic
opposites. In physics
this is known as the Theory of
Complementarity: the logical relation
between two descriptions
or sets of concepts which, though mutually
exclusive, are
nevertheless both necessary for a complete
knowledge of the
phenomenon.
Dramatic narrative cinema is antisynergetic.
Individual parts of
linear drama predict the behavior of the
whole system. For a genre to
exist it must include parts that
are integral to the a priori purpose of
the system. As E. H.
Gombrich has demonstrated, the function of its
"words" must
remain constant and predictable. To gratify conditioned
needs
for formula stimulus, the commercial entertainment film must
follow prescribed rules that predict the whole system of
conflictcrisis-
resolution.
We have seen, however, that the behavior of a
conflict or game is
always governed by its weakest moment, which
is equivalent to the
notion of a chain being only as strong as
its weakest link. This idea,
however, presupposes a linear chain
under opposing vectors of
stress, i.e., narrative drama. Fuller:
"We tend to think it is logical to
say that a chain is no
stronger than its weakest link— which immediately
is thrown out
of validity when we join the other end of the chain
back on
itself. We think a chain ought to be just an infinite line rather
than a circle because we inherited the Greek concepts of linear
and
plane geometry [which] imposed the concept of an infinite
surface
and the infinite line as logical to the then-prevalent
belief that the
earth was flat... However, in nature all the
lines are completely
ARTSCILAB 2001
110 Expanded Cinema
curved and all chains do eventually return
upon themselves."20
The malfunction or absence of any one element
in a linear
narrative constitutes a break in the system and
relinquishes the
system's hold over the viewer's consciousness.
But synaesthetic
synergy is possible only when the parts behave
with integrity and
without self-consciousness. If the metals in
chrome-nickel steel tried
to retain their individuality, the
synergetic effect of tripling the tensile
strength through alloy
would never occur. Fuller has noted that the
individual tensile
strengths of chromium, nickel, and iron are in the
approximate
range of 70,000, 80,000, and 60,000 pounds per square
inch
respectively. Yet in alloy they yield 300,000 psi tensile strength,
which is five times as strong as its weakest link and four times
as
strong as its strongest link.
The entertainer makes a package that is equal
to the sum of its
separate parts; the artist fuses his parts
into an alloy greater than its
ingredients. That is,
synaesthetic synergy does not tend toward
greater complexity,
but rather produces an effect that in physics is
known as
elegant simplicity. An elegantly simple construction
accomplishes that which previously required many different
mechanisms,
either physical or metaphysical. Recent
revolutionary concepts
in biology are an example. John McHale:
"The DNA/RNA
mechanism construct renders obsolete an enormous
number of
separate 'biological facts' and relates biology via
biochemistry to
biophysics— and thence to a more elegantly
simple configuration of
structural hierarchies as extending
outward from the micro-nucleus
through the median range of
ordinary perception towards macro-
structural hierarchies at the
level of galaxies.''21
Let us briefly review what we mean by synergy
as applied to the
cinema. We have learned that synaesthetic
cinema is an alloy
achieved through multiple superimpositions
that produce syncretism.
Syncretism is a total field of harmonic
opposites in continual
metamorphosis; this metamorphosis
produces a sense of kinaesthesia
that evokes in the inarticulate
conscious of the viewer recognition
of an overall pattern-event
that is in the film itself as well as the
20R. Buckminster Fuller, Ideas and
Integrities (New York: Collier Books, 1969), p. 65.21McHale,
"Knowledge Implosion," Good News.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetics and Synergy 111
"subject" of the experience. Recognition of
this pattern-event results
in a state of oceanic consciousness.
A mythopoeic reality is
generated through post-stylization of
unstylized reality. Post-stylization
simultaneously involves the
four traditional aesthetic modes:
realism, surrealism,
constructivism, and expressionism.
Herbert Read has suggested that these four
styles are intercorrelated
to the four modes of human
consciousness: thought, intuition,
emotion, and sensation. Of
course, they are operative in commercial
entertainment as well;
but it's the nature of synaesthetic cinema that
one is made
aware of the process of one's own perception; thus one
invests
the experience with meaning by exerting conscious control
over
the conversion of sight impressions into thought images. We
can
easily see how thought, intuition, and sensation may be directly
engaged or indirectly evoked in the synaesthetic viewing
experience;
the role of emotion deserves further comment.
The emotional content of dramatic narrative
cinema is predominantly
the result of expectations that the
viewer brings with him to the
theatre, and thus he remains
passive during the viewing experience
so that his conditioned
response to the formula may be fully gratified.
In this way he
satisfies his unconscious need to experience the
particular
emotions that he has already decided to experience. The
film is
"good" or "bad" in relation to its effectiveness as a catalyst for
these predetermined emotions. However, the emotional content of
synaesthetic cinema exists in direct relation to the degree of
conscious awareness of the act of perceiving, and is thus seldom
predictable. Synergy is the essence of the living present, and
it is the
essence of art. Where synergy does not exist, energy
tends toward
entropy and change becomes increasingly unlikely.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and Polymorphous
Eroticism
"The Western consciousness has always asked
for freedom: the human mind was born
free, or at any rate born
to be free, but everywhere it is in chains; and now at the end of
its tether."
NORMAN O. BROWN
For the majority of the mass public,
"underground" movies are
synonymous with sex. Although this
conclusion was reached for all
the wrong reasons, it is
nevertheless accurate. If personal cinema is
indeed personal,
and if we place any credence at all in Freud,
personal cinema is
by definition sexual cinema. A genuine social
underground no
longer is possible. The intermedia network quickly
unearths and
popularizes any new subculture in its relentless drive to
satisfy the collective information hunger. Jean-Luc Godard once
remarked
that the only true twentieth-century underground was in
Hanoi. But I would suggest that in the history of civilization
there
never has been a phenomenon more underground than human
sexuality.
The vast political and social revolution that
is now irreversible in its
accelerating accelerations around the
planet is merely a side effect
of the more profound revolution
in human self-awareness that is
producing a new sexual
consciousness.
We hold the radical primacy of the passions
to be self-evident.
Norman O. Brown: "All Freud's work
demonstrates that the allegiance
of the human psyche to the
pleasure-principle is indestructible
and that the path of
instinctual renunciation is the path of sickness
and
self-destruction."22 If there is a general debasement of the sexual
act among the bourgeoisie, it is precisely because that
sexuality has
been repressed. Charles Fourier: "Every passion
that is
22 Norman 0. Brown, "Apocalypse: The Place of
Mystery in the Life of the Mind,"
Harper's (May, 1961).
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and Polymorphous
Eroticism 113
suffocated produces its counter-passion,
which is as malignant as
the natural passion would have been
benign."23
Nowhere is this more evident than in
commercial cinema. Hollywood
movies are teasers whose eroticism
is a result of
psychological conditioning that is not,
fundamentally, the enjoyment
of sex itself. Girlie and Hollywood
films "for mature adults" are
founded on puritanical concepts of
"sin" and other repressive
measures, no matter how "honest" or
"artistic" or "redeeming" the
presentation may seem. The absurd
notion that sex must somehow
be "redeemed" is exploited by
Hollywood as much as by the makers
of girlie or stag films.
Hollywood presents "redeemed" sex,
suggesting there's an
unredeemed way of doing it and therefore
we're getting away with
something. Girlie and stag films take the
opposite approach:
they represent sex in various stages of
"unredemption" until the
point of watching them becomes more an
act of rebellion, of
something "dirty," clandestine, without redeeming
qualities,
than the enjoyment of sex. That is to say, the present
socioeconomic system actually contributes to the corruption of
the
institution it claims to uphold.
However, it is now only a matter of a few
years until the final
restrictions on sexuality will
disintegrate. The revolution that seeks
the restructuring of
social arrangements— a utopia of material plenty
and economic
freedom— is secondary by far to that other revolution
that
demands the total release of psychic impulses. This imminent
utopia of the senses has been described by the neo-Freudian
psychoanalyst A. H. Maslow as Eupsychia, a view oriented to the
liberation and satisfaction of inner drives as prerequisite to
any
effective reorganization of the exterior social order.24 It
implies the
necessary transformation of a bourgeois society that
perpetrates the
three cardinal crimes against human sexuality:
delayed sexual
gratification, restricted to "adults only";
heterosexual monogamy;
specialization of sexual activity
limiting pleasure to the genitals.
Eupsychia and utopia are both quite
inevitable and both quite out of
our hands, for they are the
irreversible result of technology, the
23Charles Fourier, La Phalange, quoted by
Daniel Bell in "Charles Fourier: Prophet of
Eupsychia," The
American Scholar (Winter, 1968-69), p. 50.
24A. H. Maslow, "Eupsychia— The Good
Society," Journal of Humanistic Psychology,
No. 1 (1961), pp.
1-11.
ARTSCILAB 2001
114 Expanded Cinema
only thing that keeps man human. The most
comprehensive, reliable,
and respected future-forecasts
attempted by scientific man indicate
that individual sensorial
freedom is virtually synonymous with technological
progress.25
Buckminster Fuller is among many who have
noted the effects of
industrialization and cybernetics on sexual
activity: "We may glimpse
in such patterning certain total
behaviors in Universe that we know
little about. We noted, for
instance, that as survival rate and life-
sustaining capability
increase, fewer birth starts are required. This
may be related
to our developing capacities in interchanging our
physical
parts, or producing mechanical organs, of having pro.
gressively
fewer human organisms to replenish. The drive in
humanity to
reproduce as prodigally as possible decreases considerably.
This
may be reflected in social behaviors— when all the
girls begin
to look like boys and boys and girls wear the same
clothes. This
may be part of a discouraging process in the idea of
producing
more babies. We shall have to look askance on sex
merely as a
reproductive capability, i.e., that it is normal to make
babies.
Society will have to change in its assessment of what the
proclivities of humanity may be. Our viewpoints on
homosexuality,
for example, may have to be reconsidered and more
wisely adjusted.
Repression and censorship become impossible
on an individual
level when technology outstrips enforcement.
The new image-
exchange and duplication technologies are a
formidable obstacle to
effective sexual censorship. Home
videotape recorders, Polaroid
cameras, and 8mm. film cartridges
render censorship nearly powerless.
One prominent scientist
working in laser holography has
suggested the possibility of
"pornograms"— pornographic, three-
dimensional holograms
mass-produced from a master and mass
distributed through the
mail since their visual information is invisible
until activated
by plain white light.
25See Olaf Helmer, Delphi Study, Rand Corp.,
1966; Theodore J. Gordon, "The Effects
of Technology on Man's
Environment," Architectural Design (February, 1967); Herman
Kahn, Anthony J. Wiener, The Year 2000 (New York: Macmillan,
1967); "Toward the
Year 2000: Work in Progress," American
Academy of Arts and Sciences Commission on
the Year 2000,
Daedalus (Summer, 1967).
26R. Buckminster Fuller, "The Year
2000," Architectural Design (February, 1967), p. 63.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and Polymorphous
Eroticism 115
When sexual material is readily available in
the home, it changes
the public attitude toward sex in
commercial cinema. We aren't likely
to be dazzled by discreet
nudity on the Silver Screen when our home
videotape library
contains graphic interpretations of last week's
neighborhood
bisexual orgy. This is precisely what is happening in
thousands
of suburban homes, which otherwise are far from avantgarde.
Within the last three years intermarital group sex has become
an industry of corporate business, particularly in the Southern
California area where a new world man is evolving. Computer
firms
compete with one another, matching couples with couples
and
compiling guest lists for orgies at homes and private
country clubs.
Home videotape systems are rented by the month
and tapes of
flagrant sexual activity are exchanged among the
participants, many
of whom regularly attend two orgies a week,
sometimes as
frequently as four or five, as the will to sexual
power overtakes their
outlaw consciousness. They discover the
truth in Dylan's remark that
you must live outside the law to be
honest.
Thus man moves inevitably toward the
discovery of what Norman
O. Brown describes as his
polymorphous-perverse self. A society
that restricts physical
contact in public to handshakes and discreet
heterosexual kisses
distorts man's image of his own sexual nature.
However, anyone
who has ever participated in even the most chaste
encounter
groups or sensory awareness seminars such as those
conducted at
the Esalen Institute in Big Sur, is impressed with the
new
sensual identity he discovers within himself, often accompanied
by surprise and embarrassment.
The effects of habitual group
sex, even when exclusively heterosexual,
become obvious: man
inevitably realizes that there is no
such thing as "perversion"
apart from the idea itself. We begin to
recognize that our
sexual potential is practically limitless once
psychological
barriers are erased. We see that "heterosexual,"
"homosexual,"
and "bisexual" are social observations, not inherent
aspects of
the organism. Freud, and more recently Brown, Marcuse,
and R. D.
Laing have noted that the qualities of "maleness" and
"femaleness" are restricted to genital differences and do not
even
approach an adequate description of the human libido. And
so,
"Genital man is to become polymorphously perverse man, the
man
of love's body, able to experience the world with a fully
erotic body in
ARTSCILAB 2001
116 Expanded Cinema
an activity that is the equivalent of the
play of childhood."27
Personal synaesthetic cinema has been
directly responsible for the
recent transformation in sexual
content of commercial movies. After
all, I Am Curious begins to
seem a bit impotent when Carolee
Schneemann's Fuses is playing
at the Cinémathèque around the
corner. Synaesthetic cinema, more
than any other social phenomenon,
has demonstrated the trend
toward polymorphous eroticism.
Because it is personal it's a
manifestation of consciousness; because
it's a manifestation of
consciousness it is sexual; the more probing
and relentlessly
personal it becomes, the more polymorphously
perverse it is.
(Dylan: "If my thought/dreams could be seen, they'd
put my head
in a guillotine.”) Because eroticism is the mind's
manifestation
of body ego, it is the one offensive quality that we
cannot be
rid of by slicing off a particular appendage. We are forced
to
accept it: synaesthetic cinema is the first collective expression of
that acceptance.
The art and technology of expanded cinema
will provide a
framework within which contemporary man, who does
not trust his
own senses, may learn to study his values
empirically and thus
arrive at a better understanding of
himself. The only understanding
mind is the creative mind. Those
of the old consciousness warn that
although the videotape
cartridge can be used to unite and elevate
humanity, it also can
"degrade" us by allowing unchecked manufacture
and exchange of
pornography. But the new consciousness
regards this attitude
itself as a degraded product of a culture without
integrity, a
culture perverse enough to imagine that love's body could
somehow be degrading.
John Dewey reminds us that when art is
removed from daily
experience the collective aesthetic hunger
turns toward the cheap
and the vulgar. It's the same with the
aesthetics of sex: when the art
(i.e., beauty) of sex is denied
and repressed we find a "counterpassion"
for the obscene “...as
malignant as the natural passion
would have been benign." There
is no basis for the assumption that
synaesthetic cinema will
contribute to the debasement of sex. We
know that precisely the
opposite is true: for the first time in Western
culture the
aesthetics of integrity are about to liberate man from
27 Richard W. Noland, "The Apocalypse of
Norman O. Brown,"The American Scholar
(Winter, 1968-69), p. 60.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and Polymorphous
Eroticism 117
centuries of sexual ignorance so that he may
at last understand the
infinite sensorium that is himself.
The Pansexual Universe of Andy Warhol
It might be said of Warhol that what he did
for Campbell's Soup, he
did for sex. That is, he removed sex
from its usual context and
revealed it both as experience and
cultural product. From the verbal
jousting of My Hustler and
Bike Boy to the casual intercourse of Blue
Movie, Warhol has
expressed an image of man's sexuality unique in
all of cinema.
Although partial to homosexuality, his work
nevertheless manages
to generate an overwhelming sense of the
polymorphous-perverse.
This is particularly evident in his most
recent work.
For example, a romantic heterosexual
relationship of warm authenticity
develops between Viva and
Louis Waldron in the notorious
Blue Movie. In Lonesome Cowboy
and Paul Morrissey's Flesh,
however, Waldron is equally
convincing as a brusque homosexual.
Ironically, it is Morriss
ey's beautiful film that epitomizes the unisex
world of The
Factory. The Brandoesque Joe Dallasandro is virtually
the
embodiment of polymorphous-perverse man as Morrissey interprets
him: the archetypal erotic body, responding to the pleasures of
the flesh without ideals or violence in a pansexual universe.
Because of their objective revelatory
purpose, Warhol's and
Morrissey's films are not synaesthetic.
Yet, because of their non-
dramatic structure, neither are they
spectacles. It is spectacle (". . .
something exhibited to view
as unusual or entertaining; an eye-
catching or dramatic public
display.") that defeats whatever erotic
purpose may exist in
conventional narrative cinema. Eroticism is the
most subjective
of experiences; it cannot be portrayed or photographed;
it's an
intangible that arises out of the aesthetic, the manner
of
experiencing it. The difference between sex in synaesthetic
cinema and sex in narrative cinema is that it's no longer a
spectacle.
By definition synaesthetic cinema is an art of
evocative emotion
rather than concrete facts. The true subject
of a synaesthetic film that
includes fucking is not the act
itself but the metaphysical "place
between desire and
experience" that is eroticism. It ceases to be
spectacle because
its real subject cannot be displayed.
ARTSCILAB 2001
118 Expanded Cinema
Paul Morrissey: Flesh. 1968. "Joe
Dallesandro, the
archetypal erotic body, responding to the
pleasures of the flesh without ideals or violence in
a
pansexual universe."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and Polymorphous
Eroticism 119
Virtually the entire range of erotic
experience has been engaged by
the new cinema. Carl Linder is
concerned with the surreal/psychological
aspects of sexuality in
films like Womancock or The Devil
Is Dead. Jack Smith's Flaming
Creatures and Normal Love, Ron
Rice's Chumlum, Bill Vehr's
Brothel and Waiting for Sugar, and The
Liberation of Mannique
Mechanique by Steven Arnold and Michael
Wiese all explore the
polymorphous subterranean world of unisexual
transvestism.
Stephen Dwoskin's exquisite studies, such as Alone or
Take Me,
reveal a Minimalist's sensibilities for latent sexuality and
nuances in subtle autoeroticism. Warhol's Couch, Barbara Rubin's
Christmas on Earth, and Andrew Noren's A Change of Heart
confront, in various ways, the immortal subject of "hard core"
pornography.
Carolee Schneemann: Fuses
"Sex," as Carolee might say, "is not a fact
but an aggregate of
sensations." Thus by interweaving and
compounding images of
sexual love with images of mundane joy
(the sea, a cat, window-
filtered light), she expresses sex
without the self-consciousness of a
spectacle, without an idea
of expressivity, in her words, "free in a
process which
liberates our intentions from our conceptions."
Carolee and her lover James Tenney emerge
from nebulous
clusters of color and light and are seen in every
manner of sexual
embrace. Often the images are barely
recognizable, shot in near-
darkness or painted, scratched, and
otherwise transformed until
montage becomes one overall mosaic
simultaneity of flesh and
textures and passionate embraces.
"There were whole sections,"
Carolee explains, "where the film
is chopped up and laid onto either
black or transparent leader
and taped down. I also put some of the
film in the oven to bake
it; I soaked it in all sorts of acids and dyes to
see what would
happen. I cut out details of imagery and repeated
them. I worked
on the film for three years." This fragmentation not
only
prevents narrative continuity, therefore focusing on individual
image-events, but also closely approximates the actual
experience of
sex in which the body of one's partner becomes
fragmented into
tactile zones and exaggerated mental images.
Every element of the traditional "stag" film
is here— fellatio,
cunnilingus, close-ups of genitals and
penetrations, sexual acro
ARTSCILAB 2001
120 Expanded Cinema
Carolee Schneemann: Fuses. 1965-68.
16mm. Color, black and white. 18 min.
"A fluid oceanic
quality that merges
the physical act with its metaphysical
connotation, very Joycean and very
erotic."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and Polymorphous
Eroticism 121
batics— yet there's none of the prurience and
dispassion usually
associated with them. There is only a fluid
oceanic quality that
merges the physical act with the
metaphysical connotation, very
Joycean and very erotic. There's
a fevered kinetic tempo that
flawlessly evokes the urgency of
sexual hunger. A "story" is being
told but it's the story of
every person in the audience who has wanted
to express the
richness of his experience in some concrete way.
Carolee offers
a psychic matrix in which this articulation might take
place,
and by this very act the spectacle is defeated.
Between scenes of lovemaking we see Carolee
seated nude
before her window, looking out at the sea as the
curtains whisper
lazily in the afternoon breeze. This image is
repeated several times
and serves to establish a sense of place
and unity; this is a home,
not a whorehouse. If there's anything
unique about a pornographic
film made by a woman it's this
emotional unity that ties the images
together. Scenes of Carolee
skipping merrily through the surf are
given as much prominence
as close-ups of fellatio and cunnilingus.
She's filming her
consciousness, not her orifices. Fuses moves
beyond the bed to
embrace the universe in oceanic orgasm. "The
thing that is
disreputable in the idea of pornography for me," she
says, "is
that it tends to have to do with the absence of feeling, the
absence of really committed emotions. I was after some kind of
integral wholeness; the imagery is really compounded in
emotion."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and
Extra-Objective Reality
Michael Snow: Wavelength
Michael Snow's Wavelength, a
forty-five-minute zoom from one
end of a room to the other,
directly confronts the essence of cinema:
the relationships
between illusion and fact, spaceand time, subject
and object.
It's the first post-Warhol, post-Minimal movie, one of the
few
films to engage those higher conceptual orders that occupy
modern painting and sculpture. Wavelength has become the
forerunner
of what might be called a Constructivist or
Structuralist school
of cinema, including the works of George
Landow, Tony Conrad,
Snow's wife Joyce Wieland, Paul Sharits,
Ernie Gehr, Peter Kubelka,
Ken Jacobs, Robert Morris, Pat
O'Neill, and at least two of Bruce
Baillie's films, All My Life
and Still Life.
A large studio loft in New York: pristine
light flooding through tall
curtainless windows, street sounds
floating on still air. The
motionless camera is positioned high
up, closer to the ceiling than
the floor, so that a certain
atmosphere, a certain environmental
ambience is conveyed in that
special way the cinema has of creating
a sense of place. In
fact, the first thought that comes to mind is that if
a room
could talk about itself this is what it would say.
Soon we discover the camera isn't static:
every minute or so it jerks
slightly forward; we realize the
zoom lens is being manipulated
rather clumsily; ever so slowly
we are edging toward the wall of
windows. This realization adds
the first of many new dimensions to
come: by introducing the
element of motion, specifically invisible
motion like the hands
of a clock, the filmmaker adds the temporal
element to a
composition that in all other respects appears static.
Motion is
the only phenomenon that allows perception of time; the
motion
here, like time, is wholly conceptual.
Minutes pass: we notice subtle details—
patterns of light and
shadow, furniture arrangements, signs,
tops of trucks, second-story
windows, and other activity seen
through the windows. Two women
enter with a large bookcase,
which they move against a wall, and
then leave without speaking.
There's a dispassionate distance to this
activity, not in the
least suggesting anything significant.
ARTSCILAB 2001
SynaestheticCinema and Extra-Objective
Reality 123
Michael Snow: Wavelength. 1967.
16mm.
Color. 45 min. "The first post-
Warhol, post-Minimal movie, one
of
the few films to engage those higher
conceptual orders
that occupy
modern painting and sculpture."
ARTSCILAB 2001
124 Expanded Cinema
Now we notice subtle permutations in the
light (is it our eyes or the
focus?). The walls seem darker, the
light colder. We see a chair
previously not visible (or was
it?). Two women enter again (the same
two?). They walk to a
table and sit; apparently they are on a coffee
break. (Perhaps
this is a remote section of a warehouse or garment
factory.) The
women sit in silence. Suddenly, as though from a
distant radio,
we hear the Beatles: “...Strawberry Fields... nothing is
real...
living is easy with eyes closed, misunderstanding all you
see..."
Apart from being eerily prophetic, the music
strikes the perfect
emotional chord: the scene assumes a totally
different inflection, a
kind of otherworldly dream state. What
previously was a cold
impersonal warehouse now appears
romantically warm. The music
fades; one woman walks out; the
other remains for a few minutes,
then leaves.
Up to this point the film has presented a
"believable" natural reality,
the sort of filmic situation in
which one speaks of "suspension of
disbelief." But now, for the
first time, a nonrepresentational cinematic
reality is
introduced: there begins a constant alteration of image
quality
through variation of film stock, light exposure, and printing
techniques. By changes in light we realize also that we are
alternating between times of day— morning, noon, dusk, night.
With
each cut the room appears completely different though
nothing has
been physically altered and the position of the
camera has not been
changed.
At the point when the image goes into
complete negative, the
synchronous "natural" street sounds are
replaced by an electronic
pitch, or sine wave, which begins at a
low 50 cycles and increases
steadily to a shrill 12,000 cycles
during the following half hour. Thus
"realistic" natural imagery
has become pure filmic reality, and
whatever identifications or
associations the viewer has made must
be altered.
Night: fluorescent lamps glowing (when did
they go on?). In the
blackness through the windows we see fiery
red streaks of automobile
taillights. Suddenly there's offscreen
scuffling, tumbling,
crashing glass, muffled cries. A man
stumbles into the frame, moans,
crumples to the floor with a
loud thud below camera range. The
electronic pitch is louder,
the zoom closer. Window panes and photo
ARTSCILAB 2001
SynaestheticCinema and Extra-Objective
Reality 125
graphs on the wall develop phantom images,
vague superimpositions
slightly offset. We no longer see the
floor or side walls,
just table, windows, photos, still
indistinguishable. A girl in a fur coat
enters. The light has
changed: the room now appears to be an
apartment. There's a
yellow vinyl-aluminum kitchen chair that seems
oddly out of
place. The table actually is a writing desk with a
telephone.
She dials: “...Hello, there's a man on the floor... he's not
drunk... I think he's dead... I'm scared... should I call the
police? ... all
right, I'll meet you outside... " She hangs up,
walks out.
An overwhelming metaphysical tension engulfs
the composition,
filling the emptiness with a sense of density.
Suddenly, a superimposed
phantom image of the girl appears,
transparently repeating
the motions of entering, dialing,
talking, leaving— but in silence
beneath the whine of the sine
wave, like some electromagnetic
reverberation of past activity.
The ghost image, which refers back in
time to the "real" girl
whose presence is linked in time to the death of
the man,
develops the only sequential, linear element in an
otherwise
nonlinear composition.
We realize also that the enlarged
superimposed "outlines" around
the window frames and photos
refer to future points inthe physical
film itself when these
objects actually will be that size. Similarly, the
ghost
"flashback" of the girl is a reference to the film's own physical
"past," when the frame contained forms that it no longer
contains.
Bright daylight: the room no longer is
foreboding; the electronic
tone is at its peak. The very light
seems alive with a cold scintillation.
The camera edges closer,
blocking out the windows, until finally we
distinguish the
photograph on the wall: a picture of the ocean. A
superimposed
halo appears around the photo; suddenly the screen is
an
abstract (or more precisely, literalist) geometrical composition,
totally symmetrical. This no longer is a room, no longer a
movie, but
quite literally an object— still photographs running
through a
projector.
Now the zoom advances to within the ocean
photo; the sea
consumes the entire screen. The electronic pitch
runs a berserk
glissando up and down the tone scale; We gaze at
the ocean
hypnotically: the fathomless water betraying no depth;
the rhythmical
waves frozen in time, answering some cosmic lunar
force (Snow: "An
ARTSCILAB 2001
126 Expanded Cinema
implication of universal continuity”). We
remember Chabrol's remark:
"There are no waves; there is only
the ocean." For a long time we
stare mindlessly at this ocean
and then, very slowly, it fades into
nothingness.
Like so many experimental filmmakers Michael
Snow came to the
cinema by way of painting and sculpture. His
Expo '67 exhibit and
recent New York showings have attracted
considerable attention due
to their exploration of the act of
seeing as applied to Minimal
sculpture. An understanding of
Minimal Art is essential to the
appreciation of Wavelength (shot
in one week of December, 1966).
Remembering Warhol's pivotal
contribution, it is still possible to say
that Wavelength is
without precedent in the purity of its confrontation
with the
nature of the medium: It is a triumphant and definitive
answer
to Bazin's question,"Que-est-ce que le cinéma?"
Like all truly modern art, Wavelength is pure
drama of confrontation.
It has no "meaning" in the conventional
sense. Its meaning is
the relationship between film and viewer.
We are interested more in
what it does than what it is as an
icon. The confrontation of art and
spectator, and the
spectator's resultant self-perception, is an experience
rather
than a meaning.
Referring to critics of Minimal Art, painter
Frank Stella remarked: "If
you pin them down they always end up
asserting that something is
present besides the paint on the
canvas. My painting is based on the
fact that only what can be
seen there is there."28 Similarly, in
Wavelength there is no
dependence on an idea or source of
motivation outside the work
itself. The subject of the film is its own
structure and the
concepts it suggests. (Snow: "My film is closer to
Vermeer than
to Cézanne.”) But because Snow is working in the
medium of
cinema, he must deal with the element of illusion, a
quality not
inherent in painting or sculpture. The very essence of
cinema is
the fact that what we see there is not there: time and
motion.
These concepts have been engaged in recent traditional
cinema
(Persona, Blow-Up, David Holzman's Diary), but always
symbolically, never in the empirical fashion of Snow's movie.
Wavelength
is post-Minimal because, thanks to the cinema, it can
deal
empirically with illusion, that is, a wider range of vision
than usually
28 Bruce Glaser, "Questions to Stella and
Judd,"Minimal Art, ed. Gregory Battcock (New
York: Dutton
Paperbacks, 1968), pp. 157-158.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Cinema and Extra-Objective
Reality 127
is engaged in the plastic arts. It is
post-Warhol because it confronts
the illusory nature of
cinematic reality; it presents not only "pure" time
and space,
but also filmic time (fragmented) and space (twodimensional,
nonperspectival). It is more metaphysical than Minimal.
Wavelength is a romantic movie.
Snow emphasizes that editing is an
abstraction of reality by
alternating times of day with each
cut, and by cutting rarely. Thus he
achieves what Mondrian
called the "relations" of abstract nature. The
theory of
relativity reduces everything to relations; it emphasizes
structure, not material. We've been taught by modern science
that
the so-called objective world is a relationship between the
observer
and the observed, so that ultimately we are able to
know nothing but
that relationship. Extra-objective art replaces
object-consciousness
with metaphysical relation-consciousness.
Romance is born in the
space between events.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Image-Exchange and the Post-Mass Audience
Age
The Rebirth of Cottage Industry
Just as the individual's unique identity is
smothered by a social
system that prohibits education by
experiment and restricts creative
living, so society itself as
one organism suffers from the effects of
unilateral mass
education inherent in the present public communications
network.
Future historians would have a grossly inaccurate
picture of
today's culture if they were to judge our social meanings
and
values by the content of the so-called popular media.
Judging from broadcast television, for
example, where the individual
has little choice of selection, a
personality such as Glen
Campbell or a program like "Bonanza"
might appear representative
of popular taste because their
lowest-common-denominator appeal
satisfies the indiscriminate
passivity of most of a hundred-million
viewers. However, if we
judge the same society at the same time by
those media that
offer personal selection and individual communication—
LP record
albums, for example— we find the Beatles as the
representative
image: two different worlds existing as one, distinguished
by
the technologies through which they communicate. The
same
phenomenon occurs in the cinema. The majority of college
students flock to movies like Easy Rider or Alice’s Restaurant,
but
when they make their own movies it's a different story
entirely. The
crucial difference is between mass public
communication and private
individual communication.
But that difference is quickly being
resolved. When the proliferation
of technology reaches a certain
level of saturation in the
environment, we cease to be separate
from it. Communications
technologies shape and record the
objective and subjective realities
of Everyman. The intermedia
network becomes metabolically and
homeostatically interfaced
with each human being. To unplug any
one of the advanced nations
from the global telephone network, for
example, would be a more
extreme deterrent than any bomb; and the
global television
linkages soon will become equally as vital.
In the past we've had two mass personalities:
our media personality
and our "natural" personality. Pioneering
radio and television
ARTSCILAB 2001
Image-Exchange and the Post-Mass Audience
Age 129
announcers adopted a mode of speech and
behavior essentially
unnatural, a formal way of talking and
acting through the media. In a
sense, the media function as
behavior-altering agents for special
occasions called "shows,"
much the same as alcohol is a behavior-
altering agent for
special occasions called "cocktail parties." But the
recent
phenomena of "underground" FM radio and "two-way" or
"conversation" radio and television are evidence that we're
feeling
more comfortable with our extensions. Soon we'll
converse as intimately
over television and radio as we do now
over telephones. The
increasing number of twenty-four-hour
all-news radio stations is a
symptom of humanity's growing
awareness of the monitor function of
the media, even though
today's profit-motive news might well be
described as tactical
misinformation. The notion of putting on a
"show," although
still prevalent in name at least, is losing its
meaning.
Inevitably, show business is becoming communication
business,
which in turn is becoming education business. And thus
begins
the revolution.
The mass-audience, mass-consumption era is
beginning to disintegrate
like Hesse's alter ego Harry Haller in
Steppenwolf, who
regretted his dual nature until he realized
that he not only had two
selves but quite literally dozens. It
is generally accepted that the
post-Industrial Age will also be
an age of post-mass consumption.
Cybernation virtually
guarantees decentralization of energy sources.
There'll be no
need for a "department" of water and power, for
example, when we
learn to harness solar energy as easily as we
make transistor
radios. Inherent in the proliferation of inexpensive
film
technology, which caused the phenomenon of personal cinema,
is
the force that soon will transform the socioeconomic system that
made commercial mass entertainment necessary in the first place.
Synaesthetic cinema not only is the end of movies as we've known
them aesthetically; the physical hardware of film technology
itself is
quickly phasing out, and with it the traditional modes
of filmmaking
and viewing. We're entering the era of
image-publishing and image-
exchange, the inevitable evolutionary
successor to book publishing:
the post-mass audience age.
The hardware and software environment
presently exists in which
one can purchase films as easily as
one purchases books or records.
The video/film symbiosis
accomplished in electron-beam recording
ARTSCILAB 2001
130 Expanded Cinema
results in the end of "movies" as social
event and technical discipline.
The decisive factor in the
demise of cinema and TV as we've
known them is the ability to
choose information rather than being
enslaved to mass
broadcasting schedules or distribution patterns,
restricted by
both mode and (profit) motive. This revolutionary
capability
exists even though the military/industrial complex withholds
it
from us.
Although commercial restrictions are
inevitable in the early stages
of the phenomenon, we shall soon
find that the personal filmmaker is
equivalent to the major
studio. It is now possible to collect hundreds
of cartridges of
one's own synaesthetic cinema— images of one's
actual life
preserved out of time— for documentation, post-stylization,
and
study. For the first time in history every human now has the
ability to capture, preserve, and interpret those aspects of the
living
present that are meaningful to him. The key word is
interpret. In a
very real sense we can now show both our
experiences and our
emotions to one another, rather than
attempting to explain them in
verbally abstracted language.
There's no semantic problem in a
photographic image. We can now
see through each other's eyes,
moving toward expanded vision and
inevitably expanded
consciousness.
DeMille's Ten Commandments and Brakhage's Dog
Star Man both
go into the same ten-dollar cartridges, and then
comes the test: the
ability to own and repeatedly view a film is
conditional on the
availability of films worth multiple
viewings. We shall find that ninety
percent of all cinema in
history cannot be viewed more than a couple
of times and still
remain interesting. No one is going to pay thirty
dollars to see
a movie. The only films capable of supporting multiple
viewings,
in the same way that paintings and records are enjoyed
repeatedly, are synaesthetic films in which the viewer is free
to insert
himself into the experience differently each time.
Thus the technology
that allowed synaesthetic cinema to exist on
a mass scale in the
first place is the same technology that will
force virtually all image-
making toward synaesthesis, the purest
manifestation of consciousness.
The individual's ability to apprehend,
capture, generate, transmit,
duplicate, replicate, manipulate,
store, and retrieve audiovisual information
has reached the
point where technology results in the re
ARTSCILAB 2001
Image-Exchange and the Post-Mass Audience
Age131
birth of "cottage industry" as conceived by
the economist William
Morris during the Industrial Revolution in
England— the autonomous
ability of the individual to generate
his own industry within his own
local environment. The primary
difference between Morris' preindustrial
view and today's
post-industrial reality is that cottage
industry and global
cybernetic industrialization interpenetrate each
other's spheres
of influence synergetically, each benefiting from the
other.
The introduction of videotape cartridges
forces mass communications
into the untenable position of
restricting individual freedom.
Shortly, the educational and
aesthetic messages of society will be
communicated through
cartridge-exchange and telecommand regional
videotape cable
centers; live broadcast television will be free
to move
information of a metabolic, homeostatic, interplanetary
nerve-system function. At present, videotape or filmed
information
can be electron-beam recorded onto low-cost
photosensitive material
which, in the example of Columbia's EVR,
results in one-hour
cartridges of 180,000 black-and-white frames
or half-hour cartridges
of 90,000 color frames. They can be
displayed individually or sequentially
in random-access or
automatic modes on any television set
with higher resolution
than videotape systems or broadcast TV. The
system reduces
broadcast videotape costs by a factor of fifty, home
videotape
costs by ten, and is approximately one-fifteenth as expensive
as
conventional filmmaking.
Coupled with other technologies such as the
Polaroid family of
cameras, the videophone, and long-distance
Xerography and Xerographic
telecopying, we arrive at a situation
in which every TV image
and every frame of every videotape or
movie in history can now be
filmed, taped, photographed, or
copied in a number of ways, then
replicated and transmitted— all
by the individual. The auteur theory
thus becomes utterly
meaningless. We've progressed to the point at
which an
"impersonal" or "official" film is unthinkable. There's no
such
thing as an impersonal or nonauthored film: there is only honest
cinema and hypocritical cinema, and they are measured by the
difference between what is inside and what is outside of the
maker's
consciousness. Art is both "adult" and personal: we
begin with that
behind us, taken for granted, beneath
discussion, and we go on from
there.
ARTSCILAB 2001
132 Expanded Cinema
For thousands of young persons around the
world today, the
cinema is a way of living. As we find ourselves
faced with increasing
leisure time, the camera will become more
important as an instrument
of creative living as opposed to its
present role as conditioner
of the dronelike existence we now
lead. I mean to suggest that the
camera— either cinema, or
video, or both— as an extension of our
nervous system, functions
as a superego that allows us to observe
and modify our behavior
by observing our "software" image just as
world man modifies his
behavior by observing his collective superego
as manifested in
the global videosphere. By creating new
realities in
video/cinema we create new realities in our lives. We
have seen
that it is aesthetically and technically possible: let us now
briefly examine the process.
The ethnological filmmaker Jean Rouch,
speaking of his cinémavérité
study, Chronicle of a Summer,
described the superego function
of the camera with his subjects:
"At first," he said, "there's a self-
conscious hamminess. They
say to themselves, 'people are looking
at me and I must give a
nice impression of myself.' But this lasts only
a very short
time. And then, very rapidly, they begin to think— perhaps
for
the first time sincerely— about their problems, about who
they
are, and they begin to express what they have within themselves.
As the film progresses and the people see the rushes, they
begin to think about the character they were representing
involuntarily—
a character of which they had been completely
unaware, that
they discovered on the screen all of a sudden with
enormous
surprise. And so the film becomes a reason for living
and they feel
they must play that role. However, they will often
deny the authenticity
of the film, claiming they w ere putting
on for the camera,
because what has been revealed of them is so
personal, a role which
normally they would not project to the
world.
"But something very strange occurs: the
cinema becomes for them
a pretext to try to resolve problems
that they were not able to resolve
without the cinema. I'm
convinced that ninety percent of what they
say is extremely
sincere, and out of that they would never have had
the courage
to say at least ten percent without the cinema. The
extraordinary pretext is, if you wish, the possibility to say
something
in front of the camera and afterwards be able to
retract it, saying it
ARTSCILAB 2001
Image-Exchange and the Post-Mass Audience
Age 133
was just for the camera. The extraordinary
possibility of playing a
role which is oneself, but which one
can disavow because it is only
an image of oneself.”29
The new filmmaker no longer is required to
make drama or to tell a
story or even to make "art," though art
may certainly result. Personal
cinema becomes art when it moves
beyond self-expression to
encompass life-expression. Art is not
created; it is lived. The artist
merely reports it. Synaesthetic
cinema is not filmed so much as
experienced onto film or
videotape. As an extension of the citizen's
nervous system it
can't be judged by the same canons that traditionally
have
represented art. It's simply the first utterance of human
beings
who've found a new language. If art is involved, it's the art of
creative living as opposed to passive conditioned response. The
possibility of realizing one's innermost desires with the excuse
that
it's "just for the film" is a temptation that will be too
strong to resist
when we're released from the needs of marginal
survival. Wallace
Stevens: "It is the explanations of things
that we make to ourselves
that disclose our character: the
subjects of one's poem are the
symbols of one's self or one of
one's selves."
Along with each man's life being the subject
of his own study is the
need for each man to be consciously part
of Man's life. "In dreams,"
said Yeats, "begin
responsibilities." Buckminster Fuller has said that
the great
aesthetic of tomorrow will be the aesthetic of integrity. For
ten thousand years more than five hundred generations of
agricultural men have lived abnormal, artificial lives of
repetitiv e,
boring toil as energy slaves who must prove their
right to live. But
now we are on the threshold of freedom. We
are about to become
our own gods. We are about to face the
problem of values.
Bronowski: "The problem of values arises only
when men try to fit
together their need to be social animals
with their need to be free
men. There is no problem, there are
no values, until men want to do
both."30
For the first time in history we're
approaching that point at which
both will be possible if we
fashion our lives with a sense of integrity.
29"Jean Rouch in Conversation with James
Blue,"Film Comment (Fall-Winter, 1967), pp.
84-85.
30Bronowski, Science and Human Values (New York: Harper &
Brothers, 1965), p 55.
ARTSCILAB 2001
134 Expanded Cinemas
We've modified our environment so radically
that we must now
modify ourselves in order to exist in it. If
we're all to become one, the
ethics of individual man must
become a meta-ethic for global man.
Donald Schon: "In seeking a
meta-ethic we suffer from the fact that
society traditionally
delegates the job of change to special
individuals in its midst,
to artists, inventors and scientists— and then
isolates them
from the rest of society in order to preserve the illusion
of
stability of norms and objectives.''31
Not only must we completely revise our
attitudes toward "ownership"
of the physical earth; we must also
learn to accept the fact that
the ideas and creations of
humanity do not belong to any one
individual. Thus technology
not only helps maintain the present level
of mankind's
integrity, it actually forces us to increase that integrity
and
provides the social framework within which to begin. Freedom is
the acceptance of responsibility. Bronowski speaks of the "habit
of
truth" as it applies to scientific experiments. Contemporary
man in
general might be said to practice a habit of hypocrisy:
"There is no
more threatening and no more degrading doctrine
than the fancy that
somehow we may shelve the responsibility for
making the decisions
of our society by passing it to a few
scientists armored with a special
magic. The world today is made
and powered by science; for any
man to abdicate an interest in
science is to walk with open eyes
toward slavery."32
The irresponsible audience will learn
responsibility when it becomes
its own audience through the
synaesthetic research of expanded
cinema and image-exchange. And
in this activity it will come
to discover the scientific
meta-ethic. "The practice of science
compels the practitioner to
form for himself a fundamental set of
universal values... the
exactness of science can give a context for
our nonscientific
judgments."33 By its very nature synaesthetic cinema
will close
the gap between art and science because the art of
creative
living must become a science if life is to hold any meaning
in
the Cybernetic Age.
31Donald Schon, Technology and Change (New
York: Delacorte Press, 1967), p. 24.
32Bronowski, pp. 5, 6.
33 Ibid., p. xiii.
ARTSCILAB 2001
PART THREE:
TOWARD COSMIC
CONSCIOUSNESS
"If you look back in history you'll find that
the artist and the scientist are
inseparable. In many ways the
artist's work is identical with scientific exploration.
The
artist is able to focus more in the area of consciousness, but with
the same
scientific zeal. Yet cosmic consciousness is not
limited to the scientist. In fact
scientists are sometimes the
last to know."
JORDAN BELSON
We've followed the evolution of image
language to its limits: the end
of fiction, drama, and realism
as they have been traditionally
understood. Conventional cinema
can be pushed no further. To
explore new dimensions of awareness
requires new technological
extensions. Just as the term "man" is
coming to mean man/plant/
machine, so the definition of cinema
must be expanded to include
videotronics, computer science,
atomic light. Before discussing
those technologies, however, we
must first ask ourselves what these
new dimensions of awareness
might be. In the language of
synaesthetics we have our
structural paradigm. What concepts are
we to explore with it?
We could say that art isn't truly
contemporary until it relates to the
world of cybernetics, game
theory, the DNA molecule, Heisenberg's
Uncertainty Principle,
theories of antimatter, transistorization, the
breeder reactor,
genocidal weaponry, the laser, pre-experiencing
alternative
futures. But this purely scientific portrait of modern
existence
is only partially drawn. As Louis Pauwels has observed:
"We are
living at a time when science has entered the spiritual
universe. It has transformed the mind of the observer himself,
raising
it to a plane which is no longer that of scientific
intelligence, now
proved to be inadequate.''1 Man no longer is
earthbound. We move
now in sidereal time. We must expand our
horizons beyond the
1Pauwels, Bergier, op. cit., p. 62.
ARTSCILAB 2001
136 Expanded Cinema
point of infinity. We must move from oceanic
consciousness to
cosmic consciousness.
At their present limits astrophysics,
biochemistry, and conceptual
mathematics move into metaphysical
territory. Mysticism is upon us:
it arrives simultaneously from
science and psilocybin. Pauwels:
"Modern science, once freed
from conformism, is seen to have ideas
to exchange with the
magicians, alchemists and wonder-workers of
antiquity. A
revolution is taking place before our eyes— the
unexpected
remarriage of reason and intuition."2
Art and science have achieved extremely
sophisticated levels of
abstraction. They have in fact reached
that point at which the
abstract becomes extra-objective.
Post-Euclidean geometry, for
example, precludes any exact
visualization of a stable space grid.
We are confronted with
dynamic interaction between several
transfinite space systems.
Precise focusing is impossible. (John
Cage: "A measurement
measures measuring means.”) And the
content of modern art tends
increasingly toward the conceptual— i.e.,
decision-making,
systems aesthetics, environmental problems of
"impossible" art.
What we "know" conceptually has far
outstripped what we
experience empirically. We are finally
beginning to accept the fact
that our senses allow us to
perceive only one-millionth of what we
know to be reality— the
electromagnetic spectrum. Ninety-nine
percent of all vital
forces affecting our life is invisible. Most of the
fundamental
rates of change can't be apprehended sensorially.
Fuller:
"Better than ninety-nine percent of modern technology occurs
in
the realm of physical phenomena that aresub or ultra to the range
of human visibility. We can see the telephone wires but not the
conversations taking place. We can see the varieties of metal
parts
of airplanes but there is nothing to tell us how
relatively strong these
metals are in comparison to other
metals. None of these varieties
can be told from the others by
the human senses, not even by
metallurgists when unaided by
instruments. The differences are
invisible. Yet world society
has throughout its millions of years on
earth made its judgments
on visible, tangible, sensorially
demonstrable criteria."3
2 Ibid., p. xxii.
3 R. Buckminster
Fuller, Ideas and Integrities, p. 64.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Toward Cosmic Consciousness 137
So we see— that is, we don't see— that our
physical environment
itself has drastically altered the
classical definition of artistic purpose
as articulated by
Conrad Fiedler: "Artistic activity begins when man
finds himself
face to face with the visible world as with something
immensely
enigmatical... In the creation of a work of art, man
engages in
a struggle with nature not for his physical but for his
mental
existence."4
It is the invisible and inconceivable that
man finds immensely
enigmatical and to which he has turned his
conceptual capacities.
Not only is drama obsolete but in a very
real sense so is the finite
world out of which drama
traditionally has risen. The concerns of
artist and scientist
today are transfinite. McLuhan: "Electricity points
the way to
an extension of the process of consciousness itself, on a
world
scale, and without any verbalization whatever."5
The Paleocybernetic Age witnesses the
concretization of intuition
and the secularization of religion
through electronics. Nam June
Paik: "Electronics is essentially
Oriental... but don't confuse
'electronic' with 'electric' as
McLuhan often does. Electricity deals
with mass and weight;
electronics deals with information: one is
muscle, the other is
nerve." This is to say that global man in the final
third of the
twentieth century is witnessing the power of the
intangible over
the tangible. "When Einstein wrote the equation
E=mc2 , the
metaphysical took the measure of, and mastered, the
physical.
Nothing in our experience suggests that energy could
comprehend
and write the equation of intellect... [Einstein's]
equation is
operating inexorably, and the metaphysical is now
manifesting
its ability to reign over the physical."6
In addition to a radical reassessment of
inner space, the new age
is characterized by the wholesale
obsolescence of man's historical
view of outer space. Lunar
observatories and satellite telescopes,
free from the blinders
of earth's air-ocean, will effect a quantum leap
in human
knowledge comparable to that which the microscope
provided at
the end of the nineteenth century. Until 1966, for ex
4 Conrad Fiedler, On Judging Works of
Visual Art, trans. Henry Shaefer-Simmern and
Fulmer Mood
(Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1949), p. 48.5
Marshall McLuhan, Understanding Media (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1965),
p. 80.
6 Fuller, Spaceship Earth, p. 36.
ARTSCILAB 2001
138 Expanded Cinema
ample, all of astronomy indicated that the
planet Mercury did not
rotate. Radar observations now reveal
that it turns on its axis every
fifty-nine days. Similar
embarrassing reversals of generations-old
opinions about Venus,
Mars, Jupiter, and even our own moon have
occurred within the
last decade.7
We are entering a transfinite realm of
physical and metaphysical
mysteries that have nothing to do with
fiction. It is now recognized
that science has come closer to
whatever God may be than has the
church in all its tormented
history. Science continually discovers and
reaffirms the
existence of what Fuller calls "an a priori metaphysical
intelligence omni-operative in the Universe." Scientists find
that a
vast omni-present intellect pervades every atom of the
universe,
governing the structure and behavior of all physical
phenomena. Yet
this intelligence itself, which we identify as
"the laws of nature," is
purely metaphysical and is totally
unpredicted by the behaviors of
any of the physical parts.
Einstein's E=mc2 is science's most
comprehensive formulation of
that intelligence. As J. B. S. Haldane
once said, "The universe
is not only stranger than we imagine; it is
stranger than we can
imagine."
7 Arthur C. Clarke, "Next— The Planets,"
Playboy (March, 1969), p. 100.
ARTSCILAB 2001
2001: The New Nostalgia
The year 2000, although universally
accepted as a rather
apocalyptic millennial symbol, does not
begin the twenty-first
century. A difference of twelve months
may seem relatively insignificant
today, but in the onrushing
accelerations of radical evolution
many worlds can come and go
in the period of a year. Already the
focus of the arts,
especially cinema, has shifted toward cosmic
consciousness. "The
consequences of the images," said McLuhan,
"will be the images
of the consequences." A completely new
vocabulary of graphic
language is available to the image-maker now
that our video
senses have extended to Mars and beyond.
Stanley Kubrick's 2001: A Space Odyssey was
the last film in
history forced to rely on synthetic images of
heavenly bodies. One
measure of radical evolution is the way in
which Kubrick's images of
the earth and moon, so utterly
realistic not long ago, have become
pallid in contrast with the
actual images themselves. We've
confronted a larger reality:
there no longer is a need to represent
cosmic consciousness
through fiction. Just as synaesthetic cinema
renders fiction
obsolete, so do the technologies that enable us to
traverse the
planets and to invent the future. The old Hollywood
cliché
"filmed on location" assumes staggering implications.
In many respects 2001 is an epochal
achievement of cinema; in
other ways, however, it is marred by
passages of graceless
audience manipulation and vulgar
expositional devices that would
embarrass artists of lesser
talent than Kubrick. But the movie
unquestionably is a
phenomenal experience, and even though it
begins to pale after a
couple of viewings, its contributions to the state
of the art
and to mass-audience commercial cinema cannot be
overlooked or
overrated. Because of this movie a great number of
persons have
been able to understand something of the spiritualism
in
science. And though it is rather symptomatic of an unfortunate
syndrome having to do with the feared "dehumanizing" effects of
advanced technology, 2001 did create an impressive sense of
space
and time relationships practically without precedent in
the cinema. A
technical masterpiece, but a thematic mishmash of
nineteenth
ARTSCILAB 2001
140 Expanded Cinema
and twentieth-century confusions, which
demonstrates that it is not
so much a film of tomorrow as a
trenchant reflection of contemporary
sentiments solidly based in
the consciousness of today. Still, it was
more than we might
have hoped it would be.
In casting its vision to the stars, 2001
returns full circle to the
origins of human curiosity. One of
mankind's oldest recorded
thoughts has to do with the cyclic
unity and simultaneous
regeneration of the universe. In the
texts of ancient Sanskrit is the
notion that the universe dies
and is reborn with every breath we
draw. To a certain extent
this has been substantiated by the studies
of modern physics,
which reveal that elemental changes at the
atomic and subatomic
levels are total and instantaneous, while the
macro-system of
the cosmologically vast universe itself is constantly
in
metamorphosis. In Vishvasara Tantra, which includes one of
man's
earliest attempts at explaining the formation of matter, we find
the prophetic conclusion, "What is here is elsewhere; what is
not
here is nowhere."
These concepts are virtually embodied in the
design of2001, from
its higher ordering principle— that
mankind's dawn is a continual
process of death and rebirth—
through each of its parts, none of
which predicts the behavior
of the whole. The film moves with an
implacable and purposive
grace through a richly-connected
allegorical structure that
recalls Ortega y Gasset's "higher algebra of
metaphors."
Encompassing the whole is the sexual/genetic
metaphor in which
rockets are ejaculated from a central slit in Hilton
Space
Station No. 5, and a sperm-shaped spacecraft named
Discovery
(i.e., birth) emits a pod that carries its human seed
through a
Stargate womb to eventual death and rebirth as the
Starchild
Embryo. Within this macrostructure we find endless variations
such as the prehistoric bone that becomes a spinning space
station, one of the most tasteful allegorical transitions in the
history
of a medium given to rather grandiose symbolism.
The behavior and ultimate deactivation of the
berserk computer
HAL might be viewed as a metaphor for the end
of logic. It is
established that HAL, who not only "thinks" but
also "feels,"
represents the highest achievement of human
intelligence. The
machine is singing "Daisy, Daisy, give me your
answer true" (a
computer recording of which actually was made
ten years ago) when
ARTSCILAB 2001
2001: The New Nostalgia 141
the cybernetic lobotomy renders it senseless.
Immediately after, the
astronaut encounters the alien monolith
in crucifix-alignment with a
string of asteroids and is seduced
through the Stargate into a
dimension "beyond infinity"— that
is, beyond logic.
In this domain far from any galaxy we know,
the human finds
himself in austere Regency chambers with an
aqueous video-like
atmosphere, constructed by whispering
omniscient aliens to make
him comfortable during the lifetime he
is to spend under their
scrutiny. He is kept ultra-healthy and
lives to a very old age. This is
depicted through a kind of
metaphorical time-lapse in which the
astronaut undergoes a
series of self-confrontations, aging each time.
At last he gazes
toward a bed in which is lying an image of himself
so old and
emaciated that he incredibly resembles the humanoid
apes of "The
Dawn of Man." This primitive creature timidly lifts its
palsied
hand in archetypal gesture toward the metallic monolith that
towers in the center of the glowing room.
Suddenly there appears the cosmic image that
began the film and
constitutes a kind of metaphysical leitmotiv
of transcendental
Cartesian beauty: in deep space we are
levitated near a huge
planet, its crest illumined by starlight.
Another globe rises behind and
directly in line with the first;
and now, with a blinding starburst and
Strauss's paean to
Nietzsche, a fiery sun appears behind the second
planet,
completing the geometrical assembly of heavenly bodies. A
timeless unforgettable image that suggests, almost
surrealistically,
some higher order, some transcending logic far
beyond human
intelligence. 2001 is Stanley Kubrick's
interstellar morality play.
There is, however, a fundamental disunity
between the film's
conceptual and design information. Its
adherence to a Minimalist
aesthetic of primary structures is
starkly contrasted against the
confusion of its ideas. And
whereas it is structurally uneven, there
are moments when form
and content seem flawlessly synthesized.
The elegant simplicity
of its architectural trajectories is the harmonic
opposite of
its galactic polymorphism. And what might be described
as its
"aesthetics of space tooling" has captured the imagination of a
society steeped in the vulgar bric-a-brac of postwar
architecture. It
has become a kind of cinematic Bauhaus.
ARTSCILAB 2001
142 Expanded Cinema
Mystical alignment of planets and sun in
the
Stanley Kubrick production 2001: A Space
Odyssey. Photo:
courtesy of MGM Studios.
Central to this tremendous cultural
influence, and in spite of the
film's many confusions, is
Kubrick's intuitive grasp of what I call the
new nostalgia. It
pervades the entire film, but particularly the
sequence in which
Gary Lockwood aboard theDiscovery receives a
videophone birthday
message from his earthbound parents. The
crucial effect is
Kubrick's use of the adagio from Aram Khachaturian's
Gayane
Ballet Suite. The music— mournful, melancholy, with
a sense of
transcendental beauty— invests the scene with an
overwhelming
mood that invites only one interpretation: it is obviously
a sad
event.
This sadness is a manifestation of the new
nostalgia: the astronaut
is a child of the new age, a man of
cosmic consciousness. Not only
does he live in a different world
from his parents on a conceptual
level, he has physically left
their natural world and all of its values. Of
what possible
significance could a birthday be to him? He doesn't
even share a
common definition of life with his parents. His
companions
aboard the Discovery are preserved in a cryogenetic
state of
suspended animation.
Yet the sequence has been widely interpreted
as an indictment of
the "dehumanizing" effects of technology.
The astronaut is seen as a
kind of "space zombie" because he
appears indifferent to the
effusions of his parents. In fact,
the music functions not as
commentary on the action but as an
evocation of the Astronaut's
realization of a generation gap
both physical and metaphysical.
ARTSCILAB 2001
2001: The New Nostalgia 143
That he's not particularly demonstrative in
the usual messy way
suggests nothing so much as a sense of
integrity. To find him inhuman
is equivalent to Camus'
Magistrate accusing Mersault of not
loving his mother.
To understand this generation gap, we must
realize that the melancholy
of the new nostalgia arises not out
of sentimental remembrance
of things past, but from an awareness
of radical
evolution in the living present. When Sartre wrote
about Existentialism,
it was not popularly recognized as being
inherent in daily experience;
it was a concept, a theory, else
there would have been no
need for Sartre to formulate an entire
cosmology upon it. But through
electronic technology,
Existentialism becomes daily experience. We
are transformed by
time through living within it; but technologies
such as
television displace the individual from participant to observer
of the human pageant, and thus we live effectively "outside" of
time;
we externalize and objectify what previously was
subjectively
integral to our own self-image. The result is an
inevitable sense of
melancholy and nostalgia, not for the past,
but for our inability to
become integral with the present. We
are all outsiders.
The new nostalgia also is a result of Western
culture's
transformation from sacred to secular: "Sacred
societies resist
change, unable to accept or value the new or
untraditional. Secular
societies, a relatively modern
development, are oriented toward
change, consciously seek out
and value new and untraditional ways.
Sacred societies are
oriented toward the past; secular societies
toward the future."8
Ironically, no sooner has Existentialism moved
from theory to
experience than it is given a new dimension by
science, which
has replaced the church as our temple of worship
and has
disclosed man's teleologic, anti-entropic function in the
universe, something the church never was able to do.
But the scientific method is, by its very
nature, nonsacred.
Everything is open to challenge. Thus the new
nostalgia is a
symptom of our realization that nothing is
sacred. This produces a
tendency to dissociate and distance
oneself from all previously
coveted phenomena that have provided
continuity as landmarks of
the soul. Most of mankind's ancient
dreams have become realities;
8John McHale, The Future of the Future (New
York: George Braziller, Inc., 1969), p. 24.
ARTSCILAB 2001
144 Expanded Cinema
the speed of change has caught us without new
dreams to replace
the old, because the world of tomorrow is
elsewhere and
unthinkable.
We find, moreover, that the new nostalgia is
a symptom of the
death of history. The more we learn about the
present, about
humanity's perception and interpretation of the
present, the more
suspect history becomes. When Fuller remarks
that our most
polluted resource is the "tactical information"
(news) to which
humanity spontaneously reflexes, he echoes
Hermann Hesse's view
that "history's third dimension is always
fiction." The present has
discredited the past, while the
history of the present is recorded by
machines, not "written" by
men, and is thus out of our hands as a
"man-made" phenomenon.
"The computer," says McLuhan, "abolishes
the human past by
making it entirely present." We don't "remember"
the
assassination of John F. Kennedy because we never
experienced it
directly in the first place. For millions of people who
were not
actually present in Dallas, Kennedy's death exists only in
the
endless technologically-sustained present. We "remember" it in
the same way that we first "knew" it— through the media— and we
can experience it again each time the videotapes are played.
Since
we see and hear and feel only the conditioning of our own
memory,
a great flood of nostalgia is generated when technology
erases the
past and with it our self-image.
The new nostalgia also is a result of
humanity's inevitable
symbiosis with the hallucinogens of the
ecology. First, man's image
of himself as discretely separate
from the surrounding biosphere is
shaken by his discovery of the
a priori biochemical relationship
between his brain and the
humble plant. Second, in the consciousness-
expansion of the drug
experience, the overwhelming
emotion is one of remembering
something that one has forgotten,
something one "knew" long,
long ago in the forgotten recesses of the
mind. The deja vu of
the drug experience results from the discovery
of how much is
absent in "normal" perception of the present, not the
past.
Although 2001 contains no specific allusions to drug
experiences, the subject is indirectly suggested in the Stargate
Corridor sequence, which might well be interpreted as a
drug-trip
allegory.
But perhaps the most profound aspect of
the new nostalgia is
what we call the generation gap, which is
totally a result of the
unprecedented sudden influx of
information. The past is discredited
ARTSCILAB 2001
2001: The New Nostalgia 145
Starchild Embryo from the Stanley Kubrick
production 2001: A Space Odyssey. "The
image of the
Starchild, its umbilical feeding
from no earthly womb, elegantly
symbolizes
a generation gap so sudden and so profound
that
few of us believed it possible."
Photo: courtesy of MGM Studios.
ARTSCILAB 2001
146 Expanded Cinema
but continues to inform a present in which
new information has
revealed us in a completely new perspective.
The information implosion,
as revised self-knowledge, sheds
un-relenting and inadvertently
cruel light upon the illusions of
the past, of which our parents
are victims. We find, as Hesse
did, that "world history taken as a
whole by no means furthered
what was desirable, rational, and
beautiful in the life of man,
but at best only tolerated it as an exception."
9
For the first time in history, an entire
generation abruptly discovers
that its legacy of love has been
tragically ill-served: "Humanity is
characterized by
extraordinary love for its new life, and yet has been
misinforming its new life to such an extent that the new life is
continually at a greater disadvantage than it would be if
abandoned
in the wilderness by its parents."10 The image of the
Starchild
Embryo at the conclusion of 2001, its umbilical
feeding from no
Earthly womb, elegantly symbolizes a generation
gap so sudden and
so profound that few of us believed it
possible. As we unlearn our
past, we unlearn our selves. This is
the new nostalgia, not for the
past because there is no past,
and not for the future because there
are no parameters by which
to know it.
The Cybernetic Age is the new Romantic Age.
Nature once again
has become an open empire as it was in the
days when man thought
of the earth as flat and extending on to
infinity. When science
revealed the earth as spherical, and thus
a closed system, we were
able to speak of parameters and romance
was demystified into
Existentialism. But we've left the
boundaries of earth and again have
entered an open empire in
which all manner of mysteries are
possible. Beyond infinity lurk
demons who guard the secrets of the
cosmos. We are children
embarking on a journey of discovery. "The
same extraordinary
intellectual forces with which man is remolding
his planet are
now being turned in upon himself. The results of this
inner
exploration may be infinitely more powerful than any
physically-
extended voyage to Mars or the bottom of the sea.''11
9Hermann Hesse, The Glass Bead Game (New
York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, Inc.,
1969), p. 150.
10R.
Buckminster Fuller, Education Automation (Carbondale, Ill.: Southern
Illinois
University Press, 1962), p. 9.
11John McHale, "Man
+," Architectural Design (February, 1967), pp. 87, 88.
ARTSCILAB 2001
2001: The New Nostalgia147
Kubrick himself demonstrated his awareness of
the new nostalgia
when he quoted Carl Jung's remarks on possible
consequences of
contact with advanced alien intelligence: ". . .
reins would be torn
from our hands and we would find ourselves
without dreams... we
would find our intellectual and spiritual
aspirations so outmoded as
to leave us completely paralyzed.''12
I interviewed Arthur C. Clarke, coauthor of
2001, who has been
chiefly responsible for elevating science
fiction from pulp to profundity.
I was accompanied by Ted
Zatlyn, then editor of the Los
Angeles Free Press. We suggested
that the film's depiction of the
man/machine symbiosis as
ominous and threatening might have
been irresponsible.
CLARKE: It could be irresponsible, yes. But
the novel explains why
HAL did this and of course the film never
gave any explanation of
his behavior. So from that point of view
it differs from the novel. I
personally would like to have seen
a rationale for HAL's behavior.
It's perfectly understandable
and in fact makes HAL a very
sympathetic character because he's
been fouled up by these clods
back at Mission Control, you see.
And in a way it's more pro-
machine than pro-human, if you
analyze the philosophy behind the
novel. I included a sort of
emotional passage about Hal’s electronic
Eden and so on. But it
would have been almost impossible to give
the logical
explanation of just why HAL did what he did. It would
have
slowed things down too much. So it had to be treated on this
sort of na?ve and conventional level. Then there was the
straightforward
matter of dramatic content. One had to have some
kind of
dramatic tension and suspense and conflict. And Hal’s
episode is
the only conventional dramatic element in the whole
film. And so in
that way you might say that it was rather
contrived. We set out
quite consciously and deliberately—
calculatedly, if you like— to
create a myth, an adventure, but
still be totally plausible, realistic,
intelligent. We weren't
going to have any blonde stowaway in the
airlock and all this
sort of nonsense that you've seen in the past.
This immediately
limited our options enormously. There are fairly
few things that
can happen on a space mission. Especially if the
men have been
carefully selected psychologically and so on— all
12 Stanley Kubrick interviewed in Playboy
(September, 1968), p. 96.
ARTSCILAB 2001
148 Expanded Cinema
the things which make astronauts such
undramatic characters. You
don't have nervous breakdowns or
Caine Mutinies on a spaceship.
TED: Do you see the hippie phenomenon as an
evolutionary
process similar to what you described in
Childhood's End? Many
aspects of what we call the hippie
movement were almost
prophesied in that book, especially the
idea of an awakened moral
conscience among youth.
CLARKE: Yes, at one point I had a subtitle
for 2001 which was
Childhood's Beginning.
TED: But in another way there seems to be a
contradiction between
2001 and Childhood's End. In an
evolutionary sense. In 2001 the
idea of an evolving expansion of
consciousness seems directly
opposed to extending the American
capitalistic free-enterprise
system into outer space. I mean
with Howard Johnson and Pan-
Am businesses.
CLARKE: That was done primarily to establish
a background of
realism to achieve total acceptance by the
audience.
GENE: Yes, but you see this is exactly what
we feel is rather
unfortunate about the film. I mean that's all
very fine, and it works,
and everyone likes that, they think
it's clever and all. But in fact
how "realistic" is capitalistic
free enterprise at that advanced stage
in man's evolution? And
to suggest such a thing— even to suggest
"ownership" in space is
perhaps a bit of self-fulfilling prophecy. We
are what we think
the future will be.
CLARKE: But that doesn't necessarily mean
capitalistic free
enterprise. Pan-Am is running the range for
NASA, but that doesn't
necessarily mean a capitalistic system.
Names hang on, that's all. I
mean Hilton is planning a
space-station hotel. He gave a talk and
showed designs three
years ago.
TED: But tile obvious extension of that idea
is spherical influence in
space— Russia's sphere here, America's
sphere here, China's
sphere over there. I just don't think that
when man evolves to the
point where he can travel throughout the
universe, using new
energy sources and so on, that he will carry
with him an archaic
form of thinking.
CLARKE: Well, of course, he won't. Things
will change completely.
But the events of 2001 are only thirty
years from now. And a lot of
ARTSCILAB 2001
2001: The New Nostalgia 149
these things will still be around. The names
anyway. Just as the
Catholic Church still exists in name. In
fact, if I'd done 2001 by
myself I'd have had an international
organization instead of
nationalism. But here again you're
constrained by practical
matters— this is an American film made
by an American company
and there are a lot of problems. For
example at one point we were
saying we should have at least one
token black in the crew. But
when your crew is only two people
it would be so obvious. I mean
can you see Bill Cosby in there?
So finally we said the hell with it.
GENE: Science fiction has had a new image for
the last few years, a
new respectability. In fact, most people
are now willing to accept
the fact that there is nothing but
science fiction.
CLARKE: I've been saying for years that
mainstream literature is a
small subsection of science fiction.
Because science fiction is
about everything.
GENE: Exactly. And one of the significant
aspects of 2001 is that it's
science fact. When you discuss
science and what it's doing, you're
not only discussing the
present but the past and the future
simultaneously. Because
science encompasses what has been
and what will be all in the
moment, the present. So the idea of
science fiction no longer is
meaningful.
CLARKE: One reason older people dislike 2001
is they realize it's
about reality and it scares the hell out of
them. This film is about
the two most important realities of the
future: development of
intelligent machines, and contact with
higher alien intelligence.
Which of course may be machines
themselves. I suspect that all
really higher intelligences will
be machines. Unless they're beyond
machines. But biological
intelligence is a lower form of intelligence,
almost inevitably.
We're in an early stage in the evolution of
intelligence but a
late stage in the evolution of life. Real intelligence
won't be
living.
GENE: I understand your meaning of that idea
as a beneficial thing
in which man is rendered obsolete as a
specialist, obsolete as all
the things he's been up to now—
obsolete in comparison to the
computer's ability to do all these
things better and quicker— but, on
the other hand, man is then
totally free to live comprehensively,
nonspecialized, like the
freedom of children.
ARTSCILAB 2001
150 Expanded Cinema
CLARKE: That's how I ended one of my essays
on the subject. I
said "Now it's time to play." The goal of the
future is total
unemployment, so we can play. That's why we have
to destroy the
present politico-economic system.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Stargate Corridor
The conceptual deficiencies of 2001 are
somewhat redeemed by its
sophisticated deployment of cinematic
technology. For the first time
in commercial cinema we are given
the state of the art at its highest
point of refinements.13 2001
has become the higher ordering
principle by which all commercial
cinema must be measured.
Douglas Trumbull, a twenty-five-year-old
artist/technologist, was
one of four special effects supervisors
on the project. The so-called
slit-scan machine, which created
the Stargate Corridor sequence,
was one of several pieces of
equipment Trumbull developed especially
for this film. Though
much of its impact is due to the
Cinerama format (16mm. versions
are not nearly so impressive), the
sequence was nevertheless a
breakthrough in commercial cinema.
Although this particular
approach to the slit-scan was developed by
Trumbull, the
technique does have precedent in the work of John
Whitney.
According to Trumbull, the original
screenplay called for a giant
tetrahedron that would be
discovered in orbit around Jupiter. This
was because there is,
in fact, a strange perturbation of one of
Jupiter's moons.
Astronomers have noted that it appears to grow
larger and
smaller at certain points in its orbit. "So Clarke said
maybe
it's not a moon at all," Trumbull recalls. "Maybe it's some sort
of object that presents a larger and smaller size as it rotates.
So the
spacemen arrive and it's this huge tetrahedron with a
hole in it. He
positions his pod over the hole, looks down
through, and can see
into another dimension. The tetrahedron may
be superimposed over
Jupiter but he sees stars through the hole:
a time gate."
TRUMBULL: We spent a long time drawing
tetrahedrons with holes
in them and it all looked corny. It was
never right. Then someone
thought of having a giant hole or slot
directly in one of the moons.
The spaceman is orbiting around
one of the moons and finds a
13 Extensive details on the production of
2001 were published in The American
Cinematographer (June,
1968).
151
ARTSCILAB 2001
152 Expanded Cinema
Slit-scan Stargate Corridor from
Stanley Kubrick's 2001: A Space Odyssey.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Stargate Corridor 153
hole in it. We drew pictures of that and they
looked pretty stupid.
Finally Kubrick came up with the idea of
the big slab. He always
insisted on super-simple symmetrical
forms rather than anything
which would deviate artistically from
the simplest approach.
One of the very last things we did was adding
the mystical
symmetry. The Jupiter sequence culminates in a shot
in which the
moons and asteroids are aligned and the mysterious
slab is seen
perpendicular to them like a crucifix. It wasn't
intended to be that,
but that's the way it came out. So when we
saw what we had, we
worked back from that point and created
similar scenes earlier in
the film. For example, when the apemen
are looking up at the slab
and suddenly there's this symmetrical
alignment of the sun and the
moon over the slab— that was put in
long after the sequence was
shot. Then we went back to the point
where they discover the slab
on the moon and inserted the same
imagery for that sequence.
This was all second-guessing but it
was meant to suggest the
same ideas as one finds behind similar
imagery in mystical
literature and symbols.
There was always the idea that Keir Dullea
would go into a time-
warp or some kind of "psychedelic"
corridor, but we didn't know
how to get him into it. What do we
do with him? Does he fall into a
hole or what? It was completely
unresolved. The special effects
people came up with corny things
with mirrors that looked terrible.
So I stumbled onto this idea
through fragments of information
about what John Whitney was
doing with scanning slits that move
across the lens creating
optical warps. I figured why couldn't you
have a slit that
starts far away and moves toward the camera?
Rather than moving
laterally, why can't it move dimensionally?
So I did a simple test on the Oxberry
animation stand. It was
rigged with a Polaroid camera so you
could take Polaroid pictures
of any setup immediately to see how
it looked. So I just ran the
camera up and down and juggled some
slits and funny pieces of
artwork around, and I found out that
you could in fact scan an
image onto an oblique surface. That
whole idea expanded and I
ARTSCILAB 2001
154 Expanded Cinema
built this huge thing that occupied about
50,000 square feet. It
produced the effect which I call the
Slit-Scan Effect.
Similar to image-scanning techniques used in
scientific and
industrial photography, Trumbull's process was
totally automated
through an impressive battery of selsyn
drives, timers, sequencers,
and camera controls. Basically it
involved a standard 65mm. Mitchell
camera mounted on a
fifteen-foot track leading to a screen with a
narrow vertical
slit in its center. Behind the screen was a powerful
light
source focused through several horizontally-shifting glass
panels painted with abstract designs and colors.
When the camera is at the "stop" position at
the far end of the
fifteen-foot track, the illuminated slit is
framed exactly in the center of
the lens. The standard shutter
is taken out of phase and held wide
open. An auxiliary shutter
is built onto the front of the lens that opens
to F 1.8 when the
camera begins to track toward the screen. One
single frame of
film is exposed during the sixty-second period in
which the
camera tracks from fifteen feet to within one and one-half
inches of the screen. The camera lens is attached to a bellows
mount on a camshaft rotating from a selsyn linked to a drive
motor,
all of which maintains perfect focus and depth-of-field
the entire
distance of the one-minute track.
When the camera reaches the screen it has
veered one-half of a
frame either right or left of the slit. The
exposure thus produced on
the single frame is a controlled blur,
much the same as time
exposures of freeways at night that
produce streaks of red taillights.
The shifting panels of
painted glass behind the slit alter the pattern of
light coming
through the slit as the camera approaches, producing
an uneven
or streaked blur. When the process is repeated for both
sides of
the frame, the effect is of an infinite corridor of lights and
shapes advancing at enormous velocity.
The glass panes behind the slit are shifted
horizontally by selsyns
and advancing motors synchronized with
the tracking camera. Thus
the exposure pattern is identical for
each frame of film except that a
differential mechanism
displaces the entire rig slightly for each
camera run, creating
an impression that the scanned image is
moving.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Stargate Corridor 155
Slit-scan machine built by Douglas
Trumbull
for the Stargate Corridor sequence of
Stanley
Kubrick's 2001: A Space Odyssey.
The slit-scan is not limited to this
application. As we shall see later,
John Whitney, Jr., has
constructed a computerized, hybrid optical
printer that
automatically scans a projected motion-picture sequence.
In
addition, the camera need not track perpendicular to the
scanned
image; a diagonal approach would create effects of warped
perspective in otherwise representational imagery.
TRUMBULL: There was one short slit-scan
sequence— a bad take,
actually— which started out black and
instead of having walls of
color come at you it had little
points of light which were parts of the
artwork before it
actually developed into walls. It started out black,
then a few
little red sparks came out, and then a few more and it
generated
more and more. That particular shot was done with a
device I
rigged for automatically accelerating the speed. So as the
dots
were coming up it was accelerating at such an incredible rate
ARTSCILAB 2001
156 Expanded Cinema
that we used up all the artwork in a couple
of seconds. Though the
shot is brief it was the only one with a
transitional effect: it started
out black and slowly became
something.
We had a double-projection technique in which
we could run two
aligned 35mm. projectors simultaneously onto
one screen to see
how two elements looked together. So that was
how we figured out
the way of getting the astronaut into the
Stargate sequence: we
shot a scene just panning away from
Jupiter out into deep space
and faded in that little slit-scan
footage which gave us our transition
into the time-warp. At the
same time we were shooting the slab
floating around Jupiter.
There was a physical problem in getting the
slab out of the
frame without matching the camera movement with
the animation
pan. So we decided to have it just fade out between
the planets:
the slab fades, and as the slit-scan comes in the stars
fade
out. It's strange how solutions to technical problems become
the
content of the film.
If one considers the introduction of sound
and then color as
successive "generations" in the history of
cinema, it is possible to
say that we've entered the fourth
generation by marrying basic
cinematic techniques to computer
and video sciences. There have
been no fundamental breakthroughs
in the nature of cinema since its
conception. In one sense the
history of film is but a footnote to
Lumière and Méliès. But the
technological revolution begins the new
age of cinema. Before
moving into computer films, however, we'll
discuss the work of
Jordan Belson, who both preceded and
surpassed 2001 in the realm
of cinematic innovations. Although not
as technologically
sophisticated as Kubrick's enterprise, Belson's
films achieve a
sense of cosmic consciousness only hinted at in
2001, and levels
of design with far greater integrity and vision.
With a tiny fraction of the manpower,
equipment, and money
expended in the production of2001, Belson
has created images and
moods of far wider significance and
lasting beauty. While the state of
the art remains relatively
untapped, Belson, working with limited
resources, has
demonstrated its potential. He's a visionary who has
broken
through to the other side; the state of the art need only follow.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson
"Only the fantastic is likely to be true at
the cosmic level."
TEILHARD DE CHARDIN
Certain phenomena manage to touch a realm of
our consciousness
so seldom reached that when it is awakened we
are shocked and
profoundly moved. It's an experience of
self-realization as much as
an encounter with the external
world. The cosmic films of Jordan
Belson possess this rare and
enigmatic power.
Basic to this enigma is the disconcerting
fact that Belson's work
seems to reside equally in the physical
and metaphysical. Any
discussion of his cinema becomes
immediately subjective and
symbolic, as we shall soon see. Yet
the undeniable fact of their
concrete nature cannot be stressed
too frequently. Piet Mondrian: "In
plastic art, reality can be
expressed only through the equilibrium of
dynamic movement of
form and color. Pure means afford the most
effective way of
attaining this.''14
The essence of cinema is precisely "dynamic
movement of form
and color," and their relation to sound. In
this respect Belson is the
purest of all filmmakers. With few
exceptions his work is not
"abstract." Like the films of Len
Lye, Hans Richter, Oskar Fischinger,
and the Whitneys, it is
concrete. Although a wide variety of meaning
inevitably is
abstracted from them, and although they do hold quite
specific
implications for Belson personally, the films remain concrete,
objective experiences of kinaesthetic and optical dynamism. They
are at once the ultimate use of visual imagery to communicate
abstract concepts, and the purest of experiential confrontations
between subject and object.
In their amorphous, gaseous, cloudlike
imagery it is color, not line,
which defines the forms that ebb
and flow across the frame with
14 Mondrian, op. cit., p. 10.
ARTSCILAB 2001
158 Expanded Cinema
uncanny impact. It is this stunning emotional
force that lifts the films
far beyond any realm of "purity" into
the most evocative and
metaphysical dimensions of sight and
sound. The films are literally
superempirical— that is, actual
experiences of a transcendental
nature. They create for the
viewer a state of nonordinary reality
similar, in concept at
least, to those experiences described by the
anthropologist
Carlos Castaneda in his experiments with organic
hallucinogens.15
E. H. Gombrich: "The experience of color
stimulates deeper levels
of the mind. This is demonstrated by
experiments with mescaline,
under the influence of which the
precise outlines of objects become
uncertain and ready to
intermingle freely with little regard to formal
appearances. On
the other hand color becomes greatly enhanced,
tends to detach
itself from the solid objects and assumes an
independent
existence of its own."
Belson's work might be described as
kinetic painting were it not for
the incredible fact that the
images exist in front of his camera, often
in real time, and
thus are not animations. Live photography of actual
material is
accomplished on a special optical bench in Belson's
studio in
San Francisco's North Beach. It is essentially a plywood
frame
around an old X-ray stand with rotating tables, variable speed
motors, and variable intensity lights. In comparison to
Trumbull's slit-
scan machine or the Whitneys' mechanical
analogue computer it's
an amazingly simple device. Belson does
not divulge his methods,
not out of some jealous concern for
trade secrets— the techniques
are known to many specialists in
optics— but more as a magician
maintaining the illusion of his
magic. He has destroyed hundreds of
feet of otherwise good film
because he felt the technique was too
evident. It is Belson's
ultrasensitive interpretation of this technology
that creates
the art.
The same can be said for the sounds as well
as the images.
Belson synthesizes his own sound, mostly
electronic, on home
equipment. His images are so overwhelming
that often the sound,
itself a creation of chilling beauty, is
neglected in critical appraisals.
The sound often is so integral
to the imagery that, as Belson says:
"You don't know if you're
seeing it or hearing it."
15 Carlos Castaneda, The Teachings of Don
Juan— A Yaqui Way of Knowledge (Los
Angeles, Calif.: University
of California Press, 1968).
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 159
He regards the films not as exterior
entities, but literally as
extensions of his own consciousness.
"I first have to see the images
somewhere," he says, "within or
without or somewhere. I mean I
don't make them up. My whole
aesthetic rests on discovering what's
there and trying to
discover what it all means in terms of relating to
my own
experience in the world of objective reality. I can't just
dismiss these films as audio-visual exercises. They obviously
mean
something, and in a sense everything I've learned in life
has been
through my efforts to find out what these things mean."
He has been a serious student of Buddhism for
many years and
has committed himself to a rigorous Yoga
discipline. He began
experimenting with peyote and other
hallucinogens more than fifteen
years ago. Recently his
interests have developed equally in the
directions of inner
space (Mahayana Buddhism) and outer space
(interstellar and
galactic astrophysics). Thus by bringing together
Eastern
theology, Western science, and consciousness-expanding
drug
experiences, Belson predates the front ranks of avant-garde art
today in which the three elements converge. Like the ancient
alchemists he is a true visionary, but one whose visions are
manifested in concrete reality, however nonordinary it might be.
Teilhard de Chardin has employed the term
ultra-hominization to
indicate the probable future stage of
evolution in which man will have
so far transcended himself that
he will require some new appellation.
Taking Chardin's vision as
a point of departure, Louis Pauwels has
surmised: "No doubt
there are already among us the products of this
mutation, or at
least men who have already taken some steps along
the road which
we shall all be traveling one day.''16 It requires only a
shift
in perspective to realize that Belson is taking those steps.
Allures: From Matter to Spirit
Originally a widely-exhibited painter, Belson
turned to filmmaking in
1947 with crude animations drawn on
cards, which he subsequently
destroyed. He returned to painting
for four years and in 1952
resumed film work with a series that
blended cinema and painting
through the use of animated scrolls.
The four films produced in the
period 1952-53 were Mambo,
Caravan, Mandala, and Bop Scotch.
From 1957-59 he worked with
Henry Jacobs as visual director of
16Pauwels, Bergier, op. cit., p. 59.
ARTSCILAB 2001
160 Expanded Cinema
the Vortex Concerts at Morrison Planetarium
in San Francisco.
Simultaneously he produced three more animated
films, Flight
(1958), Raga (1959), and Seance (1959). Allures,
completed in
1961, found Belson moving away from single-frame
animation
toward continuous real-time photography. It is the
earliest of his
works that he still considers relevant enough to
discuss.
He describes Allures as a "mathematically
precise" film on the
theme of cosmogenesis— Teilhard de
Chardin's term intended to
replace cosmology and to indicate
that the universe is not a static
phenomenon but a process of
becoming, of attaining new levels of
existence and organization.
However, Belson adds: "It relates more
to human physical
perceptions than my other films. It's a trip
backwards along the
senses into the interior of the being. It fixes
your gaze,
physically holds your attention."
Allures begins with an ethereal pealing of
bells. A centrifugal
starburst of pink, yellow, and blue sparks
whirls out of a black void.
Its points collect into clusters and
fade. Bells become weird chimes;
we sink into a bottomless
orange and black vortex. An intricate pink
mandala of
interconnected web patterns spins swiftly into the
distance. A
caterpillar-like coil looms ominously out of infinity. We
hear a
tweetering electronic warble, a collection of threatening piano
notes. Pink and yellow sparks wiggle vertically up the frame.
Distant
snakelike coils appear and fade. A tiny sun surrounded
by a huge
orange halo disintegrates. There are flying,
comet-like petal shapes.
Oscilloscope streak-dots bounce across the
frame with a twittering,
chattering metallic noise. They form
complex triangular and
tetrahedral grid patterns of red, yellow,
and blue. Out of this evolves
an amorphous yellow-white
pulsating globe of fire without definite
shape. It vanishes and
a blue, neon-bright baton rotates slowly into
infinity.
"I think of Allures," said Belson, "as a
combination of molecular
structures and astronomical events
mixed with subconscious and
subjective phenomena— all happening
simultaneously. The
beginning is almost purely sensual, the end
perhaps totally
nonmaterial. It seems to move from matter to
spirit in some way.
Allures was the first film to really open up
spatially. Oskar Fischinger
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 161
Jordan Belson: Allures. 1961.16mm.
Color. 9 min. "A combination of
molecular structures and
astronomical
events mixed with subconscious
phenomena... a
trip backward
along the senses from matter to
spirit."
ARTSCILAB 2001
162 Expanded Cinema
had been experimenting with spatial
dimensions butAllures seemed
to be outer space rather than earth
space. Of course you see the
finished film, carefully calculated
to give you a specific impression. In
fact it took a year and a
half to make, pieced together in thousands
of different ways,
and the final product is only five minutes long.
Allures
actually developed out of images I was working with in the
Vortex Concerts. Up until that time my films had been pretty
much
rapid-fire. They were animated and there was no real
pacing— just
one sustained frenetic pace. After working with
some very
sophisticated equipment at Vortex I learned the
effectiveness of
something as simple as fading in and out very
slowly. But it was all
still very impersonal. There's nothing
really personal in the images of
Allures."
After the glowing blue baton vanishes the
screen is black and
silent. Almost imperceptibly a cluster of
blue dots breaks from the
bottom into magnetic force fields that
become a complex grid pattern
of geometrical shapes superposed
on one another until the frame is
filled with dynamic energy and
mathematical motion. A screeching
electronic howl accentuates
the tension as galaxies of force fields
collide, permutate, and
transmute spectacularly. Some squadrons
rush toward the camera
as others speed away. Some move
diagonally, others horizontally
or vertically. It's all strongly reminiscent
of 2001— except
that it was made seven years earlier.
Elsewhere in the film
rumbling thunder is heard as flying sparks
collect into
revolving atomic structures, from whose nuclei emanate
shimmering tentacles of tweetering multicolored light. At the
end we
hear ethereal harp music as a pulsating sun, fitfully
spewing out
bright particles, reveals within itself another
glimmering galaxy.
Re-Entry: Blast-off and Bardo
Re-Entry is considered by many to be Belson's
masterwork.
Completed in 1964 with a grant from the Ford
Foundation, it is
simultaneously a film on the theme of mystic
reincarnation and
actual spacecraft reentry into the earth's
atmosphere. Also, as
Belson says, "It was my reentry into
filmmaking because I'd given up
completely after Allures. Mostly
for financial reasons. But also out of
general dismay at the
experimental film scene. There was no
audience, no distribution,
there was just no future in it at that time."
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 163
Re-Entry is chiefly informed by two specific
sources: John Glenn's
first space trip, and the philosophical
concept of theBardo, as set
forth in the ancient Bardo Thodol or
so-called Tibetan Book of the
Dead, a fundamental work of
Mahayana Buddhism. According to
Jung, Bardo existence is rather
like a state of limbo, symbolically
described as an intermediate
state of forty-nine days between death
and rebirth. The Bardo is
divided into three states: the first, called
Chikhai Bardo,
describes the psychic happenings at the moment of
death; the
second, or Chonyid Bardo, deals with the dream-state
that
supervenes immediately after death, and with what are called
karmic illusions; the third part, or Sidpa Bardo, concerns the
onset of
the birth instinct and of prenatal events.17
With imagery of the highest eloquence, Belson
aligns the three
stages of the Bardo with the three stages of
space flight: leaving the
earth's atmosphere (death), moving
through deep space (karmic
illusions), and reentry into the
earth's atmosphere (rebirth).
The film, says Belson, "shows a little more
than human beings are
supposed to see." It begins with a
rumbling thunderous drone (blastoff,
perhaps). In a black void
we see centripetal, or imploding, blue-
pink gaseous forms barely
visible as they rush inward and vanish.
The sound fades, as
though we have left acoustical space. After a
moment of silence,
the next sound is wholly unearthly: a twittering
electrical
pitch as vague clouds of red and yellow gases shift across
the
screen amorphously. Suddenly with a spiraling high-pitched
whine
we see a gigantic solar prominence (one of two stock-footage,
live-action sequences) lashing out into space, changing from
blue to
purple to white to red. Now blinding white flashes, as
though we're
passing the sun, and suddenly we are into a shower
of descending
white sparks that become squadrons of geometrical
modules moving
up and out from the bottom of the frame, warping
and shifting to
each side of center as they near the top.
GENE: Certain of your images appear in every
film, like the
geometrical, perspectival interference patterns.
They're quite
effective. Do you conceive them through some sort
of
mathematical concept?
17 W. Y. Evans-Wentz, The Tibetan Book of the
Dead (London: Oxford University Press,
1960).
ARTSCILAB 2001
164 Expanded Cinema
6 min. "The film does manage to transport
whoever is looking at it out of the boundaries
of the self."
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 165
Jordan Belson: Re-Entry. “… the next
thing you know you're in heaven. You're
surprised to be
there. On the other hand,
it's happening … "
ARTSCILAB 2001
166 Expanded Cinema
JORDAN: Those images in particular are
derived from the nature of
the device itself. But the images
later in the film— the more
nebulous ones, of more magnitude—
they're more a question of
personal vision. Discerning them,
seeking them out, presents all
sorts of possibilities by being
receptive to them when I find them
beneath my camera.
GENE: Are there other stock-footage
sequences?
JORDAN: Yes. You wouldn't recognize it, but
there's a shot of the
earth rolling by, as seen from a camera in
a rocket. I excerpted a
part of that film and doubled it, so it
was mirrored Rorschach-like.
That's for the reentry to earth.
The film leans heavily on such
material. As a matter of fact, on
the sound track there's actually
John Glenn's radio conversation
from his spacecraft to earth. He's
saying something like ". . .
I can see a light..." He was referring to
Perth, Australia, as
he passed over. Then it shoots past the earth
and the sun and
goes off into a rather ambiguous area in which
you have to cross
over barriers of time and space, but also mental,
psychological
barriers as well. It's a kind of breakdown of the
personality in
a way. It sort of boils out and the next thing you know
you're
in heaven. You're surprised to be there. On the other hand
it's
happening you know.
The "boiling out" sequence is among the most
dramatic in all of
Belson's films. Suddenly we hear a thunderous
rumble that increases
in intensity until the bottom of the frame
begins to turn pale
manganese blue and cobalt violet, a gaseous
boiling cloud that
surges up over the frame, turning alizarin
crimson. We descend
through it, as though it is being blasted
upward by some explosive
force far below. Image and sound
increase to unimaginable intensity
as though we're hurtling
through sheets of space fire in a cosmic
heat belt. The
spacecraft is out of our solar system and into another
dimension. Death has occurred; we move into the second stage of
the Bardo.
At a corresponding point in the Bardo of
Karmic Illusions the
Sanskrit text reads: "The wisdom of the
Dharma-Dhatu, blue in color,
shining transparent, glorious,
dazzling, from the heart of Vairochana
as the Father-Mother,
will shoot forth and strike against thee with a
light so radiant
that thou wilt scarcely be able to look at it."18
18 Ibid., p. 106.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 167
This of course could be interpreted as a
supernova whose
maximum intrinsic luminosity reaches one-hundred
million times that
of our sun. The image in Belson's film is
somewhat like slow-motion
movies of atomic blasts in Nevada with
the desert floor swept across
by a tremendous shock wave. At
another point it appears as a sky of
mackerel clouds suddenly
set aflame and blown asunder by some
interstellar force.
Shimmering iceberg shapes of every hue in the
spectrum dance
like galactic stalactites against a sizzling frying
sound. This
becomes a dizzying geometrical corridor or eerie lights
almost
exactly like the slit-scan corridor of 2001— except that it was
made four years earlier.
Carl Jung describes the final stage of
theBardo: "The illuminative
lights grow ever fainter and more
multifarious, the visions more and
more terrifying. This descent
illustrates the estrangement of
consciousness from the
liberating truth as it approaches nearer and
nearer to physical
rebirth.''19
The images assume majestic dimensions.
Seemingly millions of
minute particles suggesting mesons, cosmic
rays that survive in the
atmosphere for only a millionth of a
second, cascade in sizzling
firestorms down from the top and up
from the bottom in shards of
viridian, ultramarine red, Thalo
blue. There's a sense of unthinkable
enormity. Finally we see a
white sun surrounded by a pulsating red
halo, which is then
obscured by vapors. "The film does manage to
transport whoever
is looking at it," said Belson, "out of the
boundaries of the
self. At that very moment is when the foundation
slips out from
under us and very rudely we're brought back to earth.
It's all
very much like the process of spacecraft reentry. You're out
there, free, totally free from the limitations of earthly
distance, and
suddenly you have to come back and it's a very
painful thing."
Phenomena: From Humans to Gods
Phenomena (see color plates), completed in
1965, moved Belson
closer to the totally personal metaphysical
experience that culminated
two years later in Samadhi. Also
Phenomena was the first film in
which he abandoned allegories
with space flight or astronomic sub
19 Ibid., p. xxxvi.
ARTSCILAB 2001
168 Expanded Cinema
jects for a more Buddhistic exploration of
psychic energies. It was
primarily inspired by Buddha's
statements in the Diamond Sutra and
the Heart Sutra.
The film begins with electronically-distorted
rock music as
curvilinear dish shapes of bright cadmium red,
crimson, and
cerulean blue expand frenetically. A glowing red
neon coil pulsates to
the music. Next we see— unique in Belson's
work— a recognizable
though distorted figure of a man, then a
woman, images shot from
television through warped glass filters.
They are obscured by a
hailstorm of popping confetti-like
flashes of red, white, and blue on a
black field. The music
fades into tumultuous cheering throngs as a
fiery red starburst
erupts in a sky of cobalt blue, its rings expanding
into
individual thorny clusters.
Belson thinks of this sequence as "an
extremely capsulized history
of creation on earth, including all
the elements and man. It's the
human sociological-racial
experience on one level, and it's a kind of
biological
experience in the sense that it's physical. It's seen with the
blinders of humanity, you know, just being a human, grunting on
the
face of the earth, exercising and agonizing. There's even a
touch of
the Crucifixion in there— a brief suggestion of a crown
of thorns, a
red ring of centers, each emitting a kind of thorny
light cluster. The
man and the woman are Adam and Eve if they're
anyone. I see them
as rather comic at that point. At the end of
course it's pure
consciousness and they're like gods. The end of
the film is the
opposite of the beginning: it's still life on
earth but not seen from
within, as sangsara, but as if you were
approaching it from outside of
consciousness so to speak. From
cosmic consciousness. As though
you were approaching it as a
god. You see the same things but with
completely different
meaning."
In Buddhism the phenomenal universe of
physical matter is known
as sangsara. Its antithesis is nirvana
or that which is beyond
phenomena. Also within sangsara exists
maya, Sanskrit for a
magical or illusory show with direct
reference to the phenomenon of
nature. Thus in the Diamond Sutra
Buddha equates sangsara with
nirvana since both contain
"magical" elements and asserts that both
are illusory.20 This is
the substance of Belson’s film.
20 Edward Conze, Buddhist Wisdom Books: The
Diamond Sutra, The Heart Sutra
(London: George Allen & Unwin
Ltd., 1958).
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 169
Suddenly and quite incongruously we hear
German Lieder
(Belson: "The epitome of the ego personality"). A
gorgeous organ-
pipe lumia display dances across the frame, a
shifting alignment of
fluted columns of phosphorescent colors
similar to the work of
Thomas Wilfred and more recent lumia
artists such as Julio le Parc.
Though Belson calls it a "gaudy
juke-box lighting effect," it is far
more beautiful than its
predecessors: vertical shafts of white light
through which move
horizontal sheets of emerald, Prussian blue,
rose madder, pale
citron.
The pillars of color melt with a crackling
buzz and slowly liquid
blobs of pigment solidify into one of the
most spectacular images of
Belson's films: a mosaic field of
hundreds of hard-edge, bullet-
shaped modules in a serial grid.
Each tiny unit constantly transforms
its shape and color— from
violet to Mars red to French ultramarine
blue to mint green and
zinc yellow. The staccato buzz flawlessly
underscores the
geometry, as though the modules are generating
the sound as they
converge and transform.
Suddenly the frame is shattered with a roar
and a fiery light in a
heaven of boiling multihued gases: a
grim, sinister eruption that
suggests, according to Belson,
"depersonalization, the shattering of
the ego-bound
consciousness, perhaps through death, perhaps
through evolution
or rebirth." This celestial storm of manganese blue
and zinc
yellow leads into a state of karmic illusions with glacial,
floating, aurora borealis lights of red and yellow-whites,
rainbow
liquid cascades of exquisite sheerness.
Various states of matter rise above,
iceberg-like, sink and float
away. This is followed by an
intense white-light sequence with an
ethereal mother-of-pearl
quality, representing a state of total integration
with the
universe, of blinding super-consciousness. It culminates
in an
enormous roaring sphere of flaming gases. In the final sequence,
against a descending drone, the void is shattered by a
central light that throws out sweeping circular rainbows of
liquid color
moving majestically clockwise, collecting together,
and lashing out
again in the opposite direction until the
ultimate fade-out.
Samadhi: Documentary of a Human Soul
For two years, from 1966 through 1967,
assisted by a
Guggenheim Fellowship, Belson subjected himself to
a rigorously
ascetic Yoga discipline. He severed emotional and
family ties, re
ARTSCILAB 2001
170 Expanded Cinema
Jordan Belson: Samadhi. 1967.16mm. Color.
6 min.
"When I finally saw how intense Samadhi is, I knew I had
achieved
the real substance of what I was trying to depict.
Natural forces
have that intensity: not dreamy but hard,
ferocious."
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 171
duced physical excitements and stimulations,
reversed his sensory
process to focus exclusively on his inner
consciousness and
physical resources. The result of this
Olympian effort was Samadhi
(see color plates), certainly among
the most powerful and haunting
states of nonordinary reality
ever captured on film "It's a
documentary of the human soul," he
says. "The experiences which
led up to the production of this
film, and the experiences of making it,
totally convinced me
that the soul is an actual physical entity, not a
vague
abstraction or symbol. I was very pleased when I finally saw
how
concentrated, how intense, Samadhi is because I knew I had
achieved the real substance of what I was trying to depict.
Natural
forces have that intensity: not dreamy but hard,
ferocious. After it
was finished I felt I should have died. I
was rather amazed when I
didn't."
In Mahayana Buddhism death is considered a
liberating
experience that reunites the pure spirit of the mind
with its natural or
primal condition. An incarnate mind, united
to a human body, is said
to be in an unnatural state because the
driving forces of the five
senses continually distract it in a
process of forming thoughts. It is
considered close to natural
only during the state of Samadhi,
Sanskrit for, "that state of
consciousness in which the individual soul
merges with the
universal soul." This state is sought— but rarely
achieved—
through dhyana, the deepest meditation. In dhyana there
can be
no "idea" of meditation, for the idea, by its very existence,
defeats the experience. The various stages ofdhyana are denoted
by the appearance of lights representing certain levels of
wisdom
until the final "Clear Light" is perceived. In this
quasi-primordial state
of supramundane all-consciousness, the
physical world of sangsara
and the spiritual world of nirvana
become one.
Electroencephalograms of Hindu Yogis in
states of Samadhic
ecstasy, or what in psychology is known as
manic dedifferentiation,
show curves that do not correspond to
any cerebral activities known
to science, either in wakefulness
or sleep. Yogis claim that during
Samadhi they are able to grow
as large as the Milky Way or as small
as the smallest
conceivable particle. Carlos Castaneda discusses
similar
experiences in his report of apprenticeship to a Yaqui Indian
sorcerer. Such fantastic assumptions are not to be taken
literally so
much as conceptually, as experiences of nonordinary
psychological
realities, which are nonetheless real for him who
experiences them.
ARTSCILAB 2001
172 Expanded Cinema
Perhaps with these concepts in mind we can
approach Belson's
sublime vision on a level more suited to it.
We might remember also
that practically everyone reading this
book has in his possession an
instrument that transforms energy
within matter: the transistor. Belson
seeks no more and no less
than this. Samadhi is a record of two
years of his search.
Samadhi was a radical departure from Belson's
previous work in
many ways. First, rather than ebbing and
flowing in paced rhythms, it
is one sustained cyclone of dynamic
form and color whose fierce
tempo never subsides. Second, in
addition to the usual electronic
sound, Belson's inhaling and
exhaling is heard through the film to
represent years of Yoga
breathing discipline. And finally, whereas the
earlier works
moved from exterior to interior reality, Samadhi is
continually
centered around flaming spheres that evolve out of
nothing and
elude specific identification.
The various colors and intensities of these
solar spheres
correspond directly to descriptions in the
Tibetan Book of the Dead
of lights representing the elements Earth,
Air, Fire, and Water. They
have two additional meanings, however: the
kundalini moving
upward through the chakras; and the
inhalation-exhalation of the life
force, prana. For those unfamiliar with Yoga
concepts, the chakras
are physical nerve centers located within the
body along the spinal
column at five or six points: one in the
sexual region, one in the
region of the navel, the heart, the throat,
the eyes, the middle of the
head, the top of the head. Clairvoyants
supposedly can see them.
According to Yoga theory the kundalini— the
vital life force that
animates the body— resides in a concentrated
form at the base of
the spine in the general region of the sexual
organs. Through
physical disciplines and ethical, moral
strength one raises that center
of life force from the lower spine
progressively, in stages, toward the
brain.
Thus one implication of the elusive shifting
centers inSamadhi is a
trip through the chakras, from the lowest to
the highest. There is also
the analogy with the breathing structure.
When we hear Belson
inhale, the spheres glow brighter to indicate
thatprana, the life force
in the air we breathe, is being introduced
into the bloodstream and
therefore into the kundalini. The deep,
spatial, dark areas of the film
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 173
indicate not only the stages between chakras
but also exhalations
when there is relatively less prana.
As it begins, a stormy field of turbulent
gases collects around a
central core. The serrated vapors melt
into a small central "jewel" of
curling pink and red-orange
flames that finally fades into black
silence. The vacuum created
by this pause reverberates in the ears
until, slowly, a deep
blue filamented sphere evolves, turning with
purposive elegance,
glowing into cadmium orange, surrounded by a
whirling halo. It
becomes a blue sphere in a red universe, spewing
off white-hot
rings of light.
Next comes a series of solar or planetoid
visions: a scintillating
yellow star with six shimmering
fingers; a blue-purple planet with a
fiery red halo; a small
central globe dwarfed by an immense corona;
a dim yellow-ochre
sun emanating flames that revolve like
chromospheres in a plasma
storm; various stellar orbs turning with
implacable grace
against wavering sonorous drones. Suddenly
there's a burst of
white light of blinding intensity: a murky sea of
deep blue gas
is in huge movement; waves of unbearably gorgeous
mist sweep
across the void. It is obvious that contact has been made
with
some vast new reality.
Cinema to Belson is a matrix wherein he is
able to relate external
experience to internal experience. He
feels that it culminated in
Samadhi. "I reached the point that
what I was able to produce
externally, with the equipment, was
what I was seeing internally. I
could close my eyes and see
these images within my own being,
and I could look out at the
sky and see the same thing happening
there too. And most of the
time I'd see them when I looked through
the viewfinder of my
camera mounted on the optical bench. I've
always considered
image-producing equipment as extensions of the
mind. The mind
has produced these images and has made the
equipment to produce
them physically. In a way it's a projection of
what's going on
inside, phenomena thrown out by the
consciousness, which we are
then able to look at. In a sense I'm
doing something similar to
the clairvoyant Ted Serios who can
project his thoughts onto
Polaroid film. Only I have to filter my
consciousness through an
enormous background of art and
filmmaking. But we're doing the
same thing. Samadhi breaks new
territory in a way. It's as
though I've come back from there with my
camera in hand— I've
been able to film it.
ARTSCILAB 2001
174 Expanded Cinema
GENE: Do you feel your drug experiences have
been beneficial to
your work?
JORDAN: Absolutely. Early in life I
experimented with peyote, LSD,
and so on. But in many ways my
films are ahead of my own
experience. In fact Samadhi is the
only one in which I actually
caught up with the film and ran
alongside of it for just a moment.
The film is way ahead of
anything I've experienced on a continuing
basis. And the same
has been true of the drug experiences. They
somehow set the
stage for the insights. I had peyote fifteen years
ago but I
didn't have any cosmic or Samadhic experiences. That
remained
for something to happen through development on
different levels
of consciousness. The new art and other forms of
expression
reveal the influence of mind-expansion. And finally we
reach the
point where there virtually is no separation between
science,
observation, and philosophy. The new artist works
essentially in
the same way as the scientist. In many cases it's
identical with
scientific exploration. But at other times the artist is
able to
focus more in the area of consciousness and subjective
phenomena, but with the same kind of scientific zeal, the same
objectivity, as scientists. Cosmic consciousness is not limited
to
scientists. In fact scientists are sometimes the last to
know. They
can look through their telescopes and see it out
there, but still be
very limited individuals."
Momentum: The Sun as an Atom
If one were to isolate a single quality that
distinguishes Belson's
films from other "space" movies, it would
be that his work is always
heliocentric whereas most others,
even 2001, are geocentric. The
archetypal nature of the sun is
such that Belson's obsession with it
has, at times, tended
toward a certain mysticism that was, no doubt,
unavoidable. That
he would someday make a movie exclusively
about the sun was
inevitable; that it would be his least mystical work
came as
something of a surprise.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 175
Jordan Belson: Momentum. 1969.
16mm.
Color. 6 min. "The paradoxical
realm in which subatomic
phenomena
and the cosmologically vast are
identical."
ARTSCILAB 2001
176 Expanded Cinema
"I was wondering what the subject of my next
film would be after
Samadhi," he said. "My whole world had
collapsed. All the routines
I'd created in order to develop the
state of consciousness to produce
that film just fell apart. So
I had to keep working just to maintain the
momentum from
Samadhi. I had no pre-conceived idea what the
new material was
about, but I was calling it Momentum. Eventually I
discovered it
was about the sun. I ran right to the library; the more I
read
the more I realized this was exactly what Momentum was
about.
All the material was similar if not identical to solar phenomena
like corona phenomena, photosphere phenomena, chromosphere
phenomena, sun spots, plasma storms— I was even getting into
some interesting speculation about what goes oninside the sun.
And
I realized that the film doesn't stop at the sun, it goes to
the center of
the sun and into the atom. So that was the film,
about the sun as an
atom. The end shows the paradoxical realm in
which subatomic
phenomena and the cosmologically vast are
identical. Through the
birth of a new star is where it happens."
Momentum (see color plates) was completed in
May 1969, after
eighteen months of painstaking study and labor.
In one sense it's a
refinement of the whole vocabulary he's
developed through the
years, distilled to their essence. But
there are new effects inspired by
this particular subject.
Momentum is a calm, objective experience of
concrete imagery
that manages to suggest abstract concepts without
becoming
particularly symbolic.
It begins with stock footage of a Saturn
rocket whose after-burners
blaze in rainbow fury. We hear
echoing ethereal music and slow
cyclic drones. Next we see a
solar image in mauves and iridescent
ruby, huge prominences
flaring in slow motion. A series of graceful
lap-dissolves
brings us closer to the sphere as it revolves with a
steady and
ponderous dignity. In spite of its furious subject,
Momentum is
Belson's most serene and gentle film since Allures.
This
treatment of the sun as an almost dreamlike hallucinatory
experience is both surprising and curiously realistic— to the
extent
that one can even speak of "realism" in connection with
solar
images.
There's a visceral, physical quality to the
images as we draw near
to the surface and, with a soul-shaking
roar, descend slowly into
blackness: apparently the suggestion
of a sun spot. Flaming napalm-
like clouds of gas surge ominously
into the void, which suddenly is
shattered with an opalescent
burst of light. We move through various
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Cosmic Cinema of Jordan Belson 177
levels of temperature and matter. Belson's
now-familiar techniques
seem to possess a pristine clarity and
precision not previously so
distinct. Swooping cascades of flame
seem especially delicate;
fantastic towering shards of
luminescent color reach deeper levels of
the mind; the
translucent realms of kinaesthesia leave one
speechless.
Moving deeper into the mass, images become
more uniform with a
textural quality like a shifting sea of
silver silt. Millions of tiny flashes
erupt over a field of deep
blue vapors. Quick subtle movements and
sudden ruptures in the
fabric of color seem suppressed by some
tremendous force.
Indefinite shapes and countless particles swim in
a frantic sea
of color.
"Then the film goes into fusion," said
Belson. "A state of atomic
interaction more intense than
fission. This is supposed to take place
on the sun, fusion." A
blinding red fireball breaks into a multi-pointed
star of
imploding light/energy, flashing brighter and brighter,
mounting
in intensity. An image similar to James Whitney's Lapis— a
collecting of millions of tiny particles around a central fiery
core—
builds up to the moment of crescendo, with all the colors
of the
universe melting into one supremely beautiful explosion,
and
suddenly we're deep in interstellar space, watching a
distant flash as
a new sun is born.
"The whole secret of life must somehow exist
in the solar image,"
Belson remarked. "Momentum is a kind of
revelation regarding the
sun as the source of life. Not only in
our solar system, but wherever
there's a sun it's the source of
life in that part of the universe. We
come from it and return to
it. Though we think of the sun as a
gigantic thing, I think
probably an atom itself is a small sun— in fact
our sun is
probably an atom in a larger structure. It's somehow tied
up
with the essence of being. If you were to think of a single form
that would be the primary structure of the universe it would
just have
to be the solar sphere. I mean there's so much
evidence around us
to that effect."
ARTSCILAB 2001
178
Blank page
ARTSCILAB 2001
PART FOUR:
CYBERNETIC CINEMA AND
COMPUTER FILMS
"The computer is the LSD of the business
world. It absolutely guarantees the
elimination of all the
business it is now being brought to serve."
MARSHALL MCLUHAN
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Technosphere: Man/Machine Symbiosis
If one were to propose a Bill of Rights for
the year 2000 it would
defend human liberty, not civil liberty.
Guaranteed rights would
include health, truth, reality, sexual
fulfillment, study, travel, peace,
intimacy, leisure, the right
to be unique. Man is not "civilized" until he
is whole. He is
not whole until he's assured these rights. But I would
add
another: the right of every man to be protected from the
consequences of his own ignorance. The computer provides this
protection.
The computer does not make man obsolete. It
makes him fail-safe.
The computer does not replace man. It
liberates him from
specialization. The transition from a culture
that considers leisure a
"problem" to a culture that demands
leisure as a prerequisite of
civilized behavior is a
metamorphosis of the first magnitude. And it
has begun. The
computer is the arbiter of radical evolution: it
changes the
meaning of life. It makes us children. We must learn
how to live
all over again.
"Recently, as in his natural symbiotic
relations with plants and
animals, man's relation to cybernetic
systems has been subtly
changing toward a more closely-woven
interdependency resembling
his other ecological ties. This trend
often is depicted as 'intelligent'
machines dominating man; but
the possibility is more clearly that of
organic partnership… ''1
In laboratories all over the world,
biochemists are drawing ever
closer to the secrets of the
genetic code. Younger readers of this
book may within their
lifetimes, rub shoulders with pre-programmed
humans. I do not
say "synthetic" or "artificial." Fuller: "We speak
erroneously
of 'artificial' materials, 'synthetics' and so on. The basis
for
this erroneous terminology is the notion that nature has certain
things which we call natural, and everything else is 'manmade,'
ergo
artificial. But what one learns in chemistry is that nature
wrote all the
rules of structuring; man does not invent chemical
structuring rules;
he only discovers the rules. All the chemist
can do is to find out what
1 John McHale, “New Symbiosis,” Architectural
Design (February, 1967), p. 89.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Technosphere: Man/Machine Symbiosis
181
nature permits, and any substances that are
thus developed or discovered
are inherently natural."2
John McHale: "We refuse to accept the reality
of potentially
limitless wealth inherent in our new symbiotic
relation to automated
technological processes. Scientific and
technical development
destroys all previous intrinsic value in
physical resources or
properties. From this point on, broadly
speaking, all materials are
inter-convertible. The only unique
resource-input is human knowledge—
the organized information
which programs machine performance.
The products are non-unique
and expendable, as are the
machines and materials. The only part
of the whole process which is
non-expendable and uniquely
irreplaceable is man. Those social
orientations which have had
great survival value in the past now
endanger survival in the
present and cripple our approach to the
future."3
In 1963 two Soviet scientists amplified the
bio-electrical muscle
currents of a human body to operate
exoskeletal servomechanisms
attached to the limbs.4 For the
first time, organic partnership was
achieved to the direct
physical advantage of man. The director of
cardiovascular
surgery at Maimonides Hospital asserted, also in
1963: "Surgery
is essentially an engineering discipline… the
integration of
electronic circuits into the human body as functioning
and
permanent parts… is going to become very important within the
next ten years."5 Since that remark we have witnessed a steady
increase in the number of cyborgs walking among us. Scientists
now
speak of "moral spectrums for machines" based on the extent
to
which the machine "...helps or hinders human beings to
realize their
potentialities and thus to lead satisfactory
lives."6
The computer amplifies man's intelligence in
about the same ratio
that the telescope extends his vision. The
man/computer symbiosis
2 Fuller, Ideas and Integrities (Englewood
Cliffs, NJ.: Prentice-Hall, 1963), pp. 75, 76.
3McHale, "People
Future," Architectural Design (February, 1967), p. 94.
4 A. E.
Kobvinsky and V. S. Gurfinkel,Time (December, 1963).
5A.
Kantrowitz, Electronic Physiologic Aids (New York: Maimonides
Hospital, 1963).
6 M. W. Thring, "The Place of the Technologist
in Modern Society,"Journal of the RSA
(London, April, 1966).
ARTSCILAB 2001
182 Expanded Cinema
is developed to the point where the machine
instructs its user and
indicates possibilities for closer
interaction. One needn't read the
manual but may consult the
machine directly with the order, "I want
to do something,
instruct me." It is not even necessary to be in the
presence of
the computer to do this. One can carry out one's work
thousands
of miles away, linked to the computer through remote
viewing and
operating consoles.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Human Bio-Computer
and His
Electronic Brainchild
The verb "to compute" in general usage means
to calculate. A
computer, then, is any system capable of
accepting data, applying
prescribed processes to them, and
supplying results of these
processes. The first computer, used
thousands of years ago, was
the abacus.
There are two types of computer systems:
those that measure and
those that count. A measuring machine is
called an analogue
computer because it establishes analogous
connections between
the measured quantities and the numerical
quantities supposed to
represent them. These measured quantities
may be physical
distances, volumes, or amounts of energy.
Thermostats, rheostats,
speedometers, and slide rules are
examples of simple analogue
computers.
A counting machine is called a digital
computer because it consists
entirely of two-way switches that
perform direct, not analogous,
functions. These switches operate
with quantities expressed directly
as digits or discrete units
of a numerical system known as thebinary
system.7 This system
has 2 as its base. (The base of the decimal
system is 10, the
base of the octal system is 8, the base of the
hexadecimal
system is 16, and so on.) The binary code used in
digital
computers is expressed in terms of one and zero (1-0),
representing on or off, yes or no. In electronic terms its
equivalent is
voltage or no voltage. Voltages are relayed
through a sequence of
binary switches in which the opening of a
later switch depends on
the action of precise combinations of
earlier switches leading to it.
The term binary digit usually is
abbreviated as bit, which is used also
as a unit of measurement
of information. A computer is said to have
a "million-bit
capacity," or a laser hologram is described as requiring
109
bits of information to create a three-dimensional image.
The largest high-velocity digital computers
have a storage capacity
from four thousand to four million bits
consisting of twelve to forty
7 Wiener, op. cit., pp. 88-90.
ARTSCILAB 2001
184 Expanded Cinema
eight digits each. The computer adds together
two forty-eight digit
numbers simultaneously, whereas a man must
add each pair of
digits successively. The units in which this
information is stored are
called ferrite memory cores. As the
basic component of the
electronic brain, the ferrite memory core
is equivalent to the neuron,
the fundamental element of the
human brain, which is also a digital
computer. The point at
which a nerve impulse passes from one
neuron to another is
called a synapse, which measures about 0.5
micron in diameter.
Through microelectronic techniques of
Discretionary Wiring and
Large Scale Integration (LSI), circuit
elements of five microns
are now possible. That is, the size of the
computer memory core
is approaching the size of the neuron. A
complete computer
function with an eight-hundred-bit memory has
been constructed
only nineteen millimeters squared.8
The time required to insert or retrieve one
bit of information is
known as memory cycle time. Whereas
neurons take approximately
ten milliseconds (10-2 second) to
transmit information from one to
another, a binary element of a
ferrite memory core can be reset in
one hundred nanoseconds, or
one hundred billionths of a second
(10-7 second). This means
that computers are about one-hundredthousand
times faster than
the human brain. This is largely offset,
however, by the fact
that computer processing is serial whereas the
brain performs
parallel processing. Although the brain conducts
milli ons of
operations simultaneously, most digital computers conduct
only
one computation at any one instant in time.9 Brain
elements are
much more richly connected than the elements in a
computer.
Whereas an element in a computer rarely receives
simultaneous
inputs from two other units, a brain cell may be
simultaneously
influenced by several hundred other nerve cells.10
Moreover,
while the brain must sort out and select information from
the
nonfocused total field of the outside world, data input to a
computer is carefully pre-processed.
8 A. T. Lawton and G. E. Abrook, "Large Scale
Integration,"Science Journal (London,
August, 1968).
9N. S.
Sutherland, "Machines Like Men,"Science Journal (London, October,
1968).
10 Ibid.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Hardware and Software
It is often said that computers are
"extraordinarily fast and
extraordinarily accurate, but they
also are exceedingly stupid and
therefore have to be told
everything." This process of telling the
computer everything is
called computer programming. The hardware
of the human
bio-computer is the physical cerebral cortex, its
neurons and
synapses. The software of our brain is its logic or
intelligence, that which animates the physical equipment. That
is to
say, hardware is technology whereas software is
information. The
software of the computer is the stored set of
instructions that
controls the manipulation of binary numbers.
It usually is stored in
the form of punched cards or tapes, or
on magnetic tape. The
process by which information is passed
from the human to the
machine is called computer language. Two
of the most common
computer languages are Algol derived from
"Algorithmic Language,"
and Fortran, derived from "Formula
Translation."
The basis of any program is an algorithm— a
prescribed set of
rules that define the parameters, or discrete
characteristics, of the
solution to a given problem. The
algorithm is the solution, as
opposed to the heuristics or
methods of finding a solution. In the
case of computer-generated
graphic images, the problem is how to
create a desired image or
succession of images. The solution
usually is in the form of
polar equations with parametric controls for
straight lines,
curves, and dot patterns.
Computers can be programmed to simulate
"conceptual cameras"
and the effects of other conceptual
filmmaking procedures. Under a
grant from the National Science
Foundation in 1968, electrical
engineers at the University of
Pennsylvania produced a forty-minute
instructional computer film
using a program that described a
"conceptual camera," its focal
plane and lens angle, panning and
zoom actions, fade-outs,
double-exposures, etc. A program of
"scenario description
language" was written which, in effect, stored
fifty years of
moviemaking techniques and concepts into an IBM
360-65
computer.11
11 Ron Schneiderman, "Researchers Using IBM
360 to Produce Animated Films,"
Electronic News (June 17, 1968),
p. 42.
ARTSCILAB 2001
186 Expanded Cinema
In the last decade seventy percent of all
computer business was in
the area of central processing
hardware, that is, digital computers
themselves. Authorities
estimate that the trend will be completely
reversed in the
coming decade, with seventy percent of profits being
made in
software and the necessary input-output terminals. At
present,
software equals hardware in annual sales of approximately
$6.5
billion, and is expected to double by 1975.12
Today machines read printed forms and may
even decipher
handwriting. Machines "speak" answers to questions
and are voice-
actuated. Computers play chess at tournament
level. In fact, one of
the first instances of a computer asking
itself an original question
occurred in the case of a machine
programmed to play checkers and
backgammon simultaneously. A
situation developed in which it had
to make both moves in one
reset cycle and thus had to choose
between the two, asking
itself: "Which is more important, checkers or
backgammon?" It
selected backgammon on the grounds that more
affluent persons
play that game, and since the global trend is toward
more wealth
per each world person, backgammon must take
priority.13
Machine tools in modern factories are
controlled by other
machines, which themselves have to be
sequenced by higher-order
machines Computer models can now be
built that exhibit many of
the characteristics of human
personality, including love, fear, and
anger. They can hold
beliefs, develop attitudes, and interact with
other machines and
human personalities. Machines are being
developed that can
manipulate objects and move around
autonomously in a laboratory
environment. They explore and learn,
plan strategies, and can
carry out tasks that are incompletely
specified.14
So-called learning machines such as the
analogue UCLM II from
England, and the digital Minos II
developed at Stanford University,
gradually are phasing out the
prototype digital computer. A learning
machine has been
constructed at the National Physical Laboratory
that learns to
recognize and to associate differently shapedshadows
which the
same object casts in different positions.15 These new elec
12 Robert A. Rosenblatt, "Software: The
Tail Now Wags the Dog," Los Angeles Times
Outlook (June 29,
1969), sec. 1, p. 1.
13Fuller, "Prospect for Humanity," Good
News.
14 Science Journal (October, 1968).
15 Bronowski, op.
cit., p. 47.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Hardware and Software 187
tronic brains are approaching speeds
approximately one million
times faster than the fastest digital
computers. It is estimated that the
next few generations of
learning machines will be able to perform in
five minutes what
would take a digital computer ten years. The
significance of
this becomes more apparent when we realize that a
digital
computer can process in twenty minutes information
equivalent to
a human lifetime of seventy years at peak performance.
16
N. S. Sutherland: "There is a real
possibility that we may one day
be able to design a machine that
is more intelligent than ourselves.
There are all sorts of
biological limitations on our own intellectual
capacity ranging
from the limited number of computing elements we
have available
in our craniums to the limited span of human life and
the slow
rate at which incoming data can be accepted. There is no
reason
to suppose that such stringent limitations will apply to
computers of the future... it will be much easier for computers
to
bootstrap themselves on the experience of previous computers
than
it is for man to benefit from the knowledge acquired by his
predecessors. Moreover, if we can design a machine more
intelligent
than ourselves, then a fortiori that machine will be
able to design one
more intelligent than itself.''17
The
number of computers in the world doubles each year, while
computer capabilities increase by a factor of ten every two or
three
years. Herman Kahn: "If these factors were to continue
until the end
of the century, all current concepts about
computer limitations will
have to be reconsidered. Even if the
trend continues for only the
next decade or so, the improvements
over current computers would
be factors of thousands to
millions... By the year 2000 computers are
likely to match,
simulate or surpass some of man's most 'human-like'
intellectual
abilities, including perhaps some of his aesthetic and
creative
capacities, in addition to having new kinds of capabilities
that
human beings do not have... If it turns out that they cannot
duplicate or exceed certain characteristically human
capabilities, that
will be one of the most important discoveries
of the twentieth
century.''18
16 W. K. Taylor, "Machines That Learn,"
Science Journal (October, 1968).
17Sutherland, Science Journal.
18Herman Kahn, Anthony Wiener, Year 2000 (New York: Macmillan,
1967), p. 89.
ARTSCILAB 2001
188 Expanded Cinema
Dr. Marvin Minsky of M.I.T. has predicted:
"As the machine improves...
we shall begin to see all the
phenomena associated with
the terms 'consciousness,' 'intuition'
and 'intelligence.' It is hard to
say how close we are to this
threshold, but once it is crossed the
world will not be the
same... it is unreasonable to think that machines
could become
nearly as intelligent as we are and then stop, or to
suppose
that we will always be able to compete with them in wit and
wisdom. Whether or not we could retain some sort of control of
the
machines— assuming that we would want to— the nature of our
activities and aspirations would be changed utterly by the
presence
on earth of intellectually superior entities.''19 But
perhaps the most
portentous implication in the evolving
symbiosis of the human biocomputer
and his electronic brainchild
was voiced by Dr. Irving John
Good of Trinity College, Oxford,
in his prophetic statement: "The first
ultra-intelligent machine
is the last invention that man need make."20
19Arthur C. Clarke, "The Mind of the
Machine,"Playboy (December, 1968),
p. 118.
20 Ibid.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Aesthetic Machine
As the culmination of the Constructivist
tradition, the digital computer
opens vast new realms of
possible aesthetic investigation. The poet
Wallace Stevens has
spoken of "the exquisite environment of face."
Conventional
painting and photography have explored as much of
that
environment as is humanly possible. But, as with other hidden
realities, is there not more to be found there? Do we not intuit
something in the image of man that we never have been able to
express visually? It is the belief of those who work in
cybernetic art
that the computer is the tool that someday will
erase the division
between what we feel and what we see.
Aesthesic application of technology is the
only means of achieving
new consciousness to match our new
environment. We certainly are
not going to love computers that
guide SAC missiles. We surely do
not feel warmth toward machines
that analyze marketing trends. But
perhaps we can learn to
understand the beauty of a machine that
produces the kind of
visions we see in expanded cinema.
It is quite clear in what direction man's
symbiotic relation to the
computer is headed: if the first
computer was the abacus, the
ultimate computer will be the
sublime aesthetic device: a
parapsychological instrument for the
direct projection of thoughts
and emotions. A. M. Noll, a
pioneer in three-dimensional computer
films at Bell Telephone
Laboratories, has some interesting thoughts
on the subject:
"...the artist's emotional state might conceivably be
determined
by computer processing of physical and electrical signals
from
the artist (for example, pulse rate and electrical activity of the
brain). Then, by changing the artist's environment through such
external stimuli as sound, color and visual patterns, the
computer
would seek to optimize the aesthetic effect of all
these stimuli upon
the artist according to some specified
criterion... the emotional
reaction of the artist would
continually change, and the computer
would react accordingly
either to stabilize the artist's emotional state
or to steer it
through some pre-programmed course. One is strongly
tempted to
describe these ideas as a consciousness-expanding
experience in
association with a psychedelic computer... current
ARTSCILAB 2001
190 Expanded Cinema
Visualizing the invisible: Six
successive stereo pairs from a film
by A. Michael Noll of
Bell Telephone
Laboratories, demonstrating
the rotation, on
four mutually
perpendicular axes, of a four-
dimensional
hypercube projected
onto dual two-dimensional picture
planes
in simulated three-dimensional
space. The viewer wears
special polarized glasses such as
those common in 3-D movies
of the
early 1950's. It was an attempt to
communicate an
intuitive understanding
of four-dimensional
objects, which
in physics are called
hyperobjects. A computer can easily
construct, in mathematical terms,
a fourth spatial dimension
perpendicular
to our three spatial
dimensions. Only a fourth
digit is
required for the machine to locate
a point in
four-dimensional space.
Photo: Bell Telephone Laboratories.
The Aesthetic Machine 191
technological and psychological
investigations would seem to aim in
such a direction.''21
This chapter on computer films might be seen
as an introduction to
the first tentative, crude experiments
with the medium. No matter
how impressive, they are dwarfed by
the knowledge of what
computers someday will be able to do. The
curious nature of the
technological revolution is that, with
each new step forward, so much
new territory is exposed that we
seem to be moving backwards. No
one is more aware of current
limitations than the artists themselves.
As he has done in other disciplines without a
higher ordering
principle, man so far has used the computer as a
modified version of
older, more traditional media. Thus we find
it compared to the brush,
chisel, or pencil and used to
facilitate the efficiency of conventional
methods of animating,
sculpting, painting, and drawing. But the
chisel, brush, and
canvas are passive media whereas the computer
is an active
participant in the creative process. Robert Mallary, a
computer
scientist involved in computer sculpture, has delineated six
levels of computer participation in the creative act. In the
first stage
the machine presents proposals and variants for the
artist's
consideration without any qualitative judgments, yet
the man/machine
symbiosis is synergetic. At the second stage,
the computer
becomes an indispensable component in the
production of an art
that would be impossible without it, such
as constructing holographic
interference patterns. In the third
stage, the machine makes autonomous
decisions on alternative
possibilities that ultimately govern
the outcome of the artwork.
These decisions, however, are made
within parameters defined in
the program. At the fourth stage the
computer makes decisions
not anticipated by the artist because they
have not been defined
in the program. This ability does not yet exist
for machines. At
the fifth stage, in Mallary's words, the artist "is no
longer
needed" and "like a child, can only get in the way." He would
still, however, be able to "pull out the plug," a capability he
will not
possess when and if the computer ever reaches the sixth
stage of
"pure disembodied energy."22
21 A. M. Noll, "The Digital Computer as a
Creative Medium," IEEE Spectrum (October,
1967), p. 94.
22
Robert Mallary, "Computer Sculpture: Six Levels of Cybernetics,"
Artforum (May,
1969), pp. 34, 35.
ARTSCILAB 2001
192 Expanded Cinema
Returning to more immediate realities, A. M.
Noll has explained the
computer's active role in the creative
process as it exists today:
"Most certainly the computer is an
electronic device capable of
performing only those operations
that it has been explicitly instructed
to perform. This usually
leads to the portrayal of the computer as a
powerful tool but
one incapable of any true creativity. However, if
'creativity'
is restricted to mean the production of the unconventional
or
the unpredicted, then the computer should instead be portrayed
as a creative medium— an active and creative collaborator with
the
artist... because of the computer's great speed, freedom
from error,
and vast abilities for assessment and subsequent
modification of
programs, it appears to us to act unpredictably
and to produce the
unexpected. In this sense the computer
actively takes over some of
the artist's creative search. It
suggests to him syntheses that he may
or may not accept. It
possesses at least some of the external
attributes of
creativity."23
Traditionally, artists have looked upon
science as being more
important to mankind than art, whereas
scientists have believed the
reverse. Thus in the confluence of
art and science the art world is
understandably delighted to
find itself suddenly in the company of
science. For the first
time, the artist is in a position to deal directly
with
fundamental scientific concepts of the twentieth century. He can
now enter the world of the scientist and examine those laws that
describe a physical reality. However, there is a tendency to
regard
any computer-generated art as highly significant— even
the most
simplistic line drawing, which would be meaningless if
rendered by
hand. Conversely, the scientific community could not
be more
pleased with its new artistic image, interpreting it as
an occasion to
relax customary scientific disciplines and accept
anything random as
art. A solution to the dilemma lies somewhere
between the polarities
and surely will evolve through closer
interaction of the two
disciplines.
When that occurs we will find that a new kind
of art has resulted
from the interface. Just as a new language
is evolving from the
binary elements of computers rather than
the subject-predicate
relation of the Indo-European system, so
will a new aesthetic
discipline that bears little resemblance to
previous notions of art and
the creative process. Already the
image of the artist has changed
23 Noll, "The Digital Computer as a Creative
Medium," p. 91.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Aesthetic Machine 193
radically. In the new conceptual art, it is
the artist's idea and not his
technical ability in manipulating
media that is important. Though
much emphasis currently is
placed on collaboration between artists
and technologists, the
real trend is more toward one man who is
both artistically and
technologically conversant. The Whitney family,
Stan VanDerBeek,
Nam June Paik, and others discussed in this
book are among the
first of this new breed. A. M. Noll is one of them,
and he has
said: "A lot has been made of the desirability of
collaborative
efforts between artists and technologists. I, however,
disagree
with many of the assumptions upon which this desirability
supposedly is founded. First of all, artists in general find it
extremely
difficult to verbalize the images and ideas they have
in their minds.
Hence the communication of the artist's ideas to
the technologist is
very poor indeed. What I do envision is a
new breed of artist... a man
who is extremely competent in both
technology and the arts."
Thus Robert Mallary speaks of an evolving
"science of art...
because programming requires logic, precision
and powers of
analysis as well as a thorough knowledge of the
subject matter and
a clear idea of the goals of the program...
technical developments in
programming and hardware will proceed
hand in glove with a steady
increase in the theoretical
knowledge of art, as distinct from the
intuitive and pragmatic
procedures which have characterized the
creative process up to
now."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cybernetic Cinema
Three types of computer output hardware can
be used to produce
movies: the mechanical analogue plotter, the
"passive" microfilm
plotter and the "active" cathode-ray tube
(CRT) display console.
Though the analogue plotter is quite
useful in industrial and scientific
engineering, architectural
design, systems analysis, and so forth, it is
rather obsolete in
the production of aesthetically-motivated computer
films. It can
and is used to make animated films but is best suited for
still
drawings.
Through what is known as digital-to-analogue
conversion, coded
signals from a computer drive an armlike
servomechanism that
literally draws pen or pencil lines on
flatbed or drum carriages. The
resulting flow charts, graphs,
isometric renderings, or realist images
are incrementally
precise but are too expensive and time-consuming
for
nonscientific movie purposes. William Fetter of the Boeing
Company in Seattle has used mechanical analogue plotting systems
to make animated films for visualizing pilot and cockpit
configurations in aircraft design. Professor Charles Csuri of
Ohio
State University has created "random wars" and other random
and
semi-random drawings using mechanical plotters for realist
images.
However, practically all computer films are made with
cathode-ray
tube digital plotting output systems.
The cathode-ray tube, like the oscilloscope,
is a special kind of
television tube. It's a vacuum tube in
which a grid between cathode
and anode poles emits a narrow beam
of electrons that are
accelerated at high velocity toward a
phosphor-coated screen, which
fluoresces at the point where the
electrons strike. The resulting
luminescent glow is called a
"trace-point." An electromagnetic field
deflects the electron
beam along predetermined patterns by
electronic impulses that
can be broadcast, cabled, or recorded on
tape. This deflection
capability follows vertical and horizontal
increments expressed
as xy plotting coordinates. Modern three-inch
CRTs are capable
of responding to a computer's "plot-point" and
"draw-line"
commands at a rate of 100,000 per second within a field
of
16,000 possible xy coordinates— that is, approximately a million
times faster and more accurate than a human draftsman. When
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cybernetic Cinema 195
Above: Mechanical analogue plotter draws
pilot for computer-animated film by William
Fetter of the
Boeing Company in Seattle,
Washington. Below: Animated sequence
from the film. Photo: Boeing Company.
ARTSCILAB 2001
196 Expanded Cinema
interfaced with a digital computer, the CRT
provides a visual display
of electronic signal information
generated by the computer program.
The passive microfilm plotter is the most
commonly used output
system for computer movies. It's a
self-contained film-recording unit
in which a movie camera
automatically records images generated on
the face of a
three-inch CRT. The term "microfilm" is confusing to
filmmakers
not conversant with industrial or scientific language. It
simply
indicates conventional emulsion film in traditional 8mm.,
16mm.,
or 35mm. formats, used in a device not originally intended
for
the production of motion pictures, but rather still pictures for
compact storage of large amounts of printed or pictorial
information.
Users of microfilm plotters have found, however,
that their movie-
producing capability is at least as valuable as
their storage-andretrieval
capability. Most computer films are
not aesthetically-
motivated. They are made by scientists,
engineers, and educators to
facilitate visualization and rapid
assimilation of complex analytic and
abstract concepts.
In standard cinematography the shutter is an
integral part of the
camera's drive mechanism, mechanically
interlocked with the
advance-claws that pull successive frames
down to be exposed. But
cameras in microfilm plotters such as
the Stromberg-Carlson 4020 or
the CalComp 840 are specially
designed so that the shutter
mechanism is separate from the film
pull-down. Both are operated
automatically, along with the CRT
display, under computer program
control.
Some computer films, particularly those of
John Whitney, are
made with active twenty-one-inch CRTs such as
the IBM 2250
Display Console with its light pen, keyboard
inputs, and functional
keys, whose use will be described in more
detail later on. This
arrangement is not a self-contained
filmmaking unit; rather, a specially
modified camera is set up
in front of the CRT under automatic
synchronous control of a
computer program. This system is called
"active" as opposed to
the "passive" nature of the microfilm plotter
because the artist
can feed commands to the computer through the
CRT by selecting
variables with the light pen and the function
keyboard, thus
"composing" the picture in time as sequences
develop (during
filming, however, the light pen is not used and the
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cybernetic Cinema 197
Cybernetic movie studio: The IBM 2250
Display Console with CRT, light pen,
and function keyboard. Photo: IBM.
CRT becomes a passive display of the
algorithm). Also, until recently
the display console was the
only technique that allowed the artist to
see the display as it
was being recorded; recent microfilm plotters,
however, are
equipped with viewing monitors.
Since most standard microfilm plotters were
not originally intended
for the production of motion pictures,
they are deficient in at least
two areas that can be avoided by
using the active CRT. First, film
registration in microfilm
plotters does not meet quality standards of
the motion-picture
industry since frame-to-frame steadiness is not a
primary
consideration in conventional microfilm usage. Second, most
microfilm plotters are not equipped to accept standard
thousand-foot
core-wound rolls of 35mm, film, which of course is
possible with
magazines of standard, though control-modified,
cameras used to
photograph active CRTs.
ARTSCILAB 2001
198 Expanded Cinema
Recently, however, computer manufacturing
firms such as
Stromberg-Carlson have designed cameras and
microfilm plotters
that meet all qualifications of the
motion-picture industry as the use
of computer graphics becomes
increasingly popular in television
commercials and large
animation firms. Passive CRT systems are
preferred over active
consoles for various reasons. First, the input
capabilities of
the active scope are rarely used in computer
animation. Second,
passive CRTs come equipped with built-in film
recorders. Third,
a synchronization problem can arise when filming
from an active
CRT scope caused by the periodic "refreshing" of the
image. This
is similar to the "rolling" phenomenon that often occurs
in the
filming of a televised program. The problem is avoided in
passive systems since each frame is drawn only once and the
camera shutter remains open while the frame is drawn.
The terms "on-line," "off-line," and "real
time" are used in
describing computer output systems. Most
digital plotting systems
are designed to operate either on-line
or off-line with the computer.
In an on-line system, plot
commands are fed directly from the
computer to the CRT. In an
off-line system, plot commands are
recorded on magnetic tape
that can instruct the plotter at a later
time. The term "real
time" refers specifically to temporal relationships
between the
CRT, the computer, and the final film or the human
operator's
interaction with the computing system. For example, a
real-time
interaction between the artist and the computer is possible
by
drawing on the face of the CRT with the light pen. Similarly, if a
movie projected at the standard 24 fps has recorded the CRT
display
exactly as it was drawn by the computer, this film is
said to be a real-
time representation of the display. A
live-action shot is a real-time
document of the photographed
subject, whereas single-frame
animation is not a real-time
image, since more time was required in
recording than in
projecting.
Very few computer films of significant
complexity are recorded in
real-time operation. Only one such
film, Peter Kamnitzer's City-
Scape, is discussed in this book.
This is primarily because the hardware
necessary to do real-time
computer filmmaking is rare and
prohibitively expensive, and
because real-time photography is not of
crucial importance in
the production of aesthetically-motivated films.
In the case of
John Whitney's work, for example, although the
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cybernetic Cinema 199
imagery is preconceived for movie projection
at 24 fps, it is filmed at
about 8 fps. Three to six seconds are
usually required to produce
one image, and a twenty-second
sequence projected at 24 fps may
require thirty minutes of
computer time to generate.
Most CRT displays are black-and-white.
Although the Sandia
Corporation and the Lawrence Radiation
Laboratory have achieved
dramatic results with full-color CRTs,
the color of most computer
films is added in optical printing of
original black-and-white footage,
or else colored filters can be
superposed over the face of the CRT
during photography. Full
color and partial color displays are available.
As in the case
of City-Scape, however, a great deal of color
quality is lost in
photographing the CRT screen. Movies of color CRT
displays
invariably are washed-out, pale, and lack definition. Since
black-and-white film stocks yield much higher definition than
color
film stocks, most computer films are recorded in
black-and-white
with color added later through optical printing.
A similar problem exists in
computer-generated realistic imagery in
motion. It will be noted
that most films discussed here are non-
figurative,
non-representational, i.e., concrete. Those films which do
contain representational images— City-Scape, Hummingbird— are
rather crude and cartoon-like in comparison with conventional
animation techniques. Although computer films open a new world
of
language in concrete motion graphics, the computer's
potential for
manipulation of the realistic image is of far
greater relevance for both
artist and scientist. Until recently
the bit capacity of computers far
outstripped the potentials of
existing visual subsystems, which did
not have the television
capability of establishing a continuous scan
on the screen so
that each point could be controlled in terms of
shading and
color. Now, however, such capabilities do exist and the
tables
are turned; the bit capacity necessary to generate
television-
quality motion images with tonal or chromatic scaling
is enormously
beyond present computer capacity.
Existing methods of producing realistic
imagery still require some
form of realistic input. The computer
does not "understand" a
command to make this portion of the
picture dark gray or to give that
line more "character." But it
does understand algorithms that
describe the same effects. For
example, L. D. Harmon and Kenneth
Knowlton at Bell Telephone
have produced realistic pictures by
ARTSCILAB 2001
200 Expanded Cinema
scanning photographs with equipment similar
to television cameras.
The resulting signals are converted into
binary numbers representing
brightness levels at each point.
These bits are transferred to
magnetic tape, providing a
digitized version of the photograph for
computer processing.
Brightness is quantized into eight levels of
density represented
by one of eight kinds of dots or symbols. They
appear on the CRT
in the form of a mosaic representation of the
original
photograph. The process is both costly and time consuming,
with
far less "realistic" results than conventional procedures.
The Computer Image Company of Denver,
Colorado, has devised
two unique methods of producing
cartoon-like representational
computer graphics in real-time,
on-line operation. Using special
hybrid systems with the
advantages of both digital and analogue
computers, they generate
images through optical scanning or
acoustical and anthropometric
controls. In the scanning process,
called Scanimate, a
television camera scans black-and-white or
color transparencies;
this signal is input to the Scanimate computer
where it is
segmented into as many as five different parts, each
capable of
independent movement in synchronization with any audio
track,
either music or commentary. The output is recorded directly
onto
film or videotape as an integral function of the Scanimate
process.
The second computer image process, Animac,
does not involve
optical scanning. It generates its own images
in conjunction with
acoustical or anthropometric analogue
systems. In the first instance
the artist speaks into a
microphone that converts the electrical
signals into a form that
modulates the cartoon image on the CRT.
The acoustical input
animates the cartoon mouth while other facial
characteristics
are controlled simultaneously by another operator. In
the second
method an anthropometric harness is attached to a
person— a
dancer, for example— with sensors at each of the skeletal
joints. If the person moves his arm the image moves its arm;
when
the person dances the cartoon character dances in real-time
synchronization, with six degrees of freedom in simulated
three-
dimensional space. It should be stressed that these
cartoon images
are only "representational" and not "realistic."
The systems were
designed specifically to reduce the cost of
commercial filmmaking
and not to explore serious aesthetic
potentials. It's obvious, however,
that such techniques could be
applied to artistic investigation and to
nonobjective graphic
compositions.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cybernetic Cinema 201
Reclining nude scanned from photo and
reconstructed by computer using bright-ness-level
symbols.
By L. D. Harmon and Kenneth C.
Knowlton. Photo: Bell Telephone
Laboratories.
ARTSCILAB 2001
202 Expanded Cinema
Charles Csuri: Hummingbird. 1967,
16mm. Black and white. 10 min.
Computer-manipulations of
hand-
drawn figure using xy plotting
coordinates.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cybernetic Cinema 203
Professor Charles Csuri's computer film,
Hummingbird, was produced
by digital scanning of an original
hand-drawing of the bird.
The computer translated the drawing
intoxy plotting coordinates and
processed variations on the
drawing, assembling, disassembling,
and distorting its
perspectives. Thus the images were not computer-
generated so
much as computer-manipulated. There's no actual
animation in the
sense of separately-moving parts. Instead a static
image of the
bird is seen in various perspectives and at times is
distorted
by reversals of the polar coordinates. Software
requirements
were minimal and the film has little value as art other
than its
demonstration of one possibility in computer graphics.
Limitations of computer-generated realistic
imagery exist both in
the central processing hardware as well as
visual output subsystems.
Advancements are being made in output
subsystems that
go beyond the present bit-capacity of most
computers. Chief among
these is the "plasma crystal" panel,
which makes possible billboard
or wallsize TV receivers as well
as pocket-size TV sets that could be
viewed in bright sunlight.
The Japanese firms of Mitsubishi and
Matsushita (Panasonic) seem
to be leaders in the field, each having
produced workable
models. Meanwhile virtually every major
producer of video
technology has developed its own version. One of
the pioneers of
this process in the United States was Dr. George
Heilmeier of
RCA's David Sarnoff Research Center in Princeton,
New Jersey. He
describes plasma crystals (sometimes called liquid
crystals) as
organic compounds whose appearance and mechanical
properties are
those of a liquid, but whose molecules tend to form
into large
orderly arrays akin to the crystals of mica, quartz, or
diamonds. Unlike luminescent or fluorescing substances, plasma
crystals do not emit their own light: they're read by reflected
light,
growing brighter as their surroundings grow brighter.
It was discovered that certain liquid
crystals can be made
opalescent, and hence reflecting, by the
application of electric
current. Therefore in manufacturing such
display systems a
sandwich is formed of two clear glass plates,
separated by a thin
layer of clear liquid crystal material only
one-thousandth of an inch
thick. A reflective mirror-like
conductive coating is deposited on the
inside face of one plate,
in contact with the liquid. On the inside of
the other is
deposited a transparent electrically-conductive coating of
tin
oxide. When an electric charge from a battery or wall outlet is
ARTSCILAB 2001
204 Expanded Cinema
Prototype for flat, wall-size TV screens
and computer visualization subsystems of the
future: Dr. George
Heilmeier demonstrates RCA's liquid crystal display. Photo: RCA.
applied between the two coatings, the liquid
crystal molecules are
disrupted and the sandwich takes on the
appearance of frosted
glass. The frostiness disappears, however,
as soon as the charge is
removed.
In order to display stationary patterns such
as letters, symbols, or
still images, the coatings are shaped in
accordance with the desired
pattern. To display motion the conductive
coatings are laid down in
the form of a fine mosaic whose individual
elements can be charged
independently, in accordance with a scanning
signal such as is
presently used for facsimile, television, and
other electronic displays.
To make the images visible in a dark room or
outdoors at night, both
coatings are made transparent and a light
source is installed at
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cybernetic Cinema 205
the edge of the screen. In addition it is
possible to reflect a strong
light from the liquid crystal
display to project its images, enlarged
many times, onto a wall
or screen.
The implications of the plasma crystal
display system are vast.
Since it is, in essence, a digital
system composed of hundreds of
thousands of discrete picture
elements (PIXELS), it obviously is
suitable as a computer
graphics subsystem virtually without
limitation if only
sufficient computing capabilities existed. The bit
requirements
necessary for computer generation of real-time
realistic images
in motion are as yet far beyond the present state of
the art.
This is demonstrated in a sophisticated
video-computer system
developed by Jet Propulsion Laboratories
in Pasadena, California,
for translation of television pictures
from Mars in the various Mariner
projects. This fantastic system
transforms the real-time TV signal
into digital picture elements
that are stored on special data-discs.
The picture itself is not
stored; only its digital translation. The JPL
video system
consists of 480 lines of resolution, each line composed
of 512
individual points. One single image, or "cycle," is thus defined
by 245,760 points. In black-and-white, each of these points,
individually selectable, can be set to display at any of 64
desired
intensities on the gray scale between total black and
total white.
Possible variations for one single image thus
amount to 64 times
245,760. For color displays, the total image
can be thought of as
three in-dependent images (one for each
color constituent, red, blue,
and green) or can be taken as a
triplet specification for each of the
480 times 512 points. With
each constituent being capable of 64
different irradiating
levels in the color spectrum, a theoretical total of
262,144
different color shadings are possible for any given point in
the
image. (The average human eye can perceive only 100 to 200
different color shadings.)
These capabilities are possible only for
single motionless images.
Six bits of information are required
to produce each of the 245,760
points that constitute one image
or cycle, and several seconds are
necessary to complete the
cycle. Yet JPL scientists estimate that a
computing capability
of at least two megacycles (two million cycles)
per second would
be required to generate motion with the same
image-transforming
capabilities.
ARTSCILAB 2001
206 Expanded Cinema
It is quite clear that human communication is
trending toward these
possibilities. If the visual subsystems
exist today, it's folly to assume
that the computing hardware
won't exist tomorrow. The notion of
"reality" will be utterly
and finally obscured when we reach that point.
There'll be no
need for "movies" to be made on location since any
conceivable
scene will be generated in totally convincing reality
within the
information processing system. By that time, of course,
movies
as we know them will not exist. We're entering a mythic age
of
electronic realities that exist only on a metaphysical plane.
Meanwhile some significant work is being done in the development
of new language through computer-generated, nonrepresentational
graphics in motion. I've selected several of the most prominent
artists in the field and certain films, which, though not
aesthetically-
motivated, reveal possibilities for artistic
exploration. We'll begin with
the Whitney family: John, Sr., and
his brother James inaugurated a
tradition; the sons John, Jr.,
Michael, and Mark are the first second-
generation
computer-filmmakers in history.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films
John Whitney: Composing an Image of Time
"My computer program is like a piano. I could
continue to use it creatively all my
life."
The foremost computer-filmmaker in the world
today, John Whitney
has for more than thirty years sought new
language through
technological resources beyond human capacity.
He has, however,
remained resolutely "humanist" in his approach,
constantly striving to
reach deep emotional awarenesses through
a medium essentially
austere and clinical. He has realized his
goal to a remarkable
degree, yet he would be the first to admit
that there is a long way to
go. "Computer graphic systems," he
has said, "present an
opportunity to realize an art of graphics
in motion with potentials that
are only now conceivable and have
never been explored."
In his essay "Systems Esthetics," Jack
Burnham observed:
"Scientists and technicians are not converted
into artists, rather the
artist becomes a symptom of the schism
between art and technics.
Progressively, the need to make
ultrasensitive judgments as to the
uses of technology and
scientific information becomes 'art' in the
most literal
sense."24 Whitney is making those judgments with a
powerful
extension of his brain.
Following studies at Pomona College in
California, Whitney spent
a year in Europe where he studied
photography and musical
composition. In 1940 he began
specializing in concrete designs in
motion, working with his
brother James on animated films which won
first prize at the
first Experimental Film Festival in Belgium in 1949.
Early in the 1950's he experimented with the
production of 16mm.
films for television and in 1952 wrote,
produced, and directed
engineering films on guided missile
projects for Douglas Aircraft. He
was a director of animated
films at UPA in Hollywood for one year.
The title sequence for
Alfred Hitchcock's Vertigo was among the
24Jack Burnham, "Systems Esthetics,"Artforum
(September, 1968), pp. 30-35.
ARTSCILAB 2001
208 Expanded Cinema
work he produced in association with Saul
Bass during this period.
Following that he directed several
short musical films for CBS
television, and in 1957 worked with
Charles Eames assembling a
seven-screen presentation for the
Fuller Dome in Moscow. Each
screen was the size of a drive-in
movie screen.
In 1960 Whitney founded Motion Graphics Inc.,
producing motion-
picture and television title sequences and
commercials. Much of this
work was done with his own invention,
a mechanical analogue
computer for specialized animation with
typography and concrete
design. In 1962 he was named Fellow of
the Graham Foundation for
Advanced Study in the Fine Arts.
Finally, after approximately a
decade, he found himself free
once again to begin experimenting
with less commercial, more
aesthetic, problems of motion graphics.
The analogue computer work gained Whitney a
worldwide reputation,
and in the spring of 1966 International
Business Machines
became the first major corporation to take an
"artist in residence" to
explore the aesthetic potentials of
computer graphics. IBM awarded
Whitney a continuing grant that
has resulted in several significant
developments in the area of
cybernetic art. Whether working with
hand-drawn animation cards
or highly abstract mathematical
concepts, Whitney has always
displayed an artist's intuition and a
technologist's discipline.
He is a man of tomorrow in the world of
today.
The history of cybernetics reached a
milestone during World War II
with the development of guidance
and control mechanisms for
antiaircraft artillery. Two men
riding a telescope table sighted enemy
aircraft and followed
their penetration into the battery range. Selsyn
motors in the
gun-director mechanism automatically aimed an entire
battery of
guns while analogue computers set fuse times on
explosive shells
and specified true-intercept trajectories from data
fed into the
ballistics equation from movements of the operators.
An M-5 Antiaircraft Gun Director provided the
basic machinery for
Whitney's first mechanical analogue computer
in the late 1950's.
This complex instrument of death now became
a tool for producing
benevolent and beautiful graphic designs.
Later Whitney augmented
the M-5 with the more sophisticated M-7,
hybridizing the machines
into a mammoth twelve-foot-high device
of formidable complexity
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 209
John Whitney working with his mechanical
analogue computer. Photo: Charles Eames.
ARTSCILAB 2001
210 Expanded Cinema
upon which most of the business of Motion
Graphics was conducted
for many years.
Similar to the analogue device built by
Whitney's brother James for
the production of Lapis, but far
more complex, the machine consists
of primary, secondary, and
tertiary rotating tables, cam systems, and
other surfaces for
pre-programming of image and motion sequences
in a multiple-axis
environment. Whitney's son John, Jr., an electronics
genius who
improved his father's device as a teen-ager by
rewiring and
implementing its circuitry, explains the basic functions
of the
machine:
There's not one function that isn't variable.
The whole master table rotates and
so does every part in it, as
well as moving laterally, horizontally, and in some
cases
vertically. The camera moves in the same way completely independent
of
the rest of the machine, or in synchronization with it. I
don't know how many
simultaneous motions can be happening at
once. There must be at least five
ways just to operate the
shutter. The input shaft on the camera rotates at 180
rpm, which
results in a photographing speed of about 8 fps. That cycle time is
constant, not variable, but we never shoot that fast. It takes
about nine seconds
to shoot one frame because the secondary
rotating tables require nine seconds
to make one revolution.
During this nine-second cycle the tables are spinning on
their
own axes while simultaneously revolving around another axis while
moving
horizontally across the range of the camera, which itself
may be turning or
zooming up and down. During this operation we
can have the shutter open all the
time, or just at the end for a
second or two, or at the beginning, or for half of the
time if
we want to do slit-scanning.
The elder Whitney actually never produced a
complete, coherent
movie on the analogue computer because he was
continually
developing and refining the machine while using it
for commercial
work. It remained for his sons John and Michael
to make full creative
use of this device that had dominated
their childhood from earliest
recollection. However, Whitney did
assemble a visual catalogue of
the effects he had perfected over
the years. This film, simply titled
Catalogue, was completed in
1961 and proved to be of such
overwhelming beauty that many
persons still prefer Whitney's
analogue work over his digital
computer films.
The machine, like the digital computer, not
only facilitated the quick
and effortless rendering of complex
geometrical shapes and
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 211
Left: Camera zoom lens (center) focusing
into
primary rotating table of Whitney mechanical
analogue
computer. (Photo: Charles Eames)
Below:
Whitney places design template into
computer table.
ARTSCILAB 2001
212 Expanded Cinema
John Whitney: Catalogue. 1961.16mm.
Color. 7 min. "Floral patterns curl as
though they were
actually organic
growths..."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 213
motions, but also actually helped realize
certain graphics possibilities
that otherwise might not be
conceivable to the artist untrained in
mathematical concepts.
Catalogue is a brilliant display of floral
patterns that seem to
bloom and curl as though they were actually
organic growths
photographed in time-lapse. Also they have a
natural quality
quite unlike traditional single-frame animation and are
far more
convincing. Elsewhere in the film, neon-like coils expand
and
contract, throwing out bursts of pastel color. Dish-shaped
curvilinear disks wobble and strobe, stretch and contract in a
variety
of unexpected ways. Syncretistic dot-pattern fields
collect together
as in Lapis. Strings of green light perform
seemingly impossible
transformations into endless intertwined
configurations of baffling
optical complexity. Words assemble
and disintegrate, defying logic.
Floral ringlets pop like neon
confetti, showering the screen with flak
bursts of color.
Unlike the digital computer, which requires
only a mathematical
code as its input, the mechanical analogue
computer as used by the
Whitneys requires some form of input
that directly corresponds to
the desired output. That is, at
least a basic element of the final
image we see on the screen
must first be drawn, photographed,
pasted together, or otherwise
assembled before it is fed into the
analogue equipment for
processing. This means that a great deal of
handicraft still is
involved, though its relation to the final output is
minimal.
The original input may be as simple as a moiré pattern or
as
complex as a syncretistic field of hand-painted dots— but some
form of handmade or physically demonstrable information is
required
as input in the absence of conventional computer
software.
GENE: You're among the few people in the
world working to bring
the public into a closer understanding of
technology on a basis we
can relate to— a movie, pretty colors, things
that move. It's very
important.
JOHN: Just after World War II
my brother and I were constantly
excited by a future world. We sort of
expected it to happen before
the 1940's were past. We thought nothing of
taking on the formal
and creative problems of a totally
technological medium such as
the cinema. It's taken twenty or thirty years
to realize that the tech
nology we looked upon as being the
technology of the future
ARTSCILAB 2001
214 Expanded Cinema
was far from it. Instead of being the camera,
the most important
piece of instrumentation is the computer
itself. Still ahead is
considerable disciplined study to gain
understanding or control of
this kind of formal dynamic material
so that it can be human. That's
the whole problem. The light
show people are doing a lot of
wonderful sensory things, but I
feel there must come insight into
what is riot seen now— an
understanding of a whole new area of
conceptual form. The light
show people are doing something like
an infant pounding on the
keys of a piano. Sometimes it can be
very creative and terribly
exciting. But in the long run, looking at it
as an adult, it's
just banging away at the piano without training. We
know that
someone who plays a Beethoven sonata maybe has
been sharpening
his sensibilities and manual dexterity with that
one piece for
seven or eight years. That's the way I see the
relationship
between computer aesthetics and contemporary light
shows.
GENE: Where would you place yourself today
concerning what
you've done and what you'd like to do?
JOHN: In one sense I'm just beginning. In
another sense my work
with the digital computer is a culmination
of all my interests since
the 1940's because I found myself
forced into the techniques and
mechanisms of cinema. I got to
work with the digital computer
thanks to the fact that I
developed my analogue equipment to the
point that I had. As I
continued to develop the machine I realized it
was really a
mechanical model of the electronic computer. Anyone
experimenting with the medium of cinema as opposed to working
in the industry is forced into a direct confrontation with his
technology. People tried all different techniques of abstract
cinema,
and it's strange that no one has really invented
anything that
another experimental filmmaker can take up and use
himself. It's
starting afresh every time. Jim and I were trying
to make
something and there wasn't a machine available for
making it. So
my work has come to fruition because the past
thirty years of
search for instrumentation has culminated in the
present availability
of the computer. On the other hand I'm only
beginning to use
it. We all are. It's the same with those who
are beginning to use the
computer to compose music— they're at a
very primitive stage
today.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 215
Permutations (see color plates), the first
cohesive film to come out
of Whitney's work with the digital
computer, is a dazzling display of
serial imagery that seems to
express specific ideas or chains of
ideas through hypersensitive
manipulation of kinetic empathy. The
patterns, colors, and
motions dancing before us seem to be
addressing the inarticulate
conscious with a new kind of language. In
fact, Whitney thinks
of his work precisely as the development of a
new communicative
mode. Speaking ofPermutations, he explains:
The film contains various types of dot
patterns which might be compared to the
alphabet. The patterns
are constructed into "words," each having basically a
two-
hundred-frame or eight-second time duration. These words in
turn can be fitted
contextually into "sentence" structures. My
use of the parallel to language is only
partially descriptive; I
am moved to draw parallels with music. The very next term
I wish
to use is "counterpoint." These patterns are graphically
superimposed over
themselves forward and backward in many ways,
and the parallel now is more
with counterpoint, or at least
polyphonic musical phenomena. Should it be called
"polygraphic
phenomena"?
Whatever they're called, Whitney's films are
impossible to describe
with the archaic language of the phonetic
alphabet. Circles,
crescents, quadrants, and multiplex forms of
infinite variety and
endless motion interact serially, and
cosmically, until one is
transported into a realm of expanded
consciousness that intuitively
understands this new language.
It's as though the very essence of
the idea of permutation is
expressed in this film, as though the
"word" no longer were
separate from the fact. And that's exactly what
Whitney has
done: he's merged language with what it is intended to
express.
"Beautiful" seems such an inadequate term in this respect.
Before discussing the film itself, it will be
helpful to understand in
some detail how it was made, beginning
with the program and going
on through the final stages of
photography and optical printing. This
will be helpful to
readers interested in making computer films, since
Whitney's
methods and working conditions are those most likely to
be
available to the average person— with the exception of his own
specialized film processing equipment.
Dr. Jack Citron of IBM became interested in
Whitney's work and
began collaborating with him before there was
any formal IBM
ARTSCILAB 2001
216 Expanded Cinema
support. Dr. Citron later was given formal
responsibility for further
work with Whitney under the IBM
program, exploring the creative
possibilities inherent in the
IBM Model 360 computer and the IBM
2250 Graphic Display Console.
It was Citron who wrote the original
program called GRAF
(Graphic Additions to Fortran), which Whitney
has been using
since the spring of 1966.
Citron: One of the things I was interested in
doing was to set up a
kind of instrument which would buffer the
computer user from the
technical details. I think this can only
be done by someone who
understands both areas. The line of
attack in my program was to
start with what's in the artist's
mind, and somehow have him use a
kind of mathematics which he
learns by rote with a "teaching
program," to learn to express
what's in his head visually. Once
such a program is written, the
fact that the programmer who wrote
the algorithms knew what the
artist needed enables the artist to sit
down and say the kind of
things John says withoutall that other
training. I'm very happy
it worked that way. Certainly in the future
one will need more
of a mathematical-logical background than
artists have today.
But you won't need ten years of schooling in
nuclear physics.
The thing that should be done is to develop a
scientific
curriculum for the artist. I don't know of anyone seriously
considering that, but it should be done.
WHITNEY: Dr. Citron and I talked for some
time before I actually
began working. When I first began to
realize from correspondence
with IBM that I would be given the
grant, the first thing that came to
my mind was the question:
would I be able to draw a free-hand line
and somehow get that
into the computer as digital information so I
could manipulate
it? I was presenting these ideas in preliminary
talks and I was
told that anything you can define mathematically
you can do with
a computer very easily. At first, having flunked
mathematics
consistently all through school, I was a bit horrified.
And yet
I began to realize the great breadth of elegance in simple
geometrical graphics, and the historic respect geometry has
enjoyed as a graphic form. Slowly these misgivings about having
to define things in mathematical form died off... Some people in
computer work criticize me for not being able to program myself
instead of relying on someone else. Yet I've used this one
program
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 217
for more than three years and I know that it
is still only
fragmentarily explored. In terms of software
the program Dr. Citron
developed for me is like a piano. I could
continue to use it
creatively all my life. But one program is
like one area of a total
palette. Let's assume that other people are
going to develop other
programs that will have another area of
significance. Some of the
ultimate orchestrations to come in fifteen or
twenty years will
perhaps involve many combined programs.
The GRAF program is based on a single
polar-coordinate equation
having about sixty parameters. In
preparation for a display of images
in what is called the
"learning" stage of the program, the light pen is
used to select
numerical variables, displayed on the CRT, which can
be assigned
to any of the parameters of the program to determine a
particular graphic pattern. After values have been selected for
all
parameters and the camera is brought into play to record the
images, control of the computer program is by punch cards, not
the
light pen. The shutter of the computer camera specially
modified by
Whitney and his son John is operated electrically,
under control of
the computer. The functions of opening and
closing the shutter and
advancing the film are controlled by a
separate program in addition
to GRAF.
Three types of punch cards are used during
filming for control of
images, and are signified as
Identification Statements (for specifying
particular curves),
Parameter Statements (for assigning values to the
curve), and
Frame Statements (for control of successive displays).
During
this time the artist interacts with the computer through the
Program Function Keyboard (PFKB), part of the 2250's hardware.
The PFKB is equipped with thirty-six sets of keyswitches and
lights.
The program turns on light 1 as a signal to open the
camera shutter.
Interface connections between camera and
computer include
feedback circuits that allow the camera, in
effect, to respond to
computer commands: thus key 1 is
depressed, entering 20 volts
back into the computer and pulsing
the camera with 5.3volts, which
operates one single frame
exposure. This is followed by an exposure
timing loop in the
program, and subsequently light 2 is illuminated
ordering the
shutter to close. Programmed logic decides whether or
not more
information is to be displayed for this same frame of film.
ARTSCILAB 2001
218 Expanded Cinema
When the film frame is to be advanced, light
3 goes on and the next
curve is computed and displayed, the
camera is activated, and so
on.
The 35mm. black-and-white negative from the
camera is processed
normally on high-contrast stock yielding an
image that
consists of clear lines on a dense black field. This
film is threaded
into the projector side of Whitney's optical
printer, which has several
special features: the optical axis of
the system is vertical with the
camera looking down into the
projector. The projector itself is
mounted on a compound mill
table. Thus additional translations and
rotations of a
mechanical nature may be superimposed, and the
camera may be
moved along the axis so as to provide for an
additional scaling
factor of from .1 to 10. A stepping switch circuit
and preset
frame counter allow a wide range of skip-frame ratios to
expand
editing capabilities temporally. For Permutations Whitney
used
little skip-framing, but quite a bit of superimposition, slowing
and speeding, and forward and backward printing.
Set to a tabla solo by Balachander,
Permutations begins with a ring
of white dots in a black void,
with individual white dots circumscribing
the inner
circumference of the ring. This becomes an oval floral
pattern
of blue, green, and pink dots moving simultaneously
clockwise
and counterclockwise.
Two factors quickly become apparent: first,
the neon-like cold
scintillation of the image, a result of
electrons deflecting traces in the
cathode phosphor at a rate of
30 cycles per second. In our
fluorescent world of neon suns and
video eyes this scintillating
glimmer more closely approximates
daily experience than, say, the
artificial arc lamp lighting of
conventional movies.
Second, is the quite noticeable seriality of
the composition, the
unified wholeness of the statement,
although it is composed of
discrete elements. In defining
"serial" in this context I should like to
quote from art critic
John Coplans: "To paint in series is not
necessarily to be
serial. Neither the number of works nor the
similarity of theme
in a given group determines whether a [work] is
serial. Rather,
seriality is identified by a particular interrelationship,
rigorously consistent, of structure and syntax: serial
structures are
produced by a single indivisible process that
links the internal
structure of a work to that of other works
within a differentiated
whole. While a series may have any
number of works, it must
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 219
Dr. Jack Citron, IBM Los Angeles, selects
numerical values for a typical image, using
the light pen at
the 2250 Display Console.
must as a precondition of seriality have at
least two... there are no
boundaries implicit to serial imagery;
its structures can be likened to
continuums or constellations...
all contemporary usage of serial
imagery is without either first
or last members. Obviously at one
point there had to be a
beginning, but its identity becomes subsumed
within the whole,
within the macrostructure. The same
principle applies to the
last member. At any given point in time one
work in a series
stands last in order of execution, but its sequential
identity
is irrelevant and in fact is lost immediately on the work's
completion."25
25 John Coplans, "Serial Imagery," Artforum
(October, 1968), pp. 34-43.
ARTSCILAB 2001
220 Expanded Cinema
It is this seriality, then, that identifies
Permutations both as "words"
and "sentence structures" as well
as a complete overall statement,
which is the meaning of the
title. Whitney speaks of "graphic
integrity" in this respect,
referring to the mathematically precise
interrelationships
between forms, colors, and movements.
At one point in the film there is an
exploration of centrifugal and
centripetal ring movement in
alternating colors and dot-pattern fields.
This becomes an
extremely dramatic statement in which bright
emerald-green
linear figures sweep the inner circumference of a
white ring in
a black void. The action is asymmetrical, not center-
oriented, a
fluid kind of motion not restricted to one point, a multiplex
motion with no static elements, moving on a path in space that
approximates a trajectory.
This figure vanishes into infinity and there
follows a series of
superimpositions that fill the original
white ring with variously-colored
dot-pattern fields. Each field
moves into the ring from different
directions in the frame,
rests within the ring for a moment scintillating
gently, then
moves out of the frame in the opposite direction from
which it
came, making room for another dot-pattern field of another
color
which moves in simultaneously. Finally, all colors move into the
ring simultaneously from all sides, forming circles within
circles all
scintillating smoothly in a floral configuration.
GENE: You seem hesitant or apologetic using
the parallel with
musical forms.
JOHN: I'm wary of it. I've been making that
analogy all along, but I'm
aware of the pitfalls of a lot of
people in history. Da Vinci talked
about an art of color which
would be dealt with as musical tones.
Wilfred and Remmington in
England at the turn of the century were
building color organs.
They were so hung up with parallels with
music that they missed
the essence of their medium. People talk
about abstraction in
graphics as being cold or inhuman. I just don't
see that at all.
What is a musical note? It's totally abstract. That's
the
essential point and that's why I use the musical analogy. The
essential problem with my kind of graphics must resemble the
creative problem of melody writing. It is perhaps the most
highly
sensitive task of art, involving as it does balance,
contrast, tension,
and resolution all brought into play with
minimum expenditure.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 221
Music really is the art that moves in time.
The many statements
about architecture being frozen music
notwithstanding, here we are
truly looking at another art that
moves in time. Someone once said
about musical compositions:
"Time and tone completely fill each
other... what the hearer
perceives in the tones and rests of a
musical work is not simply
time but shaped and organized time...
so the conventional
formula receives its final interpretation: music
is a temporal
art because, shaping the stuff of time, it creates an
image of
time." I like that idea very much, so I ask myself, what can
be
essentially the image of time for the eye to perceive?
One such image in Permutations involves
bright blue, green, and
red ellipses that move in perspectival
space from static positions at
each side of the frame, growing
larger as they move alternately to
the center and back again,
exchanging positions. The feeling is precisely
one of
counterpoint and of temporal experiences.
This sentence structure becomes a white ring
spinning rapidly on a
vertical axis until it appears to be a
group of white rings in a cagelike
configuration, still spinning
on a polar vertical axis. Inside this cage
appears a similar
ring of elliptical spheres, emerald green, revolving
on a
horizontal axis. Finally, the whole assemblage becomes an incredibly
beautiful constellation of all colors and quickly runs through
all configurations and movements seen during the film. These are
seen moving around, within, and through a total field of
scintillating
colors as the film ends.
GENE: Which comes first, sound or image?
JOHN: Image. In Permutations the sequences
and colors were all
done before I selected a piece of music, yet
there are all these
astonishing relations with the music. That's
where accident is
working in my favor. In many areas of art and
music it has been
commonplace for the artist to tell you there's
nothing in his work
that doesn't have some sort of valid
relationship or meaningful
reason for being there. They've
constantly sought to avoid
arbitrariness— not accident: you can
often make an accident turn
into a very wonderful twist to new
meaning. But the worst kind of
arbitrariness is when a person
thinks his own casual decisions
ARTSCILAB 2001
222 Expanded Cinema
are great simply because he's done it,
because he decided to be
arbitrary. I expect to make a lot more
progress in the direction of
having more and more levels of
formal organization— therefore it
should be more and more human
and multistructured.
GENE: In one sense you're in the forefront of
avant-garde art today,
concerned as it is with systems
aesthetics, scientific discipline, and
so on. In another
respect, however, you do seem to be running
against the grain of
a trend toward the stochastic element,
especially in music,
films, and theatre.
JOHN: It's a universal misunderstanding. At
the Aspen Design
Conference in 1967, a scientist was describing
a problem
scientifically, saying it could be done this way and
that, and then he
said if it couldn't be done in such a rigorous
way let's do it anyway
and that'll be art. Scientists very
frequently get excited about
becoming involved in art. And the
very first thing that comes to
their minds is just to chuck out
the whole discipline that their entire
career is based on. They
think if it's art, it's free. Anything that goes
with random
numbers is art; and anything that has to be worked
out carefully
so that this goes here and this has got to go there,
that's not
art, that's science. But for my moneyit's more important
and
difficult to get this here and that there in the area of art,
because it involves much more than just counting numbers and
making it mathematically sound: it's got to be intensely and
intuitively sound. That's what I'm searching for. That's what I
mean
by structure.
James Whitney's Lapis: Cybernetic
Philosopher's Stone
James Whitney's cybernetic art seems totally
removed from the
idyllic scene in the serene Southern California
garden where he has
developed ceramic handicraft to a fine art
in days of quiet
meditation. Yet his Lapis is perhaps the most
beautiful, and one of
the most famous, of all computer films.
Like the work of his long-time
friend, Jordan Belson, it
represent expanded cinema in its widest
meaning: an attempt to
approximate mind forms. That Whitney
claims to have failed in
his quest does not subtract from the
archetypical eloquence of
his works. They are glowing testimony of
the truth of Herbert
Read’s assertion that greatness lies “in the
power to realize
and even to forecast the imaginative needs of
mankind."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 223
The fundamental imaginative need of mankind
today is, as it
always has been, the bridging of the chasm
between spirit and
matter. Atomic science is moving us closer to
that realization. But in
the words of Louis Pauwels, "just as
science without conscience
spells ruin for the soul, conscience
without science means defeat
also." In this respect Whitney is a
"scientist of the soul" like the
ancient alchemists in whose
work he has found much inspiration.
Internationally known as experimental
filmmakers because of their
five Film Exercises of the period
1941-44, James and John Whitney
began working separately around
1945. "After the exercises," James
recalls, "the structure of my
work was external, following pretty close
to serial imagery
concepts. The intent was a unity of structure which
would result
in a whole experience. The structure was whole, and
naturally it
would relate to your own attempts at wholeness: as you
were more
whole the structures you were dealing with would
become more
whole. Then after that there was a long period of
development in
which I tried to make exterior imagery more closely
related to
the inner. Those early images just weren't relating
thoroughly
to my own experiences in meditation, for example, where
forms
are breaking up. So I reduced the structural mode to the
dot-
pattern, which gives a quality which in India is called the
Akasha, or
ether, a subtle element before creation like the
Breath of Brahma,
the substance that permeates the universe
before it begins to break
down into the more finite world. That
idea as expressed through the
dot-pattern was very appealing to
me."
Thus in 1950 Whitney began work on his first
truly personal film,
Yantra, an inspired and arduous project,
which was to consume ten
years before its completion. Drawn
entirely by hand on small filing
cards, it was an attempt to
relate images to Yoga experiences. ". . . A
Yantra is an
instrument designed to curb the psychic forces by
concentrating
them on a pattern, and in such a way that this pattern
becomes
reproduced by the worshiper's visualizing power. It is a
machine
to stimulate inner visualizations, meditations, and experiencees...
when utilized in connection with the practice of Yoga the
contents of the Yantra diagram represent those stages of
consciousness
that lead inward from the everyday state of naive
ARTSCILAB 2001
224 Expanded Cinema
James Whitney: Lapis. 1963-66.
16mm.
Color. 10 min. "A mandala
that revolves eternally like the
heavens."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 225
Lapis: ". . . they manifest as though
out of the air itself, gathering and
converging around a
central sphere
... revolving with implacable grace
against
the eerie drone of the
tamboura."
ARTSCILAB 2001
226 Expanded Cinema
ignorance through the degrees of Yoga
experience to the realization
of the Universal Self."26
During most of the ten-year period in which
James Whitney was
laboriously producing the intricate images of
Yantra by hand, his
brother had developed the analogue computer,
which could produce
images of far greater complexity in a
fraction of the time. AfterYantra
was finished the brothers
assembled another mechanical analogue
computer, and it was on
this device thatLapis was created.
In general, the term Lapis held the same
meaning for the ancient
alchemists that the mandala holds for
the Lamaist, Tantrist, Taoist,
Hindu: a kind of "philosopher's
stone" or aid to meditation. In
alchemical times, and later
during the period of the Rosicrucians, the
Lapis was felt to
contain a vital force or mystic power, a center of
knowledge.
Hermes asserted that the Lapis was composed of body,
soul, and
spirit, “… that thing midway between perfect and imperfect
bodies." Gnostic philosophy suggests that the way to the power
of
the Lapis is by a spiral or circumambulation, specifically,
according
to Jung, "a mandala that revolves eternally like the
heavens."
Whitney began work on Lapis in 1963 and
completed it in 1966.
Much of this time was consumed, however,
in the construction of the
analogue computer that programmed the
extremely intricate
mandala-like structure of the film. Thus
cybernetics assisted Whitney
to return through the centuries to
the ancient practice of syncretism
in his search for a more
total vision.
The opening sequence ofLapis is startlingly
beautiful: a pure white
frame into which, very slowly, moves a
ring of thousands of tiny
particles. They manifest as though out
of the air itself, gathering and
converging around a central
sphere of light, gradually tightening,
growing more complex,
until they become a vast syncretistic mandala
of intricate
geometrical patterns. These configurations defy definition
as
they revolve with implacable grace against the eerie drone
of a
tamboura.
26 Heinrich Zimmer, Myths and Symbols in
Indian Art and Civilization (Harper Torchbook;
New York: Harper
& Row, 1946), pp. 141-142.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 227
To achieve this effect, Whitney hand-painted
glass plates with
fields of dot-patterns that began sparsely and
collected into high
concentration toward the center. These were
placed on rotating
tables beneath a vertically-mounted camera.
The tables spun on
their own axes while simultaneously revolving
around another axis,
and at the same time moving horizontally
across camera range.
At first the huge mandala is a monotone beige
against a white
field, then it becomes a glowing red-orange and
crystallizes into
thousands of intricate modules, each
containing a green floral
pattern inside a diamond
configuration. Forms take shape and
vanish as the whole revolves
majestically, its movement accentuated
by the sonorous drone of
the tamboura. Suddenly the image
disintegrates into a loose
cloud of red, yellow, and orange particles
that solidify into
the word Lapis. This bursts apart slowly as the first
beats of
the tabla are heard and a raga begins.
The mandala draws away from the camera until
its individual
sections are no longer distinguishable from the
whole. It dissolves
into a blue multispoked mandala in the
center of a black void,
revolving and spewing out showers of
fine sparklike particles that
fade and vanish. One seems to
detect snowflake crystals, diamonds,
molecular clusters— but
they're transformed before the mind's eye
can grasp their
trajectory. Later we see starbursts throwing off
showers of
light, spinning around dark centers. A repeat of the
opening
sequence is done in blue and black— thousands of tiny blue
particles slowly collecting around a central vortex. For a split
second
the particles freeze into diamond-like crystals and then
melt back
into the syncretistic field. A vibrant orange sun
shimmers in blackness,
surrounded by a corona of concentric
rings, each enclosing a
peacock floral pattern.
Finally the original beige mandala reappears
and spins rapidly
through the various configurations we've seen
throughout the film.
Two translucent globes within a blinding
white center begin to stretch
apart diagonally across the frame,
creating a sense of enormous
tension and stress, shimmering,
pulsating, until the final blackout.
This was Whitney's way of
suggesting what he calls "the last
breaking or snapping, unable
to reach Samadhi. That was because
Lapis was near the end of
what I could do. The machine restricted
me; my fantasies
couldn't flow. Of course we're in the most primitive
ARTSCILAB 2001
228 Expanded Cinema
stages of cybernetic art, but my inner
imagery gave way at the same
time that my outer ability to
control the instrument broke down."
Whitney finds more than a casual resemblance
between Eastern
philosophy and modern science, and suggests that
this confluence
may have a profound effect on conventional
notions of art. "Only to a
person who has expanded his
consciousness," he says, "is ordinary
experience expanded. So
it's exciting where art is going in this
respect. Art and
science are getting much closer to Eastern thought.
But you'll
always find those who seek to go beyond any language.
Those are
the people whose eyes and ears are really open. But they
will
come back, and they will be totally open and very sympathetic to
what the artist is doing, but they won't have the energy to
remain
within that confine of art. Artists must in order to
create. The other
man will see art as the great play and fun
that it is, but he won't be
able to put that same sort of
intensity into it as the artist does. The
artist, in a sense,
must keep a lot of ignorance. To stay in the world
you have to
preserve a certain amount of ignorance.
"I certainly do not feel that art is dead.
But when you're really
involved with the thing you want to
experience, you stop conceiving
it. Art finally becomes a
barrier to accepting what is. Art stays within
its closed circle
and reality never does. Art is all symbols of reality.
Symbols
are never going to free you. But it would be foolish to say
'Stop making art.' That's not what I'm saying. One should be
aware
of its limitations, that's all. This must be what they had
in mind when
they said: 'Thou shalt not create graven images.”
The Younger Whitneys: Children of the New Age
"An inadvertent spin-off from technology will
transform man into a transcendental
being. Nothing we can
conceive now will give us a clue to what that spin-off will
be.
But I suspect that vision will play an important role. The eye will
have a lot to
do with it."
JOHN WHITNEY, JR.
If the Starchild Embryo of 2001 were to grow
up as a human he'd
probably feel quite at home with the Whitney
brothers. From earliest
childhood the future has been their way
of life. John, Jr., Michael,
and Mark all were born well after
World War II. They were raised in
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 229
an environment of science, technology, the
arts, Eastern philosophy.
John Cage, Buckminster Fuller, and
Jordan Belson have been their
houseguests. Their eyes and ears
have been nourished by higher
orders of sight and sound than
most of us are able to conceive. At
eighteen John was filming
slit-scan sequences, several years before
Stanley Kubrick
discovered the technique. "I surpassed Dad when I
was about
eleven," says John, who built his father's computer
camera and
wired an analogue computer at an age when most boys
find model
airplanes challenging.
In 1965 the Whitney living room was
transformed into a multiple-
projection environment with seven
screens and ten projectors
mounted on two levels. At that time
John was eighteen, Michael was
seventeen, and Mark was fourteen.
And what were they thinking?
MICHAEL: We were anxious to get away from the
limitations of a
single screen. Obviously the answer was
multiple screens. As very
young children we were exposed to the
films our father and Jim
had made. All of our lives we've been
exposed to that kind of non-
realist material. We didn't try to
interpret them. We just accepted
them as films without any other
hangups. People call our films
"abstract" but they're not.
They're concrete films. "Abstract" means
to make an abstraction
from something concrete, but our films are
concrete. I can
remember when all the other kids in the
neighborhood would go to
the movies every Saturday afternoon
and our parents wouldn't let
us go. There was an obvious reason
of course: those movies were
absolute trash. John and I were
thinking in terms of
"performance" films: not just one strictly-
composed film but
multi-images whose relationships could be
improvised in real
time. You would "play" as you felt. We began to
envision
encompassing other art forms. We had ideas about
cartridge loops
and spontaneously interchangeable films. Some
system that would
make possible a real-time film image
composition, being able to
change a cartridge so you could
compose spontaneously.
Also during this period, while Michael was
studying calculus and
physics, John was completing his first
computer film Byjina Flores, a
pidgin-Spanish satirical
translation of "vagina flowers." Though he
ARTSCILAB 2001
230 Expanded Cinema
has since disowned this film, it remains a
beautiful optical
experience, one of the few movies that might
stand comparison (in
concept if not in fact) to the Op Art of
Vasarely or Bridget Riley.
John's father had devised a method of
scanning an image through a
slit, which would guide the phasing
relationship between the image
and the camera. This was
essentially the method used by Doug
Trumbull several years later
for the Stargate Corridor of2001.
In Byjina Flores, filamented, fluted panels
of neon-bright red,
orange, and yellow shift rhythmically across
the range of vision to
produce weird perspectival illusions and
kinetic trajectories. Objects,
which seem to be giant walls of
lightbulbs, warp, wobble, and dance,
alternating colors
stroboscopically. The effect approximates a kind of
sculpture in
time, a kinetic molding of the temporal as well as the
optical
experience.
JOHN: It was an overall pattern of moiré dots
moving with a scan-
line which guided the phasing between the
moiré and the lens. The
artwork was trucking horizontally while
the zoom was moving in
and out to achieve the illusion of
curvature, warps, and
perspectives. My idea was to work with
illusions of color and retinal
persistence of images. There's
one point where it only slightly
works as I intended, so the
film becomes a total failure for me.
We've hardly begun to
scratch the surface of possibilities with the
slit-scan. The
computerized optical printer I've built will scan
consecutive
frames of a whole motion-picture sequence. I could've
had the
whole 2001 setup reduced down to a small panel and
scanned it on
our computer and come up with the same effect. In
the making of
Byjina Flores and all our analogue films there are
parallels
with the way one programs a digital system, that is,
determining
variable values in a system by setting cam rates and
directions
which are linked differentially to related functions and
amplitudes.
From September 1966, to September 1967, the
brothers staged
several multi-screen environmental shows across
the country. For a
Grateful Dead concert in San Francisco they
worked with Tom
DeWitt and Scott Bartlett, using eight or nine
screens at angles to
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 231
each other. At the Center for the Study of
Democratic Institutions in
Santa Barbara, they staged an
environmental presentation using a
truckload of equipment
including speakers, ten projectors, and
dozens of film loops for
projection on five screens that they constructed
at the site. In
1967 they were given a building on the
grounds of the Monterey
Pop Festival and trained nine projectors on
three screens. A day
after the festival closed they were in Aspen,
Colorado, showing
their work at an international design conference.
By this time John, Jr., had made more than
5,000 feet of computer
film out of which came the
extraordinarily beautiful, and now famous,
triple-screen film
that remains untitled (see color plates). It was
premiered at
Expo '67 in Montreal and later that year was shown at
the Museum
of Modern Art in New York. The film is a sequential
triptych: it
develops in time and space, exploring the relationships of
both
form and color, visual tensions, rhythmic modes, and optical
illusions in a way that relates each screen to the other two
with
flawless exactitude.
It is among the few independently-produced
multiple-projection
films to justify its own multiplicity.
Whereas most multiple projection
is gratuitous and arbitrary,
the Whitney film is a cohesive whole,
each element accentuating
and complementing the other two in
ways that make the experience
incomplete without all three parts.
The flanking images are
identical, though reversed, so as to frame
the center screen
symmetrically, and the close synchronization of
form and color
among the screens demands highly controlled
projection
conditions.
Like most Whitney films the triple-screen
film is set to an East
Indian sound track. It begins with
circular arrangements of rose
stems, the halves of one circle
split between the two end screens in
burnt sienna, the center
screen yellow ochre with a complete but
smaller circle of stems
revolving at a faster rate than its
counterparts. What we are
seeing is actually two views of one
configuration divided into a
triad. As the stems revolve, the colors
change from warm yellows
to cool violets.
This becomes a vortex display of concentric
circles and squares
endlessly moving into the frames and
diminishing into infinity only to
be succeeded by other layers
of circles and squares of different
colors moving in unison. In
this sequence the image split between
the two end screens is
different from the central image in color, but
identical in
design. Once again, the flanking images are larger than
ARTSCILAB 2001
232 Expanded Cinema
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 233
the center image and, moving in precise
synchronization, create an
optical tension that induces a strong
kinetic empathy in the viewer.
The colors alternate between
cerulean blue, Mars red, rose madder,
and black. A sense of
tension and vertigo is established through
manipulation of form
and motion from screen to screen, while simultaneous
color
changes create their own "narrative" in still another
nonverbal
dimension.
GENE: What particular aesthetic, if any, did
you follow in making this
film?
JOHN: When I was eighteen I was drawn deeply
into Eastern
thought, Jungian psychology, the subconscious. When
I think
about the time when I made that footage— trying to
understand
what happened— I became merely an instrumentality in
tune with a
force, a creative energy force which expressed
itself. I was able to
make the films without thinking too much
about what I was doing.
There was just this continuous flow of
energy between me, the
machine, and the images. But the machine
became transparent. I
don't think I was conscious of any
systematic manipulation or
exploration of a geometrical theme,
though it is undeniably in the
film. I was able to be sort of
comprehensive when I was making the
images, whereas when I made
the machine I had to be a
mechanical engineer, an electronics
engineer, and an optical
engineer.
The relatively rectangular imagery of the
previous sequence now
becomes a series of ornate, almost
baroque, circular forms, floral
patterns, and interconnected
rings, all moving inward at various
rates to vanish as other
rings appear, and so on. The colors at this
point are
extraordinarily florid, ranging the entire spectrum in
kaleidoscopic brilliance and mosaic complexity. The images at
times
John Whitney, Jr.: Untitled. 1967.16mm.
Triple-projection. Color. 17 min. "A sense of
vertigo is
established... the images at times resemble gears, flowers, cosmic
configurations..." Shown are two three-screen "frames" from the
film.
ARTSCILAB 2001
234 Expanded Cinema
resemble gears, flowers, cosmic
configurations, and dancing optical
ellipses.
There is a brief pause and the second
portion, or "movement," of
the film begins. Throughout this
section the center screen explores
variations on the square, the
circle, and the triangle while the
flanking screens run through
a dazzling repertoire of optical effects.
These include
mandala-like configurations around which sweep
bright fingers of
light in mauve and violet, bouncing curvilinear dish-
shapes,
starburst clusters, and clocklike metronomes in flawless
synchronization with the music. The archetypal mandala symbolism
of "squaring the circle" assumes dominance in the final moments
of
the film as all three screens accelerate in a symphony of
color,
design, and motion.
Today John and Michael Whitney have become
computer
programmers, working with digital computers in addition
to the
computerized, hybridized optical printer and the analogue
computer.
Like John Stehura, whose work we shall discuss later,
Michael
Whitney is involved in formulating new computer-language
systems
specifically for graphics problems. He speaks of
"graphic integrity,"
and of a visual language that would
approach the purity and
abstraction of music. Like his father
and brother, he maintains that
such a quantum leap in the
manipulation of visual graphics is only
now possible because of
the digital computer and its unprecedented
powers.
One of the first efforts toward this goal is
Binary Bit Patterns, a
dazzling exploration of archetypal
geometrical configurations that
approaches déjá vu. The film was
made on a PFR-3 programmable
film recorder manufactured by
Information International, Inc., in
Santa Monica, California.
The PFR-3 is a specialized visual subsystem
driven by the
Digital Company's small PDP-9 computer. It is
a hybridized
microfilm plotting system built specifically for reading
film
into the computer or recording information on motion-picture
film. There are 16,000 possible xy coordinate points on the
three-
inch face of the PFR-3's cathode-ray tube. Produced with a
program
developed by one of the firm's employees, Michael
Whitney'sBinary
Bit Patterns provides a deep emotional
experience despite the fact
that it has less kinetic activity
and less image variation than the films
of his brother or
father.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 235
Michael Whitney: Binary Bit Patterns.
1969. 16mm. Color. 3 min. "Squadrons
of polyhedral modules
come pulsating
out of a black void..."
ARTSCILAB 2001
236 Expanded Cinema
Perhaps metamorphosis best describes the
effect of this film, in
which quiltlike tapestries of polyhedral
and crystalline figures pulsate
and multiply with some kind of
universal logic. In effect, if not style, it
is reminiscent of
Norman McLaren's Mosaic and Brakhage's The
horseman, the woman,
and the moth. In the McLaren film, geometrical
clusters of
dot-patterns collect and multiply with mathematical
precision.
In Binary Bit Patterns there is the same sense of
mathematical
play although it is not as discrete as the McLaren film;
shapes
are always permutating into other shapes, and an ornate,
almost
baroque, visual style softens any mathematical dryness. It
resembles the Brakhage film because of its approximation to what
Stan calls "closed-eye vision," the patterns we see when our
eyes
are shut. These ornate snowflake crystals flash and
multiply before
us with the same kind of ghostlike evasiveness
as the colors that
flicker across the retina of our mind's eye.
Squadrons of polyhedral
modules come pulsating out of a black
void, growing and multiplying
until the screen is a tapestry of
intricate, ever-changing image-color
fields. The impact is
enhanced considerably by an extraordinary
guitar-tape
composition by Whitney and Charles Villiers. Michael not
only
talks about music, he composes and plays it on acoustical and
electric guitars. As with Belson's work, it is difficult to
distinguish
whether one is seeing, hearing, or feelingBinary Bit
Patterns.
Even without sound, however, the film is
extraordinarily hypnotic.
The boys speak of such imagery as
possibly developing into a kind
of "kinetic wallpaper," which
could be rear-projected onto the
translucent walls of a room at
close range in ultra-high resolution
using large format film and
special lenses. One would live in a home
whose very walls were
alive with silent kinetic activity— not the
shallow flickering
of present-day color organs but rather "visual
music" of the
highest graphic integrity and psychic relevance.
GENE: Do you think of the future in
connection with computers?
JOHN: Well let's divorce the future
from technology and talk about
human values. I see the nature of things
today in the world and
there seems to be a strong force of
discontent and evil. And I
wonder how can there not be some
counterbalancing force,
something that can apply itself to the spirit
of man? And I begin
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 237
The Whitney brothers. Left to right:
John, Jr.,
Mark, Michael. Photo: Gene Youngblood.
to think about what is the meaning of the
film work I'm doing? I
believe it's possible that an inadvertent
spin-off from technology will
transform man into a
transcendental being. There isn't much we
can conceive now that
can give us a clue to how it will come about.
But I suspect that
vision will play an important role. The eye will
have a lot to
do with it. It could conceivably be some external thing,
which
metaphysically will affect the mind and cause some
transcendental experience. So with that in mind I've been
thinking
of ways to integrate the realist image into the
nonobjective image
so that a synthesis will evolve, a cinematic
experience which might
contribute to an evolutionary
transformation of man's thought
processes.
MICHAEL: It's very effective to use a realist
image for its
nonobjective values. You're using it for its form,
and if the form
happens to be human it's evocative and easily
digested. The whole
idea is to work with the imagery and to
develop total and complete
control through structuring, once you
have the ability to control the
problems with the equipment. Man
has not yet learned to master
ARTSCILAB 2001
238 Expanded Cinema
tools that will express as much eloquence and
latitude as his
imagination.
JOHN: I'm not suggesting that the films as we
know them today will
be the releasing force. We don't know how
to integrate realist and
nonobjective images effectively yet.
But I think our computerized
optical printer will help show the
way. The use of the realist image
is just a basis, a starting
point. Working with optical scanning you
transform the images,
and this seems to be a key to bringing
nonobjective and realist
imagery together. And why bring them
together? Because it may
lead to new insights and new
experience.
GENE: What sort of new experience?
JOHN: Well of course I don't know. But I've
been thinking about
dreams. Why is it difficult for a person to
understand his own
dreams? Why don't people know what their
dreams are telling
them? Why does a person have to go to someone
else— an
analyst— to know about his own personal dreams, which
someone
else can't possibly understand? Why don't dreams reveal
themselves
to us naturally as part of daily experience? Now
maybe this
"new experience" I'm wondering about will be the
point in evolution
when man reaches that level of sophistication
as a sentient being. I
believe the analyst is serving a function
now which won't be
needed in the future. Everything we know now
in the "rational"
world will be subsumed in the new knowledge or
wisdom of the
future. I think parapsychology, extrasensory
perception, and
related phenomena certainly cannot be ignored as
possibilities. So
in terms of our film work, the only way it may
have some relevance
to future consciousness is through problems
of formal design. Not
the technical things we're doing, just the
design problems. In other
words, sparking an inner revolution
through exterior manipulation.
The high state we achieve through
LSD or marijuana today is
insightful to the extent that it may
be similar to what man will feel
on a daily basis in the future
without exterior manipulation. This
state has already happened
in the East— not in the Occident
because it's not part of our
heritage— but it has happened with the
Yogis and so on, and it's
coming to the West through technology.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 239
GENE: Perhaps this simultaneous awareness of
inner and outer
space is the beginning of that new experience
you're talking about,
John. A new attitude toward experience.
JOHN: And space. And time. And motion. And
the speed of light.
GENE: The Uncertainty Principle becoming a
certainty.
JOHN: So I've built this machine, which will be the
cohesive force in
our future work. We're amassing film. The
machine will bring it all
together and also will generate its
own imagery. It's the beginning
of an application of technology
to an area where it's never been
applied. Bringing together a
whole number of disciplines. So, as
sources of imagery we have
the printer itself, we have the
analogue computer, we have
live-action films— which is where our
brother Mark is proving
very effective, as a person able to go out
into the world and
get something meaningful on film. And then
Michael who, from his
studies in physics and calculus, has some
exciting ideas of ways
to use a digital computer with images.
John Stehura: The Aesthetics of Machine
Language
"Studying computer language leads the artist
back to the paintbrush— but a
computerized paintbrush."
John Stehura's spectacular film Cybernetik
5.3 (see color plates)
combines computer graphics with organic
live-action photography to
create a new reality, a Third World
Reality, that is both haunting and
extraordinarily beautiful.
Cybernetik makes use of realist imagery for
its nonobjective
qualities and thus impinges directly upon the
emotions more
successfully than any computer film discussed in this
book.
However, Stehura considers the film only an
"incidental test" in an
ongoing experiment with computer
graphics that has occupied most
of his time for the last nine
years. Like Michael Whitney, Stehura is
interested in addressing
the computer directly through graphic
images rather than using
mathematics to achieve graphics and thus
becoming enmeshed in a
"number game."
Cybernetik is unique also in that it was
constructed from semi-
random image-generation techniques similar
to Michael Noll's
Gaussian-Quadratic figures. Whereas most of
the computer films
ARTSCILAB 2001
240 Expanded Cinema
John Stehura: Cybernetik 5.3.1965-69.
16mm. Color. 8 min. A series of basic
image forms before the
addition of
color, showing random character of
permutations.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 241
discussed so far are characterized by
mathematical precision,
Cybernetik exudes a strong feeling for
the uncontrolled, the
uncontrollable, the inconceivable.
Stehura began studying computer programming
at UCLA in 1961
when he was eighteen years old. He became quite
conversant with
computer languages and in 1965 programmed the
first images that
were to become the film Cybernetik 5.3 in its
completed version
some four years later. It is the only computer
film Stehura has
produced so far, having spent most of his time
developing a special
"metalanguage," which he calls "Model
Eight," designed specifically
for modeling computer music and
graphics systems.
Cybernetik originally was to have a computer
sound track
generated by the same program, but Stehura found the
directly
corresponding track inappropriate and later set the
film to Tod
Dockstader's Quatermass, a chilling otherworldly
suite of organized
electronic sound by one of America's
least-known but most unusual
artists. The result is a film
strongly reminiscent of 2001 in the sense
that it creates an
overwhelming atmosphere of some mysterious,
transcendental
intelligence at work in the universe.
Throughout the film, complex clusters of
geometrical forms and
lines whirl, spin, and fly in
three-dimensional space. Showers of
parallel lines come
streaking out of infinity. Crescents and
semicircles develop
dangling appendages and then expand until
they no longer exist.
Whirling isometric skeletal structures permutate
into quadrant
figures, polygons, rotating multiple-axis tetrahedrons,
expanding fanlike disks, and endless coils.
These images are neon-bright in alternating
blue, red, orange, and
green. They vibrate rapidly as they take
shape and disintegrate. The
staccato, spiraling, buzzing rumble
of Dockstader's sound
complements the kinetic activity with its
own sense of acoustical
space. This storm of geometrical fantasy
is superimposed over a
star-spangled image of the solar system
in emerald green.
STEHURA: I programmed Cybernetik in Fortran,
and specified about
twenty fields so that images would
metamorphose into other orders
of design. In writing the program I defined a
"field" as a point in
space having a certain effect on anything
entering its area. For
example, the sun is a field. That was the
basic idea. I made them
very specific. I said when the image gets
near this mathematical
ARTSCILAB 2001
242 Expanded Cinema
point it will either get brighter, or darker,
or be altered in such and
such a way, like enlarge, or burst
into points, or diminish into
infinity. So that's the reason for
the randomness. When the images
go into the metamorphosing
fields, their mathematical order, while
specified, becomes too
complex and appears to be random. Once
all the rules in the
program were specified, I simply turned it on to
see what would
happen. If I liked the results, I'd leave it. At one
point I
tried to trace back how the computer generated certain
forms but
it was becoming too complex and pointless.
GENE: How were the color separations and
superimpositions
programmed?
JOHN: The basic imagery was computed on an
IBM 7094 digital
computer at UCLA before we had any type of
on-line graphic
display equipment. So I ran the computer for
seven or eight hours
and took the digital tapes to General
Dynamics in San Diego
where they had a Stromberg-Carlson 4020
Microfilm Plotter.
Initially I specified how many movies I
wanted and how long I
wanted each one to be. The program
indirectly specified color
based on the form or position of a
figure. The output went onto
three plot tapes which were
converted into three pieces of blackand-
white film. These pieces
were used to mask primary colors in
a contact printer. There was
a piece of black-and-white film to
represent the color red, a
piece to represent the color green, and
one for blue. Then I
processed that footage with the contact printer
for the colors
specified.
A fascinating aspect of this film is that it
traps the viewer into
expecting mathematically logical
transformations by developing in
that manner for several
minutes, and suddenly the forms explode or
behave quite
unpredictably. Once this effect has been fully explored,
the
solar system fades into a fish-eye image of people's faces and
other representational imagery distorted, however, almost to the
point of nonobjectivity. This sequence is printed in
high-contrast,
bas-relief positive-negative color reversals, in
the manner of Pat
O'Neill's 7362. In addition, the images are
speeded so that a
frenetic, visually distorted atmosphere is
generated, suggesting
extra-terrestrial creatures or
anthropomorphic entities. The whirling
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 243
multicolored geometrical images move across
this bizarre background
as though one were peering into a new
dimension of
existence. Dockstader's organized sound reaches a
crescendo of
chaotic dissonance as the final images of the film
fade and
disintegrate into nothingness. The sense of dynamic
kinetic activity
has been so powerful that this abrupt halt
leaves the viewer
suspended and breathless.
STEHURA: In writing programs in computer
languages such as
Fortran I've worked with about five
parameterized models with
which you can specify designs
numerically. One is the "mosaic"
scheme, which is the style
developed for the Beflix language.
You're building things with
squares. Your basic figure is the square
and you're building
patterns and shading things with squares. The
result is a mosaic
pattern with chains of alternatives. The second
scheme is the
field model which I used for Cybernetik, in which
you set
objects or points in space and by controlling the strength of
fields you produce image forms. A third scheme is a mathematical
model of your arm as it would be used to draw figures. You
define
angles, specify arcs and curves, and work within those
parameters. The fourth scheme I worked with is based on the
deflection principle. Your mathematical model is patterned after
a
room or enclosure into which a ball is fired at high speed,
bouncing
from wall to wall. You plot paths of the trajectories,
angles of
deflection, distances traveled, the shape of the
environment in
which the projectile is moving. All this is
simulated mathematically
and was interesting because it
presented form as the space
between objects or containers.
Finally there's the scheme I call
"masking," which is similar to
the idea of mattes in conventional
filmmaking. The basic idea
here is that you don't have a positive
figure you're drawing,
but you have masks or shapes which hold
back light. You define a
form and its motion, and you use that form
to contain or exclude
another image. It's like a cutout or
translucency. You can treat
computer graphics in that way.
GENE: Where has all this experimentation led
you in terms of using
the computer as an artistic tool?
ARTSCILAB 2001
244 Expanded Cinema
JOHN: I discovered that working with program
languages to produce
graphics is rather hopeless. They're really
designed for playing with
numbers. A general problem with
computer languages is that you
get into simulating reality.
That's the trip physicists and
meteorologists are into. It's
close to their way of thinking andtheir
problems, but I think
it's a waste of time in computer graphics or
music. My
explorations in computer language led me back to
conventional
animation, back to the paintbrush— a computerized
paintbrush. So
the next level, after playing with these language or
parameter
systems, was to establish another level of control over
the
computer. The idea of building a metasystem or a control
system
to control control systems appeared very interesting to me.
So
over the last four years I've developed a metalanguage which I
call "Model Ei ght" since it's the eighth approach to these
systems.
It consists of a set of operators to work on one-,
two-, or three-
dimensional patterns: sensory patterns, music,
drawings, motion,
and so on. It's not a computer language which
is operated one
point at a time, but rather functions
nonsequentially on large blocks
of data. My idea was to develop
a language which would
synthesize all the schemes I mentioned
earlier so that, for
instance, in terms of work involved,
whereas it took a couple of
years to devise "Model 5.3" to make
Cybernetik, my feeling was
that it could be done in a couple of
hours.
GENE: What sort of input-output situations
are involved?
JOHN: Well, the two input systems I've found
most advantageous
are the optical-scanner and the light pen,
drawing directly on the
CRT. I have three modes of operation
with the scanner: first, a
point-by-point scan like a television
scan starting at one corner and
moving across, and you get a
list of intensities which describe a
picture, or just certain
areas or colors. You can label it and
manipulate the whole thing
or just that part. Second is anisoline
type of scan, which is
what you see in weather maps: circles within
circles which
indicate certain degrees of intensity and so on. Then,
third,
there's the situation in which you start out with an isoline
approach but produce lines which fill certain areas, and that
output
can appear on the CRT or be further modified.
GENE: What about drawing with the light pen?
I understand that
some artists, like Norman McLaren, have found
this rather unsatisfactory.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 245
JOHN: Well, the light pen is a crude drawing
instrument, it's true.
You can't do many subtle things, the
resolution is low, and the way
you operate you're always
stopping, waiting for "INTERRUPT," for
the computer to accept
your line, or the accuracy always seems to
be off, but it does
have certain advantages related to large-volume
image
production. One of them is that you can input information
that's
more specific to the way the computer's operating. You put in
a
point or a line at a time, and by remembering what you're doing
you can control a lot of image transformations. Representational
forms are almost impossible to program with computer languages,
and are extremely difficult for a computer to process. But by
taking
the alternate route, by drawing representational forms
with the light
pen you've given the computer graphic information
which can be
simply transformed according to simple motion and
shading
procedures. If you want to draw a dragon, for example,
and have it
transformed into a person, you simply draw the head
and type in
"HEAD" and then you draw the head of the man and
label it
"HEAD" and the computer operates on it to do the
transformation.
You can label portions as you draw to control
the flow of the
transformation. You can transform anything you
can draw into
anything else. And in this way you bypass much of
computer
language specification.
GENE: What relationship does "Model Eight"
have to all this? What
is the control situation?
JOHN: Drawing is a specific operation just as
scanning or
projections. With the language aspect you can
specify a fish-eye
projection or a projection on a certain plane
and you supply the
parameters. Now, after I've passed an image
through a simulated
fish-eye projection, what I want to do is
start shading the forms in a
different style. So you could call
on a surfacing operator which will
fill in your image with
colors or mosaics. Now, my language isn't
fixed. One "word"
doesn't mean one fixed thing in one fixed
context. For example,
you have a mathematical model of an arm
movement and you tell
the computer to swing the arm in a 360degree
arc to define a
circle. The basis of this operation is a sine
wave to produce
the smooth circular form. The fact that you have a
sine wave is
specified, even if by default. The output of this opera
ARTSCILAB 2001
246 Expanded Cinema
tion is a circle, a set of points. And as far
as I'm concerned it's a
wave form just as legitimate as the sine
wave. So you could run this
form back into the same particular
operator and tell the computer to
use this form— not the sine or
cosine, but this form it has just
described. The same recursive
form applies to the other operations.
For instance, you could
take projections of projections, use an object
as an element to
shade a surface and so on.
Stan VanDerBeek: Mosaics of the Mind
"We're just fooling around on the outer edges
of our own sensibilities. The new
technologies will open higher
levels of psychic communication and neurological
referencing."
For the last five years Stan VanDerBeek has
been working
simultaneously with live-action and animated films,
single and
multiple-projection formats, intermedia events, video
experiments,
and computer graphics. Clearly a Renaissance Man,
VanDerBeek
has been a vital force in the convergence of art and
technology,
displaying a visionary's insight into the cultural
and psychological
implications of the Paleocybernetic Age.
VanDerBeek has produced approximately ten
computer films in
collaboration with Kenneth Knowlton of Bell
Telephone Laboratories
in New Jersey. They are descriptively
titled Poem Fields, One
through Eight, plus Collisdeoscope and a
tenth film unfinished as of
this writing. The term Poem Field
indicates the visual effect of the
mosaic picture system called
Beflix (derived from "Bell Flicks")
written by Knowlton. A
high-level set of macro-instructions was first
written in
Fortran. The particular translation or definition of this
language for each film is then determined by the subroutine
system
of mosaic composition called Beflix. A new set of Beflix
punch cards
is fed into the Fortran-primed computer (an IBM 7094
interfaced with
an SC-4020 microfilm plotter) for each new movie
desired.
Whereas most other digital computer films are
characterized by
linear trajectile figures moving dynamically in
simulated three-
dimensional space, the VanDerBeek-Knowlton Poem
Fields are
complex, syncretistic two-dimensional tapestries of
geometrical
configurations in mosaic patterns. "The mind is a
computer," says
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 247
Computer interpretation of the word
"movies," from a film by Stan VanDerBeek
and Kenneth C.
Knowlton.
VanDerBeek, "not railroad tracks. Human
intelligence functions on
the order of a hundred-thousand
decisions per second." It appears
this brain capacity was a
prime motive in the production of thePoem
Fields, whose
micro-patterns seem to permutate in a constant
process of
metamorphosis which could very likely include a hundred-
thousand
minuscule changes each second.
"The present state of design of graphics
display systems,"
VanDerBeek explains, "is to integrate small
points of light turned on
or off at high speeds. A picture is
'resolved' from the mosaic points of
light." The artist seems to
feel that this process bears some
physiognomic similarities to
human perception. "The eye," he notes,
"is a mosaic of rods and
cones."
ARTSCILAB 2001
248 Expanded Cinema
Variations of the Beflix technique of
mosaic
image-making, from computer films by Stan
VanDerBeek
and Kenneth C. Knowlton.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 249
The early Poem Fields were investigations of
calligraphic
relationships between dogs and alphabetic
characters integrated into
fields of geometrical patterns
constantly evolving into new forms.
The most famous of these is
Man and His World (1967), a title piece
for an exhibit at Expo
'67.
Variations on the mosaic field became more
complex with
successive experiments, until simulated
three-dimensional depth
was achieved in the form of
infinitely-repeated modular units in
perspective. It is
immediately obvious that these films would be
prohibitively
tedious and time-consuming to do through conventional
animation
techniques. "Because of their high speeds of calculation
and
display," writes Knowlton, "the computer and automatic film
recorder make feasible the production of some kinds of films
that
previously would have been far too expensive or difficult.
In addition,
the speed, ease, and economy of computer animation
permit the
moviemaker to take several tries at a scene—
producing a whole
family of film clips — from which he chooses
the most appealing
result, a luxury never before possible."27
The more recent Beflix films have abandoned
the original
calligraphic patterns for highly complex Rorschach
constellations of
stunning beauty. They actually began with a
film produced by two
other scientists at Bell Telephone, B.
Julesz and C. Bosche, for use
in experiments with human vision
and perception. This involved
semirandom generation of graphic
"noise," whose patterns were
reflected several times to produce
intricate mandala grids
resembling Persian carpets and snowflake
crystals.
"We're now working with variations on the
Beflix system that
involves secondary systems," VanDerBeek
explained. "It goes
through two levels: first Beflix, then
computerizing and quantizing
that level. It's something similar
to what Ken Knowlton and Leon
Harmon did with
pictures-within-pictures. We're trying to do that
cinematically."
The Poem Fields are filmed in
black-and-white, with color added
later through a special
optical process that permits color gradations
and increments
almost as complex as the forms themselves.
27 Kenneth C. Knowlton, "Computer Animated
Movies,"Cybernetic Serendipity, a special
issue of Studio
International, ed. Jasia Reichardt (London, September, 1968), pp.
67-68.
ARTSCILAB 2001
250 ExpandedCinema
Peter Kamnitzer: Pre-Experiencing Alternative
Futures
"We would like to put the researcher,
designer, decision-maker or the public at
large in an
environment where they could be exposed to what various futures
may look like. We will do this with computer simulation, which I
believe will trigger
the next creative leap in the human brain."
So far we have restricted our discussion to
the computers and
computer output subsystems most likely to be
accessible to the
filmmaker with luck. Furthermore we have been
concerned primarily
with purely aesthetic applications of these
techniques, or what I like
to call "computer art for the
computer's sake." The limitations of
these systems should be
obvious by now.
We have seen that in order to obtain
computerized representational
imagery it is necessary in most
cases to begin with some sort
of representational input
(physical scale models or photographs,
etc.), which are then
scanned or translated by the computer through
optical-pickup
devices, servo-driven television cameras or film-
storage
systems. In fact the most spectacular films discussed so
far—
Lapis, Cybernetik 5.3, Permutations, and the Whitney
triple-
screen film— were heavily augmented through conventional
film-
processing techniques.
Furthermore, the impact of these films is
wholly visual or
experiential, with conceptual appreciation of
the computer's role
reduced to a minimum. If we can say that a
conventional film is
"cinematic" only to the extent that it does
not rely on elements of
literature or theatre, we must therefore
say that a computer film is
not fully "computerized" until it is
relatively free from conventional
film-making techniques.
With this in mind we might better appreciate
Peter Kamnitzer's
City-Scape, a film in which no
representational imagery existed
before it was produced by the
computer. The computer drew the city
strictly from coded
mathematical input in the same way that the
Whitneys'
geometrical forms are generated from polar equations.
The
software and hardware requirements to achieve this, however,
are
extremely sophisticated and expensive. Viewed merely as an
animated film, City-Scape leaves much to be desired. Compared to
Yellow Submarine, for example, it is like the earliest tintype
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 251
Peter Kamnitzer: City-Scape. 1968.
16mm. Color. 10 min. Made at the
Guidance and Control
Division of
NASA's Manned Spacecraft Center,
Houston, Texas.
Four views of the
imaginary city.
ARTSCILAB 2001
252 Expanded Cinema
compared to laser holography— on a purely
visual level, that is. But
City-Scape is deceptive. First of
all, it is not an animated film in the
sense that most of the
computer films we've been discussing are
animated. The color CRT
display, produced through electron-
scanning similar to
conventional television, was recorded on color
movie film in
real-time, on-line operation.
The $2,000,000 computer, NASA II, and its
visual simulation
subsystem was developed by General Electric
for the Guidance and
Control Division of NASA's Manned
Spacecraft Center in Houston. It
has been used for more than ten
years to simulate conditions of
lunar landings. Kamnitzer, head
of the Urban Laboratory at the
University of California at Los
Angeles, collaborated with GE and
NASA for nearly two years to
convert the equipment into a tool that
also would allow
pre-experiencing of possible environmental
situations here on
earth.
It is rather unlikely that any filmmaker will
have access to such
sophisticated equipment for aesthetic
purposes only. However, as
we have seen, the notion of "art"
increasingly includes ultrasensitive
judgments as to the uses of
technology and scientific information.
Consciously or
unconsciously, we invent the future. And all futures
are
conditional on a present that is conditioned by the past. One way
to be free of past conditioning is to simulate alternative
futures
through the fail-safe power of the digital computer.
This is "art" at the
highest level ever known to man, quite
literally the creation of a new
world imperceptibly gaining on
reality— but not so imperceptibly as
before.
A film like City-Scape adds still another
dimension to the
obsolescence of fiction. Whereas Stan Brakhage
transcends fiction
through mythopoeic manipulation of unstylized
reality, Kamnitzer
creates not myths but facts— obscuring the
boundaries between life
and art with a scientific finality
unequaled in subjective art. Optimum-
probability computerized
visual simulation of future environments is
not limited to
economic, social, or political motivations. The
possibilities
for purely aesthetic exploration are revolutionary and
have yet
to be attempted. City-Scape is the first step toward that
future
time in which artists not only will be the acknowledged
legislators of mankind but literally will determine the meaning
of the
word "man."
In programming City-Scape Kamnitzer was
limited to two hundred
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 253
and forty edges, or points where tangential
planes intersect. Since
an architectural edifice normally has
only twelve edges, the city
could have only twenty edifices.
However, rather than having only
square boxes, Kamnitzer
programmed vertical pilasters and
horizontal lines to generate a
sense of scale per floor. The necessity
of at least two freeways
and one tunnel reduced the city to
approximately five or six
buildings. This information was input to the
computer not as a
drawing to be scanned, but as mathematical
equations of
perspectives describing the transformation of a
numerical model
of a three-dimensional environment onto a two-
dimensional
display or image plane.
The real-time solution of these equations
produced a color CRT
display with six degrees of freedom,
unlimited dynamic range, true
perspective, controlled color and
brightness, and infinite depth of
focus. With three simple
control mechanisms Kamnitzer, seated
before the twenty-one-inch
screen, was able to: (1) stop and start
the forward motion of
the "vehicle" moving through the city; (2)
control the direction
of movement over and under bridges, through
tunnels, around
corners, etc.; and (3) control visual direction so that,
while
the vehicle may be moving north the "driver" may look
northeast,
south, or in any direction without affecting his forward
motion.
Because the environment is stored digitally
in the computer's
memory a true "environmental" sense is
created. That is, the
operator-driver may move into the city
and, after passing one or two
structures, may decide to turn
around and view what in effect has
been "behind" him or
otherwise out of range of the CRT display. This
is done
instantly, with the operator manipulating a lever as the CRT
draws a new perspective in color every twentieth of a second. In
addition, the operator-driver may enter closed spaces, fly into
the air,
and pass or "crash" through environment surfaces—
without
damage, of course, because the crash is only simulated.
Although City-Scape is a color film we have
not used color
illustrations for two reasons. First, the color
is not intended as an
experience in itself, an exploration of
color effects as inCybernetik
or the Whitney films, but rather
as a means of distinguishing the
structures within the city—
i.e., the yellow freeway, the blue freeway,
the green mall, the
gray building, etc. Second, as we already have
noted, a great
deal of image quality is lost when color television
displays are
recorded on color film; the result is a pale washed-out
image
neither so brilliant as the original phosphor, nor so intense as
optically-printed color.
ARTSCILAB 2001
254 Expanded Cinema
As the film begins we are rushing toward the
city's skyline against
the horizon surrounded by a vast green
plain. Once into the city,
various types of movement and
positions are simulated: circling
around the central mall area,
driving up freeway ramps and along
freeways, riding up and down
in an outdoor glass elevator, walking
down corridors of
buildings, looking out windows, flying above the
city in a
helicopter that takes off and lands from a skyscraper
heliport,
the simulation of a drunk driver and his crash into a
swimming
pool, and finally moving through a solid mass, which the
computer translates as a tunnel-like experience.
Only a few minutes have passed before a
strong sense of location
and environment is created, and the
viewer begins to remember
positions of structures not on the
screen. One actually begins to feel
"surrounded" by this city,
though viewing it as if through a porthole.
The true three-point
perspective invests the image with a sense of
actuality even
stronger than in some conventional live-action films.
Kamnitzer
relates: "The on-line experience, the sense of power of
sitting
at the controls, is something very hard to describe. You are
turned on. You are involved." It is an extremely close
interaction
between man and machine. The drunk-driving sequence—
in which
the "vehicle" swerves and careens through streets
before plunging
into an empty swimming pool— was done
specifically to illustrate the
immediacy and plasticity of the
computer's reaction to the instructions
of the operator.
Kamnitzer considers City-Scape a documentary
of the possibilities
that now exist for an Urban Simulation
Laboratory. The concept is, in
the absence of an ability to
experiment with real people in real cities,
to create a
simulated environment in which people can pre-experience
alternative futures. Kamnitzer's method incorporates the
use
of conventional mathematical models, man-gaming or operational
gaming to simulate the decision environment, and the computed
visual simulation subsystem to formulate what Kamnitzer calls
"the
total question of if then, the key to all decision-making."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Computer Films 255
The metalanguage that Kamnitzer has designed
to facilitate this
activity is called Intuval, derived from
intuition and evaluation.
Professor Kamnitzer considers Intuval
to be an "answer" to the
optimization attitude toward the
computer. "What we are doing," he
says, "is very different from
people who want to use the computer to
optimize for them and
thereby the computer provides the answers. I
am using the visual
simulation subsystem to trigger the next creative
leap in the
human brain, and therefore I consider my approach very
different
from the usual rush into data banks and optimization. If
used in
an experientially meaningful manner the computer can
provoke the
next creative leap, while in my opinion the reading of
charts,
books, monographs, and statistics does not lead to a creative
advancement. Books are being written every day, the libraries
are
full, the data banks are going to burst, but the
decision-maker does
not have access to this information when he
needs it, in a form that
is meaningful to him at this moment.
"I make the outrageous claim that creative
innovation can only
come from gut knowledge. It cannot come from
something that
remains purely in the cerebral area. I would even
go so far as to say
that what we are unable to explain to an
intelligent thirteen-year-old,
we do not know. So this leads to
on-line visual displays and the total
question of if then, the
key to all decision-making. Now I can get
information in graphic
form of course, but then comes the moment
when I want to know if
then. If I should decide to choose alternate 'B'
then these and
these and these things will happen. But what if I had
chosen
alternate 'G'? And so on. So you see the intuitive approach
has
suffered badly in the past because of its lack of instant
evaluation of what is strong and weak in your intuition. The
Intuval
system I've devised provides the designer or researcher
with this
instant evaluation. It is not simply a visualizing and
pre-experiencing
tool.
"It works in the following manner. First we
have a hunch or an
intuitive idea and we create an environment.
Next, through the visual
simulation subsystem we experience this
environment both from the
viewpoint of the designer and the
user. And of course we will
discover weak points and strong
points in the environment so, with
the stroke of a light pen, we
can change it. We find out where the
weakest spots are, we ask
the computer to provide the parameters
ARTSCILAB 2001
256 Expanded Cinema
which define this weakest link, we will be
shown graphically, then we
will change the design and get a
second evaluation, which now
hopefully will have improved that
factor, but we may have lost in
another factor. We then again
inquire what are the parameters which
determine this weakness
and so on, evolving into an interactive
process.
"There are people who have built fascinating
mathematical
models, people who do man-gaming and operational
gaming, people
who experiment with physical-environment
simulation in domes and
so on, but I do not know of any attempt
to bring these disciplines
together in an Urban Simulation
Laboratory to pre-experience
alternative futures and even to
pre-experience the inter-action of
human beings in a future
environment. In this way we can be
exposed to what various
futures may look like, feel like, and also
what they would cost
economically, socially, psychologically, and
every other way.
"Now for City-Scape I was limited to 240
edges. We now realize
that with another few million dollars next
time we could increase the
number of edges from 240 to 1500, and
we also could create
textures which could, for example, give you
the equivalent of a glass
wall on a building which would not
come out of the 1500 edges. We
will also have the ability to
collect all 1500 edges in front of the
viewer at all times,
having no 'invisible' or off-screen edges as in
City-Scape. This
would enhance the realistic detail of the simulation.
Finally we
will have hemispherical projection inside a globe, with real
people interacting with the computed environmental situation.
This is
a long way off, but I've made it my life's work. We have
Intuval, we
have City-Scape, we have NASA II. It's a beginning."
ARTSCILAB 2001
PART FIVE:
TELEVISION AS A CREATIVE
MEDIUM
"Art has operated in the gap between what we
know and what we dream. The
gap is closing quickly: what we
dream is often what we see. Television will serve
to bridge the
gap and to guide the way toward a more successful environment.
The eyes replace the me's and we arrive at a condition where
what we show
becomes what we say."
EDWIN SCHLOSSBERG
On July 20, 1969, approximately 400 million
world people watched
the same Warhol movie at the same time. As
iconographic imagery
goes there's no appreciable difference
between four hours ofEmpire
and four hours of LM. There even
were similar hallucinations of
redundancy in our sustained hot
cognition of NASA's primary
structure. The bit-capacity of that
Minimal hard-edge picture plane
without gray scale was really
amazing. We were getting a lot of
information in dragtime across
space-time. And they called it
Tranquillity.
The first moon landing was the first global
holiday in history. They
even mounted the camera at an Orson
Welles heroic low angle to
catch Beautiful Buzz Armstrong the
Archetypal Spaceman coming
down the ladder to recite his
historical speech: ". . . one giant step
for mankind.'' But few
commentators remarked, then or later, that
mankind hadn't moved
an inch. No one said how really convenient it
was to sit there
in your home, looking directly at the moon dust,
listening
simultaneously to four or five conversations separated by a
quarter-million miles, getting metabolic information about the
Buzz
Armstrongs in a closed-circuit loop that extended
humanity's total
brain-eye out around the moon and back. Who
needs telepathy?
The growth of television has been phenomenal.
In 1948
approximately 200,000 American homes had television sets
and 15
television stations were broadcasting regularly. In 1958
there were
520 stations broadcasting to sets in 42 million
homes. Today there
are tens of thousands of broadcasters, and
approximately 100
ARTSCILAB 2001
258 Expanded Cinema
million homes have television sets. There are
14 million color sets
alone in this country. In fact, there are
more television sets in
American homes today than telephones,
bathtubs, or refrigerators.
Television antennas bristle from the
rooftops of ghetto shacks that
don't even have plumbing. An
estimated quarter-billion television
receivers are in use around
the world. Yet, because of political
sovereignties and
profit-motive selfishness, more than one-third of
humanity is
illiterate.
Television, like the computer, is a sleeping
giant. But those who are
beginning to use it in revolutionary
new ways are very much awake.
The first generation of television
babies has reached maturity having
watched an average of 15,000
hours of television while completing
only 10,000 hours of formal
education through high school. Yet
television itself still has
not left the breast of commercial
sponsorship. Just as cinema
has imitated theatre for seventy years,
television has imitated
cinema imitating theatre for twenty-five years.
But the new
generation with its transnational interplanetary video
consciousness will not tolerate the miniaturized vaudeville that
is
television as presently employed.
At London's Slade School, the German-born
video artist Lutz
Becker observes: "This purely electronic
medium with its completely
abstract rules does not have its own
art form which should develop
within the scope of new
technologies and their almost chaotic wealth
of possibilities. A
new art form is not only the result of new
technologies, but
also the result of new thinking and the discovery of
new
orders."
But no new orders are to be found in the
economic society's use of
the medium it created. "A country that
is chiefly interested in turning
out consumers and producers,"
wrote Robert M. Hutchins, "is not
likely to be much concerned
with setting minds free; for the
connection between selling,
manufacturing, and free minds cannot
be established. Such a
country will transform new opportunities for
education into
means of turning out producers and consumers. This
has been the
fate of television in the United States. It could have
been used
for educational purposes, but not in a commercial culture.
The
use of television, as it was employed in the United States in the
1960's, can be put in its proper light by supposing that
Guten
ARTSCILAB 2001
Television as a Creative Medium 259
berg's great invention had been directed
almost entirely to the
publication of comic books.''1
A major portion of America's creative energy
is siphoned off into
television's exploitation of the profit
motive: "Few messages are as
carefully designed and as clearly
communicated as the thirty-second
television commerical... Few
teachers spend in their entire careers
as much time or thought
on preparing their classes as is invested in
the many months of
writing, drawing, acting, filming, and editing of
one
thirty-second television commercial."2
1 Robert M. Hutchins, The Learning Society
(New York: Praeger, 1968), p. 127.2 Peter F. Drucker quoted in:
Gerald O'Grady, "The Preparation of Teachers of Media,"
Journal
of Aesthetic Education (July, 1969).
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Videosphere
I have found the term "videosphere"
valuable as a conceptual tool to
indicate the vast scope and
influence of television on a global scale
in many simultaneous
fields of sense-extension. Like the computer,
television is a
powerful extension of man's central nervous system.
Just as the
human nervous system is the analogue of the brain,
television in
symbiosis with the computer becomes the analogue of
the total
brain of world man. It extends our vision to the farthest star
and the bottom of the sea. It allows us to see ourselves and,
through
fiber optics, to see inside ourselves. The videosphere
transcends
telepathy.
Broadcasters now speak of "narrowcasting,"
"deepcasting,"
"minicasting," and other terms to indicate the
increasing decentraliation
and fragmentation of the videosphere:
regular Very High
Frequency programming (VHF); Ultra High
Frequency special-
interest programming such as educational
television or foreign-
language stations (UHF); Community Antenna
Television (CATV);
Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV); Videotape
Recording (VTR);
Videotape Cartridges (VTC); Electronic Video
Recording (EVR);
Satellite Television (COMSAT, INTELSAT)— all of
which amount to a
synergetic nonspherical metaphysical
technology that drastically
alters the nature of communication
on earth.
Although the emphasis now is on the EVR
cartridge and videotape
cassette as being revolutionary
developments in communication, the
more likely possibility is
that CATV and the videophone will provide
unparalleled freedom
for the artist as well as the citizen. In addition
to regular
broadcast programming, CATV operators may establish
subscription
systems through which customers might receive as
many as eighty
channels of color programming not available to the
VHF or UHF
audience. Much of this programming obviously will
constitute the
kind of personal aesthetic work to be discussed in this
ook.
CATV subscribers may lease receivers with high-resolution
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Videosphere 261
1,000-scan-line pictures, compared with
broadcast TV's 525 scanlines.
3 In addition to providing videofax
newspapers, magazines, and
books, CATV will allow "visits" to
friends, shops, banks, and doctors'
offices without ever leaving
the comfort of one's home. CATV
systems are now being developed
to transmit programs to home
VTRs while a family is sleeping or
away from the house, to be
replayed later.
It is estimated that ninety percent of
American homes will be wired
for CATV by 1980, primarily because
"demand TV" or
"telecommand" systems are expected by about 1978.
By this
process one will telephone regional video-library
switchboards,
ordering programs from among thousands listed in
catalogues. The
programs will be transmitted immediately by
cable, and of course
could be stored in the home VTR if repeated
viewings are desired.
The videophone will be included in a
central home communications
console that will incorporate
various modes of digital audio-visual
and Xerographic storage
and retrieval systems. New developments
in videotape recording
will be crucial in this area.
There are two key phases in information
storage: recording and
retrieval. Retrieval is perhaps more
important than recording, at least
at this early stage.
Retrieval systems are more difficult to perfect
than recording
devices. Nam June Paik has illustrated this problem
with the
difference between the English alphabet and Chinese
characters.
"Retrieval is much quicker with Chinese characters," he
explains. "You can record (write) quicker in English but you can
retrieve (read) quicker in Chinese. One is retrieval-oriented,
the
other is recording-oriented— but you read more than you
write." Thus
it is quite likely that video-computer systems will
be available for
home use with one-inch videotape, half devoted
to video information,
half to digital storage codes.
After some twenty-five years of public
television, we are just now
developing a sense of global unity
that is destined to affect directly
the life of each individual
before this decade is past. We have seen
that technology already
is fragmenting and decentralizing broadcast
3 Electron beams in camera-tubes and
picture-tubes scan the screen in 525 horizontal
lines from top
to bottom. This is standard in the United States. Associated with
this is
what are called "lines of resolution." Since microwave
broadcasting tends to dissipate the
coherence of a signal, it is
composed of only approximately 320 lines of resolution by the
time it reaches home receivers.
ARTSCILAB 2001
262 Expanded Cinema
The Picturephone: "A completely new video
environment and life-style." Photo: Bell
Telephone
Laboratories.
television. Soon entertainment and localized
functions of the video-sphere
will be handled by CATV and
videotape cartridges, leaving broadcast
television free to
perform vital new tasks. Large communi-cations
conglomerates
such as RCA, CBS, ABC, CBC, BBC, Euro-vision, Bell
Telephone,
AT&T, and COMSAT are now planning net-works of planet
analysis that will result in television as a constant source of
global
metabolic and homeostatic information.
Direct
satellite-to-home television has been technically feasible for some
time. Scientists at Bell Telephone and COMSAT anticipate fifty
domestic
communications satellites in orbit by 1977. The total
system will be
capable of 100,000,000 voice channels and 100,000
television channels.4
Hughes Aircraft engineers estimate that
within the decade individual roof
4 Videa 1000 Newsletter, Vol. 3, No. 3
(New York: Videa International, January, 1969).
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Videosphere 263
top antennas will pick up twenty-five to
thirty channels from "local"
satellites in addition to whatever
video information the home may be
receiving from CATV and
videotape cartridges.5
Existing satellites now deliver photographs
and video images with
such high resolution that "COMSAT
typesetting" is possible. A CBS
satellite system employed by the
military to flash reconnaissance
photos from Vietnam to
Washington reportedly resulted in color
qualities "as good or
better than National Geographic." In 1969, RCA
engineers began
work on video cameras and receivers capable of
10,000-and
possibly 12,000-scan-line resolution. Also in that year,
RCA
officials proposed that NASA's TIROS M meteorological
satellite
could be converted into an "earth resources" vehicle to help
overcome food shortages and combat pollution problems. Equipped
with special high-resolution 5,000-scan-line cameras in a
500-mile
orbit, the satellite would yield picture resolution
equivalent to 100
feet above ground. Higher resolution would be
possible, officials
announced, but some countries would complain
of "invasion of
privacy.
On the receiving end, the next few years will
see the development
of transistorized sets with 500-hour
rechargeable batteries; TV sets
that can screen 16mm. movies
through the color cathode tubeby
using built-in telecine
systems; so-called spectral color 3-D television
without
Polaroid glasses; four-by-six-foot cathode tubes only one
foot
thick; self-correcting color receivers that will correct even
broadcast
errors; one-gun color sets that will eliminate
three-gun
registration problems; stereo TV; new color TV
projection systems
that will project six-foot color images with
brightness and registration
equal to studio monitor equipment;
two-dimensional laser color TV;
tubeless TV cameras smaller than
a man's hand, coupled with TV
receiving tubes the size of a
quarter. And it is estimated that the flat
wall-size plasma
crystal screen will be distributed commercially by
1978.
Individual personal expression through
videotape has begun only
recently, and the artist who works with
videotape as his own
personal medium of expression is still
quite rare. However, new
developments in small inexpensive
portable videotape recording
systems will completely
revolutionize this mode of artistic freedom.
5 Ibid.
ARTSCILAB 2001
264 Expanded Cinema
As early as 1968 several firms demonstrated
prototype low-cost
home VTR systems in the thousand dollar price
range. It is expected
that by 1973 one will be able to purchase
a color TV camera, color
VTR unit, and color display console for
less than $1,000. By
comparison, similar equipment in 1970
ranged from $11,000 (Sony)
to $50,000 (Ampex).
However, within the next few years we'll
witness the growth of
video cartridges and cassettes into a
market greater than that
presently enjoyed by books and records.
The potentials are so
impressive that Jean-Luc Godard, possibly
in a moment of passion,
once vowed to abandon his feature-film
career to make "instant
newsreels" via portable videotape
equipment. The first serious
competitor to Columbia's EVR system
will be Sony's videotape
cassettes for home VTRs, to be marketed
by 1973. At approximately
the same time RCA will introduce its
"SelectaVision" unit, which will
play pre-recorded tapes through
any TV set using a safe low-power
laser beam and special
scratch-proof vinyl tape. Virtually all video
hardware
manufacturers are developing their own versions of the
videotape
cartridge storage-and-retrieval system.
Meanwhile a whole new area of feature film
cartridge projection
systems has developed to compete with the
video cassette market.
Kodak, Bell & Howell, Fairchild, and
Technicolor have demonstrated
cartridge projection systems for
home viewing. Zeiss-Ikon has
developed a compact textbook-size
cartridge projector for 300-foot
cassettes of 70mm. film divided
into twelve separate image tracks to
produce two hours of color
sound movies in stop-motion, slow
motion, and reverse, using a
capstan drive instead of sprockets.
It is now obvious that we are entering a
completely new video
environment and image-exchange life-style.
The videosphere will
alter the minds of men and the architecture
of their dwellings.
"There's a whole new story to be told," says
video artist Scott
Bartlett, "thanks to the new techniques. We
must find out what we
have to say because of our new
technologies."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics
The underlying principle in creative use of
videotronic hardware
might be called "video synthesizing," just
as we speak of sound
synthesizing in the Moog process. There are
no special restrictions
inherent in the video signal as opposed
to the audio signal. Anything
that can be done with sound can be
done with video if the proper
hardware is available. The basic
ingredient of alternating current is
identical in both
processes, and represents potential for as many
variations as
the equipment will allow. Just as the new filmmaker
seeks to
synthesize all the elements of his technology, so the video
artist attempts to synthesize the possibilities of his medium in
the
creation of electron synaesthetics.
Since present television studio equipment was
not made for the
purpose of aesthetic experimentation, artists
have been forced to
work within parameters that amount to video
imitation of cinematic
techniques: electronic equivalents of
cinematic wipes, fades, superimpositions,
and traveling mattes.
There are, however, certain advantages
in working with video
systems to achieve variations of
these effects quite unlike
their cinematic counterparts, and with
considerably less
expenditure of time and effort.
The Television Camera
In standard photography a photosensitive
emulsion on a strip of
acetate is exposed to lens-focused rays
of light that form an image in
the emulsion. A similar principle
is involved in television except that
the image is translated
into coded electronic-signal information and
is then "erased" to
make way for another image. Inside every TV
camera, instead of
film, is a photoconductive camera tube. These
tubes are called
variously Image Orthicon, Vidicon, Staticon, and
Plumbicon,
depending on the chemical makeup of the tube's
photosensitive
surface, which is called the photocathode screen. For
many years
the Image Orthicon was the standard camera tube.
Recently,
however, the Plumbicon, whose photosensitive surface is
composed
of lead oxide, has become the popular camera tube.
According to how much light is focused onto
the surface of the
ARTSCILAB 2001
266 Expanded Cinema
photocathode screen, each tiny photosensitive
element becomes
electrically charged, building up a "charge
pattern" across the screen
proportional to the lights and darks
of the televised scene. This
charge pattern is swept across, or
"read," by a beam of electrons
emitted from a cathode gun in the
camera tube. The beam
neutralizes each picture element on the
photocathode screen as it
sweeps across, producing a varying
electric current that corresponds
to the pattern of light and
shade in the televised scene.
As each photoconductive element on the screen
is scanned by the
electron beam and relinquishes its
information, it is said to be "wiped
clean" and can therefore
respond to any new light image it may
receive through the camera
lens. This charge-forming and
systematic "reading" is a rapid,
continuous process with the entire
photocathode screen being
charged, scanned, and recharged thirty
times per second to
produce a constant scan-line pattern of 525
lines resolution,
the standard in the United States.6
The Television Receiver
The video picture signal thus produced is
subsequently amplified
and cabled through a video switcher/mixer
console in the studio
control room where it is transformed back
into a picture on monitors
that operate like home television
receivers. Cathode-ray tubes in
television receivers are called
"kinescopes." In them, a cathode gun
like the one in the camera
tube sprays the phosphor-coated screen
with a beam of electrons
synchronized with the exploratory beam in
the studio camera. The
phosphor coating glows in the path of the
beam as it scans the
picture tube. Horizontal and vertical "sync
pulses" keep the two
beams in step.
A beam of constant strength would produce a
white rectangle of
fine horizontal lines, which is called a
"raster" and is the basic field of
the picture. But if the
beam's strength is varied, the trace-point
brightness is varied
also. When the video signal is made to regulate
the picture
tube's beam, a pattern of light and shade can be built up
on the
screen's phosphor corresponding to the distribution of lights
and darks focused through the camera lens— thus a duplication of
6 Gerald Millerson, The Technique of
Television Production (New York: Hastings House,
1961) and
Howard A. Chinn,Television Broadcasting (New York: McGraw-Hill,
1953).
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics 267
the televised scene. This picture fades and
is continually replenished
by the rapidly-scanning beam so that
we see a clear, complete
image. In relatively low-resolution
systems such as the 525-line U.S.
standard, a so-called rolling
effect of the scan-lines can be detected
on the picture tube. In
high-resolution systems of 1,000 to 5,000
lines, however, the
resulting image is unflickering and extremely
clear.
The same principles are involved in color
television except that
four camera tubes are incorporated inside
each camera: one each
for the basic colors red, blue, and green,
and one black-and-white
tube for use in aligning and resolving
the three colors. In color
television receivers, three cathode
guns instead of one are used to
scan the phosphor screen,
electronically "mixing" the palette
according to the
distribution of hues in the televised scene.
De-Beaming
The electron beam scanning the photocathode
screen in the
television camera requires a certain strength, a
certain amount of
electric current, in order to reproduce the
image completely with
sharp definition and contrast. Controls on
the camera called "gain
control clippers" are provided to assure
that the beam is receiving
proper energy to reproduce the image.
By deliberately starving the
electron beam of its required
current, highlight details are washed
out of the picture,
causing the image to be retained or smeared in
the camera tube.
Any motion occurring in the brighter areas of the
televised
scene will produce a lingering smear of the image similar to
the
phenomenon of retinal persistence in human vision, but slower
and longer lasting. Accidental beam-starving often is noticeable
in
musical programs when brass instruments develop flaring
jelly-like
trails as they move. Deliberately causing and
exaggerating this effect
is known as "de-beaming" or "rolling
off the beam."
In color television, beam energies can be
controlled in any of the
three primary color tubes inside the
camera simultaneously or
separately. This means that the smear
will be in one or all of the
three colors and their
combinations. Thus a human face or figure
can be made to have
brightly-colored outlines or ghost images that
seem to stick to
the screen as the figure moves. In addition, the
three color
tubes can be deliberately de-aligned from the
coordinating
black-and-white tube, producing three separate color
ARTSCILAB 2001
268 Expanded Cinema
images moving together in time but spatially
differentiated, as
sometimes occurs accidentally in offset color
lithography.
Keying and Chroma-Keying
The video equivalent of cinematic matting is
called "keying." As in
cinematography, the purpose is to cause
one image to be inserted
into another image so that the
background image is effectively
obscured by the insertion.
Cinematic matting is mechanical whereas
video keying is
electronic. There are two basic methods of keying:
"inlay keyed
insertion" (static mattes and wipes), and "overlay keyed
insertion" (traveling mattes). Inlay keying involves a picture
tube
displaying a plain white raster on its screen, which is
seen through a
transparent masking plate (or "cel") by a lens
focused onto a photo-
tube that triggers a switching circuit. We
select part of Camera One's
picture to be matted out and make an
opaque mask (cardboard, etc.)
to cover the corresponding area on
the cel over the inlay tube's
raster. The switching circuit
automatically blanks out that area in
Camera One's picture,
allowing the rest to show through wherever
the circuit "sees"
the inlay tube's raster. Camera Two's picture is
automatically
inserted into the matted area. Numerous wipes are
possible
simply by moving a mask over the inlay tube's raster. These
wipe
masks may be manually or electronically operated. Or they can
be
photographed on motion-picture film, which is then run through a
telecine projector whose video signal triggers the switching
circuit.
In overlay (traveling matte) keying, the
switching circuit senses the
scale of grays in a televised
scene. Clipper controls on Camera One
are adjusted to select the
particular gray-scale level at which a
keyed insertion from
Camera Two is desired. This level of luminosity
is known as the
"switching tone." If a white switching tone is
selected, Camera
Two's picture will be inserted into Camera One's
picture
wherever the circuit "sees" the switching tone or a lighter
one.
If a dark tone is selected, the insertion will be made wherever
the circuit "sees" that tone or a darker one. The shape of the
insertion is determined by the shape of the switching tone areas
in
the scene. There must be a marked tonal difference between
the
inserted subject and its surroundings for the switching
circuit to
operate effectively. For example: Camera One shoots a
dancer in
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics 269
black leotards against a white backdrop;
Camera Two shoots a
striped pattern. If a white switching tone
is used, the dancer will be
seen against a striped background.
If a black tone is used, the
dancer's body will be filled with
stripes and the background will
remain white.
Ordinary use of keying as described here
usually results in the
same sort of unconvincing, tacky visual
effects as are generally
produced by traveling mattes in movies:
that is, a scene in which two
images are trying unsuccessfully
to be one. The problem lies in
general insistence on "clean"
mattes. Tonal differences of at least
fifty percent on the gray
scale must exist between the subject and
surroundings, otherwise
the switching circuit reaches points where it
cannot distinguish
between forms. This results in image-breakthrough
and ragged
"fringing" of matted edges, destroying the desired
illusi on of
"objectivity." In synaesthetic videographics, however,
keying is
employed purely for its graphic potential in design
information.
Since there's no attempt to create the illusion of a
"foreground" figure being inserted into a "background" field,
image-
breakthrough and edge-fringing are no longer a problem. In
fact,
they are deliberately induced through a technique called
"tearing the
key."
If there is no second video source, all areas
of a scene above a
white switching-tone turn black and all areas
below a black tone turn
white. If the scene contains a wide
range of gray-scale tones with
little contrast a great deal of
image-breakthrough and edge-fringing
will occur to the point
where one cannot distinguish between the two.
Electronic
metamorphosis has occurred. If the scene is a medium
close-up of
faces in low contrast and a white tone is used, all facial
highlights will turn black while all lower gray-scale values
will remain
normal. If a black tone is used, facial shadows will
flash white while
lighter values reproduce normally.
If the clipper, or sensor of the gray-scale
level, is adjusted up and
down the scale instead of being left
at one level, the result is a
constantly "bleeding" or randomly
flaking and tearing image. This is
called "tearing the key." In
the scene just described, this would result
in a constant
reversal of dark and light tones and a general
disintegration
and reappearance of the image. If a second video
source is used,
which happens to be the same image we're seeing,
ARTSCILAB 2001
270 Expanded Cinema
except through another camera, the result is
a bizarre solarization
effect of flashing outlines and surfaces,
or a composite in which an
image appears to be inside of itself.
Gray-scale keying is possible also in color
television, flaring and
intermixing colors based on their
gray-scale luminosity. However,
Chroma-Key, although limited in
some ways, provides certain
advantages in color video work.
Chroma-Key does not sense gray-
scale luminosity but rather color
hues. Any combination of the red,
blue, and green primary tubes
can be selected as the keying hue.
Whenever a background is a
particular hue, it will be keyed out and
a second video source
will be inserted. Any combination of colors in
the spectrum can
be used, but blue is normally employed because it
is most
opposite to skin tones and therefore provides the widest
margin
for "clean" mattes. If a blue-eyed girl is in front of a blue
background and the Chroma-Key is set for blue, "holes" will
appear
in her eyes into which any other video source— including
another
image of herself— can be inserted.
In July, 1968, WCBS-TV in New York featured
the Alwin Nikolais
Dance Company as part of its Repertoire
Workshop series. The
dance composition, Limbo, was designed
especially for Chroma-Key
effects and thus provides an excellent
example of a certain approach
to this technique. In one scene of
Limbo a man is threatened by
disembodied hands and arms. He is
tossed aloft by them and,
according to the program description,
"all of life's little problems are
thrown at him." To achieve
this effect the principal dancer and the
chorus were positioned
in front of a blue backdrop, all on the same
camera. The chorus
members were dressed completely in blue
except for their hands
and arms. Using a blue Chroma-Key, this
meant that wherever
there was blue in the picture, the background
camera shooting
smoke would show through. Thus the hands and
the principal
dancer appeared to be floating through smoke clouds.
At one
point, the hands appeared to pull confetti and streamers out
of
nowhere and throw them in the air. The colored confetti was
concealed with blue confetti covering the top of the pile. It
was
invisible until it was pulled out in the open.
In another segment, serial rows of running
dancers were
suspended in green space. The inside of the
dancers' bodies was a
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics 271
Chroma-Key video matting makes
arms
of Alwin Nikolais dancers seem
to float in space. Photo:
WCBS-TV.
series of wavy stripes that moved from right
to left to accentuate the
effect of motion. Two cameras and
three videotape recorders were
used. In this way, three separate
"takes" of one row of dancers were
combined in the final image.
On take 1 the camera framed the
dancers at the top of the
screen. The dancers were placed against a
large blue canvas
backdrop that curved down to the floor, permitting
even lighting
so that the dancers' full figures could be matted. The
background was a green slide that appeared wherever there was
blue in the picture. The outlines of the dancers cut the "hole"
in the
matted green slide, and these "holes" were filled by
another camera
shooting a revolving drum with painted stripes on
it. This was
recorded on videotape 1 (VT-1). This was played
back to the studio
where a wipe was used to combine the first
level of dancers on tape
with a second level of dancers now
being framed live in the center of
the camera. The resulting
composite of two rows of striped dancers
was then recorded on
VT-2. This was played back to be combined
ARTSCILAB 2001
272 Expanded Cinema
Two cameras and three VTRs were
used
to suspend candy-striped dancers
in green space. Photo: WCBS-TV.
with the third level of dancers using the
same process. The total
effect was recorded on VT-3.
In another vignette the dancers were to
represent the torments of
everyday living, from crawling
sensations to jangling nerves. The
final effect was of two lines
of dancers, toe to toe, lying side by side
on clouds and water,
holding long tapes above their head to
represent nerve endings.
The outlines of bodies and tapes were
filled with red. The
segment was done in two takes. The first take
was tape-recorded
with the dancers lined up on the right side of the
screen. On
the second take, the dancers moved to the left side of
the
screen. The tape was played back and combined with the live
action using a vertical wipe. Later this effect, plus goldfish
and
crawling ants, was inserted inside the body of the principal
dancer.7
7 Technical descriptions of the Limbo program
were provided by Herb Gardener, WCBSTV
Studio Operations
Engineer, in How We Did It, a publication of the WCBS-TV
Repertoire Workshop, New York.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics 273
Two VTRs were wiped together in this
composite scene from the Limbo
program. Photo: WCBS-TV.
While demonstrating the nature of Chroma-Key,
these examples
also clearly show how a purely electronic medium
with an
unexplored range of possibilities has been used to
imitate the older
discipline of cinema, and to express an
archaic intelligence that
insists upon "objectivity" and linear
development in graphic forms.
The rigid adherence to "clean"
matting implies disdain toward what is
obviously the unique
property of video keying: "metamorphosis," not
overlay or
insertion. The new consciousness seeks the transformation
of
realities whereas the old consciousness ventures no further
than
a timid juxtaposition of "objective" realities that retain their
traditional
identity. The fact is that there exists no cinematic
equivalent of
video keying. Tearing a key in grays or colors
produces graphic
designs of unique character, blending form and
color in a manner
virtually impossible in any other medium.
Video keying is inherently
synaesthetic; such a claim can be
made for no other aesthetic
medium.
ARTSCILAB 2001
274 Expanded Cinema
Feedback
If a microphone is placed too close to its
amplifier it squeals. If a
television camera is positioned too
close to its monitor it squeals
also, but it squeals visually.
This visual noise, like audio noise, is
called "feedback." Video
feedback may be intentionally induced and
carefully controlled
to produce graphic effects possible only through
this technique.
The most common effect is the infinitely-repeated
image similar
to the infinity effect of fun house mirror chambers. This
can be
done with one, two, or three cameras shooting into the same
monitor that displays their output. One or two cameras can shoot
into a monitor that displays their output in addition to an
image from
a third camera. There are a number of combinations
based on the
principle of the squealing camera.
Telecine Projection
Because it is the video equivalent of a
cinematic optical printer, the
"telecine projector," commonly
known as the "film chain," plays an
important role in the
production of synaesthetic videotapes or
videographic films. It
is a device that projects slides or films directly
into
television cameras whose signals are sent through a
switching/mixing console and then are broadcast or videotaped.
Telecine movie projectors are modified to project at the video
rate of
30 fps instead of the cinematic rate of 24 fps. (A video
"frame" is the
amount of signal information produced in the
thirtieth of a second
required for the camera-tube electron beam
to scan the photocathode
screen one time.)
Since certain limitations are inherent in the
physical and technical
characteristics of a live studio setup,
the film chain offers many
advantages in the production of
videographics where image control
and graphic integrity are
extremely important. The video signal from
a film chain is
"live" in the sense that a slide or movie is being rerecorded
live. Thus it is possible to televise scenes that have been
prestylized and could not exist live in front of a studio
camera. These
may then be combined on videotape with normal
studio scenes.
Most film-chain cameras employ Vidicon tubes,
which can be
controlled just the same as studio floor cameras.
In fact, film-chain
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics 275
vidicons often are more flexible to work
with, since studio cameras
are fine-tuned and one frequently is
forbidden to alter their adjustments.
De-beaming and keying
film-chain cameras produces a very
different effect, a more
subtle effect than the same techniques in live
studio cameras,
for the simple reason that film loops can be fed
through the
system. Film loops allow one to rehearse, as it were, the
precise moments at which a certain effect is desired. Endless
takes
can be made with the same image, an advantage not possible
in
studio situations. For tape-mixing purposes, monitors show
which
film-chain images are upcoming, and several film chains
can be
synchronized for mixing onto one tape.
Slightly different procedures are involved in
using film chains for
the production of videotapes as opposed to
videographic films. The
primary difference is in the ability to
manipulate colors. In filmmaking,
the usual procedure is as
follows: Original footage is shot on
16mm. or 35mm.
high-contrast stock from which a workprint is
made. This print
may then be edited in the usual fashion or fed
directly into a
video system through the film chain. High-contrast
stock is used
to overcome the image-breakdown effect of video
scan-lines, and
to retain image quality as much as possible through
the three
separate stages of videographic filmmaking: original
footage,
videotape, and kinescope (videotape images recorded on
movie
film). This process would tend to obliterate the subtle
shadings
of slower, more sensitive film stocks.
Once the high-contrast work print is formed
into loops and fitted
into the film chain, it can be processed
through the video mixing/
switching system, augmented by
de-beaming, keying, wipes, and
compounded with other video
sources, either live-action, tapes,
films, or slides. The final
master tape may be edited before a
kinescope is made. Assuming
that the imagery has already
undergone three edits— first as
original footage, then in film-chain
mixing, then as a master
tape— a fourth edit may be performed on
the kinescope footage.
This is then processed through an optical
printing system where
color is added.
Since video colors reproduce poorly onto
film, most videographic
films are shot in black-and-white with
color added optically after
video processing is completed.
However, as in the case of Scott
Bartlett's OFFON and Moon,
color can be added to black-and-white
ARTSCILAB 2001
276 Expanded Cinema
film by running it through a three-gun, color
film chain. The color is
induced electronically through the
video circuit and appears on tape.
The same reproduction problem
remains when a kinescope is made
of this color tape, and the
final color print must be augmented in
optical printing.
Videotronically-induced colors are desirable for their
unique
qualities of electron luminescence, which cannot be duplicated
in chemical photography.
Since synaesthetic videotapes are made with
no intention of
transferring them onto film, color reproduction
is no problem. Tapes
may be composed entirely through the film
chain from looped film
information, or composites of film, live
action, slides, and other
tapes. Color or black-and-white film
stocks may be used since videotape
color in a closed-circuit
playback situation is always superior to
the incident-reflected
light of movie projection.
Videotronic Mixing, Switching, and Editing
The television switching/mixing console,
described by Stan Van-
DerBeek as "the world's most expensive
optical bench," is an array
of monitors and switching circuits
by which different sources of video
information are selected,
mixed, and routed in various ways. Within
its basic ingredient—
alternating current— exists the potential for an
art of
image-synthesizing that could exceed the boldest dreams of
the
most inspired visionary. Yet, because the equipment was neither
conceived nor constructed for aesthetic purposes this potential
has
remained tantalizingly inaccessible. Traditional use of the
video
system to imitate cinema is, in the words of one artist,
"like hooking
a horse to a rocket." Still most artists are quick
to admit that even
this limited potential of the television
medium has not been fully
explored.
Most video systems are capable of handling
only three image
sources at once. Although any number of sources
may be
available— most larger systems accommodate approximately
twenty-
four— the maximum capacity for viewing is any combination
of any
three of those sources. This is an absolutely arbitrary
limitation
based only on the intended commercial use of the
equipment, for
which three video sources are perfectly adequate.
A few systems
can accommodate four video sources at one time.
Still fewer, called
"routing switchers" or "delegation
switchers," have five available
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics 277
sources, each of whose five input terminals
is fed by five more so
that the image potential becomes any
combination of any five-timesfive
video sources. This is a
positive step in the direction of video
synthesizing.
Compounding this image limitation is the
cumbersome and
unwieldy physical layout of the switching console
itself. The primary
reason is that video hardware has been
design-oriented around the
literary narrative mode of the cinema
it imitates. It is built to
accommodate a literary instructional
form in which the elements are
relatively simple and linear. In
reality, the unique capabilities of video
are perhaps even
further from the narrative mode than cinema. No
amount of
written instruction could communicate the complexity of
technical and intuitive maneuvers involved in the synaesthetic
videographics we are about to discuss; and even if that were
possible, no engineer could spend the time required to read and
carry out those instructions: the program would never reach the
air.
Video hardware has been designed around a depersonalized
instructional motive whereas it clearly should have been
designed to
accommodate personal aesthetic motives since all
technology is
moving inexorably in the direction of closer
man/machine interaction
and always has been.
The result of this traditional perversion of
the medium is that any
attempt at creativity becomes extremely
complex and often flatly
impossible. Even relatively simple
effects used commonly in movies
— such as dissolving from one matted title to
another matted title—
are not possible with normal switchers.
The desired effect is a
background scene over which title
credits, either static or in motion,
dissolve from one set of
words into another set of words without
changing the background.
In video this requires a very elaborate
device called a "double
reentry switcher" with six rows of push
buttons for each video
source. Combinations of any of two-or threetimes-
six buttons
must be used in order to get the effect on the
screen.
Assume that one wishes a video image in which colors are
automatically reversed while blacks and whites remain the same;
or
reversing the blacks and whites while colors remain
unchanged;
draining a picture of all colors but one or two;
enhancing only one or
two colors so that they become vivid while
other hues in the scene
ARTSCILAB 2001
278 Expanded Cinema
Stan VanDerBeek at work in "the world's
most expensive optical bench," the mixing/
switching control
room at WGBH-TV,
Boston, Massachusetts. Photo: Gene Youngblood.
remain stable; warbling a picture so that it
looks like shimmering
water; composite wipes, so that the edge
of the wipe moving across
the picture is not a hard edge but
rather modulated by the audio or
modulated by gray scales or
colors; numerical camera controls that
would cause one portion
of a scene to grow larger or smaller
according to the control
setting. All of these things are possible in
existing video
technology, yet are not available to the artist in the
form of a
mixing/switching console. Moreover, they are potentially
possible in a totally random and instantaneous fashion, whereas
much labor and many hours are required to achieve the same
effects in the cinema.
In addition, there is no reason that video
switching must be push-
button controlled so that the operator of a
common master-control
switcher must select combinations of
approximately one hundred
and twenty buttons. Effects could easily be
tone- or voice-actuated,
or controlled by hand capacitors,
photoelectric cells, or correspond
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cathode-Ray Tube Videotronics 279
ing pairs of voltages for transition effects.
All of this could be realized
in integrated circuitry, reducing
the mammoth proportions of existing
switchers by many times.
Delegation or routing switchers could
accomplish with twelve
buttons what now requires more than a
hundred.
The potentials of a video system are so vast
that it becomes
physically impossible for one person to have
them accessible to him
in a workable manner. This is where
video-computer symbiosis
becomes necessary. Virtually every
possible alternative can be
programmed into a computer, which
then can employ them in a
specific programmed order, or within
random or semirandom
parameters. Computer-controlled switchers
can and will be designed
that allow simultaneous processing of
the video source by computer
program, audio modulation, and
manual override. In this way all
desirable features of
synergetic technology would be available: the
randomness of a
computer, which can be infinitely more "random"
than any human;
the video being semicontrolled by its own audio;
and finally the
artist manually overriding the whole system. Thus it
would be
possible to preset all conceivable combinations of
alternatives
for one video source, which could be actuated by one
button or
one audio tone. These capabilities not only exist within the
scope of existing video technology, they are virtually inherent
in the
nature of the medium.
Until recently the one major advantage of
cinema over video was
sprocket holes and frames: that is, the
ability to do stop-frame
animation. For many years the closest
that video could come to this
was the digital method of
videotape editing such as the Ampex
Editec system or the EECO
system. These methods involved the
digital timing of the
videotape cue track in hours, minutes, seconds,
and frames. Thus
it was possible to pre-edit a videotape session by
setting a
dial, or to do post-editing and single-frame animation,
though
extremely time consuming and lacking precision. Remarks
video
artist Loren Sears:
One of the hardest things to do is stop the
recorders and try to sync them up
again. So the goal is to go
from start to finish in planned lengths but still keeping
the
tape recorders running. So I tried doing some animation with an
Editec
system. You can animate by presetting anything from one
to thirty-six frames,
ARTSCILAB 2001
280 Expanded Cinema
and there's a manual override that keeps
repeating the same frame as long as
you hold it down. You lay
down a cue track and set the machine going in an
automatic mode.
It has a seventeen-second cycle time in which it rolls to a stop,
backs up and lays down a pulse where it's to pick up next time.
It took about four
hours to do twenty or thirty seconds of
animation, whereas in film that's all instant
with the
single-frame button. This is exactly the reverse of other aspects of
videoversus-
film, in which video is much more expedient. It's an
extreme example, but
it's something that film can do easily and
there's no advantage of doing it in
television; you waste time,
and you can be more creative infilm.
However, greater animation control and
simplicity is now possible
in video through computer-controlled
color disk recording such as
the Ampex HS-200 system. It
provides all of the editing freedom that
previously was possible
only with film, plus the ability to pre-program
the insertion of
cuts, wipes, dissolves, and other effects exclusive to
video—
all instantaneously, with the push of a button. Digital
identification and retrieval of any frame within four seconds
allows
skip-framing and stop-motion at normal, fast, and slow
speeds in
both forward and reverse modes. Apart from this
positive note, I
have stressed the limitations of the video
system as an aesthetic
medium because they need to be
emphasized, and because the
many positive aspects of
videographic art will be quite clear in the
pages that follow.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes
VT Is Not TV
It is essential to remember that VT is not
TV: videotape is not
television though it is processed through
the same system. The
teleportation of audio-visual information
is not a central issue in the
production of synaesthetic
videotapes; rather, the unique properties
of VTR are explored
purely for their graphic potential. An important
distinction
must also be made between synaesthetic videotapes and
videographic cinema: the videotape artist has no intention of
transforming his work into film.
"I've come to find out that there's a lot of
difference between
seeing something on a TV screen and seeing it
projected," explains
Loren Sears. "The two-dimensionality of the
movie screen as simply
a surface for reflecting a shadow is
quite obviously incident light.
Television doesn't have that
two-dimensional quality at all; it doesn't
strike you as a
surface on which something is being projected, but
as a source.
It comes as light through a thing."
It is perhaps not surprising that the most
important work in
synaesthetic videotape has been done through
affiliates of the
National Educational Television network (NET).
In 1967 an experimental
video workshop was established at NET's
San Francisco
outlet, KQED, with funds from the Rockefeller
Foundation and the
National Endowment for the Arts. Two years
later the workshop had
become the National Center for
Experiments in Television, with a
grant from the National
Corporation for Public Broadcasting.
In 1968 KQED became involved in a third
project. In collaboration
with San Francisco's Dilexi
Foundation, the station provided facilities
and assistance to
artists commissioned to work in the video medium.
Some of the
most impressive videotapes to be seen anywhere
resulted from
this project, notably Terry Riley's Music With Balls and
Phil
Makanna's The Empire of Things.
Meanwhile, that same year, NET's Public
Broadcasting Laboratory
(PBL) produced a program of video
experiments by six artists
including Allan Kaprow, Nam June
Paik, and Otto Piene. The show,
called "The Medium Is the
Medium," was produced at WGBH-TV in
Boston, where later in 1969
Stan VanDerBeek became the first of
ARTSCILAB 2001
282 Expanded Cinema
several artists to take up residence under a
three-year Rockefeller
grant. He was followed by Nam June Paik.
A new breed of television management is
evolving as teledynamic
video consciousness saturates the
noosphere. Since the fundamental
art of television rests in the
hands of the broadcaster— the
ability to move information
through time and space— his attitude
toward the medium is a
matter of cardinal importance. We know
what most broadcasters
think of the medium; in the following pages,
in addition to
discussing artists and their work, I hope to present a
new
attitude from a new generation of TV management. Until
videotronic hardware becomes inexpensive enough for individual
use it is the producers, directors, and station managers who
make
today's video art possible. Brice Howard of the National
Center, John
Coney of the KQED/Dilexi programs, and Fred Barzyk
of WGBH are
exemplary of the new vision in television.
Videospace: The KQED Experimental Project
With few exceptions, most of the work
produced during the first
year in the experimental workshop was
black-and-white videotape.
The approach seemed balanced between
use of the medium for its
kinaesthetic design potential, and the
medium as vehicle or
environment for some other aesthetic
content. Artists in residence
included a composer, Richard
Feliciano; a poet, Joanne Kyger; a
novelist, William Brown; a
painter-sculptor, William Allen; and a
filmmaker, Loren Sears.
In addition, various guests were brought in
throughout the year,
participating from one week to three weeks.
These included Ellen
Stewart of the Cafe La Mama theatre troupe;
Paul Foster, one of the
playwrights who had come out of that
workshop; Eugene Aleinakopf,
an expert in television law;
Maurice Freidman, a theological
philosopher, particularly known
in the United States for his English
translations of Martin
Buber; Robert Creeley and Charles Olson,
poets; and Joel Katz, a
New York psychiatrist.
The two most vital functions were performed
by Robert Zagone
who was resident director of the actual
videotaping sessions, and
Brice Howard, organizer and
administrator of the project. I asked him
what answers had been
found to the project's two questions: What is
the nature of the
medium? Can an artist work in it?
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 283
BRICE: Yes, the artist can work in
television. Of course it's quite a
different system from that of
the artist. Artists generally are one-toone
people. They and
their medium are in direct contact. But the
television system
engages a great many people; any product of
that system is the
product of a number of people. No single human
being can make
anything in television. And of course television
equipment is
not easily available to the artist either.
GENE: One possibility is working through the
medium of the
cassette videotape cartridge rather than a
broadcast system.
BRICE: No question about it. But it s a long
way off, not so much
technologically and commercially, but
philosophically. The kind of
work going into the EVR cartridge
now is institutional. The artist
will be the last to
participate.
GENE: And what have you discovered about the
nature of the
medium?
BRICE: Where I'm having the greatest
difficulty in reporting this
occurrence is in discovering ways
of separating the medium from
its broadcast, distribution
characteristics. Television has been a
broadcast system, and for
that reason its technology and its
practice grow essentially
from that logic, the logic of distribution.
We accepted the
inference that we were not obligated to produce
anything. And
because of that, all kinds of things happened. If we
had started
out by saying "let's make a program" it would have
been a pretty
redundant or repetitious thing.
GENE: In your estimation the technology is
separate from the
practice?
BRICE: The emphasis so often
gets centered in the technological. I
want to take it away from
the technology because it really is not
that. So frequently I
find myself saying, when confronted with
technical questions,
"It is not technology; it is attitude shift that is
making this
happen." Indeed, there is no technology in any of the
experiences we've had that is greater than that which exists in
any
standard television studio. We went after our goal from a
different
place. For instance, you can experience some of our
material and
feel that you're discovering an enormously rich
technical
breakthrough, when as a matter of fact what you're
experiencing is
ARTSCILAB 2001
284 Expanded Cinema
process. And the same process would be with
clay, paint—
anything. In this case the material just happens to
be the electron.
All the tapes have no post-editing, are records
of process, records
of discovery, untouched, nonobjective,
nonprogrammatic. Very
often the most meaningful moments were
those in which some
incredibly remarkable, mercurial connection
was occurring among
a number of people, and the process was
constantly feeding back
upon it.
GENE: Were certain visual effects
deliberately sought?
BRICE: When you describe a particular visual
effect achieved in our
work it must be remembered that there are
so many other
elements involved. Television has been fed by four
currents of
recent history, and one not so recent: cinema,
radio, journalism,
and theatre. And the characteristics of these
histories affected the
making process. You mention a specific
effect and I might tell you
that keying is the technical means
by which you acquire that effect.
But in order for that effect
to be genuinely valuable we have to add
theatre's part,
journalism's part, radio's part, and film's part. Then
keying
becomes something meaningful.
GENE: What effect does radio have on keying?
BRICE: It has to do with the architectural
space in which the
experience occurred. You see, the fascinating
character of the
space in which some of the sources of the mix
are acquired is that
it's a space of a different order. The
television studio is affected
architecturally by the influences
of theatre and radio. For example,
the audiometrics— the
acoustical character of that situation— is
very much influenced
by microphones which preceded television.
And how sound pickup
sources affect the order of masses, planes,
volumes,
compositions, so on. Very frequently the imposition of
that
technology, which has nothing to do with the experience you're
seeking at the moment, is there nonetheless and has to be taken
into consideration, forcing certain kinds of compromises. For
example there's no reason that an omni-directional acoustical
transducer cannot be devised to pick up all the sound in all the
360-degrees of cubic space within the studio. But there isn't
one.
And that's partly a factor of radio and partly a factor of
film.
The architectural space itself is very close to theatre,
from which
film derived its basis, etcetera, etcetera. And
indeed in a conven
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 285
tional studio, ask a so-called set designer,
stage designer,
television art director (all those terms apply
to the same man in
television; all those terms are used in
television), you ask that man
to fix you an environment and more
frequently than not he'll fix you
an environment that looks like
it's on a stage. Indeed you can
almost see the proscenium arch.
Now the cubic space with which
you are dealing in this newer
mode of television is of a different
order entirely. The only
space which is valid is the space on the
surface of that
monitor. Whether or not one wants to argue about
the word
"space" is irrelevant as long as you understand the intent.
I'm
saying that it isn't in the studio, it's in the monitor. Now, the
monitor screen has some remarkable characteristics. Among other
things, it itself is information irrespective of anything you
put in it—
sign, symbol, rhythm, duration, or anything. It is
delicious all by
itself, if you want to enjoy it, though its
matter is apparently of a
totally random character. It is
different, for example, from the
reflective surface, which is a
movie screen, off which light bounces
with the image intact. But
television is an electronic surface whose
very motion is
affecting the motion that you're putting into it. And
what is
really the richest part of television, less its technology, less
its cubist nature, less its incredible colorations and shapes
and
motions and excitements— it's now, it's capturing the damned
actual with all of its aberrations. Television will help us
become
more human. It will lead us closer to ourselves.
Robert Zagone: The Music of Electrons
Virtually all of the project's
black-and-white tapes, plus a one-hour
segment of a regular KQED
color program called West Pole, were
directed by Robert Zagone,
one of an increasing number of video
artists who approach the
medium from the side of the new
consciousness. ("I mixed the
programs," Zagone said. "We don't use
the term 'director' any
more.") Out of more than forty hours of tape
approximately
fifteen hours were considered relevant. Of these I
have selected
two for discussion here.
The first is a brief but devastating exercise
in feedback techniques,
which was among many effects
accompanying a poetry recital by
Robert Creeley. This particular
episode involves the gradual
ARTSCILAB 2001
286 Expanded Cinema
Multiple-camera feedback techniques
produced this disintegration of form
in Videospace at the
KQED Experimental
project.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 287
disintegration of the poet's profile in
silhouette. In addition to the
figure, other image sources
included multiple translucent plastic
surfaces being fed into a
monitor that was taking images from still
another source. At one
point all three cameras shot the same
monitor that displayed
their images.
The result is an almost visceral, physical
quality to the image as
endless waves of flaking matter peel
away from the silhouette,
slowly at first, then faster and more
chaotically, with ever-increasing
convolutions of geometrical
patterns. A kind of serial nightmare, like
a magnetic field
suddenly rendered visible, the reverberations of
chiaroscuro
flip hectically in giant sweeping flak bursts of light until a
shimmering white glow is all that remains of the image of a man.
"It's
really a matter of where your head is at with respect to
the
technique," said Zagone. "I would say that it would take
eight months
to achieve in film the same effects that took us
one minute and forty-
five seconds with Robert Creeley's recital.
And even then the texture
would never be the same."
Like most videographics, the immediate
impression is of seeing
something that one has never encountered
before, except perhaps
in dreams. This was even more pronounced
in Zagone's interpretation
of a solo dance sequence involving a
male dancer in six
levels of delayed tape superimpositions of
de-beamed positive and
negative images. Three cameras taped the
dance simultaneously as
Zagone mixed. At first the dancer is
silhouetted in black against a
white field. A second and then a
third image of himself, delayed and
slightly staggered with each
superimposition, appear like ghosts who
follow him through his
routine. Suddenly the background becomes
dark and the dancer
develops a glowing white outline or halo; his
facial
characteristics become ominous with huge white eyes and
exaggerated features. Still more delayed images appear until
there
are six figures of the same dancer seen simultaneously at
various
points in time, like visual echoes. The richness of the
image was
varied with each superimposition, causing some images
to stand out
while others fade almost into nothingness. Finally,
as though trapped
in some video world where space and time are
out of register, the
dancer looms large and close, peering into
(out of) the camera
(monitor) as though to examine the "real"
world of men.
ARTSCILAB 2001
288 Expanded Cinema
Six levels of delayed videotape
superimpositions
of de-beamed positive
and negative images
were combined
in this experiment at KQED.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 289
"The technique is satisfactory," said Zagone,
"but requires
immense sophistication on the part of the user.
You must constantly
be thinking in advance— where will you be
five superimpositions
from now? How will you deal with the tape
at that point with respect
to the images you're creating now? We
had no plan for that
sequence ten minutes before it began. The
conceiving of it took
place as it happened in the cathode tube.
It's all in the electrons. The
effects exist nowhere but where
you see them. It's not in clipper
levels or blanking pulses or
blacks and whites— that's not where it's
at. The most successful
moments occurred when we had absolutely
no preconceived notion
of what would happen."
In May, 1968, Bob Zagone directed two
half-hour segments of
KQED's West Pole, featuring a rock concert
by The Sons of
Champlin. Even for young filmmakers of the San
Francisco/Berkeley
area, where synaesthetic cinema is part of
the life-style, this initial
exposure to pure video amounted to
a revelation. An article in the
rock newspaper Rolling Stone
described the show as "more
psychedelic than underground
movies." The realization that
something so common and "public"
as a television set could be the
source of virtually
unprecedented visual experiences was the
beginning of a new
socio-technical awareness that is now common,
as are the West
Pole techniques. Colors bloomed, flared, and
melted; shapes
disintegrated and intermixed; the picture-plane was
demolished
in a cascade of spectral brilliance— the Bonanza fan,
who knew
that television was capable of something more, finally saw
that
potential in all of its phosphorescent shimmering beauty.
GENE: What were you reaching for in theWest
Pole work?
BOB: I just wanted to fuse the electronic music with
electrons. Video
is very close to music and rock music is
very close to video.
GENE: What effects were you particularly
pleased with?
BOB: Tape delays and de-beaming, primarily.
We had been
working with refinements of those techniques
regularly for six
months.
GENE: There's a fabulous scene
where the fellow is singing: green
gaseous clouds move across his mouth, and
when he opens his
mouth to sing, the inside is intense red.
BOB: That's a combination of tape delay, feedback, de-beaming,
tearing the key, and the black-burst
generator which suffuses any
color with black.
ARTSCILAB 2001
290 Epanded Cinema
Loren Sears: Sorcery. 1968. VTR.
Black and white. 30 min. "I wanted to
express a feeling of
entrapment in the
electronic environment."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 291
Loren Sears: The Sorcery of Neuro-Aesthetics
Loren Sears regards television as an
extension of the central
nervous system, and thus employs the
term "neuro-aesthetics" to
indicate the unique character of
videographic art. Sears produced
seventy-five minutes of
experimental videotapes as an artist in
residence at KQED in
1968. The best was called Sorcery, which he
codirected with Bob
Zagone. "Every medium," Sears explained,
has a fundamental means of operation. In film
it's sprocket holes, registration,
optics, frames. The
characteristics of television are different. In both cases,
however, there's a strategic way of using the medium
effortlessly.Sorcery was an
attempt to go right through the
medium using what it can do easily.
It occurred to me that if media are
extensions of the central nervous system,
it's like you're
taking on an extra load. There's more of yourself to deal with,
because while you're putting things out of it, you're also
taking them back in. So
I'm certain there are hallucinations
which occur entirely within this realm. It has its
own ability
to create, its own importance, its own way of seeing things. It
shapes
the world-view information that's put in and taken out of
it. So I wanted to do a
very intuitive piece that would express
a sense of the video mode of operation. I
wanted it to evolve
without a script simply from camera techniques, mixing
techniques, a set, two people clothed in an odd fashion, some
props like death's
heads. So I put Joanne Kyger and Chuck Wiley,
with his violin, in front of a rear-
projection screen for
slides.
I wanted to express a feeling of entrapment
in the electronic environment. You
watch television and all you
know is what's going on in television. That's all you
really
find out. There's no way to tell if that's really what's going on in
actuality. It
was pretty difficult to think of a way to suggest
that, so I just told Chuck and
Joanne that they were totally
trapped in this milieu and their problem was to try to
get
through it somehow to outside reality through some kind of
divination. They
were left alone in the studio with these
instructions and two cameramen who had
been given shooting
patterns to follow. They ad-libbed their way through it. Chuck
played his violin. And what happened was that they began to feel
it. It began to
work on them.
Through de-beaming and keying of one camera
while a second
camera was on tape-delay, an ominous sense of the
video environment
was generated through most ofSorcery.
Relatively representational
images slowly disintegrated into
swirling diaphanous lines and
ARTSCILAB 2001
292 Expanded Cinema
clouds of light. The death's head melts into
vague outlines through
which are seen smoky crumbling faces and
ghostly superimpositions.
Long sections of the half-hour tape
are composed of
swirling lines as sounds and voices are heard as
though from
another world. Humans interact with clouds of
electrons, which seem
finally to engulf them.
"Any medium can be transformed by the user,"
Sears said. "The
paradigm for it all is music. There's the music
of the medium, which
means it also has a muse. We can learn from
it. Television has been
used as an attraction, a come-on, an
effect. Nothing used for effect
is an art." Just as in his
synaesthetic cinema, Sears merged
aesthetic and technique. There
are no effects when form and
content are one.
Conceptual Gallery for Conceptual Art
The traditional triangle of
studio-gallery-collector in which art
historically has thrived
is slowly being transformed. The
psychological effect of
television's totally immaterial nature may be
largely
responsible for the contemporary artist's awareness of
concept
over icon. For several years Gerry Schum has operated a
unique
"television gallery" (Fernsehgalerie) at a station in
Dusseldorf, West Germany. "In art," he explains, "there is a
general
change from the possession of objects to the publication
of projects
or ideas. This of course demands a fundamental
change in artistic
commerce. One of the results of this change
is the TV gallery, more
or less a conceptual institution which
comes into existence only in
the moment of transmission. After
the broadcast there is nothing left
but a reel of film or
videotape. There's no object that can be seen 'in
reality' or be
sold as an object."
Somewhat similar ideas inspired San Francisco
art dealer James
Newman to transform his Dilexi Gallery into the
Dilexi Foundation in
December, 1968, with the purpose of
"allowing more freedom for the
artist, reaching a general
audience and making art an organic part of
day-to-day life."
Newman was among the few gallery owners to
recognize
television's potential as the most influential gallery in the
history of art. He engaged in a joint project with KQED-TV to
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 293
establish a regular series of programs in the
form of an "open
gallery," not to sell objects but to move
information— the experiential
information of aesthetic design
and concept.
Newman commissioned works by Robert Frank,
Ken Dewey,
Walter de Maria, Yvonne Rainer, Ann Halprin, Julian
Beck and the
Living Theatre, Robert Nelson, Frank Zappa, Edwin
Schlossberg,
Terry Riley, and Philip Makanna. The first pieces,
televised in the
spring and summer of 1969, were unanimously
acclaimed. Chiefly
responsible for this success was KQED
producer-director John
Coney, who coordinated, produced, and
codirected many of the
video projects, working closely with the
artists.
Terry Riley: Music With Balls
Rarely has the multiplex structure of any
film or videotape been so
totally integrated as in the
transcendental composition Music With
Balls (see color plates),
conceived by Terry Riley and commissioned
by the Dilexi
Foundation in 1968. It was the work of three men
whose separate
disciplines meshed in synaesthetic alloy: Terry Riley,
composer;
Arlo Acton, sculptor; John Coney, video mixer. Music With
Balls
is a dialectical synthesis of nonverbal energies that strikes
deep into the inarticulate conscious. It inundates the beholder
in
megabits of experiential design information, aural, visual,
and
kinetic. To understand it we must understand its four
elements:
music, sculpture, cinema, and video.
Riley's music is strongly influenced by the
work of LaMonte Young,
with whom he is closely associated. Yet
it can be said that Riley's
music is unique in itself and
represents, with the exception of Young,
the most vital and
refreshing American musical composition of the
late twentieth
century. While he is seriously involved with the "row"
and
"stasis" techniques that inform Young's work at a fundamental
level, Riley is able to subsume a wide range of musical
structure,
combining the climax and directionality of Western
music with the
stasis of Eastern modalities. The result is
cyclic precision and a
buoyant mathematical randomness.
For Music With Balls, Riley pre-recorded four
tracks of fourteen-
cycle beats with a tenor saxophone and a Vox
electric organ. Each
beat was assigned a pitch, thus forming a
tonal "row" that he played
ARTSCILAB 2001
294 Expanded Cinema
back through oscillators. Various levels of
tape delay were possible
by starting and stopping one or more of
the tracks randomly. In the
studio Riley sat behind a bright red
table, flanked by his tape
equipment. Against the recorded,
delayed, and oscillated time cycles
he played rhythmic
variations on his saxophone, effectively generating
a static yet
melodious macrostructure of cycles containing epicycles
within
epicycles. The music was alternately tense and
relaxing, a
shimmering trilling universe of aural bubbles penetrated
randomly by syncopated wailing crescendi and diminuendi. The
overall effect was magical, soothing, hypnotic.
Two stereo speakers were fitted into two of
Arlo Acton's giant black
spheres that were swung from the studio
ceiling on long wires and
revolved around the set in diminishing
circles, pushed periodically by
black-clad girls at either side.
Thus the amplification of the cyclic
music was itself heard in a
physically cyclic fashion as it swirled
about the empty space. A
smaller chromed sphere was set in
pendular motion, like a giant
metronome, just above Riley's head.
This had a calming,
centering effect.
This auditory/tactile/kinetic environment was
then processed
through cinema and video on several levels, all
corresponding to the
cycle/epicycle mode. Tiny ball bearings
suspended from threads
were filmed in ultraslow motion with a
high-speed camera to make
them seem heavy. The resulting film of
swinging spheres was made
into twelve loops that were then
superimposed over one another in
all the various combinations
and as many levels of multiple-exposure
as possible on one
master print that had been cut into a strip as long
as the
entire program, twenty-six minutes. This was fed through a
film
chain as one possible video source.
Two floor cameras shot Riley in wide-angle
and close-up, and also
focused alternately into a color monitor
and a concave mirror. "The
mirror gave the entire image a
curvature which corresponded to the
cyclic nature of the whole
piece," Coney explained. "Also it broke the
repetition of the
circular orbits by making them elliptical. Shooting the
color
monitor was not done for feedback but simply to achieve an
electronified or subaqueous visual patina. A rather blue cast.
Also it
accentuates the scan-lines which are appropriate to TV,
and we
used them as a design element. In addition it gave us the
ability to
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 295
have the same picture running synchronously
on two different
scales. Seeing the image a bit larger on one
camera than the other.
That produced a very interesting cycle
effect, particularly when we
dissolved to another image."
The master tape of Music With Balls is a
fabulously rich mantra of
color, sound, and motion. Huge spheres
sweep majestically across
the screen trailing comets of
shimmering ruby, emerald, and amber.
Contrapuntal trajectories
intersect, pierce, and collide. Keying, de-
beaming, wipes, and
dissolves result in phantasmagoric convolutions
of spatial
dimensions as Riley is seen in several perspectives
at once, in
several colors, alternately obscured and
revealed on various
planes with each pass of a pendulum. The
composition builds from
placid serenity to chaotic cacophany to
bubbly melodiousness
with a mad yet purposive grace. Acoustical
space, physical
space, and video space become one electronic
experience unlike
anything the cinema has ever known.
Philip Makanna: The Empire of Things
"I'm supposedly a sculptor," remarks Phil
Makanna, "but there's
something strange and maybe decaying about
making things—
things— peopling the overpeopIed world with more
junk, not really
touching anyone. More than anything I feel the
frustration,
desperation, of wanting to be able to reach out and
hold your heart."
With the startling beauty of his synaesthetic
compositionThe Empire
of Things (see color plates), Makanna
reached out through the
videosphere and held the hearts of
thousands.
A combination of sculptor, writer, filmmaker,
and electronic
engineer, Makanna was conducting a creative
television course at
the California College of Arts and Crafts
in Oakland when he was
commissioned by the Dilexi Foundation in
1968. At the college,
Makanna focused on TV as a medium
specifically for such "fine"
artists as sculptors and painters.
His approach followed two
directions simultaneously: videotape
as a self-contained aesthetic
experience, and closed-circuit
television as an environment for live
events of a theatrical
nature. These included a collaborative effort
with the Mills
College Electronic Tape Music center, involving live
performers,
eight television cameras, twenty monitors, and eight
ARTSCILAB 2001
296 Expanded Cinema
audio recorders functioning simultaneously.
In another project, three
and four acts of King Lear were
presented simultaneously in several
modes: actors seen in
rear-projected movies, actors in video
projections, actors seen
through several closed-circuit monitors, and
"live" actors on a
stage.
But it remained for the medium of broadcast
television, andThe
Empire of Things, to reveal to Makanna a
means of reaching out to
the hearts of the public. "He has such
a powerful conceptual mind,"
recalls John Coney, "that all I did
was guide him into a general
technical format, offered
suggestions that he could use as a matrix,
and explained the
capabilities of the color-film chain in painting video
color. We
processed The Empire of Things entirely by de-beaming
the guns
of the film chain. We formed the film into loops and
practiced
over and over again until the balance between form and
content
was perfect. We had a couple of engineers— Larry Bentley
and
Wayne McDonald— who were very interested in that piece of
equipment as an electronic painting palette."
While Music With Balls wholly nonverbal and
concrete, The Empire
of Things is that rare combination of words
and images often sought
but seldom achieved. Makanna
miraculously manages to contrast
the abstraction of words with
the concreteness of images, clarity with
ambiguity, alternating
between evocation and exposition to produce
an overwhelming
emotional environment of evocative powers. The
title of the
piece is the title of a short story by H. L. Mountzoures that
appeared in the New Yorker magazine. An offscreen narrator reads
the entire story aloud while we see a collection of images shot
by
Makanna specifically for this purpose, combined with stock
footage
from old movies, newsreels, and TV commercials.
Mountzoures' story is itself a masterpiece of
imagist prose, often
indistinguishable from poetry and only
occasionally linear in
structure. A parable of war in
surrealistic and extra-objective terms, it
consists of
alternating haikuesque impressions of things observed,
events
remembered, nightmares experienced, and realities confused
in
the first-person consciousness of the narrator. One is completely
caught up in this strangely beautiful story as it unfolds with a
masterly richness of language. At the same time, however, the
images are generating their own, quite separate, world of
impres
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 297
sions. One is caught in a sensorium of
contrasts, a dialogue
between visual and aural absolutes from
which arises a pervasive
sense of abstraction. One is made
keenly aware of nuances seldom
expressed with such clarity in
any art form. The synthesis of harmonic
opposites is raised to
perfection.
Word-and-image connections are tangential at
best, and often
starkly antithetical in conceptual content. The
narrator might be
speaking of old belongings in an attic trunk,
for example, while we
see a line of men on horseback at the rim
of a steep cliff. As the
horses plunge down the incline, video
de-beaming turns the sky
orange and sends mint-green flames
streaking behind them. The
scene becomes an Expressionist
painting of green shadows and
purple highlights quivering in a
liquid mosaic of hues. This almost
Daliesque image of rainbow
horses melts into an Impressionist
vision of sun-dappled woods.
A horse and rider move slowly through
trees whose colors
suddenly detach and float in midair. Images
merge until all that
is left of the horseman is a cloud of electronic
pigment moving
nebulously through a spangled field of Seurat-like
pointillist
fragments. Elsewhere a man rides a bicycle that melts
beneath
him; he performs a strange dance ritual on a deserted
beach as
the sky seems to burst in spectral madness. Never have
conceptual information and design information been so poetically
fused as in The Empire of Things.
We haven't even begun to explore the
potentials of the medium [Coney
remarked]. Part of it lies
beyond our reach because of stringent union regulations
as to
who can use the equipment and who can't. Part of it lies beyond the
reach
of the technicians who are authorized to use it.
Videotronics will never come of
age, will never be useful for
creative purposes, until the knobs are put in the
hands of the
artist. We haven't even begun, for example, to work with really
controlled color design. One built-in characteristic of
television is the ability to
manipulate spectral colors. There's
a tremendous amount that can be done with
muted and controlled
colors that we haven't even started to do.
Television's biggest problem today is
learning how to let go. Essentially that's
what I'm trying to
do; I want to let go of control without creating a disaster on the
set. I want to open television to the extent that film is open.
You see a multiplicity
of voices and ideas in film on a number
of levels of intent, interest, and
seriousness. It doesn't
always have to be "professional" to be true. And truth is
what
we're after.
ARTSCILAB 2001
298 Expanded Cinema
WGBH-TV, Boston: "The Medium Is the Medium"
"The reason we're experimenting," explained
Fred Barzyk, "is that
a large portion of the public is really
ahead of television. They can
accept more images and ideas at
once. They're watching
underground films; they're commercial
buffs who are fascinated by
how many cuts there are in a
Pepsi-Cola ad. These are the people
who could easily be turned
on to educational television if it had the
proper ingredients."
With young producer-directors like Barzyk taking
an interest in
television as an educational experience, the ingredients
are
certain to be there sooner or later.
It was at WGBH, for example, that the program
"What's Happening
Mr. Silver?" was originated. A regular
experimental feature on pop
culture, the program proved so
successful that it was carried also by
most other ETV stations
except KQED in San Francisco, where it
was found to be
"technically innovative but slightly sick." In 1967 the
program's host, David Silver, conducted his weekly show from a
bed
in the center of the studio floor, in which he reclined
naked with an
equally nude young lady.
We wanted to experiment with every possible
aspect of the medium [Barzyk
explained] and intimate behavior in
the form of nudity became one factor. We
tried to create new
problems in the broadcast system so that we could break
down the
system as it existed. We adopted some of John Cage's theories: many
times we'd have as many as thirty video sources available at
once; there would
be twenty people in the control room— whenever
anyone got bored they'd just
switch to something else without
rhyme or reason.
"The Medium Is the Medium" came out of this
show in one sense, because
after two years of "What's Happening
Mr. Silver" we had so totally bombarded the
engineering staff
with experimentation. We took the attitude that the engineers
would have to change their normal functions. In most of the
television industry a
video man is a video man, an audio man is
an audio man, a cameraman is a
cameraman; they never step over
each other's bounds. We created a situation in
which each one of
them was asked constantly what he could do for the station.
We
told them they were artists. We said each week, "We don't know what
we're
going to do, here's our raw material, let's see what we
can do with it." So out of
this the audio man had his sources
running, the cameraman had his sources
running, and so on.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthelic Videotapes 299
Initially there is a great deal of
resistance from the engineering staff, as might
be expected when
you change someone's job conditions. We deprived them of
their
security. I mean, you know what a "good picture" is: flesh tones,
lighting, so
on. But we deprived them of that. We said on our
shows it doesn't really matter.
One engineer turned off his
machine. He didn't think it was right. A year later he
came up
to me with three new ideas that we might be able to use. So the
pressure is reversed to bring creativity out instead of
repressing it; we have the
most production-oriented engineers in
the whole country, I'd say. In effect we tell
them the station
is experimenting and we ask them not to be engineers.
It was in this environment that the
experimental program "The
Medium Is the Medium" took form in the
winter of 1968-69. The
contributions of Allan Kaprow, Nam June
Paik, and Aldo Tambellini
are discussed elsewhere in this
chapter; Otto Piene and James
Seawright were also among the six
artists who participated in the
project.
Otto Piene: Electronic Light Ballet
Otto Piene's work with luminescence,
pneumatics, and lighterthan-
air environments is among the most
elegant examples of
aesthetic applications of technology. The
artist's exquisitely delicate
sense of proportion and balance,
as demonstrated in his Light
Planets, for example, is always
stunning to behold. His synaesthetic
videotape Electronic Light
Ballet was no exception.
Typical of Piene's austere sensibility, only
two image sources were
used in this piece: a grid of colored
dots that melted in rainbow
colors across the screen; and a
videotape of Piene'sManned Helium
Sculpture, one of a series of
experiments with lift and equilibrium
that the artist conducted
as a Fellow at M.I.T.'s Center for Advanced
Visual Studies. The
helium sculpture involved 800 feet of transparent
polyethylene
tubing in seven loops, inflated with approximately 4,000
cubic
feet of helium, attached with ropes and parachute harness to a
ninety-five-pound girl for a thirty-minute ascension into the
air,
controlled from the ground by ropes attached to the
balloons and
harness.
The ascension was staged at night in the
parking lot of WGBH,
which was illuminated by colored
floodlights. Over this slow,
buoyant, ethereal, surrealistic
scene Piene superimposed a geometrical
grid of regularly-spaced
colored dots similar in effect to the
multiple-bulb brilliance
of his light sculptures. In exquisite counterpoint
ARTSCILAB 2001
300 Expanded Cinema
Otto Piene: Electronic Light Ballet.
1969.
Hi-Band Color VTR. 15 ips. 5 min.
Lighter-than-air
space contrasted with vivid
videospace in Piene's usual elegant
fashion.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 301
to the balloon scene the dots flared
brightly, became liquid, developed
spermlike tails, and finally
dripped oozing globlets of color across the
screen. The
technique was deceptively simple: de-beaming the separate
guns
of the color camera with a strong hot light source shining through
multiply-perforated stencils. Both the stencils and the camera
were
moved, causing a sperm-shaped burn-in of intense colors. If
a dot
appeared originally as yellow and was moved, the de-beamed
"tail" would
remain yellow but the "head" of the comet-shaped
light would suddenly
turn red or green. The effect, as in all of
Piene's work, was quietly elegant,
revealing the potentials of
the medium in the hands of a true artist.
James Seawright: Capriccio for TV
James Seawright, then technical supervisor of
the Electronic Music
Center of Columbia and Princeton
Universities, was best known for
kinetic/electronic sculptures.
In fact, Capriccio for TV (see color
plates) was Seawright's
first experience with video as a creative
medium. Whereas
Piene's effort was a ballet of light and air,
Seawright
processed an actual ballet pas de deux through the
videotronic
medium to produce an inspired dance of form and color.
In contrast to the elaborate yet
unimaginative convolutions of the
CBS "Limbo" program,
Seawright's piece was simple and effective.
He televised two
dancers— his wife Mimi Garrard and Virginia
Laidlaw— against a
score of electronic music by Bulent Arel. In the
first two
"movements" the dancers were shot in negative color and
were
superimposed over reversed images of themselves, producing
a
Rorschach-like mirror effect similar to bas-relief "flopping" in the
cinema. In the concluding section Seawright televised the scene
with
three cameras that recorded only one of the three basic
colors each
onto three separate tapes. In addition, one camera
was on tape
delay so that a second dimension of abstraction was
added. It was
therefore possible to see two images of the same
figure performing
the same action at different stages in
different colors, whereas the
other figure was equally abstract
in other colors. The image took on
a ghostly quality, suggesting
colored X rays or dream sequences in
the mind's eye. Space,
time, form, and color were brought into
concert in an
unforgettable video experience.
ARTSCILAB 2001
302 Expanded Cinema
Nam June Paik: Cathode Karma
"Cybernetics, the art of pure relations, has
its origins in karma. The Buddhists
say karma is sangsara,
relationship is metempsychosis. Cybernated art is
important, but
art for cybernated life is more important, and the latter need not
be
cybernated."
"My experimental television is not always
interesting," admits Nam
June Paik, "but not always
uninteresting: like nature, which is
beautiful not because it
changes beautifully, but simply because it
changes." Paik is the
embodiment of East and West, design scientist
of the electron
gun, pioneer ecologist of the videosphere. He is to
television
what John Whitney is to the computer; he does with TV
sets what
David Tudor does with pianos. "Television has been
attacking us
all our lives," he says, "now we can attack it back."
This Korean-born genius has been attacking it
back longer than
anyone, and in his own inimitable fashion. The
bloody head of an ox
was hung over the door to his first video
exhibit in Wuppertal,
Germany, in 1963, as a shock device "to
get the audience into a
oneness of consciousness so they could
perceive more"— as in Zen,
the master would strike the pupil.
Although he never really harmed
anyone, Paik was for several
years a cultural terrorist, a kind ofdeus
ex machina of the
Orient, who left in his wake a series of demolished
pianos,
clipped neckties, bizarre junkyard robots, and scandalized
audiences from Holland to Iceland. John Cage once remarked that
"Paik's work, performances, and daily doings never cease by turn
to
amaze, delight, shock, and sometimes terrify me."
In recent years Paik has abandoned his
mixed-media environmental
Happenings to concentrate exclusively
on television as an
aesthetic and communicative instrument.
Independently, in collaboration
with scientists, and in a
special research and development
program with the State
University of New York, he has explored
nearly every facet of
the medium, paving the way for a new generation
of video
artists. His work has followed four simultaneous directions:
synaesthetic videotapes; videotronic distortions of the received
signal; closed-circuit teledynamic environments; and sculptural
pieces, usually of a satirical nature.
There are approximately four million
individual phosphor trace-
points on the face of a 21-inch
television screen at any given
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 303
moment. Paik's canvas is the electromagnetic
field that controls the
distribution of these trace-points in
horizontal and vertical polar
coordinates at 525 lines per
second. By interfering, warping, and
otherwise controlling the
cathode's magnetic field, he controls the
four million glowing
traces. "It creates the possibility of electron-
drawing," he
says. "It's better than drawing on a CRT with a light pen
because it's multicolored and provides interaction with the air
program." (See color plates.)
Although he is continually developing new
parameters of control
and interaction with television, most of
Paik's basic techniques were
developed in the period 1963-64 in
collaboration with Hideo Uchida,
president of Uchida Radio
Research Institute in Tokyo, and with
Shuya Abe, an electronics
engineer who, according to Paik, "knows
that science is more
beauty than logic." Paik has outlined three
general areas of
variability with these techniques. ("Indeterminism
and
variability are underdeveloped parameters in the optical arts," he
says, "though they have been the central problem in music for
the
last two decades. Conversely, the parameter of sex has been
underdeveloped in music as opposed to literature and the visual
arts.")
The first level of variability is the live
transmission of the normal
broadcast program, "which is the most
variable optical and
semantical event of our times... the beauty
of distorted Nixon is
different from the beauty of distorted
football hero, or not always
pretty but always stupid female
announcer." Paik estimates that he
can create at least five
hundred different variations from one normal
broadcast program.
The second level of variability involves the
unique characteristics
of circuitry in each individual
television receiver. Paik has resurrected
several dozen
discarded sets from junkyards and brought them back
to wilder
life than ever before in their previous circuits. "I am proud to
say that thirteen sets suffer thirteen different varieties of
distortion,"
Paik once announced, and then added: "1957 modelRCA
sets are
the best." By altering the circuitry of his receivers
with resistors,
interceptors, oscillators, grids, etc., Paik
creates "prepared televisions"
that are equivalent in concept to
David Tudor's prepared
pianos.
ARTSCILAB 2001
304 Expanded Cinema
The third level of variability is the
manipulation of these prepared
TVs with wave-form generators,
amplifiers, and tape recorders to
produce various random,
semirandom, or completely controlled
effects, examples of which
are: (a) the picture is changeable in three
ways using hand
switches: upside-down, right-left, positive-negative;
(b) the picture can become smaller or larger
in vertical or horizontal
dimensions separately, according to
the amplitude of the tape
recorder; (c) the horizontal and
vertical electron-beam deflection of
normal TV is changed into a
spiral deflection using a yoke oscillator-
amplifier, causing an
average rectangular picture to become fanlike;
(d) the picture
can be "dissipated" by a strong demagnetizer whose
location and
rhythm contribute variety; (e) amplitude levels from
radios or
tape recorders can be made to intercept a relay signal at
the
grid of the output tube so that the picture is visible only when the
amplitude changes; (f) asymmetrical sparks flash across the
screen
when a relay is intercepted at the AC 110-volt input and
fed by a 25watt
amplifier without rectifier; (g) a 10-megohm
resistor is placed at
the vertical grid of the output tube and
interacts with a sine wave to
modulate the picture; (h) wave
forms from a tape recorder are fed to
the horizontal grid of the
output tube, causing the horizontal lines to
be warped according
to the frequency and amplitude.
Once a set has been thus
prepared, the simple flick of a switch
results in breathtakingly
beautiful imagery, from delicate Lissajous
figures to spiraling
phantasmagoric designs of surreal impact and
dazzling
brilliance. Tubular horizontal bands of color roll languidly
toward the viewer like cresting waves; flaccid faces melt,
twitch, and
curl, ears replacing eyes; globs of iridescent
colors flutter out of
place. When videotape playback systems are
used as image
sources instead of broadcast programs, the extent
of control is
multiplied and the visual results are astounding.
However, technical descriptions tend to
underplay the sheer
intuitive genius of Paik's video art. His
techniques are hardly
exclusive and are far from sophisticated
(engineers say he does
everything he shouldn't), and his
cluttered loft on New York's Canal
Street is scientifically
unorthodox to say the least. Yet out of this
tangle of wires and
boxes comes some of the most exquisite
kinaesthetic imagery in
all of electronic art. "My experimental color
television has
instructional resource value," he suggests. “Kinder
ARTSCILAB 2001
Electromagnetic distortions of the video
image by Nam June Paik. "Out of this
tangle of wires and
boxes comes some of
the most exquisite kinaesthetic imagery in
all of electronic art." Photos: Peter Moore.
ARTSCILAB 2001
306 Expanded Cinema
garten and elementary school children should
be exposed to electronic
situations as early as possible. My
experimental TV demonstrates
various basic facts of physics and
electronics empirically,
such as amplitude modulation, radar,
scanning, cathode rays, shadow
mask tubes, oscillography, the
ohm principle, overtone, magnetic
character, etc. And it's a
very pleasant way to learn these things."
Perhaps the most spectacular of Paik's
videotape compositions was
made early in 1969 for the PBL show
"The Medium Is the Medium" at
WGBH-TV in Boston, where later he
became artist in residence. Paik
brought a dozen of his prepared
TVs into the studio; using three color
cameras he mixed these
images with two nude dancers, tape delays,
and positive-negative
image reversals. The nude slow-motion
dancers in multiple levels
of delayed action suddenly burst into
dazzling silver sparks
against emerald gaseous clouds; rainbow-hued
Lissajous figures
revolved placidly over a close-up of two lovers
kissing in
negative colors; images of Richard Nixon and other
personalities
in warped perspectives alternated with equally warped
hippies.
All this was set against a recording of the Moonlight Sonata,
interrupted periodically by a laconic Paik who yawned, announced
that life was boring, and instructed the viewer to close his
eyes just as
some fabulous visual miracle was about to burst
across the screen.
Later in 1969, Paik produced an impressive
teledynamic
environment called Participation TV. The first
version was shown in
an exhibit called "Television as a Creative
Medium" at the Howard
Wise Gallery in New York City; it was then
modified into Participation
TV No. 2 for the "Cybernetic
Serendipity" exhibit in Washington, D.C.
The principle of the
piece involves three television cameras whose
signals are
displayed on one screen by the red, green, and blue
cathode guns
respectively; the tube shows three different images in
three
different colors at once. Color brightness is controlled by
amplitudes from three tape recorders at reverse phase. Thus the
viewer sees himself three times in three colors on the same
screen,
often appearing to float in air or to dissolve in
shimmering water as
multicolored feedback echoes shatter into
infinity. This was repeated
on three and four different TV sets
arranged around the environment.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 307
"Television has not yet left the breast":
Nam June Paik with Charlotte Moorman in
TV Bra for Living
Sculpture.
Howard Wise
Gallery, New York, 1969. Images are
modulated by musical
tones played on the
cello. Photo: Peter Moore.
ARTSCILAB 2001
308 Expanded Cinema
"The real issue implied in art and
technology," he has said, "is not to
make another scientific
toy, but how to humanize the technology and
the electronic
medium… I suggest Silent TV Station, which transmits
only
beautiful 'mood art' in the sense of mood music. What I'm aiming
at with my Lissajous figures and other distortions is a
television
equivalent of Vivaldi, or electronic Compoz. Lumia
art will then
become a permanent asset in the collections of
millions of people.
The Silent TV Station will simply be there,
not intruding on other
activities, and will be looked at exactly
like a landscape or a beautiful
bathing nude of Renoir. Normal
TV bores you and makes you
nervous; this soothes you. It's like
a tranquilizer. Maybe you could call
it video-soma."
Paik's exquisite sense of satirical irony
comes through most
effectively in his video sculpture pieces. In
TV Bra for Living
Sculpture, Paik covered cellist Charlotte
Moorman's bare breasts with
two tiny three-inch TV sets whose
images were modulated by the
notes played on her cello. "Another
attempt to humanize technology,"
Paik explained. For an exhibit
titled "The Machine at the End of the
Machine Age" at the Museum
of Modern Art, Paik contributed a chair
with a built-in TV set
in place of the seat: one was able to sit on the
program of
one's choice. For an exhibit at New York's Bonino Gallery
he
constructed a video crucifix of glaring and ominous proportions;
and in the privacy of his studio loft there sits a box
containing a TV set
that peeps through the vaginal opening of a
photographed vulva.
"Art," he says, "is all activities, desires,
phenomena, that one cannot
explain."
Aldo Tambellini: Black TV
"Our creative involvement with television
must begin now so that the electronic
energy of communication
can give birth to new visions: we will face the realities
which
astronauts and scientists know to be part of life."
Intermedia artist and filmmaker Aldo
Tambellini has worked
creatively with television in many ways
for several years. He has
produced synaesthetic videotapes,
videographic films, and closed-
circuit teledynamic environments.
All of his work, in whatever medium,
is concerned with the theme
of "black," both as idea and
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 309
Aldo Tambellini: Black TV. 1964-68.16mm.
Black and white. 9½ min. Two years of TV
news compressed
into a staccato barrage
of sight and sound.
ARTSCILAB 2001
310 Expanded Cinema
Aldo Tambellini: Black Video Two. 1968.
VTR. Black
and white. Both image and sound were generated
electronically. Made in collaboration
with engineer Ken
Wise. Photos: Peter Moore.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 311
experience. For Tambellini, black is the womb
and the cosmos, the
color of skin and the color of the new
consciousness. "Black is the
beginning," he says. "It is birth,
the oneness of all, the expansion of
consciousness in all
directions."
Tambellini began working with videotape in
1966-67 as part of his
intermedia presentations. This work was
subsequently expanded
into live, closed-circuit, and broadcast
video experiments. In the
spring of 1969, Tambellini became the
recipient of a grant from the
New York State Council on the Arts
in a project to develop
relationships between artists and
television engineers. He worked
with technologists at five
educational TV stations throughout New
York, producing several
experimental programs.
Also in 1969 he was one of six artists
participating in the PBL
program "The Medium Is the Medium" at
WGBH-TV in Boston. The
videotape produced for the project,
called Black, involved one
thousand slides, seven 16mm. film
projections, thirty black children,
and three live TV cameras
that taped the interplay of sound and
image. The black-and-white
tape is extremely dense in kinetic and
synaesthetic information,
assaulting the senses in a subliminal
barrage of sight and sound
events. The slides and films were
projected on and around the
children in the studio, creating an
overwhelming sense of the
black man's life in contemporary
America. Images from all three
cameras were superimposed on one
tape, resulting in a
multidimensional presentation of an ethnological
attitude. There
was a strong sense of furious energy, both
Tambellini's and the
blacks', communicated through the space/time
manipulations of
the medium.
Black TV is the title of Tambellini's
best-known videographic film,
which is part of a large
intermedia project about American television.
Compiled from
filmed television news programs and personal
experimental
videotapes, Black TV has been seen in many versions
during the
four-year period in which Tambellini constantly re-edited it.
"Since my interest is in multimedia and mixed-media live events,
and
in experimental television, I think of film as a material to
work with,
part of the communications media rather than an end
in itself. In the
future we will be communicating through
electronically transmitted
images; Black TV is about the future,
the contemporary American,
ARTSCILAB 2001
312 Expanded Cinema
Aldo Tambellini in control room of
WGBH-TV, Boston.
Below, a scene from Black (1969), an
experimental videotape
he produced at the station with 1,000
slides, seven 16mm.
projectors, thirty black children, and three
TV cameras.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 313
the media, the injustice, the witnessing of
events, and the expansion
of the senses. The act of
communication and the experience is the
essential."
As Tambellini's remarks indicate, Black TV is
about perception in
the intermedia network. It generates a
pervasive atmosphere of the
process-level perception by which
most of us experience the
contemporary environment. Since it
involves the use of multiple
monitors and various levels of
video distortion, there is a sense of
the massive simultaneity
inherent in the nature of electronic media
communication. Black
TV is one of the first aesthetic statements on
the subject of
the intermedia network as nature, possibly the only
such
statement in film form.
Black Video One and Two are representative of
the techniques and
approaches involved in Tambellini's videotape
compositions. He calls
them "video constructions" to emphasize
that they are self-contained
image-and sound-generating units,
which do not take image
material either from broadcast programs
or closed-circuit cameras.
Instead, special circuitry is devised
to generate both image and
sound electronically on two monitors.
These completely synthetic
videographics can be juxtaposed with
other image material to create
a sense of convergence between
different worlds. As in most of
Tambellini's work, archetypal
white globes, spheres, or expanding
coils are seen suspended in
a black video void. Various forms of
video noise are generated
to accentuate the purely kinetic aspect of
the tapes. Most of
this work was first produced in 1967-68, and has
been
incorporated into Tambellini's intermedia presentations and
films.
Black Video Two was exhibited at the Howard
Wise Gallery in New
York in 1967. Two years later, Wise
commissioned Tambellini and
two engineers from Bell Telephone
Laboratories to produce a work
for his exhibit "Television as a
Creative Medium." Tambellini and the
engineers, Tracy Kinsel and
Hank Reinhold, came up with Black
Spiral, a beautiful example of
aesthetically manipulated video
circuitry. The normal
rectangular raster of the TV picture was
transformed into a
circular raster by modification of the circuitry from
an xy
coordinate system to a polar coordinate system. As a result,
the
broadcast picture appeared as a flowing spiral; any movement in
the picture caused the spiral to swoop and explode in giant
gaseous
ARTSCILAB 2001
314 Expanded Cinema
curls of glowing phosphors. "Television is
not an object," Tambellini
said. "It's a live communication
media. Black Spiral brings you live
information. One day we will
look at nature as the floating astronauts
do in a spiral or
circular form where no up or down or gravity exists."
The sound
was transformed by modulating normal audio signals
from the
television station with a random audio signal.
"The artist will have to get to this medium
and begin to explore all
possibilities," Tambellini urges.
"After all, television is actually an
image made of light which
travels through time and space. I'm
interested in getting to
that particular point to actually show that light
is a
constantly moving and ever-changing form, that light is energy,
and the same energy which moves through us is the energy which
moves through the universe. It is the same energy we have
discovered
in the atom. When creative people begin to get
involved
with this idea of energy rather than making objects for
someone,
they will be exploring possibilities for everybody, art
will be an
exploration for all of mankind."
Eric Siegel: Video Color Synthesizer
"I see television as bringing psychology into
the cybernetic twenty-first century. I
see television as a
psychic healing medium creating mass cosmic consciousness,
awakening higher levels of the mind, bringing awareness of the
soul."
In 1960, as a high school student of fifteen,
Eric Siegel won second
prize in the New York City Science Fair
for a home-made, closed-
circuit television system he constructed
from second-hand tubes, a
microscope lens, and junk parts. The
following year he won another
prize in the same competition for
a home-made system called "Color
Through Black-and-White TV."
Although highly successful as a
technician, he was virtually
unknown as an artist until his spectacular
"Video Color
Synthesizer" was exhibited at New York's Howard Wise
Gallery in
May, 1969. It was clear the television generation had
produced
another genius.
The synaesthetic videotape Psychedelevision
in Color, made by
Siegel on his own home-made equipment, was at
least as creative
as works by more established artists
represented in the exhibit, and
according to some critics was
the outstanding work of the entire
ARTSCILAB 2001
Synaesthetic Videotapes 315
Eric Siegel: Psychedelevision. 1968-69.
Synthesized VTR. "Great waves of curling
clouds sweep under
and over the viewer
in turbulent fury."
show. "A work of genius," wrote video artist
Peter Sorensen in a rave
review devoted entirely to Siegel's
tape. A reviewer for Time found
Psychedelevision ". . . closer
to Kubrick's 2001 than to Disney's
Fantasia... a glowing visual
abstraction."
Siegel's synthesizer is a device that
converts the gray scale of a
video signal (in this case from a
portable videotape recorder
playback unit) into changes in hue
on the screen of a color TV set.
The results are, according to
Siegel, "electronic Rorschach patterns
in the context of a
metaphysical statement." The statement is the
tape he prepared
for processing through the synthesizer, and this
tape itself was
recorded through special equipment that the young
artist,
characteristically, calls his "magic box." This device, more
aptly described as a "video effects generator," processes images
from a portable TV camera during the actual taping: the images
are
transformed during the process of moving from the camera to
the
videotape recorder.
ARTSCILAB 2001
316 Expanded Cinema
One segment of Psychedelevision involves
variations on a portrait
of Albert Einstein as recorded through
the effects generator and
tinted through the color synthesizer.
Einstein's face is seen in
infinitely-repeated multiples, then
implodes, bursting into a shower of
fiery sparks, reforms again
from the fragments only to melt into
Daliesque puddles.
Because of the peculiar nature of the color
synthesizer, the colors
of Psychedelevision are unlike most
other video hues: now organic
in appearance, now like shimmering
metal or mercury, glowing with
an unearthly light, trembling in
fierce brilliance, like the colors on the
inside of the retina.
But in the best kinetic art it's form as well as
color that
determines the kinaesthetic effectiveness of the piece.
Siegel's
forms are virtually indescribable: great waves of curling
clouds
sweep under and over the viewer in turbulent fury, quite
reminiscent of the Stargate Corridor in 2001. Random fire bursts
of
phosphorescent crimson flash across this eerie landscape.
Suddenly
the forms become bilaterally symmetrical, with shapes
and colors
streaming wildly from the center of the screen.
"Psychedelevision is my attempt at video mind
expansion," Siegel
explained. "A new science must be created
which can reach the
inner core of human beings. One of the most
important tools of this
new science will be television. I've
been thinking of a television
system which would take impulses
from a human being through
electrodes in a positive feedback
loop: the person would be able to
watch his own neurological
reactions to the video patterns and video
information generators
activated by himself. The American Dream no
longer is evolving.
It's in a state of decay. Television must be
liberated."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema
"We use video technology in filmmaking,"
explains Loren Sears,
"exclusively for its graphic potentials.
You can't really 'represent' or
carry over satisfactorily into
film the electronic viewing experience of
watching television.
You can carry the graphics over, but not the
actual electronic
experience." In the best videographic cinema,
which we are about
to discuss, the artist is at least able to
approximate or
suggest the luminescent atomic world of video
imagery. As Sears
indicates, however, the motivation is more toward
the graphic
characteristics exclusive to television, which simply
cannot be
duplicated by cinema alone.
"Metamorphosis is the main thing you can do
with video that you
can't do with film," says Scott Bartlett.
"But video plus computers
could do it even better." As it turns
out, the optical effects of many
Hollywood films have for
several years been done on high-resolution
videotape since that
medium is less expensive to edit than film. But
the fantastic
capabilities inherent in videotape are not used; it is
employed
only as an imitation of cinema.
In the work discussed here, film and video
technologies have been
synthesized together, often through many
generations of processing,
to achieve graphic character unique
in the world of film. Since one
automatically thinks of any
movie image as having been
photographed by a camera,
videographic films are quite startling on
first encounter.
Nothing in one's experience with moviescan explain
how such
visions were captured on film— and indeed they were not:
videographic cinema might succinctly be described as a film of
videotaped film. "Color is the biggest problem," Bartlett
admits. "It's
very difficult to control. But more stable
circuits are being developed
all the time. The possible range of
video color is as great as the
range of color in any other
medium. And because you're right there
watching it happen you
can deal with the psychological nuances of
color and form."
Scott Bartlett: Tribal Television
"There's a pattern in my film work that could
be the pattern of a hundred-
thousand movies. It simply is repeat
and purify, repeat and synthesize, abstract,
abstract,
abstract."
ARTSCILAB 2001
318 Expanded Cinema
With his first film, Metanomen, made at San
Francisco State
College in 1966, Scott Bartlett went practically
as far as possible
within the structural limitations of
black-and-white film and conventional
cinema technology. Winner
of the 1966 National Student
Film Competition, Metanomen was a
stunning kinaesthetic experience
in which form and content
merged in synaesthetic alloy. It
became immediately obvious that
with more elegant structural
technologies Bartlett could raise
this form/content metamorphosis to
higher levels of graphic
integrity. Like the best synaesthetic cinema
Bartlett's films
are not about an experience: they are the experience.
Here we
find kinetic empathy soaring to poetic heights.
Early in 1967, as Bartlett recalls,
"television sort of found me. I had
been superficially exposed
to it, as my friend Tom DeWitt was in the
TV department at
school. That summer another friend, Michael
MacNamee of
Washington State University, said he could set up a
TV studio
situation for me at a station in Sacramento. I didn't know
what
would come of it, but OFFON came of it. And now Moon has
come of
that. Going into television doesn't mean I've abandoned
cinema.
It's a matter of expanding my technical vocabulary. I'm still
doing Metanomen things, and I'm still doing OFFON things. But
it's
all adding up; I'm creating a new vocabulary."
Winner of many international awards, OFFON
(see color plates)
was the first videographic film whose
existence was equally the
result of cinema and video
disciplines. Like all true videographic
cinema, OFFON is not
filmed TV, in the way that most movies are
filmed theatre.
Rather, it's a metamorphosis of technologies. "That's
becoming a
kind of aesthetic common denominator," says Bartlett.
"Marrying
techniques so the techniques don't show up separately
from the
whole. It's crossbreeding information. That's what a
computer
does, too. Having several aesthetics force each other into
their
separate molds and then sort of seeing what happens."
What happens in OFFON is extraordinary. The
basic source of
video information was in the form of twenty film
loops that Bartlett
and DeWitt had culled from more than
two-hundred loops they had
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema 319
made for a multiprojection light concert
called Timecycle, described
as a "two-hour moviemural." The
iconographic character of the
Timecycle imagery was clean and
simple since it was intended for
use in addition to other image
projections. These loops were
superimposed over one another to a
depth of as many as eleven
print generations for one strip of
film, separating images from
background, positives from
negatives, adding colors to separate
strips, and then
recombining them optically.
Black-and-white loops were fed through a
color film chain in the
television control room, adding
videotronic phosphor-texture to the
cinematic graphics.
Simultaneously, other loops and portions of Glen
McKay's light
show were rear-projected onto a screen on the studio
floor,
which was televised as a second video source. Both video
sources
were routed into one monitor: two images riding between
two
incoming channels, each pattern competing for exhibition on the
monitor, generating a cross-circuited electronic feedback loop
". . . to
the point where white information in competition with
itself breaks
down into colors: spectral breakdown." A second TV
camera
televised the monitor, feeding the signal to a videotape
recorder.
This master tape was again processed through the
switching/mixing
system. Instead of being recorded back onto
film in the usual
kinescope process, a special camera was set up
in front of a monitor
that filmed at the video rate of 30 fps
instead of the movie rate of 24
fps.
"The entire process took three hours," said
Bartlett. "The
advantage I had was that all the material was on
loops and I could
just keep adjusting knobs and arranging
appliances, cameras and
such, until I had what I wanted, and
then just film a burst of it." This
videographic imagery was
again processed through an ordinary
cinematic optical printing
system in Bartlett's studio. "The video
colors were pale, but
they were for that special texture that you can't
get any other
way. After I had that, I separated the film into AB rolls
and
dyed the strips with food color. One roll was dyed one color,
another roll was dyed a different color. I built a trough and
filled it full
of dye and rolled the film from one reel through
the trough and up
along banks of heaters. I sat atop a ladder
and very slowly rolled the
film through this assemblage at a
rate of about five or six inches a
minute. Took me all night. A
yoga dedication."
ARTSCILAB 2001
320 Expanded Cinema
It was well worth the dedication. OFFON
begins with a close-up of
a huge blue-red eyeball that pulsates
with the sound of a heartbeat.
The eye is both human and video:
suddenly it bursts into an
electromagnetic field of vibrations
and becomes a slowly-expanding
force field, a tight ring of
bright red in a pale blue universe. The red
ring blossoms into a
constellation of scattering sparks and suddenly
we see the image
of a mirror-doubled dancer throwing out multiple
layers of arms
like a human flower in bloom. "The multiplication of
arms was
done in cinematic optical printing," Bartlett explained. "But
the multiplication of the multiplications was done in video: the
halos
around the arms were created by video feedback."
Pink and blue sea gulls wheel languidly
around the disintegrating
dancer, whose image slowly melts into
an infinity of geometrical
echoes. This evolves into a close-up
of a girl's face that seems to be
streaking off, disintegrating
but somehow holdingtogether. "That's a
good example of hiding
one technique inside another," said Bartlett,
"by doing
essentially the same thing with both systems and just
compounding one action. Two pieces of film of the same shot were
flipped over so that the left became the right. This was printed
back
onto the left, except out of register so that it staggered
behind,
apparently trying to catch up with the right. And the
shot itself initially
was a very slow zoom, rocking the camera
back and forth while
zooming in on the girl's face, who was
herself rocking back and
forth. When that was fed through the
monitor it was refilmed by a
zoom lens which was also rocking
and swaying."
OFFON moves with dynamic thrust through a
succession of
images that never seem separate from one another,
each evolving
into videographic metamorphosis, exploding,
glowing, disintegrating,
cracking into infinity until it all
ends with a final burst of kinetic
energy. Later in 1968,
Bartlett made a second videographic film, this
time in
black-and-white, called A Trip to the Moon. It involved a live
panel discussion between Bartlett and friends on the subject of
the
new consciousness, cosmic unity, and metamorphosis. Films
and
slides of the moon and rockets were keyed into the scene
randomly
and certain interesting effects were achieved by
associating audio
and video feedback techniques. However, the
film was too long
(approximately half an hour) and not varied
enough to support its
length.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema 321
In the spring of 1969 Bartlett set about
remaking A Trip to the
Moon, but the film that resulted, simply
titled Moon, became a wholly
new work with only a few seconds of
original footage remaining.
Moon proved to be his most
satisfying work, more impressive even
than OFFON, because in
addition to spectacular videographics it
also was constructed
around a substantial conceptual content. It was
completed less
than two months before the first moon landing, yet is
more
effective in its metaphysical evocative power than many of the
films of the same thematic content made since then.
Moon begins in a black void as we hear a
recording of the Apollo
Eight astronauts reading from Genesis.
Under this is a rather spacey
track from the Steve Miller album,
Sailor. Suddenly the black void is
recognized as a night sky as
we approach a distant airport whose
lights seem to float in deep
space. The image is flopped; the runway
lights become a starry
corridor similar to the slit-scan corridor of
2001. This gives
way to stop-frame, optically distorted footage of
astronauts
boarding their craft before takeoff. The pale colors and
unearthly motions lend a kind of dreamlike déjà-vu quality to
the
scene as these hooded creatures lumber slowly toward the
giant
rocket.
We see the ocean and a dawning sky. As though
from another time
and place, we hear reverberating voices
speaking of the Universal
One, cosmic unity, the I Ching. A
purple face appears in the sky and
is fragmented into infinity.
Waves of the ocean— obeying lunar
gravity— crash in slow motion,
and over this we see skip-frame
video-distorted scenes of the
lunar module simulator spinning and
maneuvering in space.
Now we're inside a television control room
with several monitors
reflecting the faces of men whose words
seem far away. The control
center appears like some window onto
a video space of another
dimension. A roaring wind takes us
soaring through towering clouds,
an ethereal atmosphere similar
to the opening sequence of 8½.
Aqueous fingers of de-beamed
video phosphors stretch across the
sky like phantom visitors
from another galaxy. A spaceman whirls
through the clouds,
flashing and sparkling like an asteroid. The
graphic tempo
increases with flashes of light and a tremendous roar
until the
final crescendo. The last image we see is the ocean
receding
from a beach.
ARTSCILAB 2001
322 Expanded Cinema
Scott Barlett: Moon. 1969. VTR/16mm.
film.
Color. 8 min.". . . A purple face appears
in the sky
and is fragmented into infinity..."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema 323
Moon is a beautiful, eerie, haunting film, a
product of the New
Surrealism, all the more wonderful for the
fact that we do not actually
see the moon: only the
manifestation of its power here on earth: the
ebb and flow of
the waters that cover three-quarters of our planet.
The film
contains some of the most spectacular manipulations of
video
techniques Bartlett has yet achieved, sending fiery rainbows
into a cloudy sky, transforming men and rockets into shattering
crystals, creating a portrait of the cosmos in continual
metamorphosis.
The magic of the film [said Bartlett] is its
totally undefined meaning, the purely
visceral message. The
message could be called a code that we're trying to learn
about,
a code for connections to new space and new consciousness, a code
for
making it to the moon metaphysically, paths for your mind to
get out where you
can reach anything. In some ways technique
equals meaning: the stop-frame
action means mechanically defined
space and time and the feedback layers are
like accordion time—
all the times stacking up on top of one another.
Commercial film makers use certain images or
techniques as standard
recognizable givens. Like the way a
dissolve for them means the passage of
time. But for us dissolve
means "blend." Not so much one, not so much the other,
but
something in between the two, getting from one to another. It's
valuable to
hang somewhere between two different realities as a
dramatic element. Dali does
that. You see a face but then you
realize the face is made up of a woman's ass
and a cow and a
flagpole or something. Your mind goes from one understood
state
to another understood state and you realize that you've voyaged in
that
process.
The understood state toward which Bartlett
was headed in the
latter part of 1969 was a "tribal television
network" linking thirty or
forty experimental video centers on
the West Coast, some of them
sponsored by rock groups such as
the Jefferson Airplane and the
Grateful Dead. "It will be a
family of production centers cabled
together and co-broadcasting
with an FM radio station," Bartlett
explained. "The FM radio
would provide the mainstream
programming and the disk jockey
would be televised and would
switch on visuals during records
which would be electronically
synthesized interpretations of the
sounds. The production centers
would make specials which would
always supercede the main entertainment.
The television station
would be a voice: a natural
ARTSCILAB 2001
324 Expanded Cinema
accelerating pace for more people sharing
more knowledge. The
tribal television would allow art and
science to wed in a media
marriage free from commercial
concerns, free for pure experiment."
Tom DeWitt: The Leap
"I look at the medium through its
manipulation of time and space. Man's ability to
manipulate
space is very limited. Actually a space change is almost
inconceivable.
The same with our control of time. We're
contained in clock time.
But the medium at least seems to
control space within completely malleable
time."
After his collaboration with Scott Bartlett
in the making of OFFON,
Tom DeWitt made his own extraordinary
videographic film, The
Leap, completed late in 1968. Although
the two films were born at
approximately the same time and place
in San Francisco, they are
dramatically different in almost
every respect: evidence not only of
two strongly individualistic
personalities, but of the latitude for
personal expression
possible in the videotronic medium.
"I turned to cinema as a vehicle for
expressing my intuition,"
DeWitt explained. "I find myself only
at the threshold and I can see
no horizons. I try to use
technology flexibly to realize dream images,
but I would hardly
call my work more than the first crude stage of
image-manipulation through modern technology. I've been trying
to
learn enough about image technologies so that if I ever make
a
dramatic statement I'll know that it's being communicated
through
the essence of the medium. There was a time when I had
my copy
of Fortran and began to learn it— I saw computer art as
a potentially
limitless field — but I decided to explore what I
could contribute
through videographic cinema."
The leap of the film's title might be
interpreted in several ways, all
of them appropriate: a leap of
consciousness from one reality to
another; a leap in image
technology from cinema to video; a leap to
escape the
suffocating boundaries of metropolitan life (in this respect
The
Leap is a continuation of the theme of DeWitt's first film,
Atmosfear); and finally it might be seen as a leap to escape the
purely videotronic world of the film's imagery. However one
chooses
to view it, The Leap unquestionably accomplished
DeWitt's motivaion:
"I wasn't satisfied with the film until I
felt that without any verbal
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema 325
Tom DeWitt: The Leap. 1968. VTR/
16mm. film. Color. 6 min. "A man
seems to interact
physically with
videographic apparitions...
androgynous
symbols and arcane
electronic voodoo..."
326 Expanded Cinema
references it would take you on an emotional
trip, reacting purely to
the essence of cinema and television."
Whereas OFFON is composed entirely of
iconographic, geometric
concrete imagery— organic figures
processed through the medium
until only a fundamental primary
structure is left— The Leap is
impressive for its mixture of
pure video space with representational
filmic space. Thus an
ordinary man seems to interact physically with
videographic
apparitions, moving in and out of different space/time
realities, fluctuating between the physical and the metaphysical
with
each stride of his leap toward freedom.
We see a man jumping across rooftops and
racing up a grassy
hillside. He dodges through a jungle of
billboards, ominous
structures, and forests of barbed wire. This
is the basic vocabulary: a
man running through an industrial
landscape in search of nature. But
through the video system this
simple footage was transformed into a
breathtaking constellation
of exploding perspectives, shimmering
masses of color,
androgynous symbols, and vast realms of arcane
electronic
voodoo. There are endless zooms into quivering video
centers,
rectangles within rectangles of vanishing imagery. In mid air
the man's body becomes a videotronic ghost filled with vibrating
silvery shock waves. A simple motion is shattered into a
thousand
mirror images reverberating into infinity. Intersecting
space grids
completely demolish perspectival logic. Positive
becomes negative,
up becomes down, inside is out and outside is
in.
In making The Leap, DeWitt first shot
approximately one-hundred
and fifty feet of high contrast,
black-and-white film that was
processed through a video system.
"By compounding the imagery
through the video mixing panel I
expanded the image material into
about eight-hundred feet," he
said. "While the film was running
through the system, I added
effects by keying, wiping, and debeaming,
inserting images into
each other. One of the film-chain monitors
had a camera on it,
so whenever I switched to that camera I got a
feedback. That
studio had only two monitors for four film projectors
and two
slide projectors, so some of the calls were blind, based on
what
I thought was back on the film chain. I could see the final mix
on monitors, plus one of the two sources coming in from film
chains,
plus images coming in from a videotape recorder we
started to use
after the first session. So at about three layers
deep it got pretty
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema 327
Scott Bartlett filming Tom DeWitt at work
in television control room. Photo: William
Bishop.
ARTSCILAB 2001
328 Expanded Cinema
complex. I was very happy because I was
penetrating an area that
was completely new to me; but if I were
doing it over again I'd want
more control. I'd want to see all
the images feeding in; I'd want
synchronization between the
images, and I'd master roll the images
before I put them in."
During fifteen hours of studio time DeWitt
was assisted by an
engineer who operated the videotape machines,
an engineer
operating the two film chains, and a man on the
feedback camera.
DeWitt made all aesthetic decisions at the
master control panel.
"One of the main things I like about
video," he explains, "is the
immediacy of seeing what you're
doing, which is a tremendous
balancing effect because you can
make decisions on the spot which
feed back into the work you're
creating. It's much more spontaneous
than working in film, where
you're never really sure what the results
will be until you get
the film back. Plus the effects built into television
which are
very difficult to get in film, particularly keying and wipes."
The master tape was re-edited as a whole
before a kinescope was
made. The kinescope was edited through
conventional film
techniques, and color was added on DeWitt's
home-made optical
printer. This footage was edited once again,
and finally an electronic
sound track was made by Manny Meyer,
who composed the track for
OFFON. "I wanted to express an
emotion," DeWitt said. "Certainly
you're triggering something in
the unconscious when you start
playing with space/time
alterations."
Jud Yalkut: Paikpieces
Recognized as one of the leading intermedia
artists and filmmakers
in the United States, Jud Yalkut has
collaborated with Nam
June Paik since 1966 in a series of films
that incorporate Paik's
television pieces as basic image
material. Yalkut's work differs from
most videographic cinema
because the original material is videotape,
not film. They might
be considered filmed TV; yet in each case
the video material is
selected, edited, and prepared specifically for
filming, and a
great deal of cinematic post-stylization is done after
the
videographics have been recorded.
In addition to Paik's own slightly demonic
sense of humor, the films
are imbued with Yalkut's subtle
kinaesthetic sensibility, an ultra-
sensitive manipulation of
formal elements in space and time. Paik’s
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema 329
Jud Yalkut: Paikpieces. (Left column)
Beatles Electroniques. 1967. VTR/
16mm. film. Black and
white. 3 min.
(Right column) Videotape Study No. 3.
1968. VTR/16mm. film. Black and white.
5 min.
ARTSCILAB 2001
330 Expanded Cinema
electro-madness combined with Yalkut's
delicate kinetic consciousess
result in a filmic experience
balanced between video and cinema
in a Third World reality.
The two films illustrated here— Beatles
Electroniques and
Videotape Study No. 3— are part of a
forty-five-minute program of
films by Yalkut and Paik,
concerning various aspects of Paik's activities.
The other films
include P+A-I=(K), a three-part homage to the
Korean artist,
featuring his concert Happening performances with
Charlotte
Moorman, Kosugi, and Wolf Vostell; his robot K-456
walking on
Canal Street in New York; and his color television abstractions.
Other films in the Paikpieces program are Cinema
Metaphysique, a nontelevision film in which the screen is
divided in
various ways: the image appears on a thin band on the
left side, or
along the bottom edge, or split-screen and
quarter-screen; and two
other films of Paik's video distortions,
Electronic Yoga and Electronic
Moon, shown at various intermedia
performances with Paik and Miss
Moorman.
Beatles Electroniques was shot in
black-and-white from live broadcasts
of the Beatles while Paik
electromagnetically improvised distortions
on the receiver, and
also from videotaped material produced
during a series of
experiments with filming off the monitor of a Sony
videotape
recorder. The film is three minutes long and is accompanied
by
an electronic sound track by composer Ken Werner,
called Four
Loops, derived from four electronically altered loops of
Beatles
sound material. The result is an eerie portrait of the Beatles
not as pop stars but rather as entities that exist solely in the
world of
electronic media.
Videotape Study No. 3 was shot completely off
the monitor of the
videotape recorder from previously collected
material. There are two
sections: the first shows an LBJ press
conference in which the tape
was halted in various positions to
freeze the face in devastating
grimaces; the second section
shows Mayor John Lindsay of New
York during a press conference,
asking someone to "please sit
down," altered electronically and
manually by stopping the tape and
moving in slow motion, and by
repeating actions. The sound track is
a political speech
composition by David Behrman. In his editing of
these films,
Yalkut has managed to create an enduring image of the
metaphysical nature of video and its process of perception.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema
331
Ture Sjölander, Lars
Weck:
Video Monument in Sweden
In the fall of 1967,
intermedia artists Ture Sjölander and Lars Weck
collaborated
with Bengt Modin, video engineer of the Swedish
Broadcasting Corporation in Stockholm, to produce an
experimental
program called Monument. It was broadcast in
January, 1968, and
subsequently has been seen throughout Europe,
Asia, and the
United States. Apart from the technical aspect of
the project, their
intention was to develop a widened
consciousness of the communicative
process inherent in visual
images. They selected as source
material the "monuments" of
world culture— images of famous
persons and paintings.
The program was created
in the form of a black-and-white
videographic film, made with
the telecine projector from other film
clippings and slides. The
films and slides first were recorded on
videotape and then back
onto film for further processing. Image
distortions occurred in
the telecine process of recording film on
videotape. The basic
principle involved was the modulation of the
deflection voltage
in a flying-spot telecine, using sine and square
impulses from a
wave-form generator. With the flying-spot method
used by Swedish
television, the photographic image is transformed
into
electrical signals when the film is projected toward a photocell
with a scanned raster as the source of light. The deflection
voltage
regulates the movement of the point of light that scans
the screen
fifty times per second.
After the videotape was
completed from various film clips, a
kinescope was made, which
was edited by Sjölander and Weck into
its final form. The result
is an oddly beautiful collection of image
ARTSCILAB 2001
332 Expanded Cinema
The King of Sweden
as
seen in videographic
film Monument (1967),
Videographic Cinema
333
Paul McCartney in
Monument.
sequences unlike any
other video art. We see the Beatles, Charlie
Chaplin, Picasso,
the Mona Lisa, the King of Sweden, and other
famous figures
distorted with a kind of insane electronic disease.
Images
undergo transformations at first subtle, like respiration, then
increasingly violent until little remains of the original icon.
In this
process, the images pass through thousands of stages of
semicohesion, making the viewer constantly aware of his
orientation
to the picture. The transformations occur slowly and
with great
speed, erasing perspectives, crossing psychological
barriers. A
figure might stretch like Silly Putty or become
rippled in a liquid
universe. Harsh bas-relief effects
accentuate physical dimensions
with great subtlety, so that one
eye or one ear might appear slightly
unnatural. And finally the
image disintegrates into a constellation of
shimmering video
phosphors.
ARTSCILAB 2001
334 Expanded Cinema
record albums, and
even textile factories began using images from
the videographic
film. Sven Höglund, a well-known Swedish painter,
entered the
project after the film was completed. He made oil
paintings
based on the Monument images because he found them
"parallel to
my own creative intentions; I had for a long time been
working
on problems concerning transformations of forms. My
painted
versions of the images became another phase of the
experiment in
communication called Monument.
"Other phases were
silk-screen prints, illustrated magazine
articles, posters,
giant advertisements. In each phase Monument
experiments with
pictures in their relation to spectators. The
common denominator
is the mass-media picture, especially the most
commonly seen
pictorial representation, the television picture. The
pictures
in the film are so well known to the public that they have
been
invested with symbolic meaning. People recognize them and
are
able to retain this identification throughout all the
transformations
and variations of the electronic image."
Lutz Becker: Horizon
The young German artist Lutz Becker began
experimenting with
video feedback techniques in 1965 at the age
of twenty-four. In the
period 1967-68 he produced three films of
these experiments as a
student in the film department of the
Slade School of Fine Art,
London, in collaboration with the BBC.
Experiment 5, Cosmos, and
Horizon are little more than documents
of the cathode-ray tube
experiments and thus are not
particularly significant as examples of
videographic cinema per
se. They do, however, clearly demonstrate
the degree of control
and precision that is possible in this technique,
and will serve
to illuminate our conception of it.
In cooperation with BBC engineer A. B.
Palmer, Becker began his
experiments by focusing a TV camera on
the blank white raster of its
own monitor— the pictureless
glowing rectangle produced by a
constant strength of electrons.
A point of light appearing momentarily
on the monitor as a
result of unavoidable "camera noise" will be
picked up by the
camera and reproduced again on the screen. If the
monitor raster
and camera raster are suitably registered, the
reproduced point
will coincide in position with the original and will be
sustained as the cycle repeats. Depending on the totalgain
around
ARTSCILAB 2001
Videographic Cinema 335
Lutz Becker: Horizon. 1968. Video
feedback. 16mm. Color. 5 min. Tightly
controlled phasing
between a TV
camera and its own output monitor.
ARTSCILAB 2001
336 Expanded Cinema
the feedback loop— that is, the video
signal's tendency to exceed
the electrical limits of the
equipment— the point brightness will either
increase until
limited in some way, or decrease to extinction.
If the two rasters are deliberately placed
slightly out of register, the
reproduced point then appears
alongside the original, the next
alongside that, and so on. The
visible effect is that the point of light
moves across the
picture as the positional errors are integrated. The
direction
and velocity of the movement depend on the direction and
degree
of misregistration. The point can be made to move
horizontally
or vertically by shifting the registration between the two
rasters in horizontal or vertical modes. Changes of raster
amplitude
(adjusting the strength of the picture signals)
produce either a
convergent or divergent motion in the picture.
If one raster is tilted
relative to the other, the movement
becomes circular.
By combining these raster-misregistration
feedback techniques
with careful adjustment of camera controls
Becker achieved a wide
variety of concrete motion graphics,
which he describes as
"sustained oscillations in two
dimensions.'' Further effects were
realized by reversing the
magnetic field of one raster scan. Original
signals on the left
were reproduced on the right, then on the left, and
so on. The
pattern thus achieved is symmetrical around a central
vertical
line. Further convolutions were obtained by combining scan
reversals with raster misregistrations. These are some of the
feedback possibilities employing only a blank scanned raster and
attendant noise patterns. An entirely different range of effects
can be
obtained if a second and a third video source are
introduced into the
feedback loop.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Closed-Circuit Television
and
Teledynamic Environments
"Television can't be used as an art medium,"
claims Les Levine,
"because it already is art. CBS, NBC, and ABC
are among the
greatest art producers in the world." The art of
which he speaks is
the art of communication. And, after all, art
always has been communication
in its most eloquent form. But
until television, artists have
been inventors first and
communicators second. Artists have created
things to be
communicated: they have not created communication.
But
television is neither an object nor a "content." Tele-vision is the
art of communication itself, irrespective of message. Television
exists in its purest form between the sender and the receiver. A
number of contemporary artists have realized that television,
for the
first time in history, provides the means by which one
can control the
movement of information throughout the
environment.
In this respect television is not
fundamentally an aesthetic medium,
at least not as we've
traditionally understood the term. It's an
instrument whose
unique ability is, as its name implies, to transport
audio-visual information in real time through actual space,
allowing
face-to-face communication between humans or events
physically
separated by continents and even planets. The
self-feeding, self-
imaging, and environmental surveillance
capabilities of closed-circuit
television provide for some
artists a means of engaging the
phenomenon of communication and
perception in a truly empirical
fashion similar to scientific
experimentation.
This approach to the medium may in fact
constitute the only pure
television art, since the teleportation
of encoded electronic-signal
information is central to its
aesthetic. The actual transmission of
information across
space/time is not an issue when video equipment
is used only for
aesthetic manipulation of graphic images as in
synaesthetic
videotapes and videographic films. I use the term
teledynamic
environment to indicate that the artist works directly with
the
dynamics of the movement of information within physical and
temporal parameters. The physical environment is determined by
the
ARTSCILAB 2001
338 Expanded Cinema
Les Levine with Iris. 1968. Three TV
cameras and six monitors in an eight-by-five
console.
Collection of Mr. and Mrs. Robert
Kardon, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Closed-Circuit Television and Teledynamic
Environments 339
characteristics of the closed-circuit video
system. The artist is concerned
not so much with what is being
communicated as with how
it's communicated and the awareness of
this process. Thus
television becomes the world's first
inherently objective art form.
Les Levine: Iris
"Machines that show the human organism itself
as a working
model," says Les Levine, "may eventually destroy
the need for
psychology as we know it today." Essentially an
intermedia artist
who works in plastics, alloys, and
disposables, Levine was among
the first conceptual artists on
the New York scene focusing more on
idea than icon. Naturally he
turned to television, the most conceptual
of all creative media.
As a video artist Levine is best known for two
closed-circuit
teledynamic systems, Iris (1968) and Contact: A
Cybernetic
Sculpture (1969).
In both works the motivation is somewhat
psychological: Levine is
fascinated by the implications of
self-awareness through the
technologically-extended superego of
the closed-circuit TV. "I don't
tend to think of my work purely
in psychological terms," he explains,
"but one must assume some
psychological effect of seeing oneself
on TV all the time.
Through my systems the viewer sees himself as
an image, the way
other people would see him were he on
television. In seeing
himself this way he becomes more aware of
what he looks like.
All of television, even broadcast television, is to
some degree
showing the human race to itself as a working model.
It's a
reflection of society, and it shows society what society looks
like. It renders the social and psychological condition of the
environment visible to that environment."
In Iris, three concealed cameras focus on an
environment (one's
living room, for example) in close-up,
middle-distance, and wide-
angle. These images are displayed on
six black-and-white TV tubes
mounted in an eight-foot console
that also houses the cameras.
Combinations and distortions of
images interact from screen to
screen in a kind of videotronic
mix of the physical and metaphysical
elements of the
environment. Seeing three different views of oneself
in
combination with three others is a unique experience.
"Looking at Iris," he remarked, "many people
are greatly surprised
at the way they actually look. They see
themselves the way they
ARTSCILAB 2001
340 Expanded Cinema
usually see other people on television, and
they have to make some
kind of judgment about themselves in
terms of themselves as a
piece of information. That's what Iris
does most of all, it turns the
viewer into information. The
viewer has to reconsider what he
thought about himself before.
He must think about himself in terms
of information. You notice
people in front of Iris begin to adjust their
appearance. They
adjust their hair, tie, spectacles. They become
aware of aspects
of themselves which do not conform to the image
they previously
had of themselves."
Contact: A Cybernetic Sculpture continues the
principles of Iris on
a somewhat expanded scale. It involves
eighteen monitors and eight
cameras mounted in a sleek
eight-foot stainless steel console, nine
monitors and four
cameras on each side beneath plastic bubble
shields. As in Iris,
the cameras produce close-ups, mid-range and
wide-angle views as
images shift from screen to screen every few
seconds. Each
monitor screen is covered with a colored acrylic gel
so that a
given image may be seen in nine different colors as it swirls
through the closed-circuit system.
"Contact is a system that synthesizes man
with his technology,"
Levine states. "In this system, the people
are the software. It relies
totally on the image and sensibility
of the viewer for its life. It is a
responsive mechanism and its
personality reflects the attitudes of its
viewers. If they are
angry, the piece looks angry. Contact is made
not only between
you and your image, but how you feel about your
image, and how
you feel about that image in relationship to the
things around
you. The circuit is open."
Levine is rather indifferent to the physical
structure of the consoles
that house his video systems. "I don't
tend to consider my work in
aesthetic terms," he says. "I don't
make a work with any aesthetic
principles in mind. If it happens
to be a nice object to look at, that's
fine. What a TV set looks
like is only of value in terms of iconic
imagery. However, what
comes on the TV set is the real intelligence
of the object,
which has no intelligence until the software is injected
into
it. People don't look at the TV set, they look at the tube and the
tube is always pretty much the same shape. But television is
constantly re-wiping itself and printing over all the time, so
that
depending on what information is available at any given
moment the
image will be different. So there's really no image,
no definite image.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Closed-Circuit Television and Teledynamic
Environments 341
Les Levine with Contact: A Cybernetic
Sculpture.
1969. Photo: courtesy of Museum of
Contemporary
Art, Chicago, Illinois.
One could equate it, because of its
flexibility, with looking at a person
sitting in a chair: he
looks as he always looks except that his
behavior changes your
image of him. Television has this quality: it
always somehow
looks the same, but it's always doing something
different."
Frank Gillette, Ira Schneider: Wipe Cycle
Unlike Levine's work, the effect of Wipe
Cycle, by the young New
York artists Frank Gillette and Ira
Schneider, was to integrate the
viewer and his local environment
into the larger macrosystem of
information transmission. Wipe
Cycle was first exhibited at the
Howard Wise Gallery in New York
in 1969. It consisted of nine
monitors whose displays were
controlled by synchronized cycle
patterns of live and delayed
feedback, broadcast television, and
taped programming shot by
Gillette and Schneider with portable
ARTSCILAB 2001
342 Expanded Cinema
Frank Gillette and Ira Schneider: Wipe
Cycle.
1969. TV camera, closed-circuit system,
nine
monitors, tapes, broadcasting. Photo: courtesy
of Howard Wise
Gallery, New York.
equipment. These were displayed through
alternations of four programmed
pulse signals every two, four,
eight, and sixteen seconds.
Separately, each of the cycles acted
as a layer of video information,
while all four levels in
concert determined the overall composition of
the work at any
given moment.
"The most important function ofWipe Cycle,"
Schneider explained,
"was to integrate the audience into the
information. It was a live
feedback system which enabled the viewer
standing within its
environment to see himself not only now in
time and space, but also
eight seconds ago and sixteen seconds ago. In
addition he saw
standard broadcast images alternating with
his own delayed/live
image. And also two collage-type programmed
tapes, ranging from a
ARTSCILAB 2001
Closed-Circuit Television and Teledynamic
Environments 343
shot of the earth, to outer space, to cows
grazing, and a 'skin flick'
bathtub scene."
"It was an attempt," Gillette added, "to
demonstrate that you're as
much a piece of information as
tomorrow morning's headlines— as a
viewer you take a satellite
relationship to the information. And the
satellite which is you
is incorporated into the thing which is being
sent back to the
satellite. In other words, rearranging one's
experience of
information reception."8 Thus in Wipe Cycle several
levels of
time and space were synthesized into one audio-visual
experience
on many simultaneous frequencies of perception. What
is, what
has been, and what could be, were merged into one
engrossing
teledynamic continuum and the process of
communication was
brought into focus.
Allan Kaprow: Hello
The elements of randomness and chance, which
Allan Kaprow has
explored so successfully in his Happenings and
environmental
events, were brought into play in a television
experiment conducted
by Kaprow with the unique facilities of
WGBH-TV in Boston for "The
Medium Is the Medium." The station
has direct closed-circuit inputs
from a number of locations in
the Boston-Cambridge area: a line to
M.I.T., another to a
hospital, another to an educational videotape
library, and a
fourth to Boston Airport. These were interconnected
with five TV
cameras and twenty-seven monitors that Kaprow
utilized as a sort
of sociological conduit, demonstrating the
possibiliti es of
creativity in the act of videotronic communication,
including
obstacles to communication.
Groups of people were dispatched to the
various locations with
instructions as to what they would say on
camera, such as "Hello, I
see you," when acknowledging their own
image or that of a friend.
Kaprow functioned as "director" in
the studio control room, ordering
channels opened and closed
randomly. If someone at the airport
were talking to someone at
M.I.T., the picture might suddenly switch
and one would be
talking to doctors at the hospital. Thus not only the
process of
communication was involved, but the elements of choice
and
decision-making as well. Kaprow has suggested a global form of
8 From an interview with Frank Gillette and
Ira Schneider by Jud Yalkut in "Film," East
Village Other,
August 6, 1969.
ARTSCILAB 2001
344 Expanded Cinema
Hello, interconnecting continents, languages,
and cultures in one
huge sociological mix. The information
transmitted in Hello, he
emphasized, was not a newscast or
lecture but the most important
message of all: "Oneself in
connection with someone else."
ARTSCILAB 2001
PART SIX:
INTERMEDIA
"Shall we... use the new art as a vehicle for
a new message and
express the human longing which light has
always symbolized, a
longing for greater reality, a cosmic
consciousness, a balance
between the human entity and the great
common denominator, the
universal rhythmic flow?"
THOMAS WILFRED
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Artist as Ecologist
For some years now the activity of the
artist in our society has been
trending more toward the function
of the ecologist: one who deals
with environmental
relationships. Ecology is defined as the totality or
pattern of
relations between organisms and their environment. Thus
the act
of creation for the new artist is not so much the invention of
new objects as the revelation of previously unrecognized
relationships
between existing phenomena, both physical and
metaphysical.
So we find that ecology is art in the most
fundamental and pragmatic
sense, expanding our apprehension of
reality.
Artists and scientists rearrange the
environment to the advantage
of society. Moreover, we find that
all the arts and sciences have
moved along an evolutionary path
whose milestones are Form,
Structure, and Place. In fact, man's
total development as a sentient
being can be said to follow from
initial concerns with Form or surface
appearances, to an
examination of the Structure of forms, and finally
to a desire
to comprehend the totality of relationships between
forms, that
is, Places. Since it generally is thought that art represents
the avant-garde of human insight, it is interesting to note that
science itself has evolved through Form, Structure, and Place
appreciably in advance of the arts.
The conception of the principle of the atom
by the Epicureans in
Greece approximately 2,000 years ago began
that stage of science
chiefly concerned with Form, which
included the contributions of
Euclid, Descartes, Copernicus, and
Kepler. The Structural phase of
science might be epitomized by
Newton and Clerk Maxwell, although
we must leap forward in time
and include Rutherford and Bohr, who
found a structural model
for the atom in the planetary system. The
stage of science that
I've designated as Place is represented by
Einstein and Max
Planck, and has to do with space/time, synergy,
and entropy, all
of which subsume both Form and Structure.
If further evidence is desired, one need only
examine the technology
of the respective scientific eras. As
Bronowski has pointed
out, a characteristic invention of the
Scientific Revolution was the
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Artist as Ecologist 347
telescope, which Galileo demonstrated in
1609, a tool for perceiving
form. A characteristic invention of
the Industrial Revolution was the
power machine to perform the
routine work of the human muscle,
thus a structural tool. And
the characteristic invention of the Cybernetic
Revolution into
which we are moving is the digital computer,
which does the
routine work of the human brain: the cerebral realm
is the
"Place" in which all experience resides.
It is interesting to note that the terms
economy, ecumenical, and
ecology share a common Greek root:
oikos, a house. Following a
period of Karmic Illusions
(pre-Space Age history), the Renaissance
Man emerges from his
cocoon with difficulty (the generation gap) to
find himself the
master of a whole house and attendant guest
cottage (the moon),
and with nothing to do— the Leisure Problem. So
the artist, not
the politician, finally is accepted as the true legislator of
mankind. Today's artists work empirically with problems of
leisure
and decision-making. Men like Robert Rauschenberg,
Robert Morris,
and Robert Whitman are concerned more with the
personal
responsibility of their audience than with creating
objects to be
"owned," since ownership is seen as an
irresponsible concept when
the obvious need is for global
synergy. So we see that Duchamp's
penetrating description of art
as "defined by context and completed
by the spectator's
response" anticipated the present symbiosis of
artist and
ecologist.
That description also anticipated the
burgeoning of intermedia art
as one of the most significant
developments of twentieth-century
society. Buckminster Fuller
has differentiated mind from brain by
demonstrating that the
brain performs "special case" functions on
individual, discrete
bits of information, whereas mind is concerned
with "general
case" metaphysical relationships and implications. In
our
discussion of intermedia art I intend to present the general case.
This approach begins with the word itself: I might have
usedmixed
media, certainly a more common and identifiable term;
but an
environment in which the organisms are merely mixed is
not the
same as an environment whose elements are suffused in
metamorphosis.
During the 1960's a group of artists and
engineers, working under
the name USCO, pioneered in the
development of multimedia
performances and kinaesthetic events
throughout the United States,
Canada, and Europe. More recently,
Gerd Stern and other members
ARTSCILAB 2001
348 Expanded Cinema
of USCO have joined with a group of
behavioral scientists from
Harvard University to form the
Intermedia Systems Corporation,
whose purpose is to ". . .
explore multi-channel audio-visual techniques
and design of
facilities, hardware and software" primarily for
use in
education, but with a view toward entertainmentas education.
Since education is the obvious direction in which virtually all
communication is trending, perhaps this group's definition of
the
word intermedia would be most appropriate here: "Intermedia
refers
to the simultaneous use of various media to create a
total
environmental experience for the audience. Meaning is
communicated
not by coding ideas into abstract literary
language, but by
creating an emotionally real experience through
the use of audiovisual
technology. Originally conceived in the
realm of art rather than
in science or engineering, the
principles on which intermedia is
based are grounded in the
fields of psychology, information theory,
and communication
engineering."
For some time now it has been clear that
intermedia art is trending
toward that point at which all the
phenomena of life on earth will
constitute the artist's palette.
It is the purpose of this chapter to
illuminate the direction of
that trend and to cite a few pertinent
examples. As with all
other Paleocybernetic phenomena, the
direction is simultaneously
toward inner and outer space, the
microcosm and the macrocosm.
On the one hand, intermedia environments
turn the participant
inward upon himself, providing a
matrix for psychic exploration,
perceptual, censorial, and intellectual
awareness; on the other
hand technology has advanced to the point
at which the whole
earth itself becomes the "content" of aesthetic
activity. The
term "light show" must now be expanded virtually to
include the
aurora borealis, since hemispherical lumia displays are
possible
in the creation of artificial plasma clouds in space (see color
plates), the launching of rockets to generate atmospherical
events,
or urban environmental generators such as Nicholas
Schoffer's
monumental Cybernetic Light Tower, which transforms
the skies of
Paris into panoramic fantasias of color.
Implicit in this trend is another facet of
the new Romantic Age. The
new consciousness doesn't want to
dream its fantasies, it wants to
live them. The child of the
Paleocybernetic Age intuits that his life
could be a process of
nonordinary realities if the energies of the
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Artist as Ecologist 349
Stan VanDerBeek with multifaceted surface
for multiple-projection intermedia environment.
Photo:
Richard Raderman.
globe were properly distributed. We're
developing all these fabulous
hardware systems that soon will
make life a process of continual myth-
generation for the
individual as well as the collective ego.
"We're just fooling around on the outer edges
of our own sensi-bilities,"
says Stan VanDerBeek.
Unconsciously we're developing memory storage
and transfer systems that deal with
millions of thoughts
simultaneously. Sooner than we think we'll be communicating on
very high psychic levels of neurological referencing. It's
becoming extremely rich. This
business of being artist in
residence at some corporation is only part of the story; what
we
really want to be is artist in residence of the world, but we don't
know where to
ARTSCILAB 2001
350 Expanded Cinema
Stan VanDerBeek presides over intermedia
presentation at his Movie Drome in Stony
Point, N.Y.
Photo: Bob Hanson.
apply. Major internationalizing by
artists is going to become very important, and
so will the
myth-making process. What we're looking for in some sociologically
appropriate way is a third side to each confrontation: a way to
deal with each
other through a medium.
All media, like the automobile and telephone,
are essentially a third party which
relates us to whatever else it is we're
doing. I think the student riots are a
manifestation of a deep-seated awareness of
this problem. There's such a
contagiousness now with rioting; I think we
realize that rarely do we directly deal
with issues, personally, physically,
intimately, with real body contact. That could
easily be the cause, or at least partial
cause, of the riots. We suddenly realize
that riots may be the only real form of
theatre left in which we're not just an
audience.
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Artist as Ecologist 351
But, you see, being an audience is necessary.
A major factor in living in an
overpopulated world is that we
really cannot deal with each other directly. As the
Japanese do,
for example. They've spent thousands of years cultivating this idea
that they're there but they're not there. Because they've been
jammed together
for a long time, they've learned how to do it.
Now our culture is moving in that
direction also. That's one
reason for all these transfer systems— photo-reality,
mock-reality, artificial intelligence, whatever term you choose—
are spontaneously
and unconsciously evolving. It's a tremendous
urgent unconscious need to
realize that we can't really see each
other face to face. We only see each other
through the
subconsciousness of some other system. Cybernetics and the
looping-around of the man/machine synergy are what we've been
after all along.
Who knows, but certainly for the last thousand
years man has been inching
toward that point, and now we're
running full speed. And, of course, the machines
we're running
toward can trip us up as easily as not. We really can't be certain.
But movies are the ultimate illusionistic system. I'm working
more and more with
tools that show it can go far beyond its
present form. Holograms obviously are a
key direction to go into: where things are
stored on a molecular level.
ARTSCILAB 2001
World Expositions and Nonordinary Reality
In this forthcoming global activity of
continual myth-generation,
dramatic-fiction cinema will find a
new and vital role to play. Although
obsolete in one respect it
will become enriched in another. While
videotape cartridges and
cable television will bring conventional
cinema into the home on
an individual level, society will seek its
communal mythic
experiences in elaborate intermedia environments
found today
only at world expositions where the average citizen is
able to
experience, for a limited time, the wealth and inventiveness
that is kept from him in everyday existence.
"There's a basic human need for a communal
experience of
vision," observes Roman Kroitor, who developed the
spectacular
Labyrinthe for Expo '67 at Montreal. Kroitor's
Canadian firm, Multi-
screen Limited, has perfected a
revolutionary projection system to
be included in a chain of
local theatres with screens seven stories
high. The process,
originally called Multivision, was developed for
Expo '70 in
Osaka. It involves 70mm. film projected horizontally
rather than
vertically. Through what is known as the "rolling loop" or
"loop-wave" method of film transport, the Multivision projector
throws
an image as high as the ordinary 70mm. frame is wide
(each frame
of Kroitor's film is the size of a postal card and
has fifteen sprocket-
hole perforations). The rolling-loop system
removes virtually all
tension from the film during transport
through the projector at 336
feet per minute, stopping and
starting every twenty-fourth of a
second. Thus it is possible to
project a seven-story image of perfect
steadiness and crystal
clarity.
As the name Multivision implies, the movie
contains from three to
several dozen independently-moving images
on the screen
simultaneously, thus approaching on an
environmental scale what
had existed in 16mm. synaesthetic
cinema for decades. Here,
however, the synaesthetic experience
is three times the size of
Cinerama and encompasses a
ninety-degree span of vision from
any location in the theatre.
"New kinds of storytelling and new
audience tastes will result
from this technology," Kroitor said.
"People are tired of the
standard plot structure. New film experiences
will result, in
which there'll be a tight relationship between
ARTSCILAB 2001
World Expositions and Nonordinary Reality
353
Chamber One of Roman Kroitor'sLabyrinthe
at Expo '67, Montreal, Canada.
From eight balconies on four
levels on either side of the space, the audience
could see a
huge screen on the floor and another perpendicular to it. Both
screens were approximately forty feet long. Some 288 speakers
surrounded the
audience.
Photo: courtesy of the National
Film Board of Canada.
ARTSCILAB 2001
354 Expanded Cinema
Chamber Three of Labyrinthe, in a
five-screen
cruciform arrangement. Photo: courtesy
of the
National Film Board of Canada.
the movie and the architecture in which it's
housed. We took a step
in that direction with Labyrinthe. A new
language is going to develop.
There are ways in which shaping
the relationships of images cuts
through the superficial
realities and reaches for something deeper."
Francis Thompson, a pioneer in large-scale
multi-image film
techniques, currently is working toward both
micro- and macro-
environmental experiences. "We're interested
in films expanding and
swallowing a huge audience," he said, "but
we're also interested in
pictures the size of a wristwatch. We would
like to make the world's
smallest motion picture as well as the
largest. As regards the idea of
expanded cinema, I would like to make a
theatre that would be a
huge sphere, as big as Radio City Music Hall
or larger, and seat the
ARTSCILAB 2001
World Expositions and Nonordinary Reality
355
Two scenes from Francis Thompson's We
AreYoung for the Canadian
Pacific-Cominco Pavilion at Expo '67.
The six-screen arrangement
covered a total area of 2,952 square
feet. By comparison, normal commercial
theatre screens average
450 square feet.
ARTSCILAB 2001
356 Expanded Cinema
The Diapolyceran Screen at the
Czechoslovakian
Pavilion at Expo '67. The 32 by 20
foot screen was composed of 112
rear-
projection cubes containing two slide
projectors each.
In turn, each slide
projector was equipped with a tray of eighty
slides that could be changed in half a
second. Thus each
cube was capable of
displaying 160 images in eighty seconds.
The entire wall could be one picture, or
sections of it
could be delayed or speeded
as desired. Photo: courtesy of
Bergen
Motion Picture Service.
ARTSCILAB 2001
World Expositions and Nonordinary Reality
357
The Diapolyceran Screen, Expo '67. Photo:
courtesy of Bergen Motion Picture Service.
ARTSCILAB 2001
358 Expanded Cinema
audience around one side of it: a series of
balconies so everybody's
in the front row. The audience would
become part of the sphere. The
picture comes around as far as
you can see, and beneath you too.
"What I would like to see is a theatre with
so great an area that you
no longer think in terms of a screen:
it's the area you're projecting
on. Your images should come out
of this great, completely-
surrounding area and hit you in the
eye or go off into infinity. So
you're no longer working with a
flat surface but rather an infinite
volume.
Thompson's other major interest is the
earphone/eyephone
concept similar to the hoodlike training
devices used in aircraft and
aerospace navigation schools. A
mini-dome or individual sphere is
lowered over the head of the
viewer. "You have images that
completely fill your field of
vision and sound that would fill your entire
range of hearing."
Thompson also finds in expanded cinema the
potential for a new
consciousness and life style. "Through formal
relationships of
images, most carefully planned, you can produce the
most
powerful kind of communication. With a great sphere you're
introducing people into a whole new visual world which would be
emotionally, physically, and intellectually overwhelming."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cerebrum: Intermedia and the Human
Sensorium
The technology to produce such
environments as Kroitor and
Thompson describe has existed for
some time; what has not been
available is the necessary
consciousness. Man has been so busy
proving his right to live
that he has not learned how to live. Thus we
exist in an
environment almost totally bereft of aesthetic sensibilities;
we
are conditioned by architecture of the most vulgar design; our
entertainment is of the lowest level of conditioned response to
formulas; our traditional mode of interpersonal relationships is
practically bankrupt of integrity; the economic system forces us
to
act for "profit" rather than use; there is hypocrisy and
violence
everywhere. Disneyland is this culture's idea of a
sensorium.
Yet the evolution of intermedia, from the
primitive shadow show to
Wilfred's color organs to the
cybernetic phantasmagorias of
contemporary world expositions,
indicates an increasing human
capacity to assimilate and
comprehend more complex environmental
stimuli. The existence of
something like New York's "Cerebrum,"
therefore, is hardly
surprising: it's one of many current phenomena
that constitute a
pattern-event toward the eupsychia that is implicit in
the
intermedia experience as a kind of sensory-stimulation laboratory.
Cerebrum is among the first indications
of an imminent trend that
simultaneously will transform and
unite those disparate social
experiences characterized by
"nightclubs" on the one hand and "art
galleries" on the other.
Cerebrum is neither. There's nothing for sale
at Cerebrum except
time. And although certain synthetic events do
occur, they are
such that one's relative participation determines their
effectiveness. So one could say that Cerebrum not only isn't an
object, it doesn't even lay claim to an identifiable, marketable
experience; that's because Cerebrum (the place) exists in
cerebrum
(the mind). Fundamentally, one purchases three hours of
time in
which to practice leisure, decision-making,
interpersonal responsibility,
body awareness, and sensory
perception; Cerebrum's "guides"
supply the necessary intermedia
environment.
ARTSCILAB 2001
360 Expanded Cinema
Sensory-kinetic multimedia experience at
Cerebrum in New York. Photo:
Ferdinand Boesch.
An evening at Cerebrum follows from Form to
Structure to Place.
You get out of the cab in a sleazy slum
neighborhood and ring a
buzzer. The door opens automatically and
closes behind you,
locking. You find yourself in a small black
cubicle about four feet
square. A hidden speaker asks your name, and
after a few minutes
one of the walls opens. You are led to an
anteroom where you are
asked to remove your shoes. A boy and a girl,
obviously nude
beneath diaphanous flowing gowns, lead you
down a narrow corridor
to a large white rectangular space.
This is the Form level: from a dark closet to
a larger room, down a
narrow hallway to an open space. Next
comes the Structural experience:
the floor actually is a raised,
carpeted platform sectioned
into geometrical islands inset with
electronic control panels. These
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cerebrum: Intermedia and the Human
Sensorium 361
islands are approximately three feet above
the real floor, and you are
forced to pay close attention to
where you step.
The guides lead you to a particular island
(there are about ten of
them, each accommodating four persons).
You are instructed to put
on a gown, and are invited to remove
beneath it as much of your
clothing as you desire. Glancing
around, it becomes obvious that
nearly everyone is nude beneath
his gown, so you strip. The sensation
is delicious, especially
for men, who are not accustomed to
being naked beneath a long
silk gown. One is immediately self-
conscious, but not
embarrassed; one simply becomes fascinated
with the feel of
one's own body in its silken envelope.
The first half-hour of the three-hour
"session" is spent adjusting to
the environment, staring at
bodies as they pass in silhouette,
wondering what to do with
yourself, and finally venturing off your
island to walk among
the other guests, feeling the air onyour skin:
this is the Place
experience. A noticeably eclectic selection of music
(from
polkas to swing-era ballads, ragas, rock, symphonies) seems
to
come from nowhere in particular, and a cool passive light show
plays ambiently across the walls and ceiling. Eventually, the
guides
pass around tambourines, gongs, triangles, and flutes,
encouraging
everyone to play along with the Muzak.
During this time I began to notice what for
me was the most
interesting aspect of the experience. People
began to act outtheir
fantasies, get into their own realities,
perform anonymous little
psychodramas. One refined-looking,
silver-haired, middle-aged gentleman
knelt and gazed lovingly at
his matronly wife as she danced
before him like Scheherazade,
palms pressed together over her
head, hips swaying in
silhouette. It was, perhaps, a fantasy they had
never realized
in the privacy of their own bedroom. Elsewhere, a
beautiful
young girl who wouldn't remove her panties was "raped" by
her
husband, who peeled them off beneath her gown as his friend
held
her arms. She squealed in mock anger and false modesty, but
an
hour later could be seen twirling about the room like a ballerina,
her gown flying far above her shapely hips.
Thus, for some, Cerebrum becomes an excuse to
do and say
things they might not otherwise attempt. The two
examples I've cited
occurred rather anonymously, and probably
went unnoticed by most
ARTSCILAB 2001
362 Expanded Cinema
Cerebrum: "All the senses were stimulated
in various subtle ways." Photo: Ferdinand
Boesch.
of the guests. The nature of Cerebrum is such
that it would be
difficult to create an unpleasant scene.
I found the unisex effect of the gowns quite
stimulating. At one
point male guides came around with
mint-flavored menthol ice that
they smeared on our lips with their
fingertips. "What does it taste
like?" they inquired softly, as though not
expecting an answer. This
intimate contact with a complete stranger in
a relatively "public"
setting was a challenging experience,
particularly for men, who are
not as disposed as women to physical
intimacies in public. The
young men were followed by girls who daubed
our foreheads with a
similar skin -tingling substance. These
sensual encounters had an
ethereal, gentle, transcendental effect. One
appreciates the delicacy
and poise necessary to accomplish them
without embarrassment.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Cerebrum: Intermedia and the Human
Sensorium 363
Then the guides began collecting guests
together in groups of six.
They instructed us to form circles
and clasp hands in the center, like
spokes of a wheel. They
squirted hand cream into the tangle of
fingers as we closed our
eyes and felt our hands melt into others,
rubbing and squeezing
anonymous flesh. We then lay on our backs,
feet touching in the
center of the circle, and wiggled our toes against
one another
as the guide squirted them with the slippery cream. The
effect
was extraordinarily erotic.
At one point a scented fog was released from
beneath the platforms,
filling the space with an eerie haze
through which one could
see ghostly figures moving and dancing.
Needles of light from a
mirror-globe cut through the fog like
electrons in a cloud chamber; it
was beautiful. Next a huge
parachute was spread out; half of the
guests lay on the floor
beneath the parachute as the other half stood
around its
circumference, raising and lowering it to form a suction
that
lifted gowns, and exposed bodies, but no one cared; we just
closed our eyes and enjoyed the sensation, rather like dreaming
that
one's bed is flying away.
All the senses were stimulated in various
subtle ways: the touch
and taste of the camphor ice on the lips,
the slippery intermingling of
hands and feet, the scent of the
vapors, the kinetic stimulation of the
light show and parachute,
the visual alterations in the general level
of luminosity that
also affected one's perception of forms and
distances. Bits of
melon and fruit were passed around, as well as a
communal mug of
Coke. There was no sensation-numbing alcohol.
A kind of hypnotic centering took place when
a giant balloon,
anchored to an outlet in the center of the
floor, began inflating slowly
with a loud steady hiss. The
balloon was illuminated from a spotlight
on the floor beneath it
and glowed eerily as the houselights were
dimmed. Everyone sat
in the lotus position and gazed as the
luminescent sphere loomed
above our heads. Then it was deflated
just as slowly. A simple
but effective experience.
At Cerebrum one is voyeur, exhibitionist, and
participant. One is
both male and female. One is a walking
sensorium. Surely we can
foresee that not-too-distant day when
"nightclubs" will be operated
by art dealers who commission
artist-guides to create ecological
ARTSCILAB 2001
364 Expanded Cinema
experience places that will resemble Cerebrum
in many respects. In
other ways, however, the intermedia palaces
of the near future will
embrace bold new vistas of human
experience. "I can envision a
world in which people's lives are
recorded," says intermedia artist
Tom DeWitt, "and a massive
amount of material is accumulated, vast
libraries, and people
who never meet other people but just spend
their lives editing
audio-visual records of their own existence. When
you look at a
mixed-media show there's an awful lot of information;
it's
beyond the comprehension capabilities of most people. But if it
were an intermedia show made for an individual whose life was
being portrayed, he could relate to it. I can imagine people
having
traumatic experiences in such an environment and coming
to some
idea of who they really are." In the pages that follow I
hope to
demonstrate that intermedia art is but another path in
man's ancient
search for himself.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre
Susan Sontag once defined the "two
principal radical positions" in
contemporary art as that which
recommends the breaking down of
distinctions between genres, and
that which maintains or upholds
those distinctions: on the one
hand seeking a "vast behavioral
magma or synaesthesis"; on the
other hand pursuing "the intensification
of what each art
distinctively is." She concluded that the two
positions are
essentially irreconcilable except that "both are invoked
to
support a perennial modern quest— the quest for the definitive art
form.''1
Surely the definitive art form is not
anti-environmental, as art must
be when viewed in terms of
genres: to isolate a "subject" from its
environs by giving it a
"form" that is art denies the natural
synaesthetic habitat of
that subject, physical or metaphysical, icon or
idea. In the
progression of art history through Form, Structure, and
Place,
the idea of art as anti-environment has long been surpassed.
This is not to say that any activity that seeks to discover the
essence
of a medium is somehow disreputable; on the contrary,
the exclusive
properties of a given medium are always brought
into sharper focus
when juxtaposed with those of another.
Thus, in intermedia theatre, the traditional
distinctions between
what is genuinely "theatrical" as opposed
to what is purely "cinematic"
are no longer of concern. Although
intermedia theatre draws
individually from theatre and cinema,
in the final analysis it is neither.
Whatever divisions may
exist between the two media are not
necessarily "bridged," but
rather are orchestrated as harmonic
opposites in an overall
synaesthetic experience. Intermedia theatre
is not a "play" or a
"movie"; and although it contains elements of
both, even those
elements are not representative of the respective
traditional
genres: the film experience, for example, is not necessarily
a
projection of light and shadow on a screen at the end of a
room,
nor is the theatrical experience contained on a proscenium
stage, or even dependent upon "actors" playing to an "audience."
1 Susan Sontag, "Film and Theatre,"Tulane
Drama Review (Fall, 1966), pp. 24-37.
ARTSCILAB 2001
366 Expanded Cinema
Carolee Schneemann: Kinetic Theatre
Pioneer intermedia artist Carolee Schneemann
describes Kinetic
Theatre as "my particular development of the
Happening, which
admits literal dimensionality and varied media
in radical juxtaposition."
She works with untrained personnel
and various materials and
media to realize images that range
from the banal to the fantastic,
images which, in her words,
"dislocate, disassociate, compound, and
engage our senses to
allow our senses to expand into primary
feelings, as well as the
sensitive relatedness among persons and
things." Through these
methods she seeks "an immediate, sensuous
environment on which a
shifting scale of tactile, plastic, physical
encounters can be
realized. The nature of these encounters exposes
and frees us
from a range of aesthetic and cultural conventions."
Since 1956 Miss Schneemann has continually
redefined the meaning
of theatre. Though New York is her home,
she has staged radical
intermedia events throughout the United
States, Canada, and
Europe. Her best-known works include Snows,
presented as part of
New York's Angry Arts Festival in 1967;
Night Crawlers, staged at
Expo '67 in Montreal; Illinois Central
(1968); and the film Fuses. I
asked what directions she will
follow in future intermedia work.
CAROLEE: I'm moving more into technology and
electronics. My
long-range project is completely activated by
the spectators. I'll
sensitize the audience through a
performance situation in which
detailed film images are set off
by the audience as they move into
the performance environment.
They'll activate overlapping timed
projectors. If they want a
film to be shown again they'll have to
figure out what they did
to make it start in the first place. These
films will show
detailed aspects of performance situations: touching,
handling,
moving. Then as the participants move in other
directions the
actual materials shown in the films will be
introduced. They'll
fall from the ceiling or be tossed out of boxes.
GENE: I take it you find film/actuality
interactions effective in
involving the audience.
CAROLEE:
Night Crawlers, which I did at Expo '67, was very
successful in
this manner. I juxtaposed my Vietnam film with a
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 367
Carolee Schneemann:Night Crawlers. Expo
'67. Live performers (right) contrasted with
film
projection.
little Volkswagen that drove in front of the
film and stopped. It was
stuffed with foam rubber. My partner
and I performed a complex of
physical handling on top of, and
inside the VW while another
person was pulling all the foam out.
It was a very intimate and
humorous event in front of this
horrifying Vietnam film. Before it
began, a girl and I went
through the audience and stepped on their
shoulders and knees
and gave each person candy and cake. We
spoke to them. They got
very turned on by the whole thing. At the
end we brought them
into the performance area and played lights
and sound around
them. They found elements of the environment
that they could
start to tear down. They began rather hesitantly, but
ARTSCILAB 2001
368 Expanded Cinema
after they ripped a couple of layers of paper
there'd be a message
greeting them, saying proceed, or directing
them to paint cans. The
point seems to be to let people work out
of impulses that are
blocked. If the situation is obvious they
tend to be destructive.
They're working in daily life with
outmoded kinds of repressions
and resistances. They tend to get
violent. So we try to open up an
empathy between them and what
we're doing that they're not
consciously anticipating.
GENE: Do you always use film in your theatre
pieces?
CAROLEE: Yes, I tend always to use it in some
aspect of an
environmental performance situation, primarily
because of the
intensification of information it gives, which
may just be sensory
information. And I use it to transform the
environment. I tend to use
film very formally. Every element
that goes into the environment I'm
working with is very
carefully shaped in terms of scale, time
duration, what's going
on in juxtaposition to a film. InIllinois Central
there was a
three hundred and sixty-degree visual environment
that was
changing and shifting all the time, composed of films and
slides. And I like using slides against films because I can
start and
stop, overlap, black out, manipulate. I've been
working with
portable projectors so that the image can be
shifted in space.
GENE: Do you work with body projections?
CAROLEE: Yes, and I find it always
satisfying. I do a lot of performing
just in the light of film
projectors. So that it's a very compacted
image and there are no
peripheral distractions. It becomes central
to the environment
without your really having the sense of film,
because the bodies
or forms of people are quite embedded in it.
GENE: Do you make your own films or work with
found images?
CAROLEE: I animated the Vietnam film, shot it
from stills with
various lenses so that it seems as if it's
really moving. The images
in that film were central to the
development of Snows. My Snows
movie begins with a very
beautiful 1947 newsreel, a snowstorm, a
fall of confetti during
a parade, and ends with a car exploding and
bursting into
flames, then the Pope blessing people. One little
horrific
element after another: volcanic eruptions, ships going
down...
For my film Viet Flakes I shot a still of a Nationalist soldier
shooting a Communist worker. It's in three sections: he raises
his
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 369
gun, he leans forward, and the victim is
lying there with a dark spot
under his head. Then I got two
newsreels of winter sports in Zurich
during World War II while
all hell was breaking loose everywhere
else in the world. Then I
made a little 8mm. film that played on our
bodies, showed a New
York blizzard and a car driving through the
city. The projectors
were either carried by hand or mounted on
revolving stools.
GENE: How did you work with film for Illinois
Central?
CAROLEE: I went out in advance and shot
footage of empty
horizons. Very slow, attenuated, linear
footage. Then I borrowed
about five hundred slides of the same
landscape, this absence of
form. And I used the slides stretched
out against the film; while the
film would have a certain kind
of horizon line, I'd have six duplications
of one slide horizon
feeding into the film from all around the
room. And then as the
film shifted, slide images would shift. It
wasn't decorative. I
use films and slides as compacted metaphors.
It compounds the
basic range of emotive material. It concretizes
the event, girds
it in. While the live physical movements are
ambiguous and
emotional, the films lend a banal insistence.
GENE: How do you think of your work in terms
of their objective and
subjective aspects, actuality versus
illusion?
CAROLEE: I've always thought that I'm
creating a sensory arena,
and what you describe as kinetic
empathy is very basic to the
process. Because the information,
in terms of what we're able to
feel, how much the audience is
able to open up, be moved and
touched— it's all completely of
the moment. There's this strange
sort of fulcrum of the
individual sitting there without narrative or
literary
preparation to help him follow the action. It's all involved in
sensory receptivity. And I'm bombarding them, I'm giving them
more than they can possibly assimilate at any one point. Unlike
painting, which used to be my medium, where you could take a
great deal of time. And the thing is, with a static element, the
audience is actually being more active. You choose the time
duration
and manner in which you experience the object. But my
theatre pieces call forth a whole other range of response areas.
At
the end of Snows many people in the audience are crying, and
they don't really know why, because it all happens with an
incredible immediate speed and it's overwhelming.
ARTSCILAB 2001
370 Expanded Cinema
GENE: Some critics feel that many of the arts
explore sensory
awareness or perception well enough, but that
one doesn't come
away with a knowledge of a subject having been
learned.
CAROLEE: I know that criticism, but it
doesn't bother me because
it's not a real criticism anymore.
What I'm going more toward is not
merely a sensory or perceptual
activation of the audience but an
actual physical involvement.
There no longer can even be the
situation of performers who
prompt or provoke the audience; we
must deal directly with the
audience itself as performers. As much
as we so-called actors
need to be performers, so they need to
become performers, they
need to enact that situation themselves.
They must give over a
kind of trust in the situation and go into it. I
approach the
audience with a great deal of care and tenderness,
never being
physically aggressive. The media information may be
aggressive,
but it's going to stimulate them in ways that I have to
be
responsible for. So in terms of what that media might provoke, I
have to oversee it.
GENE: So in a sense one goes to the theatre
for completely different
reasons than one used to; I hesitate to
use the term "therapy," but
it seems to approximate something
like that.
CAROLEE: We go to the theatre in search of
inner realities because
of the bankruptcy of the myths and
conventions we're used to dealing
with in everyday life.
GENE: Perhaps in the near future, the whole
process of living will be
in this active seeking out of
experiences.
CAROLEE: Right. What people really want is
tactile confirmation, to
be in touch with their physicality, to
be able to communicate, and to
grow, to touch one another and be
touched. To get away from the
somnambulism of contemporary life.
We get all this information
and there's absolutely no way to
react. You're reading some horror
in your newspaper while eating
your doughnut. And if you were a
natural animal you'd at least
scream for fifteen minutes or chop the
sofa into bits— assuming
that you can't go and change the thing
that the media tells you
is an outrage. So we're trapped with all
these fears of real
impotence.
GENE: What other kinds of environmental
projections have you
done?
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 371
CAROLEE: Smoke, balloons, and buildings. In
Montreal I did an
outdoor event in which we carried the
projectors and moved films
across buildings at night, the images
breaking into planes and
fragments. The basic condition for my work is
that whenever I find
out how something works, what makes it go,
say in regard to
technology or any kind of element— even a
human being— then I
want to change it. As soon as I saw what a
frame was for film I
wanted to break it. I didn't want to be stuck
with that same
rectangle.
Milton Cohen: Space Theatre
Milton Cohen, primary creative force behind
the famous ONCE
group of Ann Arbor, Michigan, has, since 1958,
been developing
what he calls "Space Theatre," a highly original
and effective environmental
projection system for intermedia
events. In fact Space
Theatre is more concept than system, for
Cohen continually modifies
the hardware and architectural
parameters of the theatre he has
constructed in his studio. Yet
the motive remains, as always, "to free
film from its flat and
frontal orientation and to present it within an
ambience of
total space."
The core of Space Theatre is a rotating
assembly of mirrors and
prisms adjustably mounted to a flywheel,
around which is arranged a
battery of light, film, and slide
projectors. The movement of the
mirror/prism flywheel assembly
determines image trajectories as the
projections are scattered
throughout the performance environment.
In the past, Cohen has
positioned rectangular and triangular panels
about the space, to
serve both as screens and as strategic points for
image
interaction with live performers. Often these panels have also
been mobile— revolving, folding, or tilting— operated
mechanically or
by hand in a manner responsive to the image
being projected.
Cohen's most recent presentation was Centers:
A Ritual of Alignments.
Here the projection surface was a
translucent circular core
from which eight triangular screens
radiated. Behind each screen
was a photoelectric cell that
activated sound and strobe-light events
at various positions in
the performance area. (Cohen often employs
the amplified sound
of the projection equipment itself as the aural
complement of
the imagery.) Behind the core, also described as the
"target"
area, was a slide projector.
Film imagery was basic to the performance.
Cohen adapted pro
ARTSCILAB 2001
372 Expanded Cinema
Carolee Schneemann: Illinois Central.
1968. "I've always thought
that I'm creating a sensory arena...
we must deal directly
with the audience itself as performers."
Photo: Peter Holbrook.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 373
Centers: A Ritual of Alignments, as
performed by Milton Cohen in his Space
Theatre. 1969.
ARTSCILAB 2001
374 Expanded Cinema
jectors to handle twelve-foot film loops
projected sequentially on the
fanlike screens, making one round
every twenty seconds. Simultaneously
various geometrical target
patterns were rear-projected onto
the core. The audience is
seated on revolving stools in the twenty-
foot area between the
projection system and the screen. Their attention
is polarized
between the gyrating film and the free-floating slide
imagery
registering on walls and screens that define the total
enclosure.
The multi-channeled sound is electronic,
instrumental, and vocal,
and moves in complex trajectories from
speaker to speaker. The
effect, according to Cohen, "is one of
sound in flight; sound seeking
target." This theme of seeking
out the target is carried over into the
visuals through the
manipulation of the projection console in a
discrete sequence of
maneuvers that search out the center. "When
and if this
centering is won," Cohen explains, "the performance may
proceed
to the next film loop. But also ways must be discovered for
other performers (live dance, live music, etc.) as well as the
audience to contribute to the audiocentric and luminocentric
probes.
Ultimately there must be a common voyage for all to that
identifying
place which describes at once the center and the
whole."
The ONCE group has explored structures other
than Space
Theatre. Perhaps the best known American intermedia
theatre event
was their Unmarked Interchange (1965), in which
live performers
interacted outrageously with the Fred
Astaire-Ginger Rogers film Top
Hat projected on a huge screen
inset with movable panels, louvers,
and large drawer-like
sections. While a couple dined by candlelight
at a table in one
corner of the screen, a man read into a microphone
from the
pornographic novel, Story of 0, at the opposite end of the
projection surface; periodically a girl walked across a catwalk
in the
center of the screen and hurled custard pies in his face.
In another
opening, a man played a piano. And over all of this
Fred and Ginger
danced their way through 1930's Hollywood
romantic escapism.
John Cage and Ronald Nameth: HPSCHD
Computer-composed and computer-generated
music programmed
by John Cage and Lejaren Hiller during 1967-69
was premiered in a
spectacular five-hour intermedia event called
HPSCHD (computer
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 375
ONCE Group: Unmarked Interchange. 1965.
Live performers interact with projection of
Top Hat,
starring Fred Astaire, Ginger Rogers.
Photo: Peter Moore.
abbreviation for Harpsichord) at the
University of Illinois in May, 1969.
Computer-written music
consisted of twenty-minute solos for one to
seven amplified
harpsichords, based on Mozart's whimsical Dice Game
music (K.
Anh. C 30.01), one of the earliest examples of the chance
operations that inform Cage's work. Computer-generated tapes
were
played through a system of one to fifty-two loudspeakers,
each with its
own tape deck and amplifier, in a circle
surrounding the audience. Cage
stipulated that the compositions
were to be used "in whole or in part, in
any combination with or
without interruptions, to make an indeterminate
concert of any
agreed-upon length."
The university's 16,000-seat Assembly Hall in
which the event was
staged is an architectural analogue of the
planetary system: con
ARTSCILAB 2001
376 Expanded Cinema
Milton Cohen's Space Theatre, Ann Arbor,
Michigan. 1969. Sight and sound move in
complex trajectories
through a maze of
shifting, revolving, faceted surfaces,
seek
ing the target.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 377
John Cage and Ronald Nameth:HPSCHD.
1969. Assembly Hall, University of Illinois,
Champaign-Urbana. Fifty-two loudspeakers,
seven amplified
harpsichords, 8,000 slides,
100 films. Photo: courtesy of Ronald
Nameth.
centric circular promenades and long radial
aisles stretching from
the central arena to the eaves of the
domed ceiling. Each of the
forty-eight huge windows, which
surround the outside of the building,
was covered with opaque
polyethylene upon which slides and films
were projected: thus
people blocks away could see the entire
structure glowing and
pulsating like some mammoth magic lantern.
Over the central arena hung eleven opaque
polyethylene screens,
each one hundred feet wide and spaced
about two feet apart. Enclosing
this was a ring of screens
hanging one hundred and twenty-
five feet down from the catwalk
near the zenith of the dome. Film
ARTSCILAB 2001
378 Expanded Cinema
maker and intermedia artist Ronald Nameth
programmed more than
eight thousand slides and one hundred films
to be projected
simultaneously on these surfaces in a theme
following the history of
man's awareness of the cosmos. "The
visual material explored the
macrocosm of space," Nameth
explained, "while the music delved
deep into the microcosmic
world of the computer and its minute tonal
separations. We began
the succession of images with prehistoric
cave drawings, man's
earliest ideas of the universe, and proceeded
through ancient
astronomy to the present, including NASA movies of
space walks.
All the images were concerned with qualities of space,
such as
Méliès' Trip to the Moon and the computer films of the
Whitney
family. The people who participated in HPSCHD filled in the
space between sound and image."
Seven amplified harpsichords flanked by
old-fashioned floor lamps
stood on draped platforms on the floor
of the central arena beneath
the galaxy of polyethylene and
light. In addition to playing his own
solo, each harpsichordist
was free to play any of the others. Each
tape composition,
played through loudspeakers circling the hall in
the last row of
seats near the ceiling, used a different division of the
octave,
producing scales of from five to fifty-six steps. Only twice
during the five-hour performance were all channels operating
simultaneously; these intervals were stipulated by Cage.
Nameth has collaborated in several intermedia
performances in
addition to making his own computer films and
videographic films, as
well as conventional cinema such as Andy
Warhol's Exploding
Plastic Inevitable. In 1967 he worked with
Cage in the preparation of
Musicircus, an eight-hour marathon of
sight and sound involving
nearly three thousand persons—
musicians, musical groups, orchestras,
and composers in addition
to a participating "audience"— all
making music together.
In 1968-69 Nameth worked with Salvatore
Martirano and Michael
Holloway in a music/theatre/film
presentation titled L.'s G.A.
(Lincoln's Gettysburg Address),
which traveled throughout the United
States and Japan. Described
as a mixed-media event "for gas-
masked politico, helium bomb,
three 16mm. movie projectors, and
two-channel tape," L.'s G.A.
was simultaneously a showcase for
Martirano's electronic tape
compositions, Nameth's multiple-projection
cinema, and
Holloway's poetry. Nameth employed video imag
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 379
Two scenes from Ronald Nameth's
triple-
projection film As the World Turns for
intermedia
presentation L's G.A. 1968-69.
ARTSCILAB 2001
380 Expanded Cinema
Two scenes from Robert
Whitman'sPrune
Flat. 1965. Performers' actions were
synchronized with their film versions.
Photos: Peter Moore.
ARTSCILAB 2001
IntermediaTheatre 381
ery for his cinematic triptych As the World
Turns, which he described
as "the visual counterpart of
Martirano's music." Depending on the
physical limitations of the
performance space, Nameth's film was
projected in the form of
two smaller images side by side within a
larger image, all three
images adjacent to one another, or all three
superimposed over
one another.
Robert Whitman: Real and Actual Images
The higher ordering principle of intermedia,
or what might be called
"filmstage," is the simultaneous
contrasting of an actual performance
with its "real" projected
image, so that the live performer interacts
with his movie self.
The New York artist Robert Whitman developed
this technique in
several variations during the period 1960-67, after
which he
abandoned film/theatre compositions for experiments of a
more
conceptual nature.
In The American Moon (1960) the audience
viewed a central
performance space from six tunnel-like
mini-theatres whose openings
were periodically blocked by
plastic-and-paper screens on
which films were projected. Persons
in each tunnel could see
through their screens to the flickering
images on the screen of the
opposite tunnel. Thus Whitman
engaged cubic space, filmic space,
real and projected images.
In his most famous work, Prune Flat (1965),
Whitman utilized a
conventional proscenium stage with a large
movie screen as backdrop.
Two girls performed various movements
and gestures in
person, while their filmed images performed the
same action, and
some different ones, on the screen. A third
girl was dressed in a long
white gown on which was projected a
movie of herself removing her
clothes. The girl's physical
actions were synchronized with the film
being projected on her:
she pretended to "throw" her skirt into the
wings as the filmed
image did so, etc. Finally a nude image of the
girl was
projected on her fully-clothed figure.
Aldo Tambellini: Electromedia Theatre
A pioneer in intermedia techniques, Aldo
Tambellini has worked
with multiple projections in theatrical
contexts since 1963, always
striving to cast off conventional
forms, using space, light, and sound
environmentally. In the
spring of 1967 he founded The Black Gate,
ARTSCILAB 2001
382 Expanded Cinema
Aldo Tambellini: Black Zero. 1965. Shown
at the artist's Black Gate Electromedia
Theatre in New York.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 383
New York's first theatre devoted exclusively
to what Tambellini calls
"electromedia" environments.
His archetype, fully realized in Black Zero
(1965), is a maelstrom of
audio-visual events from which slowly
evolves a centering or zeroing
in on a primal image, represented
in Black Zero by a giant black
balloon that appears from
nothing, expands, and finally explodes
with a simultaneous
crescendo of light and sound. Literally hundreds
of hand-painted
films and slides are used, each one a variation on
the Black
Zero theme. In addition to electronic-tape compositions,
the
piece often is performed in conjunction with a live recital of
amplified cello music.
In Moon-Dial (1966) he collaborated with
dancer Beverly Schmidt
in a mixture of the human form with
electronic imagery in slides,
films, and sounds. With Otto
Piene, he presented Black Gate
Cologne at WDR-TV in Germany in
1968, which combined a closed-
circuit teledynamic environment
with multi-channel sound and
multiple-projection films and
slides as the participating audience
interacted with Piene's
polyethylene tubing. Another version of this
piece was conducted
along the banks of the Rhine in Dusseldorf,
with projections on
a mile-long section of tubing.
Wolf Vostell: De-Collage
Although he works largely with television,
both as object and
information, the German intermedia artist
Wolf Vostell is most
significant for the way in which he
incorporates his video experiments
into environmental contexts.
Actually, his videotronic manipulations
are no more
sophisticated than the distortion of broadcast
programs using
controls available on any common TV set. But this is
precisely
the point of his work: rendering the environment visible as
"art" by manipulating elements inherent in that environment.
Since 1954 Vostell has been engaged in what
he calls "de-collage"
art, or decomposition art. This is not to
be confused with destruction
art, fashionable during
approximately the same period, for Vostell
destroys nothing: he
creates Happenings or environmental theatre in
which already
broken, destroyed, damaged, or otherwise derelict
elements of
the environment are the central subjects. Beginning in
1964 he
made the first of several versions of one film titledThe Sun
in
Your Head, described as "a movie of de-collaged television pro
ARTSCILAB 2001
384 Expanded Cinema
Aldo Tambellini and Otto Piene: Black
Gate Cologne. 1968.
Tambellini's electromedia environment
combined with Piene's
helium-inflated polyethylene tubing at
WDR-TV in Cologne, West
Germany. Photos: Hein Engelskirchen.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Intermedia Theatre 385
Wolf Vostell: Electronic Happening Room.
1968. One of Vostell's de-collaged TV sets in
a
multiple-projection intermedia environment
designed to generate
an awareness
of man's relationship to technology.
Photo:
Rainer Wick.
ARTSCILAB 2001
386 Expanded Cinema
grams combined with occurrences for press
photographers and
audience."
Basically, Vostell seeks in all his work to
involve the audience
objectively in the environment that
constitutes its life. He seeks to
break the passivity into which
most retreat like sleepwalkers, forcing
an awareness of one's
relation to the video and urban environment.
He sometimes
describes his work as a form of social criticism
employing
elements of Dada and Theatre of the Absurd.
In Notstandbordstein (1969), the streets,
sidewalks, and buildings
of Munich became the "screen" on which
a film was projected from a
moving automobile. Vostell's
Electronic Happening Room (1968)
was an environmental attempt to
confront the participant with all the
technological elements
common to his everyday life, from telephones
to Xerox machines
to juke boxes. As in most of his work,
complex
multiple-projections of films and slides were combined with
sound collages taken from the natural environment. In New York,
in
1963, he exhibited a wall of six blurred (de-collaged)
television sets.
In 21 Projectors (1967) the audience was
surrounded with a
staccato barrage of multiple film and slide
projections in complex
split-second patterns designed to reveal
the surrealism of life in the
media-saturated 1960's. He
describes his archetypal work as one in
which "events on the
screen and the actions of the audience merge:
life becomes a
labyrinth."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Multiple-Projection Environments
In real-time multiple-projection, cinema
becomes a performing art:
the phenomenon of image-projection
itself becomes the "subject" of
the performance and in a very
real sense the medium is the message.
But multiple-projection
lumia art is more significant as a
paradigm for an entirely
different kind of audio-visual experience, a
tribal language
that expresses not ideas but a collective group
consciousness.
It's obviously the beginning of what Stan VanDer-
Beek proposed
in the "image library, newsreel of dreams, culture
intercom."
"The purpose and effect of such image flow,"
wrote VanDerBeek in
his 1965 Manifesto," is both to deal with
logical understanding and
to penetrate to unconscious levels, to
reach for the emotional
denominator of all men, the nonverbal
basis of human life." In the
following pages we'll discuss
multiple-projection environments on a
level that might best be
described as handicraft, with the possible
exception of the
Vortex Concerts; yet it's clear that the lumia performance
is
trending toward levels of cybernetic control far beyond
the
capabilities of a few individuals, no matter how sophisticated
their equipment. Significantly, certain members of the
now-defunct
USCO group have abandoned the physical handicraft of
multiple-
projection to develop hardware and software for
automated lumia
display systems. It's the first stage in a
pattern-event toward the kind
of transnational communication
that VanDerBeek holds essential for
the success of global man:
"Such centers around the world will have
artists in residence to
[program] the material for dialogues with other
centers at a
visual velocity of 186,000 miles per second."
Moreover, lumia art constitutes the promise
of an evolving design
science integrated architecturally into
the fabric of daily life: certainly
the true "city of light" has
yet to be realized. Recent trends in the
application of advanced
technology to what might be called "functional
aesthetics"
indicate a transformation in urban design, the
gradual
convergence of functionality and beauty, the mundane and
the
mysterious.
ARTSCILAB 2001
388 Expanded Cinema
Henry Jacobs (left) and Jordan Belson at
Morrison Planetarium in San Francisco,
California, for
Vortex Concerts.
The Vortex Concerts
The legendary Vortex Concerts conducted by
Henry Jacobs and
Jordan Belson at Morrison Planetarium in San
Francisco's Golden
Gate Park from 1957 to 1960 were
quintessential examples of lumia
art integrated with sound in an intermedia
environment. By present
standards one could not ask for a more
perfect setting. "Simply
being in that dome was a holy experience,"
said Belson. "The entire
theatre was like an exquisite instrument."
And Jacobs recalls: "It was
such an absurdly perfect situation that we
just stopped altogether
after we left the planetarium; when you begin
with the ultimate
there's nowhere else to go."
Vortex began in May, 1957, as a series of
experimental and ethnic
music concerts from tapes owned by Jacobs, a
poet and composer
of electronic music. Within a few weeks,
however, he was joined by
ARTSCILAB 2001
Multiple-Projection Environments 389
his friend Belson, and Vortex became an
experiment in visual and
acoustical space. The sixty-foot dome
was surrounded at its perimeter
by thirty-six loudspeakers
clustered in equally-spaced stations of
three speakers each.
There were two large bass speakers on either
side and one at the
zenith of the dome. Speakers were installed in
the center of the
room, bringing the total close to fifty sound sources.
"The
acoustics were very unusual," Belson remarked. "Very hushed,
and
you could hear any sound no matter how far away, as though it
were right behind you, because sound carried over the dome."
The planetarium engineering staff installed a
substantial amount of
equipment especially for Vortex, including
an audio keyboard with
controls for addressing individual
speakers or spinning sounds
rotationally about the room— thus
the title of Vortex. In addition,
Belson supervised the
installation of special interference-pattern
projectors that
were added to the hundreds of projection devices
already
assembled. "One of my greatest pleasures," said Belson,
"was
working with the star machine at a point when the entire dome
was bathed in a kind of deep red. As the color began to fade
away,
there was a point when it overlapped with this beautiful
starry sky; it
was a breathtaking and dramatic moment.
"We could tint the space any color we wanted
to. Just being able to
control the darkness was very important.
We could get it down to jet
black, and then take it down another
twenty-five degrees lower than
that, so you really got that
sinking-in feeling. Also we experimented
with projecting images
that had no motion-picture frame lines; we
masked and filtered
the light, and used images that didn't touch the
frame lines. It
had an uncanny effect: not only was the image free of
the frame,
but free of space somehow. It just hung there
three-
dimensionally because there was no frame of reference. I
used
films— Hy Hirsh's oscilloscope films, some images James
Whitney
was working on for Yantra, and some things which later
went into
Allures— plus strobes, star projectors, rotational sky
projectors,
kaleidoscope projectors, and four special
dome-projectors for
interference patterns. We were able to
project images over the entire
dome, so that things would come
pouring down from the center,
sliding along the walls. At times
the whole place would seem to reel."
ARTSCILAB 2001
390 Expanded Cinema
Planetarium projector shown equipped with
two interference-pattern projectors (top
right) for Vortex
Concerts.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Multiple-Projection Environments 391
Sound-to-image relationships amounted to
counterpoint rather than
what Jacobs calls "Mickey Mouse
synchronization." Vortex did not
simply project sound into
space, but employed dimensionality,
direction, aural
perspective, and speed of movement as musical
resources. "Jordan
controlled the performance with parameters of
the time an image
would begin, the amount of brightness, speed of
rotation, and
speed of enlargement. I would control the loudness of
the sound,
the equalization of the sound, and the spatiality of the
sound."
Music ranged from Stockhausen, Berio, and Ussachevsky to
Balinese and Afro-Cuban polyrhythms, set against the geometrical
imagery characterized by Allures. Jacobs and Belson conducted
approximately one-hundred Vortex concerts, including two weeks
at
the 1958 Brussels World's Fair. In 1960 the planetarium
withdrew its
support and Vortex ended without ever realizing its
full potential.
Jud Yalkut: Dream Reel
Jud Yalkut has collaborated in dozens of
intermedia performances
throughout the United States since 1965,
when he became resident
filmmaker for USCO at their commune in
Garnerville, New York. As
filmmaker first and intermedia artist
second, Yalkut displays a sense
of control and orchestration
that is the result of working closely with
superimpositions
within the film frame. Thus in the superimpositions
of
multiple-projection environments he is able to control not only the
spatial and temporal dimensions of a performance, but the
graphic
composition and integrity of the images as well. The
result is a "film
performance" in the fullest sense.
In the spring of 1969 Yalkut joined with
Yukihisa Isobe to present
Dream Reel, a mixed-media performance
in Isobe's "Floating Theatre"—
a parachute canopy thirty-two to
fifty feet in diameter anchored
by nylon lines to the floor of
the performance area. The
Floating Theatre is elevated above and
surrounds the audience,
using air-flow principles and centrally
located fans. In effect, it is a
portable hemispheric projection
theatre utilizing both front and rear
multiple-projection
techniques.
Dream Reel is divided into three sections:
Paikpieces, Festival Mix,
and Mixmanifestations. Paikpieces is
an environmental tribute to
Nam June Paik, incorporating the
video-film collaborations between
Yalkut and Paik discussed
earlier. Performance time is approximate
ARTSCILAB 2001
392 Expanded Cinema
ly fifteen minutes, set against the tape
composition Mano-Dharma
No. 8 by Takehisa Kosugi (1967) for two
RF oscillators and one
receiver. Equipment involves four to five
16mm. projectors including
one with sound on film, four carousel
slide projectors, and a stereo
tape system. The contrast of
Paik's electronic imagery with the airy
buoyance of the silky
enclosure produces an ethereal, evanescent
atmosphere.
Festival Mix is a multiple-projection
interpretation of the 1968
University of Cincinnati Spring Arts
Festival, originally presented as
an eleven-channel, multi-media
"feedback" mix as the final
performance of that ten-day
festival. In Dream Reel it involves three
16mm. projectors, four
carousel slide projectors, and a four-track
stereo tape system
on which is played Festival Mix Tape by Andy
Joseph and Jeni
Engel. Sounds and images include those of Peter
Kubelka, Charles
Lloyd, Bruce Baillie, Nam June Paik, Charlotte
Moorman, Ken
Jacobs, Hermann Nitsch's Orgy-Mystery Theatre,
Paul Tulley, The
Fugs, Jonas Mekas, and the MC-5. "I was unnerved
and numb from
the tremendous impact this had on my senses," one
person
commented after the performance.
Mixmanifestations, the most complex section
of Dream Reel, is
described by Yalkut as "a nonverbal communion
and celebration for
all channels within a totally surrounding
environmental performance."
Visual elements include an exploding
hydrogen bomb, the
Living Theatre, the Jefferson Airplane, the
Grateful Dead, Yayoi
Kusama (from Yalkut's film Self
Obliteration), and various be-ins and
peace marches. These are
blended and juxtaposed with abstract
meditational motifs
culminating in a centralizing mandalic experience
utilizing both
visual and aural loop techniques for the alternating
pulse and
phase-out of simultaneous temporal interference fields.
The
twenty-minute performance includes four to five 16mm.
projectors, two 8mm. projectors, four carousel slide projectors,
and
two four-track stereo tape systems for the simultaneous
playback of
tapes and tape-loop cartridges.
The Single Wing Turquoise Bird
The Los Angeles group Single Wing Turquoise
Bird came out of
the environmental rock concert and light show
genre that characterized
the pop scene of the mid-sixties.
Initially they staged huge
ARTSCILAB 2001
Multiple-Projection Environments 393
Partially-opened parachute (top) becomes
Isobe's Floating Theatre for presentation
of Jud Yalkut's
Dream Reel intermedia
environment at Oneonta, New York, March,
1969. Photos: courtesy of Yukihisa Isobe.
ARTSCILAB 2001
394 Expanded Cinema
three hundred and sixty-degree light shows
for rock concerts at the
Shrine Exposition Hall from 1967 to
1968. However, after the rock
mania subsided, the group became
affiliated with artist Sam Francis,
who sponsored studios for
them, first in Venice, then in an
abandoned hotel on the beach
in Santa Monica. In almost total
obscurity the group perfected
an art of light manipulation virtually
unequaled by any
mixed-media organization with the possible exception
of USCO.
It's a combination of Jackson Pollock and
2001, of Hieronymus
Bosch and Victor Vasarely, of Dali and
Buckminster Fuller. Time-
lapse clouds run across magenta
bull's-eyes. Horses charge in slow
motion through solar fires.
The hands of a clock run backward. The
moon revolves around the
earth in a galaxy of Op Art polka dots.
Flashing trapezoids and
rhomboids whirl out of Buddha's eye. Pristine
polygraphic forms
are suspended in a phosphate void.
Exploding isometrics give
birth to insects. A praying mantis dances
across an Oriental
garden. Spiraling cellular cubes crash into
electric-green
fossil molds. The organic symbiosis of universal man.
A huge
magnified centipede creeps across a glowing sun.
Cascading
phosphorescent sparks. Waffle grid-patterns strobe-flash
over
Roy Lichtenstein's 1930's Ultramoderne architecture. A butterfly
emerges from its cocoon. New dimensions of space and time.
Bodies become plants. White translucent squids wrestle with
geometric clusters. The sound is Terry Riley and LaMonte Young
and Mozart, seasoned with Pink Floyd, spiked with Cream.
Unlike other light artists, The Single Wing
Turquoise Bird has no
definite program; each presentation
evolves from the interacting
egos of the group working in
harmony. What we see cannot be
called a work of art as
traditionally conceived: a unique, perishable,
nonreplaceable
entity reflecting the talents of an individual. They
don't
produce an object in the sense that a movie is an object; they
produce software, not hardware. We witness an expression of
group
consciousness at any given moment. The range of their
vocabulary
is limitless because it's not confined to one point
in time, one idea,
one emotion. Depending on the variety of
basic materials (they use
everything from liquids to video
projection to laser interferometry)
they can continue into
infinity, never repeating a single "word,"
always evolving
visual-kinetic equivalents of the psychic-social cli
ARTSCILAB 2001
Multiple-Projection Environments 395
Two images from the constantly-evolving
lightworks of the Single Wing Turquoise
Bird in their studio
at Venice, California.
Photo: Gene Youngblood.
ARTSCILAB 2001
396 Expanded Cinema
mate of the moment. Their work strikes one
precisely as a synaesthetic
movie, yet a movie in which each
image emanates from its
own projector, its own human
sensitivity.
The group: Jeff Perkins, films and slides;
Peter Mays, films and
slides; Jon Greene, overhead projectors,
liquids, technical innovations;
Michael Scroggins, overhead
projectors, liquids, technical
innovations; Allen Keesling,
slides, rheostats, improvised equipment;
Charles Lippincott,
group management.
"Previously," remarked Peter Mays, "all my
experience in art was
very personal where I had total control.
Working with a group there's
a whole different kind of feeling,
a kind of communication, a
collective vision and meaning that's
like Hermann Hesse's idea in
The Glass Bead Game— taking
everything in all cultures and communicating
comprehensively on
all levels of society simultaneously.
In a sense that's what the
new consciousness is about, comprehensive
living. Our language
definitely is anti-Minimal. It's a reaction to
Minimal Art just
as Minimal Art was a reaction to the complexities of
Jackson
Pollock's Abstract Expressionism. We're making Maximal
Art. I
see the whole history of visual art in one historical progression
and the light show occupies a very crucial position in that
line. It
seems that the spirit of Abstract Expressionism has
been distilled
into a pure form in the light show; sort of
carrying on the tradition
while at the same time transforming it
into something more universal."
Jackie Cassen and Rudi Stern: Theatre of
Light
The image of a water fountain illuminated by
strobe light from
below— each droplet frozen in its arc like
some priceless crystal in
metamorphosis— characterizes the
ephemeral beauty of Cassen's
and Stern's "Kinetic Light"
compositions. Their art is contemplative
and peaceful as opposed
to the chaos of most intermedia environments.
They seek to
sharpen one's consciousness, not to
overwhelm it. Almost
symbolically, their studio/home "and small
cosmic game room" in
New York is situated just around the corner
from the 1920's site
of Thomas Wilfred's Art Institute of Light.
Reclining on black cushions in a black-draped
room, one encounters
light used not as a backdrop for a
rock-and-roll group but as "a
medium struggling to stand quite
independently, a catalyst for its
ARTSCILAB 2001
Multiple-Projection Environments 397
Sequence of images fromCircles, a
kinetic composition by Jackie Cassen and
Rudi Stern, Theatre
of Light, New York,
1969. Photo: Roy Blakey.
ARTSCILAB 2001
398 Expanded Cinema
own kind of experience." A typical
presentation may incorporate as
many as six-thousand slides and
twenty-five different projectors, many
of them designed
especially by Cassen and Stern. This The-atre of
Light has been
seen with opera, in Stravinsky's Rake's Prog-ress for
the Boston
Opera Company; with dance, in the ballet The Seven
Deadly Sins
at Vancouver's Art Festival; with the music of Berg,
Messiaen,
Mozart, and Scriabin as played by Peter Serkin at the
Festival
of Two Worlds in Spoleto; for Lyndon B. Johnson at the White
House; and for Timothy Leary's "Turn On, Tune In, Drop Out"
psychedelic celebrations.
In collaboration with the visionary Japanese
architect Yukihisa Isobe,
they have performed kinetic-light
events in black vinyl pneumatic
domes, transparent inflatables,
and other tensile struc-tures. They have
extended the use of
fiber optics into dazzling per-ceptual exercises. In
Vibrations
at the New York Architectural League in the winter of 196768
they constructed a shimmering universe of mirrored mylar
surfaces,
water pools and fountains, plexiglass cubes, geodesic,
and other
polyhedral structures, front and rear projections, and
light-activated
sound events in which photoelectric cells
responded to color as well as
intensity.
Together they design and build devices that
can be described only as
"sculptural projectors"— one does not
look at the screen in the Theatre
of Light so much as one
looksthrough it into spatial dimensions defined
by
omni-directional light from these sculptures. Their weekly, one-hour
performances at the New York studio are composed of several
brief
presentations. For example, one fifteen-minute piece is
called City
Windows, a trip through an infinite night city of
faceted windows,
surrealistic night traffic, and what Stern
describes as "white-line etched
images," set against a sound
track composed by Cassen and Stern of
traffic noises and
rumblings on a piano. Another composition, slightly
resembling
photos of Wilfred's Lumia displays, is divided into six
movements corresponding to Bach's Suite No. 1 for unaccompanied
cello. Each movement is conceived as a different kind of "light
pastorale."
Jackie Cassen and Rudi Stern seek "to build a
repertoire of light-
works, a kind of nonverbal electric theatre
prototype for the future."
Since they are helping to invent that
future, it seems that in the Theatre
of Light we actually are
seeing through time.
ARTSCILAB 2001
PART SEVEN:
HOLOGRAPHIC CINEMA: A NEW
WORLD
"Someday you'll be able to go to a party and
be the only one there."
ANDY WARHOL
In April, 1969, overlooking the Pacific from
the crest of Malibu
Canyon in Southern California, I became one
of the few persons to
view the world's first successful
holographic motion picture. There at
Hughes Research
Laboratories one can look across the canyon to
see a Catholic
monastery, Sierra Retreat, perched majestically atop
its own
mountain, commanding the same spectacular view of the
earth, the
sea, and the sky. This contrast impressed me perhaps
even more
than the technological wonder I had just witnessed: the
temples
of science and religion separated by a canyon as old as
time,
each in its own way dedicated to the same quest for God.
The art of holographic cinema circa 1970 is
comparable to that of
conventional cinema circa 1900. The few
scientists who have made
the first crude holographic films are
the Edisons and Lumières of our
time. Through the hologram
window we peer into a future world that
defies the imagination,
a world in which the real and the illusory are
one, a world at
once beautiful and terrifying. It is certain that
holographic
cinema and television will be common by the year 2000;
but more
probably this will take place within fifteen years from now.
Meanwhile, holographic cinema is still in its infancy; in the
following
pages I hope to dispel many of the misconceptions that
surround it,
and to provide some understanding of the
possibilities inherent in
this totally new way of making images.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Wave-Front Reconstruction: Lensless
Photography
The first enigma we encounter in holography
is that no optical image
is formed. Instead, the wave front or
diffraction pattern of light waves
bouncing off the subject is
captured directly on a photosensitive
surface without passing
through lenses that would form it into an
image. Each point on
the surface of an object reflects light waves in
constantly
expanding concentric circles in much the same way that
rings are
formed when a pebble is dropped into a pool of still water.
A
collection of these circles and the interference pattern resulting
from their intersecting trajectories constitute the wave front
of light
from the object. If one is able to "freeze" or store
this wave front, one
then has the potential of reconstructing a
three-dimensional image
exhibiting all the properties that a
viewer would see if he were
looking at the real object through a
window the size of the
photograph.
The secret of capturing and reconstructing
wave fronts of light was
discovered in 1947 by Dr. Dennis Gabor
of the Imperial College of
Science and Technology in London.
Light waves are described by
their intensity and frequency;
ordinary optical photography records
only the intensity of the
waves, not the frequency; yet the frequency
is the information
necessary to reconstruct a three-dimensional
image. Dr. Gabor
found that it was possible to record both intensity
and
frequency of wave fronts by imprinting interference patterns of
light on a photosensitive surface.
Just as rings in a pool of water tend to
dissipate the farther they
travel, so light waves similarly tend
to lose their cohesiveness. Light
is described as "cohesive" in
direct proportion to the distance over
which its waves remain
"in phase," or in step with one another:
ordinary "white light"
(sunlight) has a very short cohesive length. Dr.
Gabor
recognized that in order to reconstruct a faithful
three-
dimensional image of an object, one would need very
cohesive light.
The ideal would be light whose waves all
traveled at one frequency.
Since no such light existed in 1947,
he approximated it with a filtered
mercury arc lamp. The images
he obtained from the process, though
extremely poor in quality,
were called holograms from the Greek root
ARTSCILAB 2001
Wave-Front Reconstruction: Lensless
Photography 401
Diffusion of a laser beam as part ofNine
Evenings intermedia presentations by
Experiments in Art and
Technology (EAT),
New York, 1967. Photo: Peter Moore.
holos meaning whole, since they recorded a
whole picture— both
intensity and frequency.
In 1960 Dr. Theodore Maiman of the Hughes
Aircraft Company in
California invented an instrument called the
laser, named from the
initials of Light Amplification by
Stimulated Emission of Radiation. As
the name implies, the laser
generates a beam of light that is totally
coherent since it is
all one wavelength. Then in 1965 Emmett N.
Leith and Juris
Upatnieks of the University of Michigan used the
laser in a
modification of Dr. Gabor's original holographic technique
to
produce the first completely successful three-dimensional image.
Instead of using one beam like Dr. Gabor, Leith and Upatnieks
used
a prism to derive two beams from one laser. The subject
beam was
used to illuminate the object, while the reference beam
was used to
ARTSCILAB 2001
402 Expanded Cinema
Multiple-exposure photo approximates what
a viewer would see in animated hologram
made at Bell
Telephone Laboratories. Either
the plate is moved across a laser
beam, or
it remains stationary and the viewer moves
his head
from left to right. The figure
appears to rotate in full three
dimensions.
Photo: Bell Telephone Laboratories.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Wave-Front Reconstruction: Lensless
Photography 403
interfere with it, creating a pattern that
was recorded on a photographic
plate, forming the hologram.1
To reconstruct the image, another laser is
directed at the hologram
from the same position occupied
originally by the reference beam.
This beam emerges from the
film shaped exactly in the form of the
wave fronts reflected
from the original object. A picture is formed that
is identical
with the object itself, in true three-dimensionality,
requiring
no lenses or polarizing glasses as in the stereoptic process
used for so-called 3-D movies. The phenomenon that distinguishes
true 3-D from stereoptic illusion is called parallax, or the
apparent
displacement of perspectives when one object is viewed
from
different angles. In holography, different areas of the
picture become
visible depending on one's angle of approach; if
the photographic
plate were large enough, one could actually
move to the periphery
and look behind objects, discovering areas
not visible from a frontal
view.
However, the ability to do this is restricted
by the frame size of the
photographic surface, either plate or
film strip. Although images up to
thirty-five feet in depth are
considered possible through the
technique of "panoramic
holography," the largest holographic plates
are only one- or
two-feet square; the largest motion-picture film
practical for
any purpose is only 70mm. wide; thus the viewing effect
is
always one of peering through a small window into a larger
three-
dimensional space. This obviously restricts the size of an
audience
that can simultaneously observe one holographic
display: no more
than two persons can view a holographic plate
with comfort, and
film-viewing systems are restricted to the
peep-show level of one
person at a time.
1 Emmett N. Leith and Juris Upatnieks,
"Photography by Laser," Scientific American
(June, 1965), pp.
24-35.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Dr. Alex Jacobson: Holography in Motion
Until Dr. Alex Jacobson and his colleague
Victor Evtuhov made their
holographic movie of tropical fish in
an aquarium at Hughes
Research Laboratories, the only motion in
holography had been
artificially animated. Matt Lehman of
Stanford University, Charles
Ernst of the TRW Systems Group, and
scientists at Bell Telephone
Laboratories had created
photographic plates on which many separate
holograms of the same
object were recorded in tiny vertical
strips. To obtain the
illusion of motion one either moved one's head
from side to side
or remained stationary and moved the plate horizontally
across a
laser beam. In each case, however, the motion was
not recorded
in real time: separate holograms were made for each
stationary
position of the image.
Jacobson's aquarium movie was the world's
first real-time holographic
film. He used a pulsed ruby laser,
which emits light in bursts
35-billionths of a second in
duration, each with 25,000 to 50,000
watts of peak power.2 Such
brief exposures are necessary in motion
holography since any
movement of the object more than one-
thousandth of an inch
during exposure will blur the image. Jacobson
and his associates
designed and built the camera apparatus, which
exposed 100 feet
of film at 20 fps, using a Hulcher Model 100
sequential-still
camera with lens and shutter removed.
The film stock was AGFA-Gevaert 10E75
emulsion on a common
acetate base in 70mm. format. The stock is
designed especially for
holography though its photochemical
constituents are quite common.
The only unusual requirement
holography makes on film is very high
resolution capabilities.
Ideally, a holographic emulsion should be
able to resolve two
lines 25-millionths of an inch apart, or 1,500
readable lines
per millimeter. (The price paid for this resolving power
is
speed: the first film used to make holograms, Kodak 649-F
2 This amounts to approximately one
millijoule of light, or one-thousandth of a joule (Joule
is the
amount of energy required to heat one gram of water one degree
Centigrade). One
billionth of a second is known as a nanosecond,
so-called Q-switched laser emit pulses
of light one-trillionth,
or a picosecond, in duration.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Holography in Motion 405
Two photos from a holographic movie of
tropical fish made by Alex Jacobson and
Victor Evtuhov at
Hughes Research
Laboratories, Malibu, California. 1969. Laser
light was shined through the aquarium at
camera. Dark area
at right of photos does
not appear in the actual movie. Photos:
Hughes Research Laboratories.
Schematic diagram of Hughes holographic
movie system. Laser is indicated as
"pumping cavity."
ARTSCILAB 2001
406 Expanded Cinema
spectrographic plate had an ASA rating of
.02.) Thus, after eight
months and many thousands of dollars in
equipment, Jacobson
produced 30 seconds of film in which one
peeked through a 70mm.
aperture to find tropical fish swimming
leisurely in three-dimensional
space.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Limitations of Holographic Cinema
Three types of lasers are used in holography,
identified by the active
element whose atoms are electronically
charged to generate light:
the helium-neon laser, the argon
laser, the ruby laser. Since human
images are essential to
commercial holography, a pulsed laser must
be used; this
excludes the helium-neon laser, which is strictly CW
(continuous
wave) and cannot be pulsed. The argon laser does not
approach
the 35 to 50 nanoseconds required to make action holograms.
This
leaves the ruby laser, which produces a fiery red image
of
extreme graininess, and whose light is not so cohesive as the
helium-neon laser.
Since black-and-white holography is not
possible, one is stuck with
a monochromatic red image unless
full-color holograms are made.
Dr. Ralph Wuerker, of the TRW
Systems Group in Redondo Beach,
California, admits that
full-color holographic cinema is a possibility "if
the
government is ready to support that kind of research with all the
money they have in Fort Knox." Wuerker, who has developed a
special "holocamera" for recording holograms with low-coherence
lasers, suggests that full-color holographic movies might
eventually
be made using two lasers instead of one, optically
mixing their colors
as in television: red from a ruby laser, and
blue and green from a
doubled neodymium glass laser.
Dr. Jacobson, however, does not consider this
to be a major problem
in the development of holographic cinema.
"In the hierarchy of
difficulties color might be considered a
second-level problem," he
said, "and granularity would be only a
minor snag. People already
have devised means of clearing up the
graininess. But a first-level
problem is illumination. I
back-lit my fish because if I were to
illuminate from the front
I wouldn't have enough light to make a
hologram. We barely had
enough light as it was, and that's why I
selected the small
subject. If you want to make a commercial holographic
movie, you
at least have to be able to illuminate a room-
sized scene. We
estimate that in order to shoot a room-sized scene
at twenty
frames per second you'd need an input to the laser of
something
in excess of five million watts. Now I don't know how
ARTSCILAB 2001
408 Expanded Cinema
Hughes holographic projection system.
Viewer must peer through 70mm. aperture
of film transport
table. Photo: Gene
Youngblood
powerful Grand Coulee Dam is, but that's a
large portion of its
output."
Seeking a solution to this problem, for the
last few years several
firms have been working on white-light
holography, in which ordinary
illumination sources are used both to make
and view the hologram.
Optical systems are used to overcome the
incoherence of white
light. Another proposal is the technique
called integral photography
in which many ordinary photographs from
different perspectives are
combined in holographic form. The resulting
image, although
synthetic, gives all the properties of a true
hologram of the same
scene. And since the image is formed by
conventional photography,
any type of illumination can be used. The
process is extremely
complex and tedious, however, and it is
practically inconceivable that
a movie could be made in this manner.
Both Dr. Jacobson and Dr. Wuerker insist that
holography depends
on the use of laser light in recording as
well as viewing the image.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Limitations of Holographic Cinema 409
Holographic movie viewing system
developed by North American Philips
Corporation. Laser
inside the box shines
through 70mm. film as it passes viewing
aperture. Photo: North American Philips
Corp.
ARTSCILAB 2001
410 Expanded Cinema
"Using white light to reconstruct a hologram
is like playing a stereo
record through a Vitaphone," Dr.
Wuerker said. "People accept it
now because the field is young
enough, just as they accepted
inferior sound recordings in the
early days of that field. But in
holography, fidelity depends on
laser light." Dr. Jacobson suggests
that we will "just have to
wait until a big laser comes along— big in
terms of the amount
of energy it puts out. You need two
combinations: enough energy
to illuminate the scene and expose the
film, and you also need
it in a very short time to avoid motion blur.
Instead of using
one illuminator you could use ten or fifteen lasers.
That's a
possibility. But the cost and volume of equipment would still
be
prohibitive."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Projecting Holographic Movies
The popular misconception of a
holographic image as something
with which the viewer can
interact— moving around and through it in
three-dimensional
space while viewing it— may become a reality in
holographic
cinema of the future. Since a hologram is not made with
lenses
it always creates what is known as a virtual image on the
opposite side of the film from the viewer, as though one were
looking
through a window, because the image always appears
exactly where
it was when the hologram was recorded.
However, associated optically with the
virtual image is what's
known as the real image, which comes to
focus on the side of the
film nearest to the viewer. All that
would be required to see the real
image is a special optical
system to reverse the holographic process.
This system does not
yet exist; but it seems that a technique known
to the ancient
Egyptians and practiced by magicians for centuries
may provide
the means for a future system of large-scale, real-
image
holographic movie theatres.
Known generally as "The Illusion of the Rose
in the Vase," this
simple process involves the use of a lens,
concave mirror, and pinhole
light source to transpose
illusionistically an object into three-
dimensional space in full
color. In addition to floating an image in
space, it can be used
to magnify or miniaturize the image. As in the
archetypal
example, it can cause a natural-sized object like a rose to
appear suddenly in an otherwise empty vase. Through a system of
lenses and mirrors an object at another location can be
suspended
in space wherever desired.
In Japan this process is used to project tiny
three-dimensional
human beings onto the miniature stage of a
puppet theatre: the
actual persons are beneath the stage floor,
dancing in front of a
large mirror. Before we had holography an
actual object was needed
to create this effect, but now that we
have three-dimensional images
without three-dimensional objects
it is possible to develop a system
of holographic cinema based
on this ancient concept. The object is
simply replaced by a
strip of holographic film. Even then, however,
ARTSCILAB 2001
412 Expanded Cinema
the scene would be visible only to an
audience of two hundred
persons.
"If you get into an area much larger than
that," explains Dr.
Wuerker, "you confront the problem of what
is and what isn't 3-D.
You don't see much 3-D beyond twenty or
thirty feet, so the effect
would be lost if you had to sit very
far away from the image. Either
you'll have a projected image
that's like a person on a stage where
about a hundred people can
observe him, or you'll have a personalized
box like a TV set, or
a hood over your head."
Wuerker also conceives of a holographic
cylinder that would either
revolve slowly or remain stationary
while the audience rotated
around it. "But now comes the
reality," he warns. "And the reality
obviously is a cylinder, so
you're limited in your stage area. It
wouldn't be much more than
just one man. But you could have an
interview with that man."
Holographic movies may be severely
limited by their total
dependence on reality, Dr. Wuerker suggests.
"When you make a
movie, the cameraman focuses the camera. He
forces you to look
at this actor or this scene or whatever. In a
holographic movie
you don't have that. Your own eyes are the lens,
just as in
reality.
"For example, if you had two actors, one
upstage, the other
downstage, you'd focus on whichever one you
wanted to. When the
focusing is up to the viewer you're
simulating reality even more
closely; in fact as far as the
viewer's concerned it is reality. But
holograms can't be
doctored once the image is on the film. You can't
touch it up or
edit. You can synthesize, and you can superimpose
and you can
multiplex, but you can't play with focusing as you can in
photography. And you might find that in holographic movies
things
like jump cuts are not likely."
Dr. Wuerker also envisions cube holograms
instead of plates or
film strips. "You can use a thick medium
rather than a thin medium.
Someone will develop a glass block
that is photosensitive, about a
quarter of an inch thick. You
coat this glass box holographically,
putting a hundred images on
it. You hold it up to a laser and as you
rotate it your separate
images will come out. You couldn't pack
information any tighter
than you could this way. This is definitely in
the future and
definitely in the viewing of movies. Holographic
recording
itself is at this point already. But if you compound that by
ARTSCILAB 2001
Projecting Holographic Movies 413
using depth in your plate as a third
dimension— you have a thousand
lines per millimeter so every
cubic millimeter will have 109 bits of
information. And there
you go. But still you won't be able to pull the
tricks that are
in movies or on TV because holography is too
dependent on
actuality."
ARTSCILAB 2001
The Kinoform:
Computer-Generated
Holographic Movies
However, means have been devised through
which even the hologram
may no longer need "reality" to exist.
Dr. Lou Lesem and his
associates at IBM in Houston have
developed methods of
generating three-dimensional holographic
images digitally through
computers. Using an IBM Model 360-44,
Dr. Lesem calculated the
pattern in which a laser's light waves
would be scattered if they
actually struck the simulated object.
A computer-controlled laser
interference system is then used to
create this pattern on plates or
film. The resulting image is
called a kinoform.
"When they learn to perfect this system,"
said Dr. Jacobson, "you'll
be able to make holograms as abstract
as you can with conventional
cinema. You could have a
three-dimensional computer-generated
holographic movie of the
Stargate Corridor in 2001. I don't think
that's any further off
than any of these other things. In fact it's
probably closer. We
might even be able to do it now."
Moreover, the ability of holography to record
natural phenomena
that exist beyond the range of human
perception— shockwaves,
electrical vibrations, ultraslow-motion
events— could contribute to an
experience of nonordinary
realities totally beyond the reach of
conventional cinema or
television. And the most likely mode of
viewing will be the
individualized frame or enclosure. "The difference
between the
window frame and the movie frame," observes Dr.
Wuerker, "is
that you can get your face up so close that the frame
disappears
and all you're seeing is the illusionistic world on the other
side. You're in it."
ARTSCILAB 2001
Technoanarchy: The Open Empire
"In another moment Alice was through the
glass and had jumped lightly down into
the looking-glass room.
The very first thing she did was to look whether there
was a
fire in the fireplace, and she was quite pleased to find that there
was a real
one, blazing away as brightly as the one she had left
behind. 'So I shall be as
warm here as I was in the old room,'
thought Alice, 'warmer in fact, because
there'll be no one to
scold me away from the fire.'"
LEWIS CARROLL
John Cage tells the story of an international
conference of philosophers
in Hawaii on the subject of Reality.
For three days Daisetz
Suzuki said nothing. Finally the chairman
turned to him and asked,
"Dr. Suzuki, would you say this table
around which we are sitting is
real?" Suzuki raised his head and
said yes. The chairman asked in
what sense Suzuki thought the
table was real. Suzuki said, "In every
sense."3 The wise thinker
is a true realist; he might well have been
talking about the
future of cinema.
I've attempted to bring the past, present,
and future of the movies
together in one image so that a vast
metamorphosis might be
revealed. One can no longer speak of art
without speaking of
science and technology. It is no longer
possible to discuss physical
phenomena without also embracing
metaphysical realities. The
communications of humanity obviously
are trending toward that
future point at which virtually all
information will be spontaneously
available and copyable at the
individual level; beyond that a vast
transformation must occur.
Today when one speaks of cinema one
implies a metamorphosis in
human perception.
This transformation is being realized on the
personal level as well
as on the global front of the industrial
equation itself, where it can be
realized only through the
synergetic efforts of all men applying all
3 Cage, op. cit., p. 35.
ARTSCILAB 2001
416 Expanded Cinema
disciplines. While personal films,
videotapes, and light shows will
continue to expand human
communication on one level, organizations
such as PULSA at Yale
University, and the various national
chapters of Experiments in
Art and Technology (E.A.T.) are suffusing
art, science, and the
eco-system of earth itself at that point where all
converge
within the purview of modern technology.
Not only do computer, video, and laser
technologies promise to
transform our notion of reality on a
conceptual level, they also reveal
paradoxes in the physical
world that transcend and remake our
perception of that
phenomenon as well. A glimpse of the future of
expanded cinema
might be found in such recent phenomena as the
spherical mirror
developed by the Los Angeles chapter of E.A.T. for
the
Pepsi-Cola Pavilion at Expo '70 in Osaka. Although it developed
from the synergetic technologies of computer science and
poly-vinylchloride
(PVC) plastics, it is triumphantly
nontechnical as an
experience. It's just a mirror— a mirror that
is nearly two-thirds of a
sphere made of 13,000 square feet of
air-inflated mirrorized mylar
one-thousandth of an inch thick.
It is ninety feet in diameter and fifty-
five feet high, and
weighs approximately 250 pounds.
There have been other mirrorized mylar (or
PVC) spherical tensile
structures, notably the Pageos and Echo
satellites. But they weren't
constructed as mirrors per se and,
of course, one could not enter
them. Thus once again, as in the
case ofCity-Scape, we see that
humanity's most ambitious venture
into the frontiers of reality— the
space program— contributes to
the expansion of the world of art:
both are efforts to
comprehend larger spectra of experience.
Essentially a full-scale model of the
pavilion mirror that later was
constructed in Japan, E.A.T.'s
sensuous, transcendentally surrealistic
mirror-womb was revealed
to the world in September, 1969, in a
cavernous blimp hangar in
Santa Ana, California. There, sustained in
210-degrees of space
and anchored by 60,000 pounds of water in
two circular tubes at
its base, was a gateway to an open empire of
experiential design
information available to the artist. An astonishing
phenomenon
occurs inside this boundless space that is but one of
many
revelations to come in the Cybernetic Age: one is able to view
actual holographic images of oneself floating in
three-dimensional
space in real time as one moves about the
environment.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Technoanarchy: The Open Empire 417
Hemispherical mirror developed by the
Specifications: 13,000 square feet of
Los Angeles Chapter of
Experiments in mirrorized mylar 1/1000th of an inch thick,
Art
and Technology for the Pepsi-Cola air-inflated to a 210-degree
hemisphere,
Pavilion at Expo '70 in Osaka, Japan. ninety feet in
diameter and fifty-five feet
Shown in a blimp hangar at the
Marine high. Photo: David MacDermott.
Corps Air Station, Santa
Ana, California.
Because the mirror is spherical no lenses
or pinhole light sources
are necessary: the
omni-directionally-reflecting light waves intersect
at an
equidistant focal point, creating real images without laser light
or hardware of any kind. Interfaced with perpetual fog banks and
krypton laser rainbow light showers at the World Exposition, the
mirror indeed "exposed" a world of expanded cinema in its widest
and most profound significance.
The accelerating transformations of radical
evolution often gen
erate illusions of impending disaster:
hence the overriding sense of
paranoia that seems to cloud the new
consciousness as we thrust
toward the future. Yet surely some revelation
is at hand. In 1920 W.
B. Yeats (in his poem "The Second Coming")
saw that things were
falling apart: "The falcon cannot hear the
falconer; /... the centre
ARTSCILAB 2001
418 Expanded Cinema
cannot hold; / Mere anarchy is loosed upon
the world,... / And what
rough beast, its hour come round at
last / Slouches towards
Bethlehem to be born?"
Yeats didn't know what was coming, and thus
like all of us he
feared it. But in assigning Bethlehem as its
birthplace he suggested
that we were to be visited by a savior,
however fearsome. That
savior is technoanarchy and he is born
out of the industry of man's
ignorance, in spite of our petty
copulations, in contradistinction to our
minor misbehaviors. The
term anarchy is defined as "a political
theory... advocating a
society based on voluntary cooperation and
free association of
individuals and groups... a utopian society having
no government
and made up of individuals who enjoy complete
freedom." The
biologist John Bleibtreu is an anarchist, then, when
he speaks
of “… a new sustaining myth which corre-sponds to
reality...
this new mythology which is being derived from the most
painstaking research into other animals, their sensations and
behavior, is an attempt to reestablish our losses— to place
ourselves
anew within an order of things, because faith in an
order is a
requirement of life."4 Yesterday, man needed
officialdom in order to
survive. But technology has reversed the
process: survival today
depends on the emergence of a natural
order. Thus we see that
anarchy and order are one, because
history is demonstrating that
officialdom is no order at all.
Technology is the only thing that keeps man
human. We are free in
direct relation to the effective
deployment of our technology. We are
slaves in direct relation
to the effectiveness of our political
leadership. (Herbert Read:
"Effective leadership is fascism.") The
world is populated by
three-and-a-half-billion human slaves, forced
by the masters of
politics continually to prove our right to live. The
old
consciousness perpetuates myths in order to preserve the union;
it reforms man to suit the system. The new consciousness reforms
the system to suit man. Water takes the shape of its container.
We
have no basis for postulating a "human nature" until there's
no
difference between the individual and the system. We cannot
ask
man to respect his environment until this difference is
erased. This is
anarchy: seeking a natural order. It is
technoanarchy because it will
be realized only through the
instrumented and documented intellect
that we call technology.
4 Bleibtreu, op. cit., p. 8.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Technoanarchy: The Open Empire 419
"As they are extended into mythologies,
metaphysical systems
allow mankind the means to abide with
mystery. Without a
mythology we must deny mystery, and with this
denial we can live
only at great cost to ourselves. It seems
that we are in the process of
creating a mythology out of the
raw materials of science in much the
same way that the Greeks
and Jews created their mythologies out of
the raw materials of
history."5
The limits of our language mean the limits of
our world. A new
meaning is equivalent to a new word. A new word
is the beginning of
a new language. A new language is the seed
of a new world. We are
making a new world by making new
language. We make new
language to express our inarticulate
conscious. Our intuitions have
flown beyond the limits of our
language. The poet purifies the language
in order to merge sense
and symbol. We are a generation of
poets. We've abandoned the
official world for the real world. Technology
has liberated us
from the need of officialdom. Unlike our
fathers we trust our
senses as a standard for knowing how to act.
There is only one
real world: that of the individual. There are as
many different
worlds as there are men. Only through technology is
the
individual free enough to know himself and thus to know his own
reality. The process of art is the process of learning how to
think.
When man is free from the needs of marginal survival, he
will
remember what he was thinking before he had to prove his
right to
live. Ramakrishna said that given a choice between
going to heaven
or hearing a lecture on heaven, people would
choose the lecture.
That is no longer true. Through the art and
technology of expanded
cinema we shall create heaven right here
on earth.
5 Ibid., p. xi.
ARTSCILAB 2001
420
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
Selected Bibliography
PRIMARY SOURCES
A. Books
ARNHEIM, RUDOLPH. Art and Visual Perception.
Berkeley and Los Angeles, Calif.:
University of California
Press, 1954.
BAZIN, ANDRÉ. What Is Cinema? Translated by HUGH
GRAY. Berkeley and Los
Angeles, Calif.: University of California
Press, 1967.
BLEIBTREU, JOHN N. The Parable of the Beast. New
York: Collier Books, 1969.
BRONOWSKI, J. Science and Human
Values. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1965.
CAGE, JOHN. A
Year from Monday. Middletown, Conn.: Wesleyan University
Press,
1968.
CASTANEDA, CARLOS. The Teachings of Don Juan: A Yaqui Way
of Knowledge.
Berkeley and Los Angeles, Calif.: University of
California Press, 1968.
CHINN, HOWARD A. Television
Broadcasting. New York: McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1953.
COLLINGWOOD, R.
B. Principles of Art. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1938.
CONZE, EDWARD. Buddhist Wisdom Books: The Diamond Sutra, The
Heart Sutra.
London: George Allen & Unwin, Ltd., 1958.
DEWEY, JOHN. Art as Experience. New York: Capricorn Books, 1958.
EHRENZWEIG, ANTON. The Hidden Order of Art. Berkeley and Los
Angeles, Calif.:
University of California Press, 1967.
EVANS-WENTZ, W. Y. The Tibetan Book of the Dead. New York:
Galaxy Books,
Oxford University Press, 1960.
FIEDLER,
CONRAD. On Judging Works of Visual Art. Translated by HENRY
SHAEFER-SIMMERN and FULMER MOOD. Berkeley and Los Angeles,
Calif.:
University of California Press, 1949.
FULLER, R.
BUCKMINSTER. Education Automation. Carbondale, Ill.: Southern
Illinois
University Press, 1962.
———— . Ideas and
Integrities. New York: Collier Books, 1969.
———— . Operating
Manual for Spaceship Earth. Carbondale, Ill.: Southern Illinois
University Press, 1969.
GOMBRICH, E. H. Art and Illusion.
(The Bollingen Series XXXV.) New York:
Pantheon Books, Inc.,
1960.
HESSE, HERMANN. Demian. New York: Bantam Books, Inc.,
1968.
———— . The Glass Bead Game. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and
Winston Inc., 1969.
HUTCTHINS, ROBERT M. The Learning Society.
New York: Frederick A.
Praeger, Inc., 1968.
KAHN, HERMAN,
and WIENER, ANTHONY J. The Year 2000. New York:
Macmillan, 1967.
KELMAN, KEN. "Anticipations of the Light," from The New American
Cinema, ed.
GREGORY BATTCOCK. New York: Dutton Paperbacks, 1967.
ARTSCILAB 2001
422 Expanded Cinema
KLEE, PAUL. The Thinking Eye. London: Lund
Humphries, Inc., 1961
KRISHNAMURTI, J. The First and Last
Freedom. Wheaton, III.:
Quest Books, Inc., 1968.
LEE, DAVID.
"A Systematic Revery from Abstraction to Now," from Minimal Art,
ed. GREGORY BATTCOCK. New York: Dutton Paperbacks, 1968.
LILLY, JOHN C. The Human Bio-Computer. Miami, Fla.:
Commumications
Research Institute, 1967.
MC HALE,
JOHN. The Future of the Future. New York: George Braziller, Inc.,
1969.
MC LUHAN, MARSHALL. Understanding Media: The Extensions of
Man. New York:
McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1965.
——— — and
FIORE, QUENTIN War and Peace in the Global Village. New York:
Bantam Books, Inc., 1968.
MILLERSON, GERALD. The Techniques
of Television Production. New York:
Hastings House, 1961.
MONDRIAN, PIET. Plastic Art and Pure Plastic Art. New York:
Wittenborn
Schultz, Inc., 1945.
PAUWELS, LOUIS, and BERGIER,
JACQUES. The Morning of the Magicians.
New York: Avon Books, 1968.
PIERCE,
J. R. Symbols, Signals, and Noise. New York: Harper & Brothers,
1961.
PLATO. The Republic. Translated by A. D. LINDSAY. New
York:
Dutton Paperbacks, 1957.
READ,
HERBERT. Icon and Idea. New York: Schocken Books, 1965.
REISZ,
KAREL. The Techniques of Film Editing. New York: Hastings House,
1968.
RENAN, SHELDON. An Introduction to the American
Underground Film. New York:
Dutton Paperbacks, 1967.
SCHON,
DONALD. Technology and Change. New York: Delacorte Press, 1967.
SEGAL, MARSHALL H., CAMPBELL, DONALD T. and HERSKOVITS, MELVILLE
J.
The Influence of Culture on Visual
Perception. Indianapolis, Ind.:
Bobbs-Merrill, Inc., 1966.
SONTAG, SUSAN.
Against Interpretation. New York: Delta Books, 1967.
TEILHARD DE
CHARDIN, PIERRE. The Phenomenon of Man. New York:
Harper & Row, Inc., 1959.
TRUFFAUT, FRANÇOIS. Hitchcock. New York: Simon & Schuster,
Inc., 1968.
VORKAPICH, SLAVKO. "Toward True Cinema," from Film:
A Montage of Theories,
ed. RICHARD DYER MAC CANN. New York:
Dutton Paperbacks, 1966.
WHORF, BENJAMIN. Language, Thought, and
Reality. Cambridge, Mass.:
M.I.T. Press, 1966.
WIENER, NORBERT.
The Human Use of Human Beings. New York: Avon Books, 1967.
WITTGENSTEIN, LUDWIG. Philosophical Investigations. Oxford,
England:
Blackwell Press, 1968.
ZIMMER, HEINRICH. Myths and
Symbols in Indian Art and Civilization. New York:
Harper &
Brothers, 1946.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Selected Bibilography 423
B. Articles and Periodicals
BELL, DANIEL.
Charles Fourier: Prophet of Eupsychia,The American Scholar
(Winter, 1968-69), p. 50.
———— (ed.).
"Toward the Year 2000: Work in Progress,"Daedalus (Summer 1967).
BLUE, JAMES. "Jean Rouch in Conversation with James Blue,"Film
Comment
(Fall-Winter, 1967), pp. 84, 85.
BRAKHAGE, STAN. “Metaphors on Vision,” ed. P. Adams Sitney. Film
Culture (Fall, 1963)
BROWN, NORMAN O. “Apocalypse: The Place of
Mystery in the Life of the Mind,"
Harper's (May, 1961).
BURNHAM, JACK.
Systems Esthetics, Artforum (September, 1968), pp. 30- 35.
CALDER, RITCHIE. “The Speed of Change,” Bulletin of the Atomic
Scientists
(December, 1965).
CLARKE, ARTHUR C.
“The Mind of the Machine,” Playboy (December, 1968 ), p. 116.
———— . "Next— The Planets," Playboy (March, 1969), p. 100.
COPLANS, JOHN. "Serial Imagery," Artforum (October, 1968), pp.
34-43.
"Filming 2001: A Space Odyssey," The
American Cinematographer (June, 1968).
FULLER, R. BUCKMINSTER.
"Planetary Planning," text of the Jawaharlal Nehru
Memorial Lecture. New Delhi, India (November
13, 1969).
———— . “The Prospect for Humanity,” Good News, eds.
EDWIN SCHLOSSBERG and
LAWRENCE SUSSKIND. New York: Columbia
University, 1968.
———— . "The Year 2000,” Architectural Design
(February, 1967).
GORDON, THEODORE J.”The Effects of Technology
on Man’s Environment”
Architectural Design (February, 1967).
KANTROWITZ, A. Electronic Physiologic Aids. New York: Maimonides
Hospital, 1963.
KNOWLTON, KENNETH C. “Computer Animated Movies,”
Cybernetic Serendipity,
a special issue of Studio International
(September, 1968).
LAWTON, A. T., and ABROOK, G. E. "Large Scale
Integration," Science Journal
(August, 1968).
LEBEL, JEAN-JACQUES,
“On the Necessity of Violation,” The Drama Review (Fall, 1968)
LEITH, EMMETT N., and UPATNIEKS, JURIS. “Photography by Laser,”
Scientific
American (June, 1965), pp. 24-35.
MALLARY, ROBERT. "Computer Sculpture: Six Levels of
Cybernetics,"
Artforum (May, 1969), pp. 29-35.
MASLOW, A. H.
"Eupsychia— The Good Society," Journal of Humanistic
Psychology,
No. 1 (1961).
MC HALE, JOHN. "Education for Real," WAAS
Newsletter, World Academy of Art
and Science (June, 1966).
———— . "Information Explosion— Knowledge Implosion," Good News,
eds.
ARTSCILAB 2001
424 Expanded Cinema
EDWIN SCHLOSSBERG and LAWRENCE SUSSKIND. New
York: Columbia University
Press, 1968.
———— . "New Symbiosis,"
Architectural Design (February, 1967).
———— . "People Future,"
Architectural Design (February, 1967).
———— . "The Plastic
Parthenon," Dotzero (Spring, 1967).
NOLAND, RICHARD W. “The
Apocalypse of Norman O. Brown,”The American Scholar
(Winter, 1968~ 69).
NOLL, A. MICHAEL.
“The Digital Computer as a Creative Medium,” I.E.E.E. Spectrum
(October, 1967).
O'GRADY, GERALD. "The Preparation of
Teachers of Media,"Journal of Aesthetic
Education (July, 1969).
ROSE,
BARBARA. “Problems of Criticism, VI,” Artforum (May, 1969), pp. 46 -
51.
ROSENBLATT, ROBERT A. “Software: The Tail Now Wags the Dog,”
Los Angeles Times
Outlook, Sec. 1, p. 1 (June 29, 1969).
SCHNEEMANN, CAROLEE. “Snows,” I-Kon, ed. SUSAN SHERMAN (March,
1968).
SCHNEIDERMAN, RON. “Researchers Using IBM 360 to Produce
Animated Films,”
Electronic News (June 17, 1968).
SONTAG, SUSAN. "Film and Theatre," Tulane Drama Review (Fall,
1966), pp. 24-37.
SUTHERLAND, N. S. "Machines Like Men," Science
Journal (October, 1968), pp. 44-48.
TAYLOR, W. K. "Machines That
Learn," Science Journal (October, 1968), pp. 102-107.
THRING, M.
W. "The Place of the Technologist in Modern Society," Journal of the
Royal
Science Academy (April, 1966).
TOFFLER,
ALVIN. “The Future as a Way of Life,” Horizon (Summer, 1965) .
Videa 1000 Newsletter. New York: Videa International, Nos. 1-12
(1969).
WINKLESS, NELS, and HONORE, PAUL. “What
Good Is a Baby?” From the Proceedings
of the A. F. I1. P. S.
1968 Fall Joint Computer Conference.
YALKUT, JUD. "An Interview
with Frank Gillette and Ira Schneider," East Village Other
(August 6, 1969).
SECONDARY SOURCES
A. Books
Bhagavad-Gita. Translated by
SWAMI PRABHAVANANDA and CHRISTOPHER
ISHERWOOD. Los Angeles, Calif.: Vedanta
Press, 1944.
BRAITHWAITE, R. B. Scientific Explanation. New
York: Harper & Brothers, 1960.
BROWN, NORMAN O. Life Against
Death. New York: Vintage Books, 1959.
———— . Love's Body. New
York: Vintage Books, 1968.
BROWN, RONALD. Lasers. New York:
Doubleday & Co., Inc., 1968.
CAGE, JOHN. Silence. Cambridge,
Mass.: M.I.T. Press, 1966.
ARTSCILAB 2001
Selected Bibliography 425
FULLER, R. BUCKMINSTER. Nine Chains to the
Moon. Carbondale, Ill.: Southern
Illinois University Press,
1966.
———— . No More Secondhand God. Carbondale, Ill.: Southern
Illinois University
Press, 1967.
———— . Utopia or Oblivion.
New York: Bantam Books, Inc., 1969.
———— . and MC HALE, JOHN.
World Design Science Decade (196~197S),
Documents
One through Six. Carbondale, III.: Southern
Illinois University Press, 1963-67.
KNUTH, DONALD The Art of
Computer Programming. Los Angeles, Calif.:
Addison & Wesley,
Inc., 1968.
MC LUHAN, MARSHALL. The Gutenberg Galaxy. Toronto,
Canada: University of
Toronto Press, 1965.
———— . The
Mechanical Bride. Boston, Mass.: Beacon Press, 1951.
———— . and
FIORE, QUENTIN. The Medium Is the Massage. New York: Bantam
Books, Inc., 1967.
NEBRICH, RICHARD B., JR., VORAN, GLENN I.,
and DESSEL, NORMAN F. Atomic
Light: Lasers— What They Are and
How They Work. New York: Sterling Publications,
Inc., 1967.
READ, HERBERT. To Hell with Culture. New
York: Schocken Books, 1963.
WIENER, NORBERT. Cvbernetics.
Cambridge, Mass.: M.I.T. Press, 1967.
B. Articles and Periodicals
FULLER, R.
BUCKMINSTER. “The Grand Strategy,” Los Angeles Free Press
(October 18, 1968).
MC HALE, JOHN. “2000
+,” Architectural Design (February, 1967).
NOLL, A. MICHAEL.
"Computers and the Visual Arts,"Design and Planning, No. 2 (1967).
———— . "Computer-Generated Three-Dimensional Movies," Computers
and
Automation, Vol. 14, No. 11 (November, 1965).
———— . "Stereographic Projections by Digital Computer,"
Computers and Automation,
Vol. 14, No. 5 (May, 1965).
ARTSCILAB 2001
426
Blank Page
ARTSCILAB 2001
Index
Allures (Belson), 159-162, 389, 391 Catalogue
(Whitney, John, Sr.), 210,
Andy Warhol's Exploding Plastic
In-213
evitable (Nameth), 83, 102-105, Castaneda, Carlos, 158,
171
378 Cathode-ray tubes, 194, 265-267, 302,
Art and
entertainment, 42, 57, 59-65, 303
67-69 Cerebrum, 359, 364
Art and science, 67, 136 Chinese Firedrill (Hindle), 83, 84-91,
Art and technology, 42, 43, 116, 128- 93-96
133, 189-193,
416, 417 Chronicle of a Summer (Rouch), 80,
Artist as design
scientist, 70-73 132-133
Auteur theory, 71, 72, 131 Cinema,
historical applications of, 75,
106-108
Cinéma-vérité,
79-80, 106, 107
Bartlett, Scott, 264, 275, 317-324 Citron, Jack,
215-217
Barzyk, Fred, 282, 298-299 City-Scape (Kamnitzer), 198,
250,
Bazin, André, 85, 86, 106, 126 256, 416
Becker, Lutz,
258, 334-336 Clarke, Arthur C., 138, 147-150, 188
Belson,
Jordan, 43, 135, 156 Cohen, Milton, 371-374
157-177, 222, 229
Commercial entertainment, 42, 50, 57Binary
Bit Patterns
(Whitney, 58, 59-65, 66-67, 72, 88, 113, 128,
Michael), 234-236
130, 323
Binary mathematical system, 183, Computer art, 189-193
184, 192 Computer-generated holograms, 191,
Bleibtreu, John,
53, 63, 418, 419 414
Brakhage, Stan, 67, 82, 83, 85, 87-91,
Computer films, 43, 179-256
93, 130, 236, 252 Computer Image
Corporation, 200
Bronowski, J., 42, 70, 133, 134 Computer
language, 185, 239-246
Brown, Norman O., 41, 42, 112, 115
Computer programming, 51, 185
Byjina Flores (Whitney, John,
Jr.), Computers, 51, 52, 179-256, 261, 317,
229-230 414
Computers, analogue, 183, 208, 213
Cable television,
260-261, 352 Computers, digital, 179-256
Cage, John, 48, 66, 73,
136, 229, 298, Computer/video interface, 261, 317
302, 374, 381,
415 Coney, John, 282, 293-297
Capriccio for TV (Seawright), 301
Consciousness, cosmic, 43, 135-177,
Cassen, Jackie, 396-398
222-228, 228-239, 324
ARTSCILAB 2001
428 Index
Consciousness, expanded, 41, 47, 130,
Electromedia Theatre (Tambellini),
157-177, 189, 222-239, 323,
349, 381-383
364, 371-374, 388-391, 392-398 Empire of Things,
The (Makanna),
Consciousness, oceanic, 92, 93, 110 281, 295-297
121, 136 Entropy, 62-65, 68, 111
Contact: A Cybernetic
Sculpture (Le-Existentialism and science, 142-147,
vine),
339-341 238
Coplans, John, 218-219 Expanded cinema, 41, 49,
54-56, 75,
Csuri, Charles, 194, 203 116, 222, 417, 419
Cybernetic Age, 41, 81, 134 Experiments in Art and Technology,
Cybernetic cinema, 194-206 416 417
Cybernetics, 65, 108,
129, 131, 183184,
226 Fetter William, 194
Cybernetik 5.3 (
Stehura ), 239-246, Fiction, the end of, 106-108, 135, 252
250
Fischinger, Oskar, 157, 160-162
Flesh (Morrissey), 79-83, 117
Fourier, Charles, 112
David Holzman's Diary (McBride),
Fuller, R. Buckminster, 15-39, 44, 45,
79, 80, 126 48, 53, 57,
63, 64, 77, 84, 109, 114,
Decentralization, technological, 42,
133, 136, 137, 144, 146, 180-181,
128-134 186, 229, 347, 394
Dewey, John, 66, 116 Fuses (Schneemann), 83, 116, 119DeWitt,
Tom, 318, 324-328, 364 121, 366
Dilexi Foundation, 281,
292-297 Future shock, 50-53
DNA/RNA, 52, 55, 110, 135
Dog
Star Man (Brakhage), 67, 82, 83,
85, 87-91, 93, 130 Generation
gap, 46-51, 144-146
Drama, 42, 60, 64, 70, 85, 87, 135 Gillette,
Frank, 341-343
Drama, the end of, 75-134 Godard, Jean-Luc, 49,
79, 80, 108,
Dream Reel (Yalkut), 391-392 112
Dylan, Bob,
48, 68, 115, 116 Gombrich, E. H., 90, 109, 158
Eastern philosophy, 136, 140, 159,
Hallucinogens, 47, 81, 144, 174, 238
162-167, 222-228, 238 Hello
(Kaprow), 343-344
Ecology, 43, 50, 346-347, 416 Hesse, Hermann,
47, 93, 129, 144,
Educational Television, 281, 298 146, 396
Ehrenzweig, Anton, 84 Hindle, Will, 83, 93-96
Eisenstein,
Sergei, 85, 87
Sjolander,
Ture, 331-334
ARTSCILAB 2001
Index 429
Holographic cinema, 43, 399-414 Labyrinthe,
352-354
Holograms, computer-generated, 191, Lapis (Whitney,
James), 177, 210,
414 213, 222-228, 250
Holography, 41,
400-403, 416-417 Laser, 399-414, 417
Homosexuality, 113-121
Leap, The (Dewitt), 324-328
Howard, Brice, 282-285 Levine, Les,
78, 337, 339-341
HPSCIHD (Cage), 374-381 Logic, bistable, 81
Hummingbird (Csuri), 199, 203 Logic, the end of, 140-141
Logic, triadic, 81
IBM, 51, 196, 215, 216, 217, 242, 246
Image-exchange, 49, 114, 128-134 Makanna, Philip, 281, 295-297
Information, experiential, 62-65, 71 Mallary, Robert, 191, 193
Information theory, 62-65 Marker, Chris, 80, 105
Interferometry, laser, 41, 191, 400-403 Maslow, A. H., 113
Intermedia, 43, 345-398 McHale, John, 44, 51, 54, 57, 68, 110,
Intermedia network, 41, 53, 54-58, 143, 146, 180, 181
66,
112, 128-134 McLuhan, Marshall, 44, 55, 77, 137,
Intermedia
Theatre, 365-386 139, 144, 179
Iris (Levine), 339-341 Mechanical
plotter, 194-203
Metanomen (Bartlett), 318
Microfilm
plotter, 194-203
Jacobs, Henry, 388-391 Minimal cinema, 119,
122-127
Jacobson, Alex, 404-414 Momentum (Belson), 174-177
Jung, C. G., 147, 163, 167, 226, 233 Mondrian, Piet, 82, 127,
157
Montage, 76, 85, 86, 87
Monument (Weck-Sjölander-)
Kamnitzer, Peter,
198, 250-256 der), 331-334
Kaprow, Allan, 281, 299, 343-344 Moon
(Bartlett), 275, 321-324
Kinaesthetic cinema, 83, 97, 110, 157
Morrissey, Paul, 79, 83, 117
158 Multiple projection, 371-374,
387,
Kinescope, 275, 317-324, 328 398
Kinetic empathy, 83-97
Music With Balls (Riley), 281, 293Kinetic
Theatre (Schneemann),
366-295
371 Mythopoeia, 106-108, 111, 252
Klee, Paul, 85
Knowlton, Kenneth, 199, 246-249
Krishnamurti, J., 52, 61, 62
Nameth, Ronald, 83, 102-105, 374Kroitor,
Roman, 352-354 381
KQED-TV, 281, 297, 298 National Center for Experiments in
Kubrick, Stanley, 43, 139-156, 229 Television 81-292
ARTSCILAB 2001
430 Index
Negentropy, 62-65 Reality, extra-objective,
79, 83, 122New
Nostalgia, 43, 142-147 127
New Romantic Age,
146-147 Reality, nonordinary, 158, 159, 348Noll,
A. Michael,
189, 192, 193, 239 349, 352
Noosphere, 57-58, 78-79, 260
Reality, post-stylized, 106-108
Reality, prestylized, 106-108
Re-Entry (Belson), 162-167
OFFON (Bartlett), 275, 318-321,
Riley, Terry, 281, 293-295
324, 326, 328 Rouch, Jean, 80,
132-133
Once Group, 371-374
O'Neill, Patrick, 83, 97-100,
122, 242
Samadhi (Belson), 169-174, 175
Schlossberg, Edwin,
44, 257, 293
Paik, Nam June, 137, 193, 281, 282, Schneemann,
Carolee, 83, 92, 116,
302-308, 328-330, 391-392 119-121, 366-371
Paikpieces (Yalkut-Paik), 328-330, Schneider, Ira, 341-343
391-392 Schofill, John, 83, 100-102
Paleocybernetic Age, 41,
50, 55,57, Schum, Gerry, 292
66, 77, 78, 81, 137, 246, 348
Sears, Loren, 279-280, 281, 282, 291Panofsky,
Erwin, 106 292
Pauwels, Louis, 52, 135, 136, 159 Seawright, James, 301
Permutations (Whitney, John, Sr.), 7362 (O'Neill), 83, 97-100
215-222, 250 Siegel, Eric, 314-316
Phenomena (Belson),
167-169 Single Wing Turquoise Bird, 392-396
Piene, Otto,
281-282, 299-301, 383
Sjölander,
Ture, 331-334
Plasma crystal screens, 203-205 Slit-scan
technique, 151-156, 167,
Plot, 64, 70, 81-122, 352-358 229, 230
Poem Fields (VanDerBeek-Knowlton, Snow, Michael 83, 99, 122-127
246-249 Software, 78, 79, 132, 185-188
Polymorphous
eroticism, 83, 112-121 Sontag, Susan, 70, 365
Post-Mass-Audience
Age, 42, 128-Space Theatre (Cohen), 371-374
134, 260-264
Stehura, John, 234, 239-246
Pudovkin, Alexander, 85 Stern, Gerd,
347-348
Stern, Rudi, 396-398
Stevens, Wallace, 75, 90, 133,
189
Radical evolution, 42, 48, 50-53,58, Superimposition, 84 -
87, 100, 110
65 Synaesthetic cinema, 42, 75-134
Read,
Herbert, 70, 76, 111, 418 Synaesthetic cinema, and McLuhan, 77
Realism, cinematic, 79, 80, 107, 135 Synaesthetic cinema, and
sex, 112-121
Reality, 43, 45, 46, 53, 79, 82, 106-Synaesthetic
cinema, and science, 76
108, 399, 415
ARTSCILAB 2001
Index 431
Synaesthetic cinema and synergy, Thompson,
Francis, 354-358
109-111 Tibetan Book of the Dead, 162-167,
Synaesthetic cinema, and technology 172
128-134 Tower,
Alvin, 50, 51, 69
Synaesthetic cinema, and television, Trumbull,
Doug, 151-156, 230
77-80 TV Gallery (Schum), 292
Synaesthetic videotapes, 281-316 2001:
A Space Odyssey
(Kubrick),
Syncretism, 83, 84 - 91, 110, 226 43, 139 - 156, 162,
167, 174, 228,
Synergy, 109-111, 341 230, 241, 314, 316, 321,
394, 414
USCO, 347-348, 387, 391, 394
Tambellini, Aldo, 299,
308-314, 381-Utopia, 47, 113, 419
383
Technoanarchy, 79, 415
Technological decentralization, 42,
78-79, 128-134
VanDerBeek, Stan, 193, 246-249, 276,
Technology and art, 42-43,
116, 128- 282, 349-351, 387
133, 189-193, 416-417 Video,
de-beaming, 267-268, 275,
Technology and freedom, 78-79, 415-
287, 289, 291, 296, 301, 321, 326
419 Video, feedback, 274,
285-287, 320,
Technology and sex, 112-116 326, 334-336, 342
Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre, 45, 47, Video, film chain, 274-276,
294, 296,
57, 157, 159, 160 317-334
Teledynamic
environments, 337-341 Videographic cinema, 275, 317-336
Television, cable, 260-261, 352 Video, keying, 268, 273, 275,
287,
Television camera, 265-266 289, 291, 326
Television,
and cinema, 77-80 Videosphere 78-79, 128-129, 132,
Television,
closed-circuit, 78-80, 257, 143, 260-264
337-341 Video
synthesizing 265, 314, 315,
Television as creative medium, 43,
Videotape cassettes, 128-134, 260,
257-344 264, 283, 352
Television, global, 57-58, 78-80, 257-Videotape recording, 114,
128-134,
259, 343-344, 387 260-264, 275, 281-334
Television,
and politics, 79 Videotapes, synaesthetic, 281-316
Television,
and psychology, 78, 132-Videotronic mixing and editing, 276134,
285, 291-292 280, 326
Television receiver, 266-267
Vorkapich, Slavko, 75
Television, satellite, 78, 261-263 Vortex
Concerts (Belson-Jacobs), 162,
Theatre of Light (Cassen-Stern)
387, 388-391
396-398 Vostell, Wolf, 330, 383-386
Thermodynamics, laws of, 62-63
ARTSCILAB 2001
432 Index
Warhol, Andy, 66, 79, 80, 83, 102-Whitney
triple screen film, 231-234,
105, 1l7, 119, 122, 257, 399 246,
250
Wavelength (Snow), 83, 122-127 Wipe
Cycle(Gillette-Schneider),
Weck,
Lars, 331-334 341-343
WGBH-TV, 281, 298-301, 306, Wise,
Howard, 306, 313, 341
311, 343-344 Wuerker, Ralph, 407-414
Wiener Norbert, 44, 52, 63, 64 67
71, 183
Wilfred
Thomas, 345, 396 Xfilm (Schofill), 83, 100-102
Whitehead, Alfred
North, 47, 71
Whitman, Robert, 347, 383
Whitney family, 151,
155, 196, 206, Yalkut, Jud, 328-330, 391-392
207-222, 228-239,
306, 378, 389 Yantra (Whitney, James), 223-226,
Whitney, James,
214, 222-228, 389 389
Whitney, John, Sr., 151, 196, 207-222,
Yeats, W. B., 133, 417-418
302 Yoga, 162-174, 222-228
Whitney, John, Jr., 155, 157, 206,
210, 228-239
Whitney,
Mark, 228, 239 Zagone, Robert, 285-289
Whitney, Michael, 206,
210, 228-239 Zatlyn, Ted, 44, 147, 148
ARTSCILAB 2001
Jordan Belson: Phenomena. 1965.
16mm.
Color. 6 min. ". ..As though
you were approaching earth as a
god,
from cosmic consciousness. You see
the same things but
with completely
different meaning." (See page 167.)
Jordan Belson: (Left column) Samadhi .
1967.
16mm. Color. 6 min. (Right column) Momentum .
16mm.
Color. 6 min. "I first have to see
the images somewhere: within
or without or
somewhere. I mean I don't make them up . . .
in a sense everything I've learned in life
has been through
my efforts to find out what
these things mean." (See pages
171,176.)
John Whitney: Permutations. 1967.
16mm. Color. 8 min. "The parallel is
with counterpoint or
polyphonic
musical phenomena. Should it be
called
polygraphic phenomena?"
(See page 215.)
John Whitney: Permutations. 1967.
16mm. Color. 8 min. "So I ask myself
what can be essentially
the image of
time for the eye to perceive?" (See
page 215.)
A selection of images from John
Whitney, Jr.'s, triple-projection
computer film. 1967. 16mm.
Color.
17 min. (See page 231.)
John Stehura: Cybernetik 5.3.1965-69.
16mm. Color. 8 min. "It creates an
overwhelming atmosphere
of some
mysterious transcendental intelligence
at work in
the universe . . . as though
one were peering into a new
dimension
of existence." (See page 239.)
Terry Riley and Arlo Acton: Music
With Balls. 1969. Hi-Band Color VTR.
15 ips. 23 min. "A rich
mantra of color,
sound, and motion. . . phantasmagoric
convolutions of spatial
dimensions." (See page 293.)
Philip Makanna: The Empire of
Things.
1969. Hi-Band Color VTR.
15 ips. 20 min. "Haikuesque impressions
of things observed, events
remembered, nightmares
experienced
. . . the sky bursts in spectral
madness." (See
page 295.)
James Seawright: Capriccio for TV.
1969. Hi-Band Color VTR. 15 ips. 5
min. "It was possible to
see two
images of the same figure performing
the same action
at different stages in
different colors." (See page 301.)
Three experiments with the color
cathode tube by Korean artist Nam
June Paik. "It's so cool,"
he says. "It's
like going to the moon." Photos: Paul
Wilson.
(See page 303.)
Scott Bartlett: OFFON. 1967. VTR/
16mm. film. Color. 10 min. Spectral
breakdown and
videographic
metamorphosis. (See page 318.)
Clouds of barium atoms released by
proposed similar projects to generate
rockets at high altitudes
are ionized hemispherical lumia displays. Photo:
by solar
radiation. They then interact courtesy of the Max Planck Institute
with electromagnetic force fields for Physics and Astrophysics,
Munich,
around the earth. Several artists have West Germany.
(See page 348.)